JP2021186114A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of contributing to smoothing of progress of a game.SOLUTION: An MPU of a main control board executes a winning/losing lottery on the basis of entry into an operation hole and executes a support lottery on the basis of entry into a through gate. When a jackpot occurs as a result of the winning/losing lottery, control is shifted to a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode B via a special game state. Contrarily, when particular losing occurs as a result of the winning/losing lottery, control is shifted to a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode A without going through a special game state. When a support lottery is won, a support game by an electric accessory is executed. The longest required time until a player can enjoy the benefit when the high-frequency support mode A is set during a support game is nearly identical to the longest required time until a player can enjoy the benefit when the high-frequency support mode A is set during a variation display of a pattern on a display part for the through gate.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 191

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a firing operation by the player. When the game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The game is diversified by making the ball entry section variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball entry section according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2002-78904

In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to facilitate the progress of the gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can contribute to facilitation of gaming progress.

The present invention
The game board where the game area is formed and
A game ball launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player,
A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a game ball based on a ball entering a ball entry portion provided in the game area.
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the starting ball entry section as the entry section, and a special information acquisition means.
An acquisition information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and an acquisition information storage means.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and a determination means.
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. As one of the game times, the game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Equipped with
As the predetermined determination information, the first determination information and the second determination information are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. Special game state transition means to shift to a special game state,
A variable ball entry section as the entry section, which can be switched between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state.
A control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the state shifts to the special gaming state, and
A support lottery means for executing a support lottery based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion provided in the game area, and a support lottery means.
A picture display unit that can display a variable picture and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means for controlling the pattern display unit so that
A variable mechanism that can switch between an accepted state in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state.
It has a control means for a variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism, and the variable mechanism is put into an accepting state based on the fact that the result of the support lottery is the winning result and the definite display of the pattern by the display control means is completed. It is equipped with a support game execution means for executing a support game to be switched.
As the switching control mode of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a first switching mode and a second switching mode set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode. And a third switching mode set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode is provided.
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and
A third gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state, and
A second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state is provided.
When the player shifts to the third gaming state by the second transition means during the support game, the required period until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state according to the timing of the transition is On the other hand, if the second transition means shifts to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern, the player can enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state according to the timing of the transition. The required period is different,
The longest required period of the required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the support game and the longest required period of the required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the required period is the same or substantially the same.

According to the present invention, it is possible to contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the back side. It is a rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the back pack unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display contents on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display contents on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters and the like used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a hit / fail table for a low probability mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a hit / miss table for a high probability mode. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for big hits, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for special deviation. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot and the lottery mode and the support mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of special loss and the lottery mode and the support mode. (A) Schematic diagram showing a support lottery table for low frequency support mode, (b) Schematic diagram showing support lottery table for high frequency support mode A, (c) Support lottery table for high frequency support mode B. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the normal deviation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation display time table corresponding to a big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation display time table corresponding to a special deviation. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for a through gate. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for a through gate. It is a schematic diagram which compared the display time of a pattern in the display part for a through gate. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for confirmation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching a support mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure which concerns on the notification / effect control device and the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display control processing which is executed by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 1st fluctuation start. It is a schematic diagram which exemplifies the outline of the game rotation production. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a symbol combination corresponding to a big hit, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a symbol combination corresponding to a special deviation. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game at the time of transitioning to the 4th normal game state with a special deviation as an opportunity. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is a timing chart exemplifying the change of the holding ball. (A) Schematic diagram comparing the support modes in the second embodiment, (b) Schematic diagram showing the display contents when shifting to the high frequency support mode A1, (c) When shifting to the high frequency support mode A2. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display content of. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching the support mode executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the 1st and 4th normal game states. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the normal deviation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the normal deviation. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a front view of the game board unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters and the like used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 1st actuating opening. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 2nd actuating opening. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation display time table for the 2nd actuating opening. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a schematic diagram which shows the distribution table for the actuation opening in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation start processing executed by MPU of a notification / effect control apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first special effect, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second special effect. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a front view of the game board unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the internal structure of a variable winning apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters and the like used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) is a schematic view showing a hit / fail table for the first actuating port, and (b) is a schematic view showing a pass / fail table for the second actuating port. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for the second operating port. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the behavior when a special hit result is obtained, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a transition pattern of a gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching a support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process to the special hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows the start process for special hits. It is a flowchart which shows the end processing of a special hit game. It is a flowchart which shows the V distribution setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the V winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process to the jackpot game state. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of a big hit. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-confirmation process executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special variation display time table for the 2nd actuating opening. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit-and-miss table for the actuation opening in the 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the transition pattern of a game state. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is a front view of the game board unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters and the like used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 1st actuating opening. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 2nd actuating opening. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for the second operating port. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between a winning type and a lottery mode and a support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching a support mode. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is a front view of the game board unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters and the like used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a hit / fail table for a low probability mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a hit / miss table for a high probability mode. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the distribution table for a 1st actuating opening, and (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the hit or fail table for a 2nd actuating opening. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between a winning type and a lottery mode and a support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching the support mode executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the winning / failing table in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for big hits, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning type and the lottery mode and the support mode. (A) is a schematic diagram comparing the support modes, and (b) is a schematic diagram comparing the display time of the pattern in the display unit for the through gate. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game round end processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a timing chart exemplifying the change of the holding ball. (A) Schematic diagram comparing the support modes in the tenth embodiment, (b) Schematic diagram showing the display contents when shifting to the high-frequency support mode A1, and (c) When shifting to the high-frequency support mode A2. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display content of. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the lottery result in 11th Embodiment, and the pattern displayed on the display part for actuating opening. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the normal deviation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation display time table corresponding to a special deviation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation display mode of a design on a display screen. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching a support mode in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU of a main control unit. (A) A flowchart showing a special notification process executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device, and (b) (c) a schematic diagram showing special notification. It is a flowchart which shows the special notification control processing which is executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a front view of the game board unit in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters and the like used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a hit / fail table for a low probability mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a hit / miss table for a high probability mode. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the distribution table for a 1st actuating opening, and (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the hit or fail table for a 2nd actuating opening. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between a winning type and a lottery mode and a support mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation start processing executed by MPU of a notification / effect control apparatus. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a schematic diagram which shows the distribution table for the special deviation result in 14th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure which concerns on the symbol display. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the arrangement of the symbols displayed on the display screen of a symbol display device. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a symbol combination corresponding to a special deviation result. (A) A flowchart showing a special deviation setting process executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of special deviation result and the rotation speed. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the latter half part for special deviation executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variation end process for special deviation executed by the MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the notification of the end reference number of times. It is a front view of the game board unit in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters and the like used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 1st actuating opening. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 2nd actuating opening. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-confirmation process executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the hold command executed by the MPU of the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot notice effect setting process executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit notice effect detailed decision processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing for hold display control executed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the hold display process which is executed by MPU of a display control apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the first type notice effect, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of the second type advance notice effect. It is a front view of a special production device. It is a schematic diagram which shows various display modes of a special production apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special deviation notice effect setting process executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special deviation notice effect detailed determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the special deviation notice effect execution process executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the special out-of-order notice effect. It is a front view of the game board unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a vertical sectional view of a special production device. It is a front view of (a) a special effect apparatus, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the positional relationship between the passage path of a light emitting body, a light diffusing part and a non-light diffusing part. It is a schematic diagram comparing the light emission modes. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the position of a light emitting body and a light emitting mode. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates the change of the light emission mode. It is sectional drawing of the special effect apparatus in 17th Embodiment. It is a front view of a special production device. It is a schematic diagram which shows various display modes of a special production apparatus. It is a front view of the game board unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the internal structure of the transformation prize apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters and the like used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows the pass / fail table for a working port. It is a schematic diagram which shows the distribution table for a working port. It is a schematic diagram comparing various jackpot results. It is a flowchart which shows the V distribution setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the V winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-confirmation process executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the hold command executed by the MPU of the main control unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the ceiling arrival confirmation effect executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device. It is a timing chart exemplifying the flow of the game when the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is executed. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit which shows the operating opening unit and its periphery in 19th Embodiment. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a game board unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the movement of a game ball. It is a perspective view of a movable piece. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service support process which is executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing process for electric service. (A) is a schematic diagram comparing the support modes, and (b) is a schematic diagram comparing the display time of the pattern in the display unit for the through gate. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship of the time required for passing a game ball. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of discharge of a game ball. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram which shows the actuation opening unit in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service support processing in 21st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which compared the opening pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a schematic diagram which compared the support mode. It is a timing chart exemplifying the flow of the game when the support mode is switched. It is a timing chart exemplifying the flow of the game when the support mode is switched. It is a timing chart exemplifying the flow of the game when the support mode is switched. It is a timing chart that compares the flow of the game when the support mode is switched. It is a timing chart that compares the flow of the game when the support mode is switched. It is a timing chart that compares the flow of the game when the support mode is switched. It is a timing chart that compares the flow of the game when the support mode is switched. It is the schematic which compared the opening pattern in 22nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 3, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main portion 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is formed by connecting long frame members on four sides and is formed so as to form a rectangular frame as a whole. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall or the like.

The gaming machine main portion 12 is supported by an outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. Specifically, the upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further below to the connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. A side support metal fitting 18 is provided. The support mechanism is composed of the upper support metal fittings 17 and the lower support metal fittings 18, and the support mechanism causes the game machine main portion 12 to rotate on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine 10 can be rotated forward with the right side as the rotation tip side (see FIGS. 3 and 4).

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main portion 12 is arranged behind the inner frame 13 as a base body, the front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and the inner frame 13. It is equipped with a back pack unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the main portion 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. ing. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 can rotate backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is said that.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE described later can be visually recognized from the front, and the window portion 21 is the same by the glass unit 22. It is blocked from the back side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder for holding the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion that partitions the holding area of the glass panel 23 back and forth, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, the gaming area PE is doubly covered from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

It is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 by using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame body 20. Further, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to adopt a plurality of glass panels and to face each of these glass panels back and forth with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to adopt a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of the glass panel.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination unit 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the peripheral edge of the window unit 21. The annular illumination unit 26 is lit or blinked according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, an error display lamp unit 27 that lights up when a problem such as an error occurs is provided at the center of the annular illumination unit 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and further to the left and right of the error display lamp unit 27, during the payout of prize balls. A illuminating prize ball lamp portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 for outputting sound effects, BGM, etc. according to the game state is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 (see FIG. 3).

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 32 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 (see FIG. 2). The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launch mechanism described later while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 33 and a game that does not reach the game area PE (see FIG. 3) among the game balls launched by the game ball launch mechanism. When the ball is returned to the player, it has a function as a saucer for storing the discharged game ball.

An effect button 35 operated by the player is arranged in a portion of the upper bulging portion 31 in front of the upper plate 33. The effect button 35 is connected to the notification / effect control device 140, and the notification / effect control device 140 executes an operation-corresponding effect or the like based on the operation of the effect button 35.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to project toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism described later. The rate of fire of the game ball increases as the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41 increases, and when this operation amount is adjusted by the player to reach a predetermined amount, the game ball is played. It will reach the region PE. Further, by adjusting this operation amount by the player, it is possible to separate the game ball into the right route and the left route, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage leading to the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage leading to the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed in the upper corner portion thereof, and the entrance portion of the upper plate passage on the front door side is formed by partitioning the receiving portion to the left and right by a partition wall. A section is formed between the portion and the entrance portion of the lower plate passage on the front door side. The front door side upper plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage are connected to the game ball distribution section described later on the upstream side, and the game balls that have entered the front door side upper plate passage are guided to the upper plate 33 and are guided to the front door side lower side. The game ball that has entered the plate passage is guided to the lower plate 34.

On the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14, protrusion shafts are provided at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. These protrusion shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. In FIG. 5, as in FIG. 3, the configuration in the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. Further, the inner frame base body 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, the lower end thereof), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the curtain plate. It will be listed. A slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference.

Support metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although not shown, the support metal fittings 71 and 72 have shaft portions, and by inserting the bearing portions provided in the front door frame 14 into these shaft portions, the front door frame with respect to the inner frame 13 is inserted. 14 is rotatably supported.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is disposed on the rotating tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end portion (vertical frame member described later) of the inner frame base body 50, and the hook member 76 for the front door is arranged scattered in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) thereof. have. In the inner frame base body 50, a slit for projecting to the front side of the inner frame 13 of the hook receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 corresponds to each front door hook member 76. It is formed in this way. The front door hook member 76 protruding through the slits is locked to the front door hook member 76 provided in the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76. The front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Further, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 extending to the rear side of the inner frame 13. The inner frame hook member 77 is hooked on the hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, so that the gaming machine main portion 12 is locked with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed in the inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75). The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (each hook member 76, 77, the interlocking rod, etc.) constituting the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise). And the lock of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is unlocked.

A storage recess 51 for accommodating the game board unit 80 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base body 50. The accommodating recess 51 is recessed in the rear of the gaming machine according to the outer shape of the gaming board unit 80, and the gaming board unit 80 is fixed to the accommodating recess 51 in a state of being fitted from the front of the gaming machine by a manual lock mechanism. .. A substantially rectangular window hole 52 is formed at the bottom of the accommodating recess 51, and the rear surface configuration of the game board unit 80 (rear surface block 80b described later) projects rearward of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. .. The window hole 52 is in a state where almost the entire area thereof is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the gaming board unit 80 mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is provided on the back side of the game board 80a formed mainly of wooden plates and the game board 80a, and various game parts (variable display device, control device, movable production mechanism, etc.) described later. Is integrated with the back block 80b mounted on the base body 251.

The above-mentioned game area PE into which the game ball flows down is formed on the front surface of the game board 80a. As described above, the game area PE is covered with the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). In the glass unit 22, the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game board 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is the same as the game area PE. They are arranged so that they are not lined up in front of and behind each other. As a result, ball clogging in the game area PE is suppressed. The game board 80a is not limited to wood, and may be made of synthetic resin.

Hereinafter, the game board unit 80 (particularly, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game board 80a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as viewed from the rear.

The game board 80a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 80a. As shown in FIG. 6, a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82, a variable winning device 83, a through gate 84, and the like are arranged in each opening. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82, and the variable winning device 83, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor provided corresponding to each entry portion, and a predetermined number is detected based on the detection result. Benefits such as prize balls (payout of game balls) are given to the player. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80a (game area PE), and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86. .. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 86, the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, and the variable winning device 83 is also referred to as "winning". do.

Further, on the game board 80a, various game parts such as a large number of game nails 87 and a windmill 94 are arranged in order to appropriately disperse the flow path of the game ball. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations of the game nail 87, the windmill, and the like, and a prize is generated in the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like with an appropriate probability.

A central opening is formed in the center of the game board 80a, and a transparent opening cover is attached so as to cover the central opening from the back side of the game board unit 80. A variable display unit 85 or the like belonging to the back block 80b is located behind the central opening, and the variable display unit 85 or the like can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening (opening cover).

An actuating port unit 82, a through gate 84, and the like are arranged around the central opening. The actuating port unit 82 is provided with a first actuating port 91 arranged below the variable display unit 85 and a second actuating port 92 arranged below the first actuating port 91. Of these two operating ports 91 and 92, the second operating port 92 is provided with an electric accessory 93 as an opening / closing assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). The electric accessory 93 includes a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and has an open state (auxiliary state) that allows the ball to enter the second operating port 92 and the same ball. It is possible to switch to the closed state (non-auxiliary state) that makes it impossible.

When the electric accessory 93 is in the closed state, it becomes difficult to enter the second operating port 92, and by switching to the open state, the electric accessory 93 enters the second operating port 92 rather than in the closed state. It may be configured to facilitate the sphere.

The through gate 84 is arranged on the upstream side of the second operating port 92, specifically on the side of the variable display unit 85, and when the support lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 84 of the game ball is won. Will switch the electric accessory 93 from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

When a ball enters the first operating port 91, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the second operating port 92, four game balls are paid out. Is executed, but the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above.

The variable winning device (special winning device or special winning means) 83 can be switched between a large winning opening, an allowable state for allowing entry into the large winning opening, and a blocking state for disallowing entry. A shutter is provided. In the following description, the state of the variable winning device 83 when the shutter is in the allowable state is referred to as “open state”, and the state of the variable winning device 83 when the shutter is in the blocking state is referred to as “closed state”. ..

Regarding the variable winning device 83, when the variable winning device 83 is in the closed state, it becomes difficult to enter the variable winning device 83, and when the variable winning device 83 is switched to the open state, the ball is entered into the variable winning device 83 rather than in the closed state. May be configured to facilitate.

In the normal game state described later, an internal lottery is executed based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92, and when the internal lottery is won (for example, when a big hit is obtained), it is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It shifts to the special game state (open / close execution mode). The variable winning device 83 is maintained in the closed state and is configured to be switched to the open state when the special gaming state is entered. In the special gaming state, for example, the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) is set as one round, and the switching to the open state up to a plurality of rounds (for example, 6 rounds) is repeated. It has been set.

Next, the variable display unit 85 will be supplementarily described. The variable display unit 85 has a symbol display device 95 that variably displays (variates) the symbol by using the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 as a trigger. The symbol display device 95 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled horizontally so as to be variablely displayed. Then, when the jackpot is won, the symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the preset effective line, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). The symbol display device 95 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

The game board 80a is provided with a center frame 96 so as to surround the central opening. The center frame 96 is fixed to the game board 80a from the front surface side thereof, and in such a fixed state, the center frame 96 and the glass unit 22 stand up from the front surface of the game board 80a. The gap between the ball and the ball is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is prevented that the game ball flowing down the game area PE collides with the symbol display device 95, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 85 (specifically, the center frame 96). It is roughly divided into the above right route that detours from the left side and the above left route that detours from the left side. In the present embodiment, various game parts provided in the game area PE are arranged so as to be symmetrical (so-called symmetrical gauge), and a difference in advantages and disadvantages between the right route and the left route is provided. However, the game balls launched on either the right route or the left route are configured to be able to win the operating ports 91, 92, the through gate 84, and the variable winning device 83.

A stage on which the game ball can roll left and right is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion constituting the lower part of the center frame 96. The game ball flowing in from the inflow port formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 96 is discharged onto the stage through the warp passage also formed in the center frame 96. Regarding the stage, specifically, the game ball that has reached the stage flows into the first operating port 91 as compared with the game ball that does not pass through the stage so that the game ball that has reached the stage can easily flow into the first operating port 91. It is configured to be easy to play, and contributes to increasing the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on this stage. In the present embodiment, as described above, the central opening is covered with the transparent opening cover, and the game ball that has reached the stage is regulated so as not to move to the back block 80b (variable display unit 85) side.

The actuating ports 91 and 92 are arranged at positions closer to the variable display unit 85. Since it is possible to shift to the special gaming state by using the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not to win the operating ports 91 and 92 and grasps whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. It is considered that attention should be paid to the symbol display device 95. The fact that the operating ports 91 and 92 are provided near the variable display unit 85 is a device for concentrating the points that the player wants to pay attention to around the variable display unit 85.

At the right end of the game board 80a, a game area partition member 98 for partitioning the game area PE is arranged together with a guide rail 100 described later. The game area partition member 98 is provided with a stopper member and a main display unit 99 on which a game ball flying along the guide rail 100 collides. The stopper member is a cushioning member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member flows down the game area PE after its momentum is weakened. That is, the stopper member is provided with a de-energizing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game ball.

Here, the main display unit 99 will be supplementarily described. The main display unit 99 is embedded in the game area partition member 98, and a part thereof is arranged so as to face the glass unit 22. A main display unit D on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided on the facing portions. The main display unit 99 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit D is configured to be controlled by the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 6B, the main display unit D has a display unit D1 for the first operating port that displays a lottery result based on a winning prize in the first operating port 91, and a winning prize in the second operating port 92. It has a display unit D2 for a second operating port that displays the result of the lottery performed based on the above. In the display unit D1 for the first operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the first operating port 91 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the variation display is performed based on the winning of the first operating port 91. The result of the internal lottery will be clearly shown. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the special gaming state, the variable display is stopped and stopped on the display unit D1 for the first operating port. As a result, after the predetermined pattern is displayed, the game shifts to the special gaming state.

In the display unit D2 for the second operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the second operating port 92 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, it is performed based on the winning of the second operating port 92. The result of the internal lottery will be clearly shown. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the special gaming state, the variable display is stopped and stopped on the display unit D2 for the second operating port. As a result, after the predetermined pattern is displayed, the game shifts to the special gaming state according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of any of the actuation ports 91 and 92, the variation display is started on the corresponding actuation port display units D1 and D2, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the above variation display is stopped ( (Confirmed display), and the period until the confirmed display time elapses while maintaining that state corresponds to one game. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, and for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a prize is awarded to any of the actuation ports 91 and 92, the single display area is provided. In a configuration in which variable display is performed in the display area, variable display is started in the single display area, and the above variable display is stopped (confirmed display) with a predetermined stop result displayed, and that state. It is also possible to set one of the game times until the confirmed display time elapses while maintaining the above.

In the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is held up to four times (up to eight in total), and the main display unit 99 is adopted. The main display unit D is provided with a first operating port holding number display unit S1 and a second operating port holding number display unit S2 that display the number of holdings of the operating ports 91 and 92, respectively.

Further, in addition to the operating port display units D1 and D2, the main display unit D of the main display unit 99 is provided with a through gate display unit DS that displays lottery results based on winning a prize in the through gate 84. .. In the through gate display unit DS, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 84, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 84 is obtained. Explicit (confirmed display is executed). If the result of the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84 is the support winning result, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit DS, the variation display is stopped, and the confirmation display is completed. , Transition to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 93 attached to the second operating port 92 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is held up to 4 times, but the number of holdings is displayed on the main display unit D of the main display unit 99. A display unit SS for the number of holdings to be held is provided.

The main display unit D described in detail above can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball is prevented from moving in front of these various display units. Therefore, its visibility is guaranteed.

Explaining the configuration of the inner frame 13 again with reference to FIG. 5, a game ball is launched into the game area PE below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50 based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41. A game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided.

(Game ball launch mechanism 110)
The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball arranged at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines a launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. The ball feeding device 113 for supplying balls and the base plate 114 to which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as the main configurations, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50 to provide the same. It is integrated with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in a state of being inclined diagonally so as to be inclined upward toward the game board unit 80 side. The launch rail 112 is formed with a groove portion having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and the front and rear positions of the game ball are defined by fitting the game ball into the groove-shaped portion.

A ball stopper for holding the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 to the above-mentioned launch standby position is arranged at a position closer to the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply / emission control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply / launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the launch standby position is on the game board unit 80 side, in detail. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100 is formed by partitioning the game area PE together with the game area partition member 98 fixed to the game board unit 80 (specifically, the front surface of the plate body) so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. .. Further, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and both rails 101 and 102 form a section of the guide passage 103. Has been done. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 opened to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located above the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guidance rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). In the game board unit 80, on the front side of the exit portion 105, specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, there is a reverse return prevention member 106 that prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE from returning to the same guidance passage 103. It is attached to prevent the game ball that has reached the game area PE in advance from hindering the launch of the subsequent game ball.

Each of the rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 has an arc shape centered on a substantially central portion of the game area PE. Therefore, the game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated by itself. That is, when the game ball is launched so as to deliver the game ball to the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guidance passage 103 constitutes a passage area (passage path) through which the game ball substantially passes. However, the region along the inner rail 101 is a region in which the game ball does not substantially pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112, the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other with the lower end edge of the game board unit 80 interposed therebetween. Have been placed. That is, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged so that the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are displaced to the left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game board unit 80. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower end edge of the game board unit 80, and a gap is formed at a predetermined interval between the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is arranged below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE and returns in the guidance passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage through the above gap. Become. The foul ball passage leads to the lower plate passage on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage is discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. As a result, the interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next is suppressed.

In the inner frame base body 50, a through hole is formed on the left side of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) to penetrate the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction. A passage forming member 121 is arranged in the door. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50, and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 leads to a game ball distribution unit described later. Further, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage 122. A front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

In the inner frame base body 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 is attached. The opening / closing member 124 is urged at a front position that closes the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123, and when the front door frame 14 is opened, each opening / closing member 124 is urged by this urging force. By being in the closed state, the game balls are prevented from falling out from the passages 122 and 123. On the other hand, in the state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the urging force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage communicate with each other.

Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base body 50 and game board unit 80) will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing metal fitting 132 is attached to the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. Further, on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50, a plurality of fixing levers 134 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state are provided.

As described above, the bottom portion of the accommodating recess (game board accommodating portion) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 penetrates in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and is opened to the back side of the inner frame base body 50. A window hole 52 is formed, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 51. Various configurations such as a control device are mounted on the back surface of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b), and these various configurations are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board unit 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

As described above, the back block 80b is attached to the back surface of the game board 80a. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 open to the game board 80a side, and the base body 251 is fixed to the back surface of the game board unit 80 to form a game board 80a and a back block. It is integrated with 80b.

The front side of the base body 251 is an arrangement area for a movable effect mechanism and the like, and the back side thereof is an arrangement area for a control device for controlling various configurations thereof and the variable display unit 85 (design display device 95). It has become.

More specifically, a part of the base body 251 protrudes to the back surface side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-mentioned symbol display device 95 (see FIG. 6) and the symbol display device thereof with respect to the protruding portion. A display control device for driving the 95 is attached. The symbol display device 95 and the display control device are arranged so as to be stacked so that the symbol display device 95 is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50). Further, a notification / effect control device 140 is mounted on the back surface of the base body 251 so as to be located behind the display control device.

The notification / effect control device 140 includes a notification / effect control board that controls voice output, lamp display, and control of the display control device according to instructions from the main control device described later, and the notification / effect control board is transparent. It is housed in a substrate box 141 made of a resin material or the like.

Below the notification / effect control device 140, a main control device unit 160 is provided so as to cover the base body 251 from the rear. The main control device unit 160 has a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the back surface of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the rear block 80b) and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. There is. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 163 made of the same.

The board box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing portion 164 as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided on the short side portions of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but the box can be inserted by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole portion constituting the box sealing portion 164. The base and the box cover are designed so that they cannot be opened. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after opening the package. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking pin into at least one locking hole of the plurality of box sealing portions 164. When the board box 163 is opened when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the box sealing portion into which the locking pin is inserted and the board box 163 main body is formed. To disconnect. As a result, the box base of the board box 163 and the box cover are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If the history of opening the board box 163 is left in the board box 163, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 163.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected to each other by a pedestal sealing portion 165 so as not to be opened. Specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has a locking hole portion and a locking pin as in the box sealing portion 164, and the locking pin is inserted into the locking hole portion to form a board box 163. It is designed to be inseparably coupled to the mounting base 161. This makes it easier to grasp the fact when the board box 163 is illegally removed.

The portion of the front surface of the base body 251 facing the lower back surface of the game board unit 80 corresponds to the game board opening of the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82, and the variable winning device 83, and is on the downstream side. A collection passage (not shown) that gathers at one place is formed. As a result, all the game balls that have won in the general winning opening 81 or the like are configured to gather below the game board unit 80 via the collection passage. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting the game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 80 are led out into the discharge passage by the collection passage. The out port 86 is also connected to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning openings is led out into the discharge passage through the out port 86.

Further, the base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b has, as the detection sensor for each of the above-mentioned ball entry portions, a general winning opening detection sensor for detecting the game ball winning in the general winning opening 81, and an operating port 91. , 92 is equipped with a detection sensor for the operating port that detects the game ball, and the winning detection mechanism is configured by these various detection sensors. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and detection information (detection signal) is output from each detection sensor to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as a main body of the back pack unit 15, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. ..

The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 10, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and forms a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. It has 212. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 85.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal board. Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal board, and various signals are output to the management control device (hall computer) on the game hall side through these output terminals. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins 214 at the right end portion when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the bearing pin 214 is provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by being inserted through the portion 133. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixed lever 134 provided in the inner frame 13 is inserted, and the fixed lever 134 is inserted into the insertion portion and hits the base portion 211 from behind. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by being in contact with the inner frame 13.

The base portion 211 is provided with a payout mechanism portion 202 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and is open upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. To. A tank rail 222 that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221 and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function for distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to any of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. Formed so as to lead to the upper plate 33 via the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage, and to lead the outer opening to the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage. Has been done.

A discharge passage board and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion back and forth. The discharge passage board is formed with a discharge passage opened rearward on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game ball derived from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like to the discharge passage passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

The control device collective unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, and the payout control device 242 and the power supply / emission control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply / launch control device 243 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is housed in the board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout device 224 occurs, the ball jam can be cleared.

In the power supply / emission control device 243, the power supply / emission control board is housed in the substrate box 246. A predetermined power source required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the power supply / launch control board, and the launch of the game ball is controlled by the player operating the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, the drive control of the solenoid 111 constituting the game ball launch mechanism 110 and the drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

Further, the power supply / emission control device 243 is provided with a power supply switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (on state) and a cutoff state (off state).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and holding function for various data, retains the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and returns to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. You can do it. For example, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure as in the case of the closing of the game hall, the state before the cutoff is stored in memory. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the reset switch 166 provided on the main control device 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by opening the main portion 12 (inner frame 13) of the gaming machine to expose the back portion of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, in a state where the opening of the gaming machine main unit 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. That is, the above-mentioned various switches are difficult to operate when the game machine main unit 12 is closed, and are operated from the front side of the game machine by a person who does not have a key for the locking device 75 (for example, a fraudster). Is difficult.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block of FIG.

The MPU 402 is mounted on the main control board 401 provided in the main control device 162. The MPU 402 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a ROM 403 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 402 and a control program stored in the ROM 403. It is an element having a built-in RAM 404, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 402, for example, the function of the ROM 403 and the function of the RAM 404 are provided as another element.

The MPU 402 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 402, a power failure monitoring board 405 provided in the main control device 162, a payout control device 242, various detection sensors, and the like are connected. A power supply / emission control device 243 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 405, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power failure monitoring board 405.

As a part of various detection sensors, a ball entry detection sensor 391a that detects a ball entry (winning) into the general winning opening 81, a ball entry detection sensor 391b that detects a ball entry (winning) into the variable winning device 83, the first A ball entry detection sensor 391c that detects a ball entry (winning) into the operating port 91, a ball entry detection sensor 391d that detects a ball entry (winning) into the second operating port 92, and a ball entry (winning) into the through gate 84. A ball entry detection sensor 391e for detecting the above is connected, and a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each entry portion is performed in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162. Further, in the MPU 402, a big hit lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92, and a support lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 84.

A power failure monitoring board 405, a payout control device 242, and a notification / effect control device 140 are connected to the output side of the MPU 402. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball portion corresponding to the winning of the above-mentioned operating ports 91, 92 and the like. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 83 is specified, 15 game balls are output. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout is output, and when the winning to the first operating port 91 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output to the second operating port 92. When a prize is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output from the main control device 162 to the notification / effect control device 140. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. It should be noted that each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 402, a variable winning drive unit for opening and closing the shutter of the variable winning device 83, an electric accessory driving unit for opening and closing the electric accessory 93 of the second operating port 92, and a main display unit 99 are connected. Has been done. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 401, and the MPU 402 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit is executed in the MPU 402 so that the variable winning device 83 is opened and closed in the open / close execution mode. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 93 is won, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit is executed in the MPU 402 so that the electric accessory 93 is opened and closed. Further, the MPU 402 executes display control of the main display unit D of the main display unit 99.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402, and through this external output terminal board 213, information on ball entry to various ball entry sections can be sent to the management control device (hall computer) on the game hall side. Information about lottery results such as jackpots is output. This makes it possible to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the game situation with the hall computer.

The power failure monitoring board 405 relays the main control board 401 and the power supply / emission control device 243, and the power failure monitoring board 405 has a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 243. The function to monitor is given. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply / launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, the operating power required for each of the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc. is generated based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. Further, the power supply / launch control device 243 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

The notification / effect control device 140 is provided with a notification / effect control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM is executed. A certain RAM and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM and RAM are integrated into one chip for the MPU, and each may be individually chipped. The MPU of the notification / effect control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display. It controls 410.

The display control device 410 executes the display control of the symbol display device 95 based on the command input from the notification / effect control device 140. In this case, in the notification / effect control device 140, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 95 (for example, the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the content of the reach effect) and the like. The stop display mode of the symbol (the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display) is determined.

Here, the configuration related to the variable display of the symbol of each game and the content of the variable display will be described. In the following description, FIGS. 12 and 13 will be referred to as appropriate. 12 and 13 are schematic views for explaining the display contents on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.
For convenience of explanation, the background image and the like displayed on the display screen 95a are omitted in FIG. 13 and the like.

The display control device 410 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, data of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" (see FIGS. 12 (a) to (i)) and data of sub-symbols without numbers are attached. (See FIG. 12 (j)) is stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 13A, on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 95a, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, on the display screen 95a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done. Further, on the display screen 95a, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set. Then, the variable display was stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination with the same number) was formed on one of the effective lines. When the variation display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed in the state, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probabilistic jackpot result.

In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). The 2 symbol row) and the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a 3rd symbol row (or a 3rd symbol row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) correspond to "specific symbols" and have even numbers (2,4,6,8). The main symbol corresponds to a "non-specific symbol". When the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, for example, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, when a normal jackpot result is obtained, for example, the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 95 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to the vertical direction.

A hold display is placed at the bottom of the display screen 95a, specifically below the variable display area ME composed of the variable display area for the upper symbol column, the variable display area for the middle symbol column, and the variable display area for the lower symbol column. The area is set. The hold display area includes a hold number display area Da and a variable display area in which the same number of units hold display areas as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins in the actuation ports 91 and 92 are arranged in the left-right direction. It is composed of an execution target display area Dc capable of displaying a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the game times being executed in the ME.

More specifically, when the game ball wins the operating openings 91 and 92, the maximum number of holdings is eight, and correspondingly, the holding number display area Da has the first unit holding display area and the second unit holding. A display area, a third unit hold display area, a fourth unit hold display area, a fifth unit hold display area, a sixth unit hold display area, a seventh unit hold display area, and an eighth unit hold display area are set.

For example, when the number of holdings is one when the game ball wins in the operating openings 91 and 92, a predetermined holding image (holding icon) is displayed only in the first unit holding display area, and the game ball is displayed. When the number of holdings is 4 when the operating ports 91 and 92 are won, a predetermined holding image (holding icon) is displayed in the 1st unit holding display area to the 4th unit holding display area. It has become. FIG. 13B exemplifies the case where the number of holdings at the operating ports 91 and 92 is three. In the following description, the "holding number" is also simply referred to as the "holding number".

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 402 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit lottery, set the display of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D), set the symbol display of the symbol display device 95, and the like. As shown in FIG. 14, when the hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the type counter C2 used for determining the hit type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, and the symbol display device 95 are displaced and fluctuates. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the variation display time of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 A variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time of the symbol on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 93 attached to the second operating port 92 is set to the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 404. The RAM 404 is provided with a hold ball storage area 432 including a hold area RE for an operation port, an execution area AE, and a total hold number storage area.

The holding area RE for the working port includes a first area, a second area, a third area, a fourth area, a fifth area, a sixth area, a seventh area, and an eighth area, and the first working port 91 or Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 according to the winning history to the second operating port 92 is the first area as the above-mentioned hold information. ~ Stored in any of the 8th area. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the eighth area, when the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → the third area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. Then, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92 are stored on hold. Further, the reserved ball storage area 432 is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and the number of reserved balls stored in the total reserved number storage area is the number in which the winning history to the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92 is stored. Information for identifying is stored.

The execution area AE is for moving each value stored in the first area of the operation port hold area RE when the variable display of the pattern is started on the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99. At the start of one game round, a hit / fail judgment is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Here, various counters will be supplementarily described.

The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the operating port holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 421 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 403. As shown in FIG. 15, as the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group) are set. .. That is, the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a high probability mode (high probability) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means. State) and is set.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15A) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (that is, winning information) that are big hits are "7", "107", and " There are a total of 6 pieces, "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing. Incidentally, if the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers that are big hits are arbitrary.

In this embodiment, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot corresponds to the off result. The deviation results are roughly divided into normal deviation results and special deviation results. The details will be described later, but the special deviation result is given preferential treatment over the normal deviation result in that the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is switched to the high frequency support mode A described later. In the case of a special deviation below, the support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode after the game rounds related to the special deviation are completed. In the following description, the out-of-order result is usually referred to simply as the "out-of-order result".

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15A) is referred to in the lottery, the values of the random numbers that are special deviations (that is, special deviation information) are "111" and "333". , "555", a total of three. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "111", "333", and "555" correspond to the special deviation result. On the other hand, even under the gaming state in which the hit / fail table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that is a special deviation (that is, the special deviation information) is "111". , "333" and "555", for a total of three. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "111", "333", and "555" correspond to the big hit result. That is, the probability of becoming a special deviation is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

Next, the type counter C2 will be described. The type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value (that is, 29), and then return to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are different in two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode by the electric accessory 93 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

As a support mode by the electric accessory 93 attached to the second operating port 92, the second operating port 92 is compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PE in the same manner. Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency support state) so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 93 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low. High frequency guide state) is set. The high-frequency support mode is roughly divided into a high-frequency support mode A that shifts when the above-mentioned special deviation or the like occurs, and a high-frequency support mode B that shifts when a big hit occurs. The difference between these support modes will be described later.

The type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the game ball is stored in the operating port holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92 wins a prize.

The distribution destination of the game result for the type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 422 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 403. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. As the distribution table, the distribution table for big hits (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 16 (a) and the distribution table for special deviation shown in FIG. 16 (b) (second distribution information group). ) And are set.

As shown in FIG. 16A, in the jackpot distribution table, the 6R normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result) and the 6R probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result) are distributed to the game results. ) Is set. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and "15 to 29" corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the 6R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state (open / close execution mode). In this high-frequency support mode B, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode B reaches the end reference number of times, or when a big hit result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (specifically, the game shifts to the special game state). If you do), it will end and switch to the low frequency support mode. In this embodiment, 40 times is set as the end reference number of times.

The 6R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state (open / close execution mode). This high-frequency support mode B is continued until the next big hit result and the transition to the special gaming state is performed, and the mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode with the start of the special gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16B, in the distribution table for special deviation, the special deviation result A and the special deviation result B are set as the distribution destinations of the game results. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 23" corresponds to the special deviation result A, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the special deviation result B. ..

As shown in FIG. 17B, neither the special deviation result A nor the special deviation result B is a trigger for switching the lottery mode, but a trigger for switching the support mode by the electric accessory 93. ..

Specifically, the special deviation result A is an opportunity to switch the support mode to the high frequency support mode A after the end of the game times that resulted in the special deviation result A. In this high-frequency support mode A, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the end reference number of times, or when a big hit result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (for details, go to the special game state). (If migrated), exit and transition to low frequency support mode. In this embodiment, 20 times is set as the end reference number of times.

The special deviation result B also serves as an opportunity to switch the support mode to the high frequency support mode A after the end of the game round that resulted in the special deviation result B. In this high-frequency support mode A, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the end reference number of times, or when a big hit result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (for details, go to the special game state). (If migrated), exit and transition to low frequency support mode. In this embodiment, 40 times is set as the end reference number of times.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the operating port holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403.

However, in the game round to shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture), and the game result is compatible with the open / close execution mode. In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variation display can be a special display result in the game times that is the game result, the stop display result after the variation display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) in the symbol display device 95 is started. Refers to a display state for making the player think that the special display result is likely to be a variable display state before the derivation display is performed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, it is possible to establish a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode. It is a display state in which a reach symbol combination having a characteristic is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, it is possible to establish a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode on the preset effective line in the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a characteristic reach symbol combination, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

The display contents on the display screen 95a will be described in more detail. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbol with the numbers constituting the above, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach display is performed by displaying the variation of the symbol in the middle symbol row. Will be. Then, when a big hit occurs, the main symbol with the numbers constituting the hit symbol combination together with the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variation display of the symbol in the middle symbol row is displayed. It will be terminated.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. This includes those that perform a reach effect by reducing or hiding the reach symbol combination and then displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 95a. Further, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS has a variation display time in the first operating port display unit D1 and a second operating port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D) and a symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 95. And are used in determining in the MPU 402. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the start of the variation display in the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the display unit D2 for the second operating port and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 95. Will be done.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reach the maximum value (that is, 599), and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric accessory holding area 433 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a support lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 93 of the second operating port 92 to the open state by the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. Hereinafter, the support mode will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 18 and 19.

The value of the random number that wins the support is stored as a support lottery table (win / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 421 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 403. As shown in FIG. 18, as the support lottery table, the support lottery table for the low-probability support mode (low-probability hit / miss information group) and the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode A (low-probability hit / miss information group). And a support lottery table (high-probability winning / failing information group) for the high-frequency support mode B are set.

In the situation where the support lottery table for the low frequency support mode (FIG. 18A) is referred to in the above lottery, the random number values (that is, winning information) for winning the support are "1" and "3". , "5", "7" ... "595", "597", "599", for a total of 300 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7" ... "595", "597", "599" correspond to the support winning result. is doing. Other values correspond to support non-winning results.

In the situation where the support lottery table for the high frequency support mode A (FIG. 18 (b)) is referred to in the above lottery, the random number values (that is, winning information) for the support winning are "1", " 3 ”,“ 5 ”,“ 7 ”...“ 595 ”,“ 597 ”,“ 599 ”, for a total of 300 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7" ... "595", "597", "599" correspond to the support winning result. is doing. Other values correspond to support non-winning results. That is, the support lottery table for the high frequency support mode A is shared with the support lottery table for the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high frequency support mode B (FIG. 18 (c)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that wins the support (that is, the winning information) is "4", There are a total of 598 pieces except "304". That is, all of the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599" other than "4" and "304" correspond to the support winning result. That is, the high-frequency support mode B is differentiated from the high-frequency support mode A and the low-frequency support mode in that the support is won in almost all of the support lottery.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the low frequency support mode, the support winning probability is halved, and the number of times (opening number) that the electric accessory 93 is switched to the open state when the support winning result is obtained is ". It is specified to be "once", and the time (opening time) in which the electric accessory 93 is maintained in the open state is specified to be "0.1 sec". As described above, by extremely shortening the opening time, the winning of the second operating port 92 is substantially avoided during the low frequency support mode.

In the high frequency support mode A, the support winning probability is halved, which is the same as in the low frequency support mode, but the number of times the electric accessory 93 is switched to the open state when the support winning result is obtained. (Number of times of opening) is specified to be "2 times", the time (opening time) for keeping the electric accessory in the open state is "2 sec", and the interval time for keeping the electric accessory in the closed state is "0.2 sec". It is stipulated to be. By extending the opening time as compared with the low frequency support mode in this way, the second operating port 92 is allowed to win a prize during the high frequency support mode A. By appropriately generating a prize in the second operating port 92 in this way, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease (investment) in the number of balls held. That is, the high frequency support mode A is configured such that the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired game balls (so-called base) is higher than that of the low frequency support mode.

In the high frequency support mode B, the support winning probability is 1 / 1.1, and the number of times (opening number) that the electric accessory 93 is switched to the open state when the support winning result is obtained is "2 times". The time (opening time) for keeping the electric accessory in the open state is "2 sec", and the interval time for keeping the electric accessory in the closed state is "0.2 sec". By extending the opening time as compared with the low frequency support mode in this way, the second operating port 92 is allowed to win a prize during the high frequency support mode B. In the high-frequency support mode B, the winning frequency of the second operating port 92 is higher than that in the high-frequency support mode A, so that it is possible to proceed with the game while further suppressing the decrease (investment) in the number of balls held. There is. That is, the high frequency support mode B is configured so that the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired game balls (so-called base) is higher than that of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode A. ing.

As described above, the game state in the present embodiment shifts to the normal game state in which the game progresses by repeating the game times based on the entry into the operating ports 91 and 92, and the variable winning is triggered by the big hit. It is roughly classified into a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the device 83 is opened / closed. The normal game state is the first normal game state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, and the second normal game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode B. In the third normal game state where the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode B, and the fourth normal game state where the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode A. It is configured. Regarding the advantage of the player, the difference is provided so that the first normal game state <the fourth normal game state and the third normal game state <the second normal game state become higher in this order.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process executed for advancing the game by the MPU 402 in the main control device 162 will be described. In the MPU 402, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. , The description of these various processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 402 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, the state of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the winning detection sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S103, the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S104, a winning process for passing through is executed in association with winning the winning through the through gate 84. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the electric service holding area 433. The value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is set on condition that the number of reserved information for the through gate 84 (hereinafter, also referred to as the accessory reserved storage number SN) is less than 4. It is stored in the electric service holding area 433. When the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 435, the winning detection flag for the through gate is deleted and the winning process for the through gate is completed.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and in the step S105, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 is executed, and this timer interrupt processing is completed. do.

(Prize processing for the operating port)
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 and 22.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the first operating port 91. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the first operating port 91, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for paying out three game balls is set in the payout control device 242.

In the following step S203, an external signal setting process is performed so that information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 91 is output to the hall computer on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer can grasp that the ball has entered the first operating port 91. In the following step S204, a value corresponding to the first operating port 91 is read from the holding number storage area, and this value is set to the holding storage number RaN for the first operating port (hereinafter, also referred to as the holding storage number RaN for the first operating port). Say). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing each value such as the winning random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first operating port 91, the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the second operating port 92. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating port 92, the process proceeds to step S207, and a prize ball command for paying out four game balls is set in the payout control device 242. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output process S401 of the normal process described later.

In the following step S208, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 92 to the hall computer on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer can grasp that the ball has entered the second operating port 92. In the following step S209, the value corresponding to the second operating port 92 is read from the holding number storage area, and this value is set to the holding storage number RbN for the second operating port (hereinafter, also referred to as the holding storage number RbN for the second operating port). Say). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing each value such as the winning random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in both the processes of steps S201 and S206, that is, if there is no ball in either the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92, the main winning process is terminated as it is. ..

Here, the information acquisition process in step S205 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the information acquisition process of the operation hold storage number N stored in the hold number storage area of the hold ball storage area 432, specifically, the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92. It is determined whether or not the operation hold storage number N (RaN or RbN described above) related to the ball entry portion that triggered the above is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the operation hold storage number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the operation hold storage number N of the corresponding operation port is added by 1 in step S302. , The total number of holds stored in the hold number storage area in step S303 (hereinafter referred to as the common hold number CRN) is added by 1.

In the following step S304, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in step S103 are set to the first of the free storage area areas of the operation port hold area RE. It is stored in the storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common hold number CRN added by 1 in step S302.

That is, when the reserved storage number RaN for the first operating port is set, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in step S103 are set. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the operation hold hold area RE, that is, the area corresponding to the operation hold storage number N added by 1 in step S302.

When the reserved storage number RbN for the second operating port is set, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are set to the holding area for the operating port. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of RE, that is, the area corresponding to the operation hold storage number N added by 1 in step S302.

After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, the display update process is executed for the hold number display unit of the main display unit 99. In the display update process, when the current entry destination (winning destination) is the first operating port 91, the display of the hold number display unit S1 for the first operating port is updated, and the current entry destination (winning destination) is changed. In the case of the second operating port 92, the display of the hold number display unit S2 for the second operating port is updated.

Each of the hold number display units S1 and S2 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit by the hold number display units S1 and S2, the hold number related to the first operation port 91, and the second operation. The configuration is such that the number of holds related to the mouth 92 matches. When the number of holdings related to the first operating port 91 increases due to this prize, the number of LEDs lit in the holding number display unit S1 for the first operating port is increased accordingly, and the second operation is performed. When the number of holdings related to the mouth 92 increases, a process of increasing the number of lit LEDs on the holding number display unit S2 for the second operating port is performed accordingly.

In the following steps S306 and S307, the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410, which are the control devices on the sub side (secondary side), recognize that the operation ports 91 and 92 have won a prize, and hold them, which will be described later. The pre-confirmation process and the hold command setting process, which are the processes for executing the advance notice, etc., are executed, and this information acquisition process is terminated. The hold command includes information on which of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is based on the winning.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S307 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S401 to S407 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S409 and S410 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, the output data such as the timer interrupt process or the command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device and the hall computer on the sub side.

Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242. Further, if various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, and other production commands, a hold command, and a shift command described later are set, they are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140. ..

Further, although the details will be described later, for example, every time the display units D1 and D2 for the operation port of the main display unit D finish the variable display of the design, an external signal indicating that the design is confirmed is output to the hall computer, and the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The inside outputs an external signal indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress to the hall computer, and outputs an external signal indicating that the high frequency support mode is in the high frequency support mode to the hall computer.

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S403, a game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game round control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 95, display control of the main display unit 99, and the like are performed.

After executing the game times control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404 to execute the game state transition process. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode), a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode B, and the like. The details of the game times control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the following step S405, a through gate control process including a support lottery process based on winning a prize in the through gate 84 is executed, and in step S406, an electric motor for driving and controlling the electric accessory 93 attached to the second operating port 92 is executed. Executes role support processing. Details of the through-gate process in step S405 and the electric service support process in step S406 will be described later.

After that, in step S407, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is once in a predetermined interval period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply / launch control device 243. To excite. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S408, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not one cycle (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

Since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S407 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

(Game times control processing)
Next, the game times control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 27.

In the game times control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the special game state (opening / closing execution mode) is in progress. When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the game rounds are performed without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game round start processing of steps S503 to S506 and the game round progress processing of steps S507 to S509. End the control process.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in steps S502 and S503 whether or not the game is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 are in the variable display. If the variation is being displayed, a negative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the definite display on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 has been completed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S503, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S504 to S506. In the game round start process, first, in step S504, it is determined whether or not the total number of start hold balls (common hold number CRN) is "0". When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 432. Therefore, the game round control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data setting process for setting the data stored in the hold area RE for the operation port of the hold ball storage area 432 for the variable display is performed in step S505. This is executed, and further, in step S506, the fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display of the operation port display units D1 and D2 in the main display unit 99 and the fluctuation display of the symbol display device 95 is executed, and then the game round control process is executed. To finish.

Here, the data setting process in step S505 and the fluctuation start process in step S506 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, among the operation hold storage numbers N stored in the hold number storage area, the one that is the target of the current setting process and the common hold number CRN are subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE for the operation port (see FIG. 14), that is, the operation hold storage number N is "0". If the operation hold storage number N is "0", the data setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the operation hold storage number N is not "0", the data (hold information) stored in the first area of the operation hold hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the data (holding information) stored in the second area to the eighth area of the holding area RE for the operation port is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. As a result, for example, with the movement of the data in the first area to the execution area AE, the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, the fifth area → the fourth. The data in each area is shifted such as area, 6th area → 5th area, 7th area → 6th area, 8th area → 7th area.

In the following step S604, a shift command is set, which is information for causing the notification / effect control device 140 to recognize that the data in the holding area RE for the operation port has been shifted. After that, this data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). Then, this shift command is also transmitted to the display control device 410 via the notification / effect control device 140.

(Variation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the fluctuation start processing, first, in step S701, the game count counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 are updated. The game count counter is cleared to 0 with the transition to the special game state, and "1" is added each time the update process of step S701 is executed. In the MPU 402, it is possible to specify the game times executed after the end of the special game state by referring to the value of the game number counter.

In the following step S702, the winning / failing determination process based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 is executed. This hit / fail determination process is a process for determining whether or not the pending information referred to in the current fluctuation start process corresponds to the jackpot winning. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for jackpot determination, that is, the information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the above-mentioned grasped information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot by referring to the winning / failing table for the low probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 421 of the ROM 403. If the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the above-mentioned grasped information becomes a big hit by referring to the winning / failing table for the high-probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 421 of the ROM 403. Identify if it is included in the corresponding information.

In the following step S703, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination process in step S702 is the result corresponding to the jackpot. If the result corresponds to a big hit, the big hit type determination process is executed in step S704.

In this type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for type determination, that is, the information acquired from the type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table for jackpots stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of ROM 403, which of the 6R normal jackpot result and the 6R probability variation jackpot result corresponds to the above-mentioned information for type determination grasped. To identify.

If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, an affirmative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S706, and the stop result setting process for the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed in the step S706. If it is a 6R normal jackpot, a negative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S707, and the stop result setting process for the 6R normal jackpot is executed in the step S707.

Returning to the description of step S703, if a negative determination is made in step S703, that is, if it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S708. If the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal range described above, a negative determination is made in step S708 and the process proceeds to step S713. In step S713, the stop result setting process for normal deviation is executed. If the result of the lottery this time is the above-mentioned special deviation, an affirmative determination is made in step S708, the process proceeds to step S709, and the special deviation type determination process is executed.

In this type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for type determination, that is, the information acquired from the type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table for special deviation stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of the ROM 403, the information for type determination grasped above corresponds to either the special deviation result A or the special deviation result B. Identify.

If the special deviation result A is obtained, an affirmative determination is made in step S710, the process proceeds to step S711, and the stop result setting process for the special deviation A is executed in the step S711. If the result is a special deviation result B, a negative determination is made in step S710, the process proceeds to step S712, and the stop result setting process for the special deviation B is executed in the step S712.

In each stop result setting process of steps S706, S707, S711 to S713, the stop result table in which the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403 stores information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the main display unit 99. Is specified by reference to, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 404.

In step S706 and step S707, information for specifying in the MPU 402 that the hit / fail determination result of this game round is a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 6R normal jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S706, the 6R probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S707, the 6R normal jackpot flag is stored.

Further, in steps S711 and S712, information for specifying in the MPU 402 that the hit / fail determination result of the current game round is the special deviation result A or the special deviation result B is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. do. Specifically, in step S711, the special out-of-order A flag is stored, and in step S712, the special out-of-order B flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes of steps S706, S707, and S711 to S713, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S714. In the variation display time setting process, the variation display time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time is acquired by referring to the variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. After that, the acquired fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter (variation display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

After executing the variation display time setting process in step S714, the process proceeds to step S715 to set the variation start command and the type command. The fluctuation start command includes information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the 6R probability variation jackpot result, information on the 6R normal jackpot result, information on the special deviation result A, information on the special deviation result B, and the like as information on the game result. In step S713, the presence or absence of reaching the ceiling is specified by referring to the value of the game count counter, and this information is also included in the fluctuation start command.

The fluctuation start command and the type command set in step S715 are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the output pattern of the sound (BGM and sound effect) from the speaker unit 29 in the game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command. The lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 are controlled so that the determined content of the effect is executed. Further, the notification / effect control device 140 determines the details of the game effect such as the pattern variation display pattern on the symbol display device 95 in the game times based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and determines them. Information is added to the fluctuation start command and the type command and transmitted to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 displays the symbol display device 95 so that the game effect (display effect) is executed in the mode determined by the notification / effect control device 140 based on the received fluctuation start command and type command. Control.

After that, in step S716, the variation display of the pattern is started on one of the corresponding display unit D1 for the first actuation port and the display unit D2 for the second actuation port of the main display unit 99, and then this variation start processing is performed. finish. It is also possible to configure the variable display of the pattern or the like to start before the lottery is executed.

(Variable display time setting process)
Next, an outline of the variable display time setting process (step S714) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold information is acquired based on the ball entering the first actuating port 91 and the second actuating port 92, and the pattern in the game round is based on the acquired hold information. The configuration is such that the variable display to the final display of the symbol are executed. Here, regarding the variable display time of the pattern or the symbol, as a result of the current game state, the result of this winning / failing lottery based on the entry into the operating openings D1 and D2, the holding information stored in the operating opening holding area RE. It is set according to the number and so on. Regarding the variable display time, when comparing the jackpot result and the missed result, the former is more likely to be longer than the latter, and in the case of the missed result and the reach display does not occur. Is configured to become shorter as the number of stored pending information increases.

In the variable display time setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step S702 described above is a big hit or a special loss. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 6R probability variation jackpot flag, the 6R normal jackpot flag, the special outlier A flag, and the special outlier B flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404.

(Variable display time table for normal deviation)
When the lottery result is a normal deviation (complete deviation) that does not correspond to the ceiling arrival (not reached), it is determined whether or not to generate the reach display on the symbol display device 95 in this game round. Specifically, whether to generate the reach display by referring to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 403. Decide whether or not. Then, the variable display time table corresponding to the complete deviation from the various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referred to, and the current game state and the holding area RE for the operating port are stored. Set the variable display time according to the number of pending information and the presence or absence of reach.

FIG. 27 (a1) exemplifies the variation display time in the case of complete deviation in the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", either "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information When the number is "2", any of "7, 8, 9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored pending information is "3" to "8", it is set. Any of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the first normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

FIG. 27 (a2) illustrates the variation display time in the case of complete deviation in the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", either "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information When the number is "2", any of "7, 8, 9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored pending information is "3" to "8", it is set. Any of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the fourth normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec". That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the fourth normal gaming state is the same as the setting mode of the variable display time in the first normal gaming state.

FIG. 27 (a3) exemplifies the variable display time in the case of a complete deviation in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", any of "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored pending information is "1". If it is "8", one of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the second normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

FIG. 27 (a4) exemplifies the variable display time in the case of a complete deviation in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", any of "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored pending information is "1". If it is "8", one of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the third normal gaming state is the same as the setting mode of the variable display time in the second normal gaming state. In the third normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

By the way, in any of the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state, in the game times in which the reach display (out-of-reach) corresponding to the out-of-order result occurs, the variable display time is irrespective of the number of stored information. Is set to any of "20 to 30 sec". This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result (see FIG. 28), and in the case of the jackpot result, a relatively long time in the range. If it is easy to set and the result is off, it is easy to set a relatively short time in the range. That is, the difference is provided so that the reach display having a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach display having a short variable display time.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in the present embodiment, when the game progresses without becoming a big hit and the number of games in the normal game state reaches a preset upper limit (hereinafter, also referred to as a ceiling). The support mode may be forcibly switched to the high frequency support mode A when the ceiling is reached. In the game times that reach the ceiling, a variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 sec) corresponding to the reach display is set as in the case of a big hit, a game time that is a special deviation, and the like.

The game is not limited to this, and it is possible to set a variable display time that does not correspond to the reach display in the game times when the game reaches the ceiling. For example, the setting mode of the variable display time may be unified between the game times in which the ceiling is reached and the game times in which the ceiling is not reached regardless of whether or not the ceiling is reached.

Incidentally, the "complete deviation" shown in the following explanation is a general term for game results that do not correspond to any of a jackpot, a special deviation, and a normal deviation that does not correspond to reaching the ceiling.

(Variable display time table for big hits)
When the lottery result is a big hit (6R probability variable big hit or 6R normal big hit), refer to the variable display time table corresponding to the big hit from various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403. , The variable display time is set regardless of the current game state and the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE for the operating port.

In FIG. 28, the variation display time in the case of complete deviation in the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state is illustrated. Regardless of the number of stored information on hold being "0" to "8", "20 to 30 sec" is set as the variable display time. The range of this variable display time is the same as that in the case where the above-mentioned deviation reach occurs, and it is easy to set a relatively long time in the range as compared with a relatively short time. In the first normal game state, the third normal game state, and the fourth normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are "1 sec". In the second normal gaming state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are "0.5 sec".

(Variable display time table for special deviation)
If the lottery result is a special deviation (special deviation A or special deviation B), the variation display time table corresponding to the special deviation is selected from the various variation display time tables stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. Refer to it to set the variable display time.

FIG. 29 (c1) shows the variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Regardless of whether the number of stored information on hold is "0" to "8", any of "20 to 30 sec" is set as the variable display time. The range of this variable display time is the same as that in the case where the above-mentioned deviation reach occurs, and it is easy to set a relatively long time in the range as compared with a relatively short time. In the first normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

FIG. 29 (c2) shows a variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. Regardless of whether the number of stored information on hold is "0" to "8", any of "20 to 30 sec" is set as the variable display time. The range of this variable display time is the same as that in the case where the above-mentioned deviation reach occurs, and it is easy to set a relatively long time in the range as compared with a relatively short time. In the first normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

FIG. 29 (c3) shows a variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. Even if the number of stored information on hold is any of "0" to "8", any of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. The range of this variable display time is the same as the above-mentioned case of complete deviation, and it is difficult to distinguish the special deviation from the variable display time. In the second normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

FIG. 29 (c4) shows a variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. Even if the number of stored information on hold is any of "0" to "8", any of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. The range of this variable display time is the same as the above-mentioned case of complete deviation, and it is difficult to distinguish the special deviation from the variable display time. In the third normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in the present embodiment, when the game progresses without becoming a big hit and the number of games in the normal game state reaches a preset upper limit (ceiling), the ceiling is concerned. Upon arrival, the support mode may be forcibly switched to the high frequency support mode A. Although reaching the ceiling does not occur during the high-frequency support mode B, it occurs in the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode and the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode A. Can be. In the game times in which the ceiling is reached in the first normal game state or the fourth normal game state, the variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 sec) similar to the reach display or the like is set as the variable display time. That is, the reach display is executed in the game times when the player reaches the ceiling.

Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 24), if the operating port display units D1 and D2 are in the variable display or the definite display in the main display unit 99, the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (variation display time information) of the fluctuation display time counter of the RAM 404 becomes “0”. The value is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S508. In the variable display process, the display mode of one of the actuation port display units D1 and D2 is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated. If the variable display time has elapsed, the final display process is executed in step S509, and then the game round control process is terminated. The details of this confirmation display process will be described later.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode (during the special game state) is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the game round of 1 is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the preset fixed display time (stop display time) has elapsed since the variation display is completed on any of the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit D. judge. If it is not the timing when the game round is finished, the main game state transition process is finished as it is.

If it is the timing when the game round is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step S802, and the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is determined whether or not the game result (result of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery) of this game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode (special game state). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 6R probability variation jackpot flag and the 6R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If any of the above flags is stored, the opening / closing execution mode start processing is executed in step S804. By the start processing, the operation restriction of the variable winning device 83 by the lock device is released, and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 83 is allowed until the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, in the start processing of step S804, the open / close execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and the waiting time for opening in the open / close execution mode is set. In step S801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress depending on the presence / absence of the open / close execution mode flag.

In the following step S805, "6" is set in the round counter RC1 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The round counter RC1 functions as a means for grasping the number of times the variable winning device 83 is opened. After executing the process of step S805, the process proceeds to step S806 to erase the high frequency support mode flags A and B stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the support mode in the open / close execution mode is forcibly switched to the low frequency support mode. After that, the opening command setting process is executed in step S807, the external signal setting process is executed in step S808, and then the game state transition process is terminated.

The opening command set in step S807 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 95, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. In the display control device 410, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / effect control device 140, the display corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode this time, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 95 is executed so that the moving image of the character or the like and the background image can be switched.

Further, the external signal set in step S808 is also transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23), and the hall computer is in the open / close execution mode based on this external signal. It becomes possible to identify that.

Returning to the description of step S801, if it is determined in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S810. Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 31.

(Opening and closing of the winning opening)
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening) is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit for the variable ball entry device of the variable winning device 83. If the big winning opening is not open, it is determined in step S902 whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If an affirmative decision is made in step S902, the opening / closing process of the winning opening of the main prize is terminated as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". The timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time or the interval time of the big winning opening, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is executed. .. If a negative determination is made in step S903, the process of opening and closing the winning opening of the main prize is terminated.

If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S904 to execute the opening process of the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening). Specifically, the drive unit for the variable ball entry device is set to the drive state in order to open the large winning opening.

After that, the processes of steps S905 and S906 are executed as the closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening). Specifically, "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1 in step S905, and "10" is set in the first winning counter PC1 in the subsequent step S906.

After executing the process of step S906, an open command indicating that the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening) has been opened is set in step S907, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (see FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the release based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S901, if it is determined in step S901 that the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening) is open, the process proceeds to step S908, and whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0" is determined. judge. If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S909, and whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening is determined based on the detection signal from the detection sensor provided in the variable winning device 83. do.

If a prize has been won, the output process of the prize command is executed in step S910. The winning command is output to the notification / effect control device 140, and the effect in the open / close execution mode executed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, for example, is changed by the winning command.

After executing the command output processing in step S910, the process proceeds to step S911. In step S911, the value of the first winning counter PC1 is subtracted by 1, and in the following step S912, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning counter PC1 is "0". The opening / closing process is completed.

When the affirmative judgment is made in step S912, that is, when the value of the first winning counter PC1 is "0", or when the affirmative judgment is made in step S908 (that is, the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0"). If it is determined), it means that the condition for closing the large winning opening is satisfied. In this case, in step S913, the drive unit for the variable ball entry device is put into a non-drive state in order to close the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening).

In the following step S914, the round counter RC1 is updated. Specifically, when the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the value of the round counter RC1 is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the value of the round counter RC1 is set to "0". Keep it as it is.

After that, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round counter RC1 is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S915, the process proceeds to step S916, and "1000" (corresponding to 2.0 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1.

After executing the process of step S916, the closing command is set in step S917, and the process of opening and closing the winning opening of the main prize is completed. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the closed command based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S915, if it is determined in step S915 that the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S918. In step S918, the ending process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 403 is set in the waiting time counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

Then, in step S919, after setting the ending command, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23).

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 30), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S810, the process proceeds to step S811 to determine whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is “0”. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S813, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

(Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode)
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode this time is triggered by the 6R probability variation jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the process proceeds to step S1002, and the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the winning / losing table for the high-probability mode will be referred to in the winning / losing lottery in the subsequent game rounds.

After that, the high frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode B flag set in this way, the D support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode B is referred to in the support lottery in the subsequent electric service support processing, and the display unit DS for the through gate is used. The variable display time table for the high frequency support mode B is referred to as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the pattern in.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, when the jackpot that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 6R normal jackpot, the number-of-counts limit flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 (step S1004), and various types of the RAM 404 are set. "40" is set in the continuation number counter provided in the counter area 434. After that, the process proceeds to step S1003, and the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404.

The value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1" each time the game round is executed, and when the value of the continuation count counter becomes "0", the high frequency support mode B ends. That is, the upper limit (the above-mentioned end reference number of times), which is the number of games that can be executed during the high frequency support mode B, is defined by the value of the continuation number counter.

After executing the process of step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1006, and the value of the game count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is cleared (reset) to 0. After that, in step S1007, various flags (big hit flag, etc.) for the open / close execution mode stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is stopped.

Next, the through-gate control process in step S405 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 33 and 34.

(Control processing for through gate)
In the through gate control process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 93 is supporting. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. The support flag is a flag that is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 at the start of support by the electric accessory 93 and is erased from the various flag storage areas 435 at the end of support.

If the support flag is stored, the control process for this through gate is terminated as it is. If the support flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S1101 and the process proceeds to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether or not the variable display or the definite display of the pattern is being performed on the through-gate display unit DS in the main display unit D. If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is held up to four times, that is, the holding information (electrical hold) based on the winning of the through gate 84 is the maximum. Up to four are stored in the electric service holding area 433. In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the bonus storage number SN is "0". If the number of stored items SN is "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, and the control process for the through gate is terminated. If the number of stored items SN is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S1103 and the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the electric service holding area 433 for variable display is executed.

In this data setting process, the accessory hold storage number SN is subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information stored in the electric service holding area 433 is "0". If the number of stored items SN is "0", the data setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the character hold storage number SN is not "0", the data (hold information) stored in the first area of the electric service hold area 433 is moved to the execution area. Then, the data (reserved information) stored in the second area to the fourth area of the electric service holding area 433 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. As a result, for example, with the movement of the data in the first area to the execution area, the data in each area such as the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. Is shifted.

After the data setting process is executed in step S1104, the pattern variation start process in the through-gate display unit DS is executed in step S1105, and then the through-gate control process is terminated. Here, the fluctuation start processing in step S1105 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

(Variation start processing)
In the fluctuation start processing, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode B. If the current support mode is either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode A, a negative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, the support lottery process (low probability support lottery process) is executed with reference to the support lottery table (see FIGS. 18A and 18B) corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode A. If the current support mode is the high frequency support mode B, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, the support lottery process (high probability support lottery process) is executed with reference to the support lottery table (see FIG. 18C) corresponding to the high frequency support mode B.

If a support is won in the support lottery process of steps S1202 and S1203, an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205, and the stop result setting process for the support win is executed. If the support is not won in the support lottery process of steps S1202 and S1203, a negative determination is made in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1206, and the stop result setting process for the support non-winning is executed.

After executing the stop result setting process of steps S1205 and S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207 to set the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS.
The variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 stores a variable display time table for the low frequency support mode and a variable display time table for the high frequency support mode, respectively. If the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, set the variable display time of the pattern by referring to the variable display time table for the low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the variable display time set with reference to the variable display time table for the low frequency support mode is specified to be "10 to 20 sec" (see FIG. 35). On the other hand, when the current support modes are the high frequency support modes A and B, the variable display time of the pattern is set with reference to the variable display time table for the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the variable display time set with reference to the variable display time table for the high frequency support mode is specified to be "0.5 sec" (see FIG. 35). That is, in the high-frequency support modes A and B, the variation display time of the pattern in the through-gate display unit DS is significantly shortened as compared with the low-frequency support mode.

In any of the support modes, the fixed display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is unified to "0.5 sec".

After executing the setting process of step S1207, the variation display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is started in step S1208, and the control process for the through gate is terminated.

(Processing for electric service support)
Next, the electric service support process of step S406, which is executed as a part of the normal process, will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 36 and 37.

In the electric service support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the electric service is being supported by the electric accessory 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If it is not being supported, a negative determination is made in step S1301 and the process proceeds to step S1302. In step S1302, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the final display of the pattern is completed on the through gate display unit DS. If it is not the timing when the final display of the pattern is completed, the process for supporting the main electric service is terminated by denying it in step S1302. When the confirmation display of the pattern is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302 and the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the support is won in the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84. If the support is not won, a negative determination is made in step S1303, and the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If the support is won in the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84, a positive determination is made in step S1303 and the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support modes A and B. If there is a low frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1305, and "1" is set in the round counter RC2 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The round counter RC2 functions as a means for grasping the number of times the electric accessory 93 is opened. If the high frequency support modes A and B are set, the process proceeds to step S1306, and "2" is set in the round counter RC2.

After executing the processes of steps S1305 and S1306, the process proceeds to step S1307, and the support flags are set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. After that, the opening start process is executed in step S1308, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. In the opening start process, the waiting time for the opening is set. After the waiting time has elapsed, the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 93 is started.

Returning to the description of step S1301, if an affirmative determination is made in the step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1309. In step S1309, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening set in step S1308 has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, a negative determination is made in step S1309, and the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, an affirmative determination is made in step S1309 and the process proceeds to step S1310. Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the electric service opening / closing process in step S1310 will be described.

(Electrical function opening / closing process)
In the electric function opening / closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 93 is open (open state). Whether or not the electric accessory 93 is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit is in the driving state. If the electric accessory 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1402, and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC2 is “0”. When the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is “0”. The timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time and the interval time of the electric accessory 93, and the value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is executed. To. If a negative determination is made in step S1403, the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the electric service release process is executed. Specifically, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit (solenoid) is started, and the electric accessory 93 is switched from the closed state to the open state. After that, in step S1405, "10" is set in the second winning counter PC2. In the following step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support modes A and B. Set the timer counter TC2 to "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec) in the high frequency support modes A and B (step S1407), and set the timer counter TC2 to "50" (0) in the low frequency support mode. . Equivalent to 1 sec) is set.

Returning to the description of step S1401, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if the electric accessory 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1409. In step S1409, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1410. In step S1410, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 92 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor for the second operating port 92. If no prize has been won, the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If a prize has been won, the value of the second prize counter PC2 is subtracted by 1 in step S1411, and in the subsequent step S1412, it is determined whether or not the value of the second prize counter PC2 is "0". If it is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

When the affirmative judgment is made in step S1412, that is, when the value of the second winning counter PC2 is "0", or when the affirmative judgment is made in step S1409 (that is, the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0"). If it is determined), it means that the opening end condition of the electric accessory 93 is satisfied. In this case, in step S1413, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit is stopped in order to close the electric accessory 93 (second operating port 92).

In the following step S1414, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, when the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the value of the round counter RC2 is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the value of the round counter RC2 is set to "0". Keep it as it is.

After that, in step S1415, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round counter RC2 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1415, the process proceeds to step S1416, and "100" (corresponding to 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2.
If it is determined in step S1415 that the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, the ending process is executed. In the start process, the waiting time for the ending of the electric service support is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 403 is set in the waiting time counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

Returning to the description of FIG. 36, after executing the electric service opening / closing process in step S1310, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC2 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1311, the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1311, the process proceeds to step S1312, and it is determined whether or not the ending waiting time set in step S1417 has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S1312, the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, the process proceeds to step S1313. In step S1313, the support flags stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the main electric service support process is terminated. As a result, the regulation of the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84 will be lifted.

As described in detail above, the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is configured to switch from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode mainly via the special gaming state, but when the above special deviation occurs or the ceiling is reached. In the case of, the low frequency support mode may be switched to the high frequency support mode without going through the special game state. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 38 and 39, a configuration for switching the support mode, specifically, a final display process (step S509) of the game turn control process (FIG. 24) executed as a part of the normal process. ) Will be supplementarily explained.

(Process for confirmation display)
As shown in FIG. 38, in the confirmation display processing, first, it is determined in step S1501 whether or not the confirmation display is being performed by the operation port display units D1 and D2. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, the confirmation display time setting process is executed. In the present embodiment, "1 sec" is set as the definite display time in the first normal game state, the third normal game state, and the fourth normal game state, and "0" is set as the definite display time in the second normal game state. .5 sec ”is set.

In the following step S1503, the confirmation display start process is executed. In the start process, the display control of the actuating port display units D1 and D2 is performed in order to stop the pattern determined in each process of steps S706, S707, S711 to S713. After that, the variable end command is set in step S1504 to end the final confirmation display process. The variation end command is output to the notification / effect control device 140 or the like in step S401 of the normal process, and the notification / effect control device 140 is being executed by the symbol display device 95 or the like based on the reception of the variation end command. Ends the variable display of the symbol of (shifts to the final display).

Returning to the description of step S1501, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the final display time of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2 has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S1505, the final confirmation display process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the support mode switching process is executed in step S1506 to end the final confirmation display process. Here, the process for switching the support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

(Process for switching support mode)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the number of times limit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S1602, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, the continuation number counter of various counter areas 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S1604, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1604, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1605, and the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically, the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number-of-times limit flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 are cleared. This switching process ends. By clearing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S1601, if a negative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, the process proceeds to step S1607. In step S1607, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S1607, the process proceeds to step S1608. In step S1608, the continuation count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S1609, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1609, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared in step S1605, and the switching process is terminated. That is, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S1606, if a negative determination is made in step S1606, that is, if the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1610. In step S1610, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special deviation. If it does not correspond to the special deviation, a negative determination is made in step S1611, and the switching process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1611 (when corresponding to a special deviation) or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1610 (when the ceiling is reached), the process proceeds to step S1612. In step S1612, the high frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in the following step S1613, the number-of-times limit flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. After that, the process proceeds to step S1614, the continuation count counter setting process is executed, and then the switching process is terminated.

In the continuation count counter setting process, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit (when the ceiling is reached) in the current game round, "400" is set in the continuation count counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A will continue until the high-frequency support mode A becomes a big hit or the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 400 times. If the result of this game is a special deviation A, "20" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A will continue until the high-frequency support mode A becomes a big hit or the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 20 times. If the result of this game is a special deviation B, "40" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A will continue until the high-frequency support mode A becomes a big hit or the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 40 times.

Returning to the explanation of step S1607, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit (when the ceiling is reached) during the high frequency support mode A, "400" is set (overwritten) in the continuation count counter in step S1614. ), And the process for switching is completed. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A is extended so that the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A becomes 400. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special deviation, the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode A is continued is reset (overwritten), and other normal game states, etc. are changed. The upper limit of the 4th normal gaming state will be raised without going through.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 40, the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 will be supplementarily described.

The MPU 442 is mounted on the notification / effect control board 441 provided in the notification / effect control device 140. The MPU 442 is a ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 443 is executed. A certain RAM 444 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 443 and the RAM 444 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 442, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of other control devices.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and receives game times control commands (game times control information) such as the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command from the main control device 162. .. In addition, it receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

Lamp units 26 to 28, speaker units 29, and display control device 410 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 442. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification / effect control device 140 are transmitted (transferred) to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information form.

The display control device 410 is a display control board 471 on which an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477, respectively, are mounted. It is equipped with. It is not essential that the program ROM 473 and the work RAM 474 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 472, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification / effect control device 140, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically). Is to generate an internal command for VDP475). More specifically, the MPU 472 executes a process of specifying the variation display pattern of each game in the symbol display device 95 based on the command transmitted from the notification / effect control device 140, and also performs a process related to a hold notice or the like. It is executed, and the drawing process for VDP475 is executed according to the process result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 472 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 472. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 474.

The VDP475 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built in the symbol display device 95. Since the VDP475 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 475 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 472, the video RAM 477, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 477 from the character ROM 476 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 95.

The character ROM 476 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 95. The character ROM 476 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 476 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 476. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 473 in the character ROM 476.

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 95, and the display content of the symbol display device 95 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 477.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the outline of the variation display mode of the symbol on the display screen 95a is specified by the notification / effect control device 140 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and based on the specific result. The details of the variable display mode are determined by the display control device 410. Specifically, in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, the variation display control process is executed as a part of the periodic process started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the variation display of the symbol is displayed by this variation display control process. The outline of the aspect and the like are specified. Here, the variation display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41.

(Variable display control processing)
In the variation display control process, when the gaming state is the first normal gaming state, an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, and the first variation display control process for the first normal gaming state is executed in step S1702. When the gaming state is the second normal gaming state, a negative determination is made in step S1701 and an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, and the second variation display control process for the second normal gaming state is executed in step S1704. When the gaming state is the third normal gaming state, a negative determination is made in steps S1701 and S1703, and the third variation display control process for the third normal gaming state is executed in step S1705. When the gaming state is the fourth normal gaming state, a negative determination is made in steps S1701 and S1703, a positive determination is made in step S1707, and a fourth variation display for the fourth normal gaming state is made in step S1708. Execute control processing.

(1st variable display control process)
Here, the first variation display control process executed in the first normal gaming state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

In the first variation display control process, first, whether or not one game is being executed in step S1801, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 95 is executing the variation display or the definite display of the symbol for one game. Is determined. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 is received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1802, the variation display control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, the variation display control process ends after the first variation start process described later is executed in step S1803.

Returning to the description of step S1801, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the variation end command transmitted from the main control device 162 is received. If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the variable display control process is terminated after the variable intermediate process is executed in step S1805. The variable middle processing is a process of executing various effects and changing the determined effects in the game times started by the variable start process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1806 to execute the variation end process, and then the variation display control process ends. In the variable end processing, the variable display of the symbol and the effect being executed are terminated (fixed and stopped) so as to correspond to the pending information related to the game times. In such a process, the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to produce an effect corresponding to the fixed stop. Then, after outputting the confirmation command to the display control device 410, the process for ending the variation is terminated. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the symbol display device 95 to confirm and stop the symbol based on the received confirmation command.

(Process for starting the first fluctuation)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43, the first variation start processing in step S1803 will be supplementarily described. The first variation start process is a process for starting the effect for game rounds based on the reception of the variation start command from the main control device 162. In the first variation start process, the reach display and the like are set as the effect for the game round.

In the first fluctuation start processing, first, the fluctuation start command received this time in step S1901 is read, and the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control device 162, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1601, the type command received together with the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and from the command, information on the probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the special deviation result, information on the normal deviation result, and reaching the ceiling. Identify various information related to the game result, such as the information of. Then, in step S1901, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not there is a big hit, information on the type of big hit if it is a big hit, information on whether or not there is a special loss, and if it is a special loss, the type of special loss. Information, information on whether or not reach has occurred, information on whether or not the ceiling has been reached, information on fluctuation display time, etc. are grasped when the jackpot is not won and the special is not out of order, and the grasped information is stored in the register of MPU442.

In the following step S1902, based on the information grasped in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is the game result corresponding to the jackpot result. If the game result this time is a jackpot result (6R probability variation jackpot result or 6R normal jackpot result), the effect setting process for the jackpot is executed in the following step S1903. The effect setting process for the jackpot includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for the jackpot to be stopped and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation display mode determination for determining the variation display mode of the symbol for the jackpot. It is roughly divided into processing (effect pattern determination processing).

In the stop result determination process for the jackpot, the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination, "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination, "3" symbol, "3" symbol , "3" symbol combination, "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination, "5" symbol, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination, "6" symbol, "6" Symbol, "6" symbol combination, "7" symbol, "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination, "8" symbol, "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination, "9" symbol, "9" symbol The combination of the symbols and the symbols "9" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot (see, for example, FIG. 45 (a)).

As already explained, when a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for big hits, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game result in the type command are obtained. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the above is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, it is determined whether or not the ceiling is reached in this game round. When the ceiling is reached, an affirmative judgment is made in step S1904, and the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed. The effect setting process for reaching the ceiling includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for reaching the ceiling to be stopped and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation for determining the variation display mode of the symbol for reaching the ceiling. It is roughly classified into a display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process).

In the stop result determination process for reaching the ceiling, the stop result in which the combination of the symbols for reaching the ceiling is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling (see FIG. 45 (b)).

When it reaches the ceiling, the result is notified via the reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for reaching the ceiling, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the game in the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a big hit is made in a game round that reaches the ceiling, the big hit is given priority. That is, the symbol combination and the variation display mode that are stopped and displayed in the game round are set by the setting process of step S1903.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special deviation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, the effect setting process for special deviation is executed. The effect setting process for special deviation includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for special deviation to be stopped and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation for determining the variation display mode of the symbol for special deviation. It is roughly classified into a display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process).

In the stop result determination process for special deviation, the stop result in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special deviation is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation as in the case of reaching the ceiling (see FIG. 45 (b)). ).

In the case of a special deviation, the result is notified via the reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for special deviation, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game in the type command. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1908 to execute the effect setting process for complete disengagement. In the effect setting process for complete off, it is grasped whether or not reach occurs in this game round. When reach occurs, the effect setting process for generating reach is executed, and when reach does not occur, the effect setting process for non-reach is executed.

The effect setting process for the reach generation includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for the reach-compatible complete disconnection to be stopped and displayed and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation display mode of the symbol for the reach-compatible complete disconnection. It is roughly classified into a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) for determining.

In the stop result determination process for reach-corresponding complete deviation, the stop symbol is determined so as not to be any of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the variation display mode determination process for reach correspondence complete deviation, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time are acquired. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the game result in is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

The effect setting process for non-reach generation includes the stop result determination process for determining the stop display of the symbol combination for non-reach complete off and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the symbol for non-reach complete off. It is roughly classified into a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) for determining a variable display mode.

In the stop result determination process for non-reach complete disconnection, the stop symbol is determined so that it does not become any of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival. .. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the variation display mode determination process for non-reach complete deviation, the variation display pattern table for non-reach correspondence storage stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time is acquired. And the effect pattern corresponding to the game result in the type command is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

After executing any of the processes of steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908, the process proceeds to step S1909. In step S1909, a process of outputting commands including stop result and effect pattern information determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908 to the display control device 410 as stop result commands and pattern commands is executed. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 in order to execute the effect in the current game round, based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process of step S1909, in the following step S1910, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game round, the process for starting the variation is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the effect pattern determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908, and the effect for game rotation is started.

Here, the display mode of the symbol displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 will be supplementarily described based on the schematic diagram of FIG. 44.

(Display mode)
The variable display mode of the symbol executed in the variable display area ME of the display screen 95a is roughly classified into five types: non-reach compatible, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. .. These variable display modes are set so that the variable display time is different, and it is possible to grasp the outline of the variable display mode for each game based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162. It has become.

Specifically, the variable display time that is not compatible with reach is "1 sec to 14 sec" (difference is set according to the game state, the number of holds, etc.), and the variable display time of normal reach A is "20 sec". The variable display time of normal reach B is "25 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of normal reach A, and the variable display time of super reach A to C is "30 sec", which is longer than the variable display time of normal reach A and B. .. For example, when the information regarding the fluctuation display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "20 sec", it is understood that the normal reach A should be executed by the notification / effect control device 140, and the main control device When the information regarding the fluctuation display time given to the command from 162 is "25 sec", it is understood that the normal reach B should be executed by the notification / effect control device 140. On the other hand, when the information regarding the fluctuation display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "30 sec", the determination as to which of Super Reach A to C is executed is notification / effect control. It will be entrusted to the device 140.

In this decision, it is easier to select Super Reach C> Super Reach B> Super Reach A in the game times corresponding to the jackpot, and Super Reach A> Super in the game times corresponding to the complete deviation. It is easy to select in the order of reach B> super reach C. In other words, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, it is easier to select in the order of Super Reach C> Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach B> Normal Reach A. ＞ Normal Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ Super Reach A ＞ Super Reach B ＞ Super Reach C. That is, the winning expectation of the jackpot is set to increase as the variable display time becomes longer, and the expectation is set to increase in the order of Super Reach A <Super Reach B <Super Reach C. ing.

In addition, it is easier to select Super Reach C> Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach B> Normal Reach A for the game times that correspond to special deviations, and in the game times that reach the ceiling, it is super The selection rate is evenly divided so that reach C = super reach B = super reach A.

Here, the variation display mode of the normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (a). When normal reach A and B are selected, first, the variable display (scroll display) of all the stopped and displayed symbol rows is started, and then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row (upper symbol row Z1) is started. Is terminated (stopped display), and the variation display of the symbol is terminated (stopped display) in the lower symbol row (lower symbol row Z3). In this way, in the state where the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same number attached to any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 13A) are stopped and displayed. A reach line is formed at. Then, in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the middle symbol row (middle symbol row Z2) is performed, so that the reach display (reach variation display) is obtained. After the reach display is displayed, the variable display ends by stopping and displaying the middle symbol column Z2. Then, when the same symbol as the symbol constituting the reach display stops on the reach line, it is notified that the jackpot has been won, and when the other symbols stop on the reach line, the jackpot is won. You will be notified that you have not done so. In this way, the combination of the symbols displayed as the final stop is maintained as it is for a predetermined period. That is, the current game round continues until the stop display period elapses, and the transition to the next game round is permitted after the stop display period elapses.

In the present embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is secured by setting the difference in the variable display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed. How to set the difference between is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to secure the difference in the variation display time by setting the difference in the time from the start of the variation display to the formation of the reach line.

Next, the variable display modes of the super reach A, B, and C will be described based on the variable display modes of the normal reach A and B described above. As shown in FIGS. 44 (b) to 44 (c), the above-mentioned reach lines are formed for the super reach A, B, and C through the same process as the normal reach A, B. Then, after forming the reach line, the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image in addition to the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in Super Reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol row Z2, and in Super Reach B. After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in Super Reach C, after the reach line is formed, A character imitating a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol sequence Z2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the flow of the game in the case of shifting to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A will be described when the special deviation or the arrival at the ceiling is triggered. FIG. 46 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game in the case of shifting to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation.

At the timing of ta1 during the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the variation display of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port and the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 based on the winning of the operation port. Has started. Since this game round corresponds to a special deviation, the variation display mode of the symbol shifts to the reach display at the timing of ta2 when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the symbol and the symbol. After that, at the timing of ta3, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) prior to the confirmed display of the pattern on the operation port display unit. Immediately after the timing of ta4, the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 goes dark, and at the timing of ta5, the symbol corresponding to the special deviation is stopped and displayed on the display unit for the actuation port, and high frequency support is provided on the display screen 95a. A message indicating the transition to mode A (for example, the characters "entering the chance zone") is displayed.

At the timing of ta6 when the fixed display time has elapsed from the timing of ta5, the support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode A, and the background of the display screen 95a is switched to the background corresponding to the high frequency support mode A at the same time. Further, in the corner of the display screen 95a, the number of remaining games for which the high frequency support mode A is continued is displayed.

As described above, the notification is overlooked by displaying the design combination corresponding to the special deviation prior to the final display of the design on the operation port display unit and gaining the notification time indicating the transition to the high frequency support mode A. It suppresses the problem.

The flow of the game when the transition to the high frequency support mode A reaches the ceiling is basically the same as the flow of the game when the transition is triggered by the special deviation. However, unlike the case of the special deviation, the display of the remaining number of games on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is omitted during the game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, which is shifted when the ceiling is reached.

(Outline of the game)
Next, the outline of the game of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state, and FIG. 48 is a timing chart illustrating changes in the holding ball with the progress of the game.

As described above, the first normal gaming state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player, and the first normal gaming state is the first. It is intended to generate a prize in the operating port 91 and shift to another gaming state such as a special gaming state. As described above, the game board 80a shown in the present embodiment is a so-called symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), and the first operation is performed regardless of the direction in which the game ball is fired on the right route or the left route. A prize may occur in the mouth 91. Further, a through gate 84 is arranged on each of the right route and the left route, and a part of the game ball launched aiming at the first operating port 91 can win a prize in the through gate 84. However, the opening time of the electric accessory 93 when the support is won by the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84 during the low frequency support mode is extremely short, and the second operating port 92 is won. Is virtually impossible. That is, during the first normal game state, the benefit of the electric accessory 93 cannot be received, and the number of balls held increases as the game progresses (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIG. 47, when a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved in the first normal gaming state, the game shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special gaming state.

In the second normal gaming state, the electric accessory 93 is frequently opened, and the opening time is defined so that the winning of the second operating port 92 is substantially allowed. Therefore, in addition to the winning of the first operating port 91, the winning of the second operating port 92 occurs, and a predetermined number (four in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the second operating port 92. The prize ball will be given to the player. As a result, during the second normal game state, the decrease in the number of balls held due to the progress of the game is alleviated as compared with the first normal game state, and the game can be advanced while suppressing the investment (decrease in the number of balls held). Further, since the second normal game state is continued until the next big hit, the number of balls held can be greatly increased by continuously shifting to the special game state. If the 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved in the second normal game state, the game returns to the second normal game state through the special game state. By looping the second normal gaming state and the special gaming state in this way, the number of balls held is greatly increased (see FIG. 48).

When a 6R normal jackpot is achieved in the first normal game state or the second normal game state, the game shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special game state.

In the third normal gaming state, the electric accessory 93 is frequently opened, and the opening time is defined so that the winning of the second operating port 92 is substantially permissible. Therefore, in addition to the winning of the first operating port 91, the winning of the second operating port 92 occurs, and a predetermined number (four in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the second operating port 92. The prize ball will be given to the player. As a result, during the third normal game state, the decrease in the number of balls held is alleviated as in the second normal game state, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing investment (decrease in the number of balls held). However, the end reference number of times (upper limit: 40 times) is set for the high frequency support mode B in the third normal game state. When the number of games executed during the third normal game state reaches the upper limit, the game shifts to the first normal game state.

Here, it is feared that a longer stay in the first normal gaming state leads to monotonicization of the game and causes a decrease in the player's willingness to play. In this respect, in the present embodiment, if a special deviation occurs during the first normal gaming state, the game shifts to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A.

The jackpot probability during the fourth normal gaming state is the same as that of the first normal gaming state, but the frequency of opening the electric accessory 93 is high, and the winning of the second operating port 92 is frequent. As a result, during the 4th normal game state, the decrease in the number of balls held is alleviated as compared with the 1st normal game state, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing investment (decrease in the number of balls held) (see FIG. 48). .. Further, in the fourth normal game state, as in the first normal game state, the variation display time of each game is greatly shortened as the number of pending numbers increases. Therefore, by shifting to the fourth normal gaming state, the progress speed of the game becomes faster as a result of frequent winning of the second operating port 92.

In addition, in the case of a special deviation during the first normal gaming state, the transition to the fourth normal gaming state is performed without going through the special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the time when the player is out of the special position until the player can enjoy the benefits of the high frequency support mode A as much as possible. It is preferable to realize a configuration in which the benefits of the high-frequency support mode can be promptly enjoyed in this way in order to suppress the delay during the transition to the state and emphasize the lightness of the game. In addition, diversifying the transition pattern as a configuration that can migrate to the high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode A, B) via two different routes, via the special gaming state and not via the special gaming state, is to diversify the game. It is also preferable to realize.

Here, in the first normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a big hit is low and the base is also low. Therefore, there is a possibility that the investment will be excessively large in advancing the game. This is not only a factor that deteriorates the impression of the gaming machine, but also a factor that deteriorates the soundness of the gaming machine. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, a ceiling (upper limit of the number of games) is set in the first normal game state, and when the ceiling is reached, a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode A are supported. Shifts to the 4th normal game state of. In the fourth normal gaming state, the winning probability of the jackpot itself is the same as in the first normal gaming state, but the electric accessory 93 is frequently opened, so that the second operating port 92 is frequently won. As a result, the game can be advanced while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held (see FIG. 48).

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If a big hit result is obtained in the lottery based on the entry into the operating ports 91 and 92, the support mode is changed via the special game state, and if a special out-of-order result is obtained, the special game state is passed. The support mode is changed without any notice. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the flow of the game when changing the support mode to a higher-level one, and to contribute to suppressing the monotonicization of the game. Further, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the support mode is switched to a higher-level one, the electric accessory 93 is opened depending on whether the trigger is a big hit result or a special deviation result. The frequency will be different. By providing game assistance by the high frequency support mode A while ensuring the superiority of the support by the high frequency support mode B, diversification of the game can be suitably realized. In particular, for the high frequency support mode B on the disadvantage side, the support mode is quickly switched without going through the special gaming state. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the satisfaction of the player.

If a special deviation result occurs during the first normal gaming state, the game shifts to the fourth normal gaming state without going through the special gaming state. At this time, although the low probability mode is inherited in the lottery mode, the support mode is changed from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A. As a result, it becomes possible to aim for a big hit result while suppressing investment, and a certain kind of player rescue function will be exhibited. When such a relief function is exerted, the special game state is not passed through as described above, so that the time required for the function to be exerted can be shortened as much as possible, so that the game is unnecessarily delayed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to give the impression as if it were.

As shown in this embodiment, when the low frequency support mode → the high frequency support mode B is established, the winning probability of the support lottery based on the passage of the through gate 84 is changed, and the low frequency support mode → the high frequency support mode A. In this case, the time required from winning to the opening of the electric accessory 93 is shortened without changing the winning probability. If the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B are differentiated by using different parameters as described above, the two high-frequency support modes can be suitably coexisted.

In the high frequency support mode B, as compared with the high frequency support mode A, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of fired game balls, that is, the number of game balls paid out is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out. The value divided by the number (hereinafter referred to as the base) becomes higher, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. In other words, if the result is a big hit and the player shifts to the high frequency support mode B via the special game state, it is a chance to win a large number of balls. On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode A, the above-mentioned base is given preferential treatment over the low-frequency support mode, but the degree of the base is suppressed to be lower than that of the high-frequency support mode B, so that the relief function becomes excessive. Can be suppressed. With such a configuration, the sharpness of the game can be enhanced by using a plurality of support modes together.

By setting an upper limit (end reference number of times) for the number of games in the high-frequency support mode A, it is possible to return from the high-frequency support mode A to the low-frequency support mode, and after the high-frequency support mode A is set. It is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the tension of the game.

In the third normal game state, which shifts when a normal jackpot result is obtained, the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode B is 40 times, and in the fourth normal game state, which shifts when a special out-of-order result is obtained, the frequency is high. It is stipulated that the end reference number of times of support mode A is equal to or less than the end reference number of times of high frequency support mode B (specifically, 20 times or 40 times). This is advantageous in increasing the frequency of transition to the fourth normal gaming state and increasing the frequency of transition to the gaming state. In addition, by setting a part of the end reference number set in the 4th normal game state to be shifted when a special deviation result is obtained to the same number as the end reference number of the high frequency support mode B, it is apparently 1. It is possible to make it appear as if a plurality of transition routes to the gaming state (third normal gaming state, fourth normal gaming state) are provided. This is preferable in order to realize the diversification of the game and to prevent it from becoming a factor that causes confusion for the player.

Further, the end reference number of times is set for each of the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. It is possible to contribute to the diversification of games by providing a transition route to a limited advantageous state with an upper limit on the number of games, either via or not via the special game state. In such a configuration, the base in the high frequency support mode A is configured so that the difference from the base in the high frequency support mode B is smaller than the difference from the base in the low frequency support mode. As a result, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

According to the present embodiment, when a special deviation result is obtained in the first normal game state, or when the number of times the game is executed reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) during the first normal game state, the frequency is high. It shifts to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the support mode A. In this way, excessive investment is made by relieving the player in the 4th normal gaming state as a judgment result or reaching the ceiling that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state as the opportunity to shift to the 4th normal gaming state. Can contribute to suppression. In particular, by relatively increasing the number of end reference times set when reaching the ceiling and relatively decreasing the number of end reference times set when the special deviation result is triggered, the game is diversified and the relief function is strengthened. Can be suitably realized.

<Modification 1>
The support mode of the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special disconnection and reaching the ceiling is more advantageous to the player than the support mode of the high frequency support mode B triggered by the big hit, that is, to the second operating port 92. You may give preferential treatment so that the winning frequency of the prize will be high.

<Modification 2>
The base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode A was set to be closer to the latter of the base (benefit) of low-frequency support mode and the base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode B. It may be set to be close. Further, the base (benefit) of the high frequency support mode A may be set to be between the base (benefit) of the low frequency support mode and the base (benefit) of the high frequency support mode B.

<Modification 3>
The variable display time set when the ceiling is reached during the first normal gaming state may be different from the variable display time set when the special deviation occurs during the first normal gaming state. For example, the difference is such that the variable display time set when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is longer than the variable display time set when the special deviation occurs during the first normal game state. May be provided, or the variable display time set when the ceiling is reached during the first normal gaming state is larger than the variable display time set when the special deviation occurs during the first normal gaming state. A difference may be provided so as to be shorter.

<Modification example 4>
There may be a difference between the support mode of the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special deviation and the support mode of the high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. For example, the support mode of the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special disconnection is different so that the winning frequency to the second operating port 92 is higher than the support mode of the high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. In addition, the support mode of the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special disconnection has a higher winning frequency to the second operating port 92 than the support mode of the high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. A difference may be provided so as to be lower.

<Modification 5>
The number of end reference times set when the special deviation occurs may be larger than the number of end reference times set when the ceiling is reached, or the number of end reference times may be the same.

<Modification 6>
The game count counter may be reset (cleared to 0) when the high-frequency support mode A, which has been shifted to the ceiling, is terminated.

<Modification 7>
It is also possible to configure the continuation count counter to be reset (overwritten) when the special deviation occurs again during the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special deviation. However, the player's satisfaction is reduced because the number of games that can actually be continued is smaller than the number of games that the high frequency support mode A should have been able to continue due to the continuous special deviation. It is expected to be a factor to cause. Therefore, in consideration of such a situation, it is preferable to fix the value set in the continuation number counter to "40" when the special deviation occurs during the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special deviation. Specifically, it is preferable to unify the types of special deviations into one and set "40" in the continuation count counter when the special deviation occurs.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment described above, the value of the game count counter is reset (cleared to 0) in the transition process at the end of the special game state, but the value of the game count counter is changed when the big hit result is obtained. If it is reset, the specific timing of the reset is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to reset the value of the game count counter at the end of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, or to reset the value of the game count counter at the start of the special game state or during the round game.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit (when the ceiling is reached) during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A, the continuation count counter The value of is overwritten with the value triggered by the arrival at the ceiling (specifically, "400"). When the ceiling is reached, the configuration is such that the fourth normal gaming state is taken over promptly when the ceiling is reached, that is, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is seamlessly exhibited without going through other normal gaming states. In other words, the configuration is such that the fourth normal gaming state related to reaching the ceiling is prioritized over the fourth normal gaming state related to special deviation. In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the transition of the gaming state when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49 (a), in the high frequency support mode A that shifts when the special deviation occurs, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 becomes blue, and the transition occurs when the ceiling is reached. In the frequency support mode A, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is differentiated so as to be green. That is, the background color of the display screen 95a can clearly indicate the trigger for shifting to the high frequency support mode A. In the following explanation, the high-frequency support mode A that shifts when the special deviation occurs is referred to as "high-frequency support mode A1", and the high-frequency support mode A that shifts when reaching the ceiling is appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A2". .. By the way, the support modes of the high frequency support modes A1 and A2 are common, and the base (the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out to the number of game balls fired) is configured so that there is no difference between the two. Then, it is the same as the first embodiment.

Here, the flow of the start notification of the high frequency support mode A will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 49 (b) to 49 (c).

As shown in FIG. 49 (b), in the game rounds in which the special misses occur and the game shifts to the high frequency support mode A1, the symbol combination corresponding to the special misses in the game rounds is stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a (confirmed display). ). Specifically, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on any of the effective lines via the reach display. Then, the background color of the display screen 95a is changed from white to blue at the start of the next game round, and the remaining number of games of the high frequency support mode A1 is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

On the other hand, in the game round that shifts to the high frequency support mode A2 when the ceiling is reached, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling reach in the game round is displayed on the display screen 95a. It may be stopped (confirmed). Specifically, when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the symbol combination including the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on any of the effective lines via the reach display. On the other hand, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, the symbol combination corresponding to the complete disconnection is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) without going through the reach display. At this time, the background color of the display screen 95a is also maintained in blue.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50, a process for switching the support mode constituting the game times control process executed as a part of the normal process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described.

(Process for switching support mode)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the number of times limit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S2002, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, the continuation number counter of various counter areas 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2004, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2004, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005, and the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically, the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number-of-times limit flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 are cleared. This switching process ends. By clearing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S2001, if a negative determination is made in the step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the continuation count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2008, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S2008, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared in step S2005, and the switching process is terminated. That is, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2009, and it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached the upper limit (whether or not the ceiling has been reached). If a negative determination is made in step S2009, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, the process proceeds to step S2010, the preparation flags are set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and the switching process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S2006, if a negative determination is made in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special deviation. If it corresponds to the special deviation, an affirmative determination is made in step S2011 and the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, the high frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S2013, the number-of-times limit flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Then, after executing the setting process of the continuation number counter in step S2014, the present switching process is terminated.

In the continuation count counter setting process, if the game result of this time is a special deviation A, "20" is set in the continuation counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A1 will be continued until the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A1 is 20. On the other hand, if the result of this game is a special deviation B, "40" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A1 is continued until the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A1 reaches 40.

Returning to the description of step S2011, if a negative determination is made in step S2011, that is, if the special deviation is not supported, the process proceeds to step S2015. In step S2015, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2015, the preparation flag is cleared in step S2016, and each process of steps S2012 to S2014 is executed. In the setting process of the continuation count counter in step S2014 this time, "400" is set in the continuation count counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A2 is continued until the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A2 reaches 400.

Incidentally, when the transition to the special gaming state is made while the preparation flag is stored, the preparation flag is cleared at the end of the special gaming state.

Returning to the description of step S2015, if a negative determination is made in step S2015, that is, if the preparation flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2017. In step S2017, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached the upper limit (whether or not it has reached the ceiling). If a negative determination is made in step S2017, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2017, the process of steps S2012 to S2014 is executed, and then the process for switching is terminated. In the setting process of the continuation count counter in step S2014 this time, "400" is set in the continuation count counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A2 is continued until the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A2 reaches 400.

According to the configuration described in detail above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, the high frequency support mode A2 is supported after one game round in the first normal gaming state. It will shift to the fourth normal gaming state. That is, it returns to the fourth normal gaming state after one game round in the first normal gaming state. Here, even though the return to the 4th normal gaming state is confirmed, the longer game times of 1 above give the impression that the transition to the advantageous state is silently delayed. It is feared that it will be a factor to give to people. One of the features of the present embodiment is that, in consideration of such circumstances, a device is made to realize a quick return to the fourth normal gaming state. Hereinafter, the device will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. First, the variation display time setting process (step S714 of FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 51 to 52.

(Variable display time setting process)
In the variable display time setting process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is either the first normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, the setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states is executed, and then the setting process for the variable display time is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the current gaming state is the second normal gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the setting process for the second normal gaming state is executed in step S2104, and then the setting process for the variable display time ends. When a negative determination is made in step S2103, that is, when the current gaming state is the third normal gaming state, the setting process for the third normal gaming state is executed in step S2105, and then the variable display time is set. End the process. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states will be described.

(Setting processing for the 1st and 4th normal game states)
In the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the current game times correspond to the big hit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the jackpot setting process is executed in step S2202, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states is terminated. In the process of step S2202, the variable display time in the current game round is determined with reference to the variable display time table for jackpots (see FIG. 28) stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special deviation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204 to execute the special deviation setting process, and then end the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states. In the process of step S2204, the variation display time in the current game round is determined with reference to the variation display time table for special deviation (see FIG. 27) stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403.

If a negative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether or not the current game round is a game round that reaches the ceiling. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed in step S2206, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S2005, if a negative determination is made in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether or not the preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, the continuous transition setting process is executed in step S2208, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2207, the setting process for complete disconnection is executed in step S2209, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states is terminated.

Here, although the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the normal deviation is referred to in both steps S2206 and S2208, the fluctuation display time table is individually provided depending on the presence or absence of the preparation flag. Hereinafter, the variable display time table will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54.

When the ceiling is reached in the situation where the preparation flag is not stored during the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the reach display is displayed as the fluctuation display time of the display unit for the operation port. The corresponding variable display time "20 to 30 sec" is set. That is, when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the symbol combination (see FIG. 49 (c)) indicating the arrival at the ceiling via the reach display is stopped and displayed (confirmed) on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Will be displayed).

On the other hand, when the ceiling is reached in the situation where the preparation flag is not stored during the 4th normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A1, the fluctuation display time of the operation port display unit is set. The same fluctuation display time (see FIG. 27) as in the case of complete deviation is set. Then, in this game round, the symbols other than the symbols corresponding to reaching the ceiling, more specifically, the symbol combinations corresponding to the complete detachment are stopped and displayed. That is, the symbol displayed as stopped does not include the above "CHANGE" symbol. As a result, it is difficult to identify that the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state from the symbol combination and the variation display time (variation display mode) of the symbols.

A game result that does not correspond to either a big hit or a special deviation (normal deviation) when the mode shifts to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode under the situation where the preparation flag is stored. In the case of, "3 sec" is set as the fluctuation display time of the display unit for the operating port. This variation display time coincides with the shortest variation display time that can be set in the game times that are completely out of the first normal gaming state (see FIG. 27). That is, when the ceiling is reached and the preparation flag is stored during the 4th normal gaming state, the 4th normal gaming state is restored again via the 1st normal gaming state after the end of the 4th normal gaming state. However, it is suppressed so that the staying time in this first normal gaming state is not extended.

In addition, during the fourth normal game state, the game times may be repeated with the preparation flag stored. The variable display time set in such a case is the same as the variable display time set in the game times in which the preparation flag is not stored (see FIGS. 27 and 53).

(Flow of continuous transition)
Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 55, the behavior when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A1 will be described.

At the timing of tb1 after shifting to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation, the 299th gaming round after the end of the special gaming state has started. In the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue.

At the timing of tb2 that follows, the 300th game round after the end of the special gaming state has started, and at the timing of tb3, the symbol combination corresponding to the 300th game round is confirmed and displayed. Since the 4th normal game state is currently in progress, the symbol combination corresponding to the complete deviation (normal deviation) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) instead of the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. In the example shown in FIG. 55, even in the game round started at the timing of tb2, the end reference number (upper limit) in the fourth normal game state has not been reached, so that the fourth normal game state is continued and the preparation flag is described. Will be stored.

Even for the game rounds started at the timing of tb4, the end reference number of times (upper limit) is not reached, so that the above-mentioned blue background is maintained. However, after the fourth normal gaming state is completed, a message (characters of "STANDBY") suggesting that the fourth normal gaming state is restored is displayed at the upper part of the display screen 95a to indicate the number of remaining continuations. The counter is hidden.

At the timing of tb5, the final game round that reaches the end reference number of times is started in the fourth normal game state. In the example shown in FIG. 55, the game times correspond to complete deviation (normal deviation), and at the timing of tb6 when the confirmation display of the symbol and the symbol is completed, the fourth normal gaming state shifts to the first normal gaming state. At the same time, a new game round has started. Although this game time corresponds to the first normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a is maintained in blue, and the characters "STANDBY" displayed at the upper part of the display screen 95a are also displayed. Will remain. At the timing of tb7 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the display screen 95a is blacked out. Then, at the timing of tb8 when the confirmation display is started, the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival is stopped and displayed (reduced display) in the upper corner of the display screen 95a, and the ceiling arrival is triggered in the center of the display screen 95a. The characters "Entering the Super Chance Zone" will be displayed as a message clearly indicating the transition to the 4th normal gaming state.

At the timing of tb9 when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the gaming state shifts from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A2. Along with this, the background color of the display screen 95a is changed from blue to green.

According to the second embodiment described in detail above, even if the game proceeds with the transition to the special game state (big hit result) unsuccessful, the high frequency support mode A is due to the special off result or reaching the ceiling. It may shift to the corresponding 4th normal gaming state. By switching to the high frequency support mode A, the frequency of winning prizes in the second operating port 92 increases, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the soundness of the game. However, as described above, when the special deviation result and the ceiling reach are used together as an opportunity to shift to the fourth normal gaming state, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the 4th normal game state, the ceiling reach is invalidated, or if the 4th normal game state is forcibly terminated due to the special deviation result, the player It is feared that some of the benefits that should have been originally enjoyed will disappear, and the satisfaction of the players will be greatly reduced. In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the ceiling is reached at least until the number of times the game is executed in the fourth normal game state reaches the end reference number. The transition to the fourth normal gaming state will be delayed. This can dispel the above concerns and contribute to improving the satisfaction of the player.

As described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state and the transition to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the arrival at the ceiling, the behavior (switching mode) of the electric accessory 93 is the same. By aligning them, it is possible to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being inferior to the behavior up to that point.

If the delay function is provided, it is assumed that if the benefit of reaching the ceiling is immediately terminated after a large delay, it will be a factor that impairs the player's willingness to play. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the number of end reference times related to the special deviation result <the second end reference number related to reaching the ceiling, excessive delay is suppressed and the benefits after reaching the ceiling are stale. It is possible to suppress the impression that there is.

If the ceiling is reached during the 4th normal game state, the rhythm of the game can be adjusted by shifting from the 4th normal game state to the 1st normal game state and then returning to the 4th normal game state. Accents can be added, which can contribute to suppressing the monotonization of the game.

In the configuration of returning to the fourth normal game state via the first normal game state, the following inconveniences occur due to the variation in the operation period of the game turn operation of the game times executed during the first normal game state. obtain. That is, when the operation period is relatively short, the time for notifying the player of the transition to the fourth normal gaming state is insufficient, and when the operation period is relatively long, the transition to the fourth normal gaming state is performed. It makes it easier to give the player the impression of being unreasonably delayed. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, for the game times in the first normal game state in which the transition to the fourth normal game state is delayed, a predetermined operation period is set regardless of the number of reservations. By keeping the operating period constant, the above concerns can be resolved.

As shown in the present embodiment, when a big hit result is obtained in a situation where the transition to the 4th normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling is about to occur, the 4th normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling The transition to is disabled. Such a configuration is preferable in order to prevent the player's rescue function from becoming excessive.

If the maximum number of times is reached (reached the ceiling) during the first game state, a special effect (stop display of the combination of "3" symbol, "1" symbol, and "4" symbol) is executed at that game time. As a result, it is promptly notified that the fourth normal gaming state will be entered. On the other hand, when the upper limit number of times is reached (reached the ceiling) during the 4th normal game state, the above special effect ("3" symbol, "1" symbol, "4" symbol combination is used in the game. Stop display) is avoided. In this way, when the transition to the 4th normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed, the 4th normal transition is triggered by the special deviation result by intentionally not performing the special effect. It is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the gaming state from decreasing before the end of the fourth normal gaming state.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, the fourth normal game corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 is passed through the first normal game state. It was configured to shift to the state. That is, the configuration is such that the fourth normal game state is continuous with one game number corresponding to the first normal game state sandwiched between them. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be changed as follows. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the 4th normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, the high frequency support mode A2 is immediately switched to after the end of the 4th normal gaming state without going through the 1st normal gaming state. It may be configured to shift to the corresponding fourth normal gaming state. That is, the configuration may be such that the fourth normal gaming state is continued without interruption. Even in this case, the high-frequency support mode A1 triggered by the special deviation is not forcibly terminated in the middle (the high-frequency support mode A1 can be expired), so that the player's satisfaction level is high. It does not decrease.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment described above, the background color of the display screen 95a is different between the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 and the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2. , Not limited to this. It is also possible to make the background color the same in both fourth normal game states.

<Modification 3>
In the second embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, a message suggesting the continuation of the fourth normal gaming state in the next game round is displayed. The display is started, but instead of this, it is possible to start the display of the message at the game times when the ceiling is reached. In addition, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which a message suggesting the continuation of the fourth normal gaming state is displayed from the gaming round that has reached the ceiling or the next gaming round, the configuration does not suggest the continuation of the fourth normal gaming state. It is also possible. That is, it is also possible to make it unclear whether or not there is a transition to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling until the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation is completed.

<Modification example 4>
If the fourth normal gaming state is changed to the first normal gaming state while the electric accessory 93 is in the open state, the electric accessory 93 is opened after the initially set opening time of the electric accessory 93 has elapsed. The configuration may be such that the 93 is switched to the closed state, or the electric accessory 93 may be quickly switched to the closed state in order to immediately stop the opening.

<Modification 5>
In the second embodiment described above, when the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 is transferred to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the first normal gaming state, the said case is concerned. As the fluctuation display time of the design of the operation port display unit and the design of the design display device 95 in the first normal game state, the fluctuation display time of the design of the through gate display unit DS set during the low frequency support mode (10 to 10). The configuration is such that a time shorter than 20 sec) is set, but the configuration is not limited to this. For the operating port in the first normal gaming state when shifting from the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the first normal gaming state. As the fluctuation display time of the design of the display unit and the design of the design display device 95, a time longer than the fluctuation display time (10 to 20 sec) of the design of the display unit DS for the through gate set in the low frequency support mode is set. It is also possible to have a configuration like this.

<Modification 6>
In the second embodiment described above, when the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 is transferred to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the first normal gaming state, the said case is concerned. The configuration is such that "3 sec", which is a variable display time corresponding to complete deviation, is set as the variable display time of the design of the display unit for the operating port and the design of the symbol display device 95 in the first normal game state, but the configuration is limited to this. It's not something. For example, when shifting from the 4th normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 to the 4th normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the 1st normal gaming state, the operation in the 1st normal gaming state is performed. It is also possible to set "30 to 40 sec", which is the variable display time corresponding to the reach display, as the variable display time of the design of the mouth display unit and the design of the design display device 95.

<Modification 7>
In the second embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state, the first is once the number of times the game is executed in the fourth normal gaming state becomes the end reference number. It is configured to shift to the normal gaming state and then return to the fourth normal gaming state. At this time, the number of game times executed during the first normal game state is set to one, but the number of times is not limited to this. It suffices if the number of games in the first gaming state is specified so as to be at least equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of holdings that can be stored (preferably the upper limit of the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92).

As shown in this modification, when the ceiling is reached during the 4th normal gaming state, the configuration is such that the 4th normal gaming state is changed to the 1st normal gaming state and then the 4th normal gaming state is restored. By doing so, it is possible to add an accent to the rhythm of the game and contribute to suppressing the monotonization of the game. Further, in the configuration in which the first normal gaming state is intervened, there is a possibility that the player may be given the impression that the enjoyment of the benefit is unreasonably delayed by repeating the game times in the first normal gaming state. It gets higher. In particular, it is assumed that such an impression becomes stronger when the number of special information stored by the intervention of the first normal gaming state becomes 0 and the continuous progress of the gaming times is interrupted. In this regard, by limiting the number of games executed in the intervening first normal game state to be less than the upper limit of the storage of special information, the continuation of the game times is interrupted when returning to the fourth normal game state. Can be avoided and the above concerns can be suitably dispelled.

<Modification 8>
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a big hit result, it is possible to execute a special effect indicating the transition to the fourth normal game state. When the upper limit number of times is reached during the fourth normal game state and the number of times the game is executed during the fourth normal game state is larger than the predetermined number of times, the game reaches the upper limit number of times. While the special effect is executed in each round, if the maximum number of times is reached during the fourth normal game state and the number of times the game is executed in the fourth normal game state is less than the above-mentioned predetermined number of times, the maximum number of times is reached. The above-mentioned special effect may be executed in the game times that are executed after the game times.

If the upper limit of the number of times is reached (reached the ceiling) during the fourth normal game state, which is triggered by the result of the special exception, the impression of the player may differ depending on the timing. For example, if the ceiling is reached immediately after the transition, it may give the impression that the special off result was a waste. Therefore, as shown in this modification, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the number of times the game is executed during the fourth normal game state (the number of games executed so far) is set. The above concerns can be dispelled by making the timing of occurrence of the special effect, that is, the timing of notification of reaching the ceiling different accordingly.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the playability using the above-mentioned special deviation is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment and the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the difference in the basic configuration of the game board unit will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a front view of the game board unit.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetric gauge (see FIG. 6), but in the present embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetric gauge. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, the game board 80aA will be described in detail.

The game board 80aA is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 80aA. A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like are arranged in each opening. When the game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82A, and the variable winning device 83A, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry portion, and the detection result is used. Based on this, a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 80aA, and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out opening 86.

Further, in the game board 80aA, a large number of game nails 87 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged. .. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations such as the game nail 87 and the windmill, and the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are adjusted so as to generate a prize with an appropriate probability.

The actuating port unit 82A is provided by the first actuating port 91A and the second actuating port 92A arranged directly under the first actuating port 91A, similarly to the actuating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. In particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric accessory 93A as an opening / closing assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE by the center frame 96A is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that detours from the left side. It is the same as the above-mentioned first embodiment in the point that it is done.

However, in the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the left route can win the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, but cannot win the variable winning device 83A and the through gate 84A. Therefore, the game ball launched to the right route can win the second operating port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, while the first operating port 91A cannot be won. The arrangement of the 1 operating port 91A, the 2nd operating port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A has been changed. It should be noted that the game ball launched to the left route may be configured so that the second operating port 92A cannot be won.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route according to the game state, the game can be advanced advantageously. By encouraging such technical intervention, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the storage of the reserved information based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 57.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in the present embodiment is the first operating port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A. It has a holding area Ra for the second working port and a holding area Rb for the second working port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is won in the second operating port 92A. is doing.

The holding area Ra for the first operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the first operating port 91A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area to the fourth area. Further, the holding area Rb for the second operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second. Each numerical information (holding information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area → third area → fourth area.

In the present embodiment, when the holding information is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second working port (specifically, the first area). Is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When the hold information is not stored in the hold area Rb for the second operating port and the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first working port, the holding area for the first working port is stored. The hold information stored in Ra (specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, any of the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is configured to be a special deviation, but in the present embodiment, the first operating port is configured. The configuration differs from that of the first embodiment in that only one of the lottery based on the winning of the 91 and the second operating port 92 can be a special deviation. Hereinafter, the hit / fail table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 58, the pass / fail table for the first operating port includes a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). And are set.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 58 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of 6 pieces of "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 58 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the out-of-order results (usually out-of-order results). That is, in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the configuration does not become the "special deviation" shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59, the pass / fail table for the second operating port includes a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). And are set.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 59 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of 6 pieces of "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 59 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing.

Further, in a situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode and the winning / failing table for the high probability mode are referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the value of the random number that is a special deviation (that is, that is). , Special deviation information), all of which are "2", "4", "6", "12", "14" ... "596", for a total of 150 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "2", "4", "6", "12", "14" ... "596" correspond to the special deviation result. Then, all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to either the jackpot or the special deviation correspond to the deviation result (normal deviation result).

(Flow of the game)
Here, the flow of the game (game flow) will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each gaming state.

The first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is composed of a main stage and a special stage (mission stage). The main stage is a stage to stay when the game round based on the winning of the first operating port 91A is executed, and the special stage stays when the gaming round based on the winning of the second operating port 92A is executed. It's a stage.

Regarding the special stage, other normal gaming states corresponding to the high frequency support mode, specifically, the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B or the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. It is a stage that temporarily stays at the time of transition from the gaming state to the first normal gaming state, and the upper limit of the number of games to be executed matches the upper limit of storage of the holding information in the holding area Rb for the second operating port. There is. That is, immediately after the transition from the third normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the stage moves to the special stage on condition that the hold information related to the second operating port 92A is stored. .. Then, if there is no big hit or special loss in this special stage, the special stage is moved to the main stage.

As described above, the first normal gaming state corresponds to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, even if the game ball is fired to the right route and the support is won, the winning of the second operating port 92A is substantially avoided. Since the game ball launched to the right route cannot win a prize in the first operating port 91A, it becomes difficult to receive a lottery based on the winning in the operating ports 91A and 92A. On the other hand, for the game ball launched to the left route, the winning of the second operating port 92A is avoided, while the winning of the first operating port 91A may occur. For the above reasons, in the first normal game state, it is possible to proceed with the game so that it is more advantageous for the player to aim at the left route than to aim at the right route. If the game ball is launched to the right route during the first gaming state, a warning is given to urge the launch destination to return to the left route.

If a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved in the lottery during the first normal game state, the game shifts to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special game state. The second normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode B, and the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the investment (decrease in the number of balls held) by launching the game ball to the right route. During the second normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route wins a prize in the second operating port 92A, and the game progresses centering on the game times related to the second operating port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, there is a 1/4 chance that the special deviation will occur, but the special deviation during the second normal gaming state will be invalid and will be treated as a normal deviation. .. That is, even if a special deviation occurs during the second normal gaming state, the special deviation does not trigger the transition to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A.

If a 6R normal jackpot is won in the lottery during the first normal game state and the second normal game state, the game shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special game state. .. The third normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode B, and the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the investment (decrease in the number of balls held) by launching the game ball to the right route.

During the third normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route wins a prize in the second operating port 92A, and the game progresses centering on the game times related to the second operating port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, there is a 1/4 chance that the special deviation will occur, but the special deviation during the third normal gaming state will be invalid and will be treated as a normal deviation. .. That is, even if a special deviation occurs during the third normal gaming state, the special deviation does not trigger the transition to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A.

When the game progresses without becoming a big hit during the third normal game state, and the number of executed game times (specifically, the game times related to the second operating port 92A) reaches the end reference number (20 times). , The first normal game state is entered. Specifically, when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is "0", the stage shifts to the main stage, and when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is other than "0", the stage shifts to the special stage. ..

In the special stage, the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A will be executed for the number of pending times. If the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A results in a special loss, the game shifts to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. During the fourth normal game state, the player can advance the game while suppressing the investment (decrease in the number of balls held) by launching the game ball to the right route. During the fourth normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route wins a prize in the second operating port 92A, and the game progresses centering on the game times related to the second operating port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, there is a probability of about 1/4 that the special deviation will occur, but the special deviation during the 4th normal gaming state will be invalid and will be treated as a normal deviation. ..

When the game progresses without becoming a big hit during the fourth normal game state and the number of executed game times (specifically, the game times related to the second operating port 92A) reaches the end reference number (20 times). , The first normal game state is entered. Specifically, when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is "0", the stage shifts to the main stage, and when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is other than "0", the stage shifts to the special stage. .. In this way, if the fourth normal game state and the special stage can be looped, the player can advance the game advantageously.

Here, in the case of transitioning from the third normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the advantage greatly changes depending on the number of reservations related to the second operating port 92A. In the present embodiment, in the final game times in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the variation display time of the pattern on the display unit D2 for the second operating port is set to the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state. By making it longer than the other game times in the above, a configuration is realized in which the hold related to the second operating port 92A can be easily stored up to the upper limit during the final game time.

(Variable display time table for operating port)
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61A, the variable display time table for the second operating port referred to in the 20th gaming in the third normal gaming state is variablely displayed regardless of the number of reservations. It is configured so that "40 sec" is set as the time. On the contrary,
Regarding the variation display time table for the second operating port referred to in each of the 1st to 19th game times in the third normal game state, the variation display set from the 20th game time in any case. It is configured to shorten the time. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), in the case of non-reach display non-compliant (special deviation or normal deviation), "12 to 14 sec" or "1 to 2 sec" is set according to the number of holds, and the reach display is displayed. In the case of out-of-correspondence (special out-of-order or normal out-of-order), "20 to 30 sec" is set. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), "20 to 30 sec" is set regardless of the number of holdings.

In this way, in the 20th final game round, the variable display time is expanded as compared with the 1st to 19th game rounds, so that the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A becomes the upper limit of storage. It is possible to reduce the chance of shifting (demotion) from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state without reaching it.

The variable display time table for the second operating port, which is referred to during the first normal gaming state, is referred to as a variable display time table referred to in the case of special deviation and normal deviation, and in the case of a big hit. It is roughly divided into a variable display time table. In the variable display time table for special deviation and normal deviation referred to during the first normal gaming state, when the number of holdings is "0", "10sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of holdings is "1". In the case of "4", "0.5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the variable display time table for jackpots referred to during the first normal game state, "20 to 30 sec" is set as the variable display time for any game times regardless of the number of holdings and the game result. There is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the flow of the effect when shifting to the fourth normal gaming state will be described. FIG. 62 illustrates a case where the end reference number of times is reached without becoming a big hit during the third normal gaming state, and the remaining hold related to the second operating port 92A includes a special deviation.

In the third normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue and nuts, and the number of remaining games in which the high frequency support mode is continued is displayed in the upper corner of the display screen 95a. There is. At the timing of ct1 when the 19th game round related to the second operating port 92A was started, the number of holdings decreased from "4" to "3", and the 20th game round (final game round) was started. At the timing, the number of reservations has decreased from "3" to "2".

When the final game round is started, a moving image of the loop branching effect is displayed on the display screen 95a. At the beginning of this video, "Catch the Mission Fairy" is displayed, and then the fairy character and the girl character are displayed on the display screen. As described above, the variable display time of the final game times is longer than the variable display time of the 1st to 19th game times. As a result, winning a prize in the second operating port 92A during the final game round is likely to occur. In the example of FIG. 62, winnings to the second operating port 92A occur consecutively at the timing of tc3 and the timing of tc4, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 92A is the upper limit of storage before the end of the final game round. Has reached.

The loop branch effect in the present embodiment is a series of effects executed over the final game times in the third normal game state and the game times executed during the special stage in the first normal game state, and is final. If the game times correspond to the jackpot, the game times executed during the special stage will be specially missed, or if the game times correspond to the jackpot, the production that succeeded in capturing the fairy will be executed, and the final game times will be the special miss. Or, when all the game times executed during the special stage correspond to the normal deviation, the effect of failing to capture the fairy is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 62, the effect of successfully capturing the fairy is executed at the timing of tc5 at which the definite display of the pattern of the display unit D2 for the second operating port is executed in the final game round in the third normal gaming state. After that, until the special stage is completed, the characters "STANDBY" are displayed on the display screen 95a as a message indicating the transition to the normal gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode. During this time, the gaming state shifts from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state.

If the electric accessory 93A is in the open state at the time of transition from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the electric accessory 93A is forcibly switched to the closed state. 1 It is avoided that a prize is generated in the second operating port 92A after the transition to the normal gaming state.

At the timing of ct7, the game round corresponding to the special deviation is started, and at the timing of ct8, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation is confirmed and displayed. Then, at the timing of tk9, the first normal gaming state is shifted to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. In the fourth normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a is blue, and the number of loops in the high frequency support mode and the number of remaining games are displayed at the upper part of the display screen 95a.

After that, when the final game times in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A are reached without becoming a big hit, the game shifts to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Specifically, the stage shifts to the special stage on condition that the hold related to the second operating port 92A is stored. Even when transitioning from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state, the loop branching spans the final game round in the 4th normal gaming state and each game round executed in the special stage in the 1st normal gaming state. The production (for details, a video in which the chase of the fairy and the girl is partially omitted) will be executed.

According to the third embodiment described in detail above, when a normal jackpot result is obtained in the first normal gaming state, the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B is passed through the special gaming state. Move to. In the third normal gaming state, the electric accessory 93A is frequently switched to the open state, and the chances of winning a prize in the second operating port 92A are increased, so that the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed. A limit is set for the number of times in the third normal game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the third normal game state reaches the first end reference number (20 times), the low frequency support mode is supported. It shifts to the first normal game state. This makes it difficult to win a prize in the second operating port 92A.

Here, the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 92A is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, and after shifting from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, The game times are executed based on the stored pending information. In the remaining game rounds related to the second operating port 92A, a special deviation result may occur. If a special out-of-game result is obtained in the remaining game times, the game shifts to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A without going through the special game state, and the high frequency switching mode is set. It will loop. With this loop, it is possible to aim for a big hit while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

As described above, in the case of transitioning from the third normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the second is up to the number of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second operating port. The game times related to the operation port 92A are executed. In the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the probability of a special loss result (1/4) is higher than the probability of a big hit result (1/100), and the above high frequency support mode is used. It is possible to aim for a big hit while looping. With such a configuration, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game without increasing the probability of a big hit result.

If a special deviation result occurs during the 3rd normal game state and the 4th normal game state, the result becomes invalid, while the 3rd normal game state and the 4th normal game state shift to the 1st normal game state. If a special deviation result is obtained in the remaining game times related to the second operating port 92A, the transition to the fourth normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state loops with the special deviation result as a trigger. According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the loop depends on the storage upper limit number of the reserved information related to the second operating port 92A. Therefore, when adjusting the degree of freedom by increasing or decreasing the number of end reference times in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, it is possible to avoid affecting the loop probability and to avoid the influence on the end reference. The degree of freedom in setting the number of times can be suitably improved.

The opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 93A in the high frequency support mode A is closer to the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 93A in the high frequency support mode B than the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 93A in the low frequency support mode. .. In such a configuration, when the third normal gaming state → the first normal gaming state → the fourth normal gaming state is established, whether the gaming states before and after sandwiching the first normal gaming state are the same for the player. It is preferable to promote such recognition. In particular, the end reference number of times (20 times) in the fourth normal game state and the end reference number of times (20 times) in the third normal game state are the same number of times. With such a configuration, the above recognition can be suitably promoted.

Immediately after shifting from the third normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the remaining reserved game times related to the second operating port 92A are executed. Then, when a special deviation result is obtained in these game times, the state shifts from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. Here, as shown in the present embodiment, in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, it is specified in advance whether or not the remaining reserved game times result in a special deviation result, and the result is determined. By performing the continuous effect based on the above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the presence or absence of the occurrence of the loop described above.

The above-mentioned prior identification is performed in the final gaming times in the third normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state when the transition from the third normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state. Will be executed. As described above, if the above specification is performed in the final gaming times in the third normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, the number of holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port becomes the upper limit of storage. The continuous effect is executed in the state where the continuous effect is reached, and the function of suggesting the continuation of the loop can be suitably exhibited by the continuous effect.

In addition, according to the configuration in which the continuous effect is started before the above-mentioned prior specification in the final game times in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the restriction on the execution period of the continuous effect is relaxed, and the continuous effect is relaxed. Can be suitably suppressed from becoming obsolete.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment described above, when a special deviation occurs in a part of the gaming state (for example, the second normal gaming state, etc.), this is invalidated and treated as a normal deviation, but the configuration is limited to this. is not it. It is also possible to refer to the winning / failing table that does not include the special deviation in the game result, so that the lottery itself for the special deviation is not performed.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment described above, the end reference number of times (20 times) in the third gaming state and the end reference number of times (20 times) in the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation are the same. It is not limited to the above, and the end reference number of times in the third gaming state and the end reference number of times in the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation may be different.

For example, a difference may be provided so that the end reference number of times (40 times) in the third game state becomes larger than the end reference number of times (20 times) in the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation. A difference may be provided so that the end reference number of times (20 times) in the gaming state is less than the end reference number of times (40 times) in the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation.

<Modification 3>
In the third embodiment, the variation display time of the game times related to the second operating port 92A in the first normal game state is set to be "0.5 sec" regardless of the number of holdings and the game result. However, the configuration is not limited to this. As with the variable display time of the game times related to the first operating port 91A, the variation display time of the game times related to the second operating port 92A in the first normal gaming state is also set according to the number of reservations and the game result. May be good.

<Modification example 4>
In the third embodiment described above, by expanding the variation display time of the final game times in the third normal gaming state, the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A at the time of transition to the first normal gaming state is less than the upper limit. However, instead of or in addition to this, the following configuration is also possible. That is, by expanding the variation display time of the final game times in the 4th normal gaming state when shifting from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state, the second operation is performed at the transition to the 1st normal gaming state. It is also possible to prevent the number of holds related to the mouth 92A from becoming less than the upper limit.

<Modification 5>
In the third embodiment described above, the loop branching effect is executed over the third normal gaming state and the first normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode B, but the loop branching effect is frequently performed. It is also possible to configure the system to be executed over the third normal game state corresponding to the support mode B, the first normal game state, and the third normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. By gaining the effect execution time in this way, it is possible to enhance the loop branch effect while promptly shifting to the third normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the number of games executed at the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) (when the ceiling is reached), the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A is supported. It was configured to move to. The configuration of the present embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment in that the ceiling is pseudo-variable. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the pseudo-variable function in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. 63, a distribution table for special deviation in the present embodiment will be described.

(Distribution table for special removal)
In the distribution table for special deviation in the present embodiment, the special deviation result A, the special deviation result B, and the special deviation result C are set as the distribution destinations of the game results. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 23" corresponds to the special deviation result A, and "24 to 28" corresponds to the special deviation result B. , "29" corresponds to the special off result C.

Neither the special deviation result A to the special deviation result C serves as a trigger for switching the lottery mode, but as a trigger for switching the support mode.

Specifically, the special deviation result A is an opportunity to switch the support mode to the high frequency support mode A after the end of the game times that resulted in the special deviation result A, that is, an opportunity to shift to the fourth normal gaming state. .. In this high-frequency support mode A, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the end reference number of times, or when a big hit result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (for details, go to the special game state). (When transitioning), it ends and switches to the low frequency support mode (shifts to the first normal gaming state). In this embodiment, "20 times" is set as the end reference number of times.

The special deviation result B also serves as an opportunity to switch the support mode to the high frequency support mode A after the end of the game round resulting in the special deviation result B, that is, to shift to the fourth normal gaming state. In this high-frequency support mode A, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the end reference number of times, or when a big hit result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (for details, go to the special game state). (When transitioning), it ends and switches to the low frequency support mode (shifts to the first normal gaming state). In this embodiment, "40 times" is set as the end reference number of times.

The special deviation result C also serves as an opportunity to switch the support mode to the high frequency support mode A after the end of the game round resulting in the special deviation result C, that is, to shift to the fourth normal gaming state. In this high-frequency support mode A, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the end reference number of times, or when a big hit result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (for details, go to the special game state). (When transitioning), it ends and switches to the low frequency support mode (shifts to the first normal gaming state). In this embodiment, "260 times" is set as the end reference number of times.

Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the ceiling = 300 times and the upper limit of the number of games in the third normal gaming state = 40 times. That is, both the end reference number set when the special deviation result A is obtained and the end reference number set when the special deviation result B is obtained are executed in the first normal gaming state by the time the ceiling is reached. The maximum number of games to be played is less than the maximum number of games to be played, but the maximum number of end reference times set when the special deviation result C is reached is the maximum number of games to be executed in the first normal game state by the time the ceiling is reached. It is the same number as the number of times.

The number of end reference times in the special deviation result C can be set to be larger than the maximum number of games executed in the first normal game state before reaching the ceiling.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the special disengagement result C is obtained during the first normal gaming state, the support by the high frequency support mode A until the ceiling is substantially reached is confirmed, and the special disengagement result A and the special If the number of remaining games to reach the ceiling is less than the end reference number of the special loss results A and B when the result is B, the support by the high frequency support mode A to reach the ceiling is confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the behavior of the symbol display device 95 and the like differs depending on whether the end reference number of times exceeds the number of remaining games until the ceiling is reached or not when a special deviation result is obtained. ing. Specifically, as in the first embodiment, when a special deviation result is obtained, the player is notified (explicitly) by stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result. Although it is configured to be obtained, if the number of ending reference times exceeds the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling, the notification is not performed. Hereinafter, a specific configuration for achieving such behavior, that is, a first fluctuation start process executed as part of the periodic process by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. ..

(Process for starting the first fluctuation)
In the first fluctuation start processing, first, the fluctuation start command received this time in step S2301 is read, and the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control device 162, the type command is also transmitted. In step S2301, the type command received together with the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and from the command, information on the probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the special deviation result, information on the normal deviation result, and reaching the ceiling. Identify various information related to the game result, such as the information of. Then, in step S2301, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not there is a big hit, information on the type of big hit if it is a big hit, information on whether or not there is a special loss, and if it is a special loss, the type of special loss. Information, information on whether or not reach has occurred, information on whether or not the ceiling has been reached, information on fluctuation display time, etc. are grasped when the jackpot is not won and the special is not out of order, and the grasped information is stored in the register of MPU442.

In the following step S2302, various counters for specifying the number of games are updated. Specifically, the remaining number of games counter for specifying the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling provided in various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444 is updated ("1" subtraction). The remaining number of times counter is configured to be set to "300" at the end of the special gaming state.

In the following step S2303, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times to be started this time is a big hit result based on the information grasped in step S2301. If the game result this time is a jackpot result (6R probability variation jackpot result or 6R normal jackpot result), the effect setting process for the jackpot is executed in the following step S2304. The effect setting process for the jackpot includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for the jackpot to be stopped and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation display mode determination for determining the variation display mode of the symbol for the jackpot. It is roughly divided into processing (effect pattern determination processing).

In the stop result determination process for the jackpot, the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination, "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination, "3" symbol, "3" symbol , "3" symbol combination, "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination, "5" symbol, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination, "6" symbol, "6" Symbol, "6" symbol combination, "7" symbol, "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination, "8" symbol, "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination, "9" symbol, "9" symbol The combination of the "symbol" and the "9" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot.

As already explained, when a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for big hits, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game result in the type command are obtained. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the above is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If it is determined in step S2303 that the result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, based on the information grasped in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times to be started this time is a special deviation result. If the result of this game is a special deviation result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2305 and the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, the number-of-times comparison process is executed.

In the number-of-times comparison process, the above-mentioned remaining number of times counter is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the end reference number of times set in this special deviation is less than the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling. If the number of end reference times set in this special deviation is less than the number of times remaining until reaching the ceiling, an affirmative determination is made in step S2307 and the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, the first special effect setting process, which is the effect setting process for special deviation, is executed.

The first special effect setting process includes a stop result determination process for determining a special out-of-order symbol combination to be stopped and displayed and an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variable display for determining a variable display mode of the special off-designation symbol. It is roughly classified into an aspect determination process (effect pattern determination process).

In the stop result determination process constituting the first special effect setting process, the stop result in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special deviation is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of the main game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation.

In the variable display mode determining process constituting the first special effect setting process, the variable display mode is determined so that the player is notified via the reach display that the special effect has occurred. Specifically, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the normal reach display corresponding to the game result in the type command are obtained. Alternatively, the effect pattern of the super reach display is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

Here, the first special effect set by the first special effect setting process will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 65 (a).

In the game times corresponding to the first special effect, the reach display shifts to the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of all the symbol strings stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a. At a predetermined timing after shifting to the reach display, the symbol combination (combination of "1" symbol, "3" symbol, "4" symbol) corresponding to the special deviation is stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a. After that, a message indicating switching to the high frequency support mode A (for example, "Chance time rush" or the like) is displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a is changed to blue.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64, when a negative judgment is made in step S2307, that is, when the end reference number set in this special deviation matches or increases the number of remaining times until reaching the ceiling. Goes to step S2309. In step S2309, the second special effect setting process, which is the effect setting process for special deviation, is executed.

The second special effect setting process includes a stop result determination process for determining a special out-of-order symbol combination to be stopped and displayed and an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variable display for determining a variable display mode of the special off-designation symbol. It is roughly classified into an aspect determination process (effect pattern determination process).

In the stop result determination process constituting the second special effect setting process, the stop result in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special deviation is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of the main game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area. The symbol combination determined by this stop result determination process includes the "CHANGE" symbol. That is, in the second special effect, the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines.

In the variable display mode determination process constituting the second special effect setting process, the variable display mode is determined so that the player is notified via the reach display that the special effect has occurred. Specifically, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the normal reach display corresponding to the game result in the type command are obtained. Alternatively, the effect pattern of the super reach display is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

Here, the second special effect set by the second special effect setting process will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 65 (b).

In the game times corresponding to the second special effect, the reach display shifts to the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of all the symbol strings stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a. At a predetermined timing after shifting to the reach display, the symbol combination including the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a. After that, a message indicating switching to the high frequency support mode A (for example, “relief activation” or the like) is displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a is changed to green.

Returning to the description of FIG. 64, if a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the current game round does not correspond to the special deviation result, the process proceeds to step S2310. In step S2310, it is determined whether or not the ceiling is reached in this game round. When the ceiling is reached, an affirmative judgment is made in step S2310, and the process proceeds to step S2311. In step S2311, the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed. The details of the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2310, the effect setting process for complete disengagement is executed in step S2312. In the effect setting process for complete off, it is grasped whether or not reach occurs in this game round. When reach occurs, the effect setting process for generating reach is executed, and when reach does not occur, the effect setting process for non-reach is executed.

The effect setting process for the reach generation includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for the reach-compatible complete disconnection to be stopped and displayed and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation display mode of the symbol for the reach-compatible complete disconnection. It is roughly classified into a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) for determining.

In the stop result determination process for reach-corresponding complete deviation, the stop symbol is determined so as not to be any of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the variation display mode determination process for reach correspondence complete deviation, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time are acquired. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the game result in is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

The effect setting process for non-reach generation includes the stop result determination process for determining the stop display of the symbol combination for non-reach complete off and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the symbol for non-reach complete off. It is roughly classified into a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) for determining a variable display mode.

In the stop result determination process for non-reach complete disconnection, the stop symbol is determined so that it does not become any of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival. .. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the variation display mode determination process for non-reach complete deviation, the variation display pattern table for non-reach correspondence storage stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time is acquired. And the effect pattern corresponding to the game result in the type command is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

After executing any of the processes of steps S2304, S2308, S2309, S2311, and S2312, the process proceeds to step S2313. In step S2313, a process of outputting commands including stop result and effect pattern information determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908 to the display control device 410 as stop result commands and pattern commands is executed. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 in order to execute the effect in the current game round, based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process of step S1909, in the following step S1910, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game round, the process for starting the variation is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the effect pattern determined in the above steps S2304, S2308, S2309, S2311, and S2312, and the effect for the game round is started.

Here, the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling in step S2311 will be described. The effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is a normal setting process executed when the current gaming state is the first normal gaming state, and a normal gaming state other than the first normal gaming state (for example, the fourth). It consists of a special setting process that is executed when the game is in the normal game state.

The normal setting process constituting step S2311 includes a stop result determination process for determining a symbol combination for reaching the ceiling to be stopped and displayed, an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variable display mode for the symbol for reaching the ceiling. It is roughly classified into a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) to be determined.

In the stop result determination process in the normal setting process, the stop result in which the combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area. In the present embodiment, a symbol combination including the "CHANGE" symbol is defined as a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling.

When it reaches the ceiling, the result is notified via the reach display. In the variation display mode determination process, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game result in the type command are supported. Determine the effect pattern of normal reach display or super reach display. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 65 (b), a supplementary description will be given to the effect performed in the game times in which the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state.

In the game round in which the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the reach display shifts to the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of all the symbol rows stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a. .. At a predetermined timing after shifting to the reach display, the symbol combination including the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a. After that, a message indicating switching to the high frequency support mode A (for example, “relief activation” or the like) is displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a is changed to green.

That is, the effect when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is the same as the second special effect set in step S2309, and the end reference number set when the special deviation is triggered is until the ceiling is reached. It is configured so that the effect mode and the symbol combination displayed at the stop are the same as the case where the number of remaining games is matched or exceeded. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, or if the end reference number set as a trigger for the special deviation matches or exceeds the number of remaining games until the ceiling is reached. However, the second special effect will be executed, and the player will not be able to identify whether the effect (effect mode or symbol combination displayed as stopped) is a special effect or a ceiling arrival. ing.

The special setting process constituting step S2311 is a stop result determination process for determining a symbol combination to be stopped and displayed and an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variation display mode determination process for determining a variation display mode of the symbol. It is roughly divided into the production pattern determination process).

In this stop result determination process, the stop result in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal deviation is established is determined as the stop result of the main game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In addition, the result is notified via the reach display. In the variation display mode determination process, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game result in the type command are supported. Determine the production pattern that does not support reach. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

That is, when the ceiling is reached during the normal gaming state other than the first normal gaming state (specifically, the fourth normal gaming state), the same effect as in the case of complete non-reach correspondence is executed. This makes it difficult to identify the fact that the ceiling has been reached from the content of the production. In other words, if the player reaches the ceiling during the 4th normal game state, or if the player is completely out of the game (no big hit, special off, or reaching the ceiling), the effect corresponding to the complete off is achieved. It will be executed, and it is configured so that the player cannot identify whether the trigger is reaching the ceiling or completely off from the effect (effect mode or symbol combination displayed to be stopped).

Next, the flow of the game will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 (a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached after the end of the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation, and FIG. 66 (b) is the fourth timing chart triggered by the special deviation. It is a timing chart exemplifying the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached during the normal game state.

In the example shown in FIG. 66 (a), the timing of td1 during the first normal gaming state is specially off. This special deviation is the special deviation result A, and "20" times are set as the end reference number of times. The number of remaining times to reach the ceiling is higher than the number of termination standards set this time. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 66A, the ceiling is not reached during the fourth normal gaming state in which the transition is triggered by the special deviation.

The first special effect (see FIG. 65 (a)) is executed in the game times in which the special deviation occurs, and it is clearly stated that the transition to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A is triggered by the special deviation. Then, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is changed from white to blue with the transition to the fourth normal gaming state. Further, in the upper corner of the display screen 95a, a countdown display of the number of remaining games in the fourth normal game state is started, and the number of remaining games is clearly indicated.

At the timing of td2 when the number of game times executed during the fourth normal game state reaches the end reference number of times, the state shifts from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state. In line with this, the background color of the display screen 95a has been changed from blue to white.

After that, the game progressed without becoming a big hit, and when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reached the upper limit (ceiling) at the timing of td3, the first normal game state to the fourth It has shifted to the normal game state. In the final game round to reach the ceiling, the above-mentioned second special effect (see FIG. 65 (b)) is executed, and it is clearly shown to the player that the game has reached the ceiling. The background color of the display screen 95a is changed to green in accordance with the transition of the timing of td3 to the fourth normal gaming state.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 66 (b), the special deviation occurs at the timing of te1 during the first normal gaming state. This special deviation is the special deviation result B, and "40" times are set as the end reference number of times. The number of remaining times to reach the ceiling is higher than the number of termination standards set this time. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 66 (b), the ceiling may be reached during the fourth normal gaming state in which the transition is triggered by the special deviation. At the timing of te1, the second special effect is executed, and the background color of the display screen 95a is changed from white to green. However, on this display screen 95a, the countdown display of the number of remaining games is not executed, and the number of remaining games is not specified.

The number of game times executed after the end of the special game state at the timing of te2 in the fourth normal game state has reached the upper limit (ceiling). In this game round, the effect of normal deviation (complete deviation) that does not correspond to reach is executed, and the symbol combination corresponding to normal deviation (complete deviation) is stopped and displayed.

At the timing of te3 after that, the number of game times executed during the fourth normal game state has reached the end reference number, and the game state has shifted from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state. .. In the first game round that shifts to the first normal game state, the effect of normal deviation (complete deviation) that does not correspond to reach is executed, the symbol combination corresponding to complete deviation is stopped and displayed, and at the timing of te4 when the game round ends. It has quickly returned to the 4th normal gaming state. In this way, the background color on the display screen 95a remains green even during the continuous transition from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state.

According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, if the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a big hit result, high frequency support is provided. It shifts to the fourth normal game state corresponding to mode A. In the high frequency support mode A, the winning of the second operating port 92 occurs frequently, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to rescue the player. Here, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, even if a special deviation result is obtained, the game may shift to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. In this case, a special effect is executed. If the ceiling is reached during the 4th normal gaming state, which results in a special deviation result and the transition is triggered by the special deviation result, the special effect executed when the ceiling is reached during the 1st normal gaming state, and The same production is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ceiling look as if it were variable. Then, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the above-mentioned mimicry effect can be more preferably exhibited by making the ceiling arrival unclear without executing the above-mentioned effect for reaching the ceiling. .. If the set end reference number of times <the number of games until reaching the ceiling is set when the result is a special deviation and the state shifts to the fourth normal game state, an effect different from the above effect is executed. This is preferable in order to exert the above-mentioned mimicry effect.

In the case of high-frequency support mode A → low-frequency support mode → high-frequency support mode A, by continuing the display for suggesting a series of modes at least from the previous high-frequency support mode A to low-frequency support mode. , The above-mentioned mimicry effect can be more preferably exhibited.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the end reference number of times set in the case of a special deviation matches the remaining number of times until reaching the ceiling or is larger than the remaining number of times, the first normal gaming state The configuration is such that the same effect (second special effect) as when the ceiling is reached inside is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Only when the number of end reference times set in the case of special deviation is larger than the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling, the same effect as when reaching the ceiling during the first normal game state (second special effect) It may be configured to execute.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the end reference number of times set in the case of a special deviation matches the remaining number of times until reaching the ceiling or is larger than the remaining number of times, the first normal gaming state The configuration is such that the same effect (second special effect) as when the ceiling is reached inside is executed, but it is not always necessary to completely share both effects. If the end reference number of times set in the case of a special deviation matches the remaining number of times until reaching the ceiling, or if it is larger than the remaining number of times, or if the special deviation occurs during the first normal game state. It suffices if the effect to be executed and the effect to be executed when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state are the same as the latter, if the effect is recognized by the player. ..

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the structure is not specified to that effect, but it is also possible to specify the ceiling arrival. For example, a message indicating the arrival at the ceiling may be displayed on the display screen 95a, or the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 may be changed to clearly indicate the arrival at the ceiling.

<Modification example 4>
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state triggered by a special deviation, the configuration is such that the player returns to the fourth normal gaming state via the first normal gaming state. It is also possible to set the variable display time of the pattern of the display unit for the operating port in the first normal gaming state as the variable display time corresponding to the reach display. In this way, it is preferable to secure the variation display time of the game times in the first normal game state in order to execute the continuous effect (promotion effect) of the fourth normal game state in the game times.

<Modification 5>
In the fourth embodiment, the game count counter is reset (cleared to 0) at the end of the special game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game count counter may be reset at the time of transition to the special game state, or the game count counter may be reset during the special game state. It is also possible to configure the game count counter to be reset when the high frequency support mode ends.

<Modification 6>
The end reference number of times (20 times) set when the special deviation result A is obtained is less than the number of games executed from the end of the high frequency support mode B to the arrival at the ceiling, and when the special deviation result C is obtained. The end reference number of times (260 times) set in is specified to be larger than the number of games executed from the end of the high frequency support mode B to the arrival at the ceiling. That is, when the special deviation result A is obtained, whether or not the high frequency support mode A can be continued until the ceiling is reached depends on the timing, while when the special deviation result C is obtained, the high frequency support is supported until the ceiling is reached. The configuration is such that mode A can be continued. By changing this, the end reference number of times (20 times) set when the special deviation result A is obtained is less than the number of games (300 times) to reach the ceiling, and it is set when the special deviation result C is obtained. The end reference number of times (for example, 310 times) may be specified to be larger than the number of games to reach the ceiling (300 times).

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the player shifts to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. The structure is designed to curb excessive investment. In such a configuration, even if the player is rescued by shifting to the fourth normal gaming state, the game is delayed because it takes time to enjoy the benefits of the relief (such as throwing out a ball due to a big hit). The impression that you are doing can be strong. In the 4th normal gaming state, the number of winnings to the 2nd operating port 92 frequently occurs and the number of holdings increases, which makes it easier to shorten the variable display time. However, this 4th normal gaming state corresponds to the low probability mode. Therefore, since the probability of winning a jackpot based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 does not change, it is assumed that it will be difficult to completely dispel the above-mentioned concerns.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of game times executed after the end of the special gaming state (the jackpot gaming state or the V jackpot gaming state described later in the present embodiment) reaches the upper limit (ceiling), One of the features is that the above-mentioned concerns are resolved by shifting to a chance zone (a special gaming state described later) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is substantially increased. Hereinafter, a specific configuration for exerting the function will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetric gauge (see FIG. 6), but in the present embodiment, the game board unit 80B (game board 80aB) is a left-right asymmetric gauge. The arrangement of various game parts provided in the game area PE has been changed. Hereinafter, the game board unit 80B in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a front view of the game board unit 80B.

(Game board unit 80B)
The game board 80aB is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 80aB. A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83B, a through gate 84A, and the like are arranged in each opening. When the game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82A, and the variable winning device 83B, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry portion, and the detection result is used. Based on this, a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player.

Further, in the game board 80aB, a large number of game nails 87 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. .. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations such as the game nail 87 and the windmill, and the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are adjusted so as to generate a prize with an appropriate probability. An out port 86 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 80aB, and the game ball that has not entered the various ball entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

The actuating port unit 82A has a first actuating port 91A and a second actuating port 92A arranged directly under the first actuating port 91A, similarly to the actuating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. Have. Of the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, the latter is provided with an electric accessory 93A as an opening / closing assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). When the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is set to the low frequency support mode, it is practically impossible to win a prize in the second operating port 92A, and by shifting to the high frequency support mode, the second operating port 92A is reached. Will be allowed to win.

The game board 80aB is provided with a center frame 96A so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80aB, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE by the center frame 96A is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that detours from the left side. It is the same as the above-mentioned first embodiment in the point that it is done. However, in the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the left route can win the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, while the variable winning device 83B and the through gate 84A cannot win the prize. , The game ball launched to the right route can win the second operating port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83B, but the first operating port 91A cannot be won. The arrangement of 91A, the second operating port 92A, the variable winning device 83B, and the through gate 84A has been changed. It should be noted that the game ball launched to the left route may be configured so that the second operating port 92A cannot be won.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route according to the game state, the game can be advanced advantageously. By encouraging such technical intervention, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration according to the variable winning device 83B is different from the variable winning device 83 shown in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the specific configuration of the variable winning device 83B will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a schematic view showing the internal structure of the variable winning device 83B.

(Variable winning device 83B)
Inside the variable winning device 83B, a ball passage 332B through which a game ball flowing into the entrance (large winning opening 331B) of the variable winning device 83B passes is formed. The ball passage 332B branches into the first branch passage 334B and the second branch passage 335B at the intermediate position, and the flow destination of the game ball is directed to the first branch passage 334B side and the second branch passage 335B side in this branch portion. A switchable flow path switching member 336B is provided. The drive unit (specifically, the solenoid) for the flow path switching member 336B is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. The flow path switching member 336B stands by at a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 332B in a state where a drive signal is not input from the main control device 162 (non-excitation state), and is in a state where a drive signal is input (excitation state). ) Is configured to stand by at a retracted position where protrusion to the ball passage 332B is avoided.

In the state where the flow path switching member 336B is arranged at the protruding position, the inlet portion of the first branch passage 334B is blocked by the flow path switching member 336B. In this state, the inflow of the game balls that have reached the branch portion into the first branch passage 334B is avoided, and the game balls flow into the second branch passage 335B.

When the drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 336B is output from the main control device 162 and the drive unit is in the excited state, the flow path switching member 336B moves to the retracted position where the protrusion to the ball passage 332B is avoided. The entrance portion of the first branch passage 334B is opened. As a result, the inflow destination of the game ball is changed. In this state, the inflow of the game balls that have reached the branch portion into the second branch passage 335B is avoided, and the game balls flow into the first branch passage 334B. The movement of the flow path switching member 336B is predetermined by the result of a lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A.

An upstream side detection sensor 391d is arranged in a portion of the ball passage 332B on the upstream side of the branch portion, and a portion on the downstream side of the branch portion, specifically, the first branch passage 334B and the second branch passage. Downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are arranged in the branch passage 335B. The upstream side detection sensor 391d and the downstream side detection sensors 338B and 339B are connected to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 transfers to the variable winning device 83B based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 391d. The presence or absence of a prize is specified, and if a prize is generated, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Further, the remaining state of the game ball is monitored based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 391d and the downstream side detection sensors 338B and 339B.

In the main control device 162 shown in the present embodiment, it is specified that the ball has entered the first branch passage 334B by the detection information (detection signal) from the downstream side detection sensor 338B attached to the first branch passage 334B. If this is the case, the support mode after the end of the special game state (detailed in the V jackpot game state described later) is switched to the high frequency support mode (detailed in the high frequency support mode B). In the present embodiment, the first branch passage 334B corresponds to the "advantageous entry portion" or "V", and the winning of the first branch passage 334B is also referred to as "V winning".

(Reserved ball storage area)
Next, in the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the storage of the reserved information based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 69.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in the present embodiment is the first operating port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A. It has a holding area Ra for the second working port and a holding area Rb for the second working port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is won in the second operating port 92A. is doing.

The holding area Ra for the first operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the first operating port 91A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area to the fourth area. Further, the holding area Rb for the second operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second. Each numerical information (holding information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area → third area → fourth area.

In the present embodiment, when the holding information is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second working port (specifically, the first area). Is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When the hold information is not stored in the hold area Rb for the second operating port and the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first working port, the holding area for the first working port is stored. The hold information stored in Ra (specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the low probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low as the lottery mode in which a lottery is performed based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is relative to the probability of winning a jackpot. A high-probability mode is provided. In other words, the winning / failing table for the operating port to be referred to is switched according to the lottery mode. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first embodiment and the configuration are configured in that the winning / failing lottery for the operating port is executed with reference to the same winning / failing table in any gaming state. Is different. Further, the configuration is different from that of the first embodiment in that the configuration is such that different winning / failing tables are referred to depending on the winning destination of the game ball. Hereinafter, the hit / fail table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 70 (a), in the winning / failing table referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the random number values (that is, winning information) for winning the big hit are "7" and "307". , "507", a total of three. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the big hit. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the deviation (normal deviation). As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/200.

As shown in FIG. 70 (b), in the winning / failing table referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the random number values (that is, winning information) for winning the big hit are "7" and "307". , "507", a total of three. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the big hit. In addition, in this pass / fail table, a total of 60 pieces of "5", "15", "25", "35", "45" ... "575", "585", "595" correspond to special hits. ing. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to either the big hit or the special hit correspond to the deviation (normal deviation). As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/200 and the special hit probability is 1/10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery result based on the winning of the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A does not include the special deviation shown in the first embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A may be configured to be a special loss, or the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A may be a special loss. It may be configured so that it may be a special deviation in any of the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A and the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A.

Next, a distribution table for each of the actuation ports 91A and 92A will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

(Distribution table for operating port)
In the distribution table for the first operating port 91A, a total of 27 of the values of the type counters C2 of "0" to "29", "0" to "26", correspond to the 6R jackpot, and "27". ~ "29", a total of 3 pieces, correspond to the 10R jackpot. That is, when a big hit is won, about 90% of it becomes a 6R big hit, and the remaining 10% becomes a 10R big hit.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second operating port 92A, a total of 15 of the values of the type counters C2 of "0" to "29", "0" to "14", correspond to the 6R jackpot. A total of 15 pieces from "15" to "29" correspond to the 10R jackpot. That is, when the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the 6R jackpot and the 10R jackpot is 50%, respectively.

For the 6R jackpot and the 10R jackpot, there is a difference in the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode. The number of rounds in the former is "6", while the number of rounds in the latter is "10". In other words, if you win the 10R jackpot, you have a chance to increase the number of balls you have at once.

Further, in the case of a 6R jackpot and a 10R jackpot, a gaming state in which the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B after the end of the jackpot gaming state (first special gaming state or second special gaming state). Move to. This high-frequency support mode B-compatible game state is continued until the number of game times executed after the end of the jackpot game state, specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A reaches the end reference number, and the end reference number is reached. When is reached, the support by the high frequency support mode B ends. In the case of a 6R jackpot, "6 times" is set as the end reference number, and in the case of a 10R jackpot, "100 times" is set as the end reference number.

If the above special hit is achieved in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the game shifts to the special winning gaming state, the variable winning device 83B is opened for a predetermined time, and the variable winning device 83B is used. The flow path switching member 336B moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, a prize (V prize) to the advantageous ball portion 334B is allowed. Then, when a prize (V prize) is generated in the advantageous ball-entry portion 334B, a 5RV jackpot is obtained, and after the end of the special hit gaming state, the game is configured to shift to the V jackpot gaming state (FIG. 72 (a)). reference).

After the end of the V jackpot game state, the game state shifts to the high frequency support mode B compatible game state. This high-frequency support mode B-compatible game state is continued until the number of game times executed after the end of the V jackpot game state, specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A reaches the end reference number, and the end reference When the number of times is reached, the support by the high frequency support mode B ends. In the case of a 5RV jackpot, "6 times" is set as the end reference number of times.

Here, in the present embodiment, during the game state (first special game state or second special game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode B, the game times based on the winning of the second operating port 92A are the main. Even after the game progresses in this way, the end reference number of times is reached, and the game state is changed to the game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the game times related to the second operating port 92A are continued by the remaining reserved amount related to the second operating port 92A. It will be executed.

In the present embodiment, among the game states in which the game is executed based on the winning of the operating port, the game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and excluding the special game state described later is "normal". It is called "game state". Further, the special hit game state, the V jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state are referred to as "special game states".

In other words, in the case of a 5RV jackpot or a 6R jackpot, the probability of winning is raised for a total of 10 times, which is the end reference number of times (6 times) + the upper limit of the number of reserved numbers related to the second operating port 92A (4 times). It becomes a stochastic state. During this time, the probability of a big hit or a special hit is about 65%. In addition, in the case of a 10R jackpot, a total of 10 times, which is the end reference number of times (100 times) + the upper limit of the storage number of the reserved number related to the second operating port 92A (4 times), is a high probability state in which the hit probability is raised. Become. During this period, the probability of becoming a big hit or a special hit is almost 100% (see FIG. 72 (b)).

In the present embodiment, when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A (third special game state). In that respect, it has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment. In the game state corresponding to this high frequency support mode A, the number of games executed after the end of the open / close execution mode, specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A is the end reference number of times (time reduction number: 1 time in this embodiment). ), And when the end reference number of times is reached, the game state shifts to the low frequency support mode compatible game state (normal game state).

In the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A that shifts when the player reaches the ceiling, the total number of times of the end reference number (1 time) + the upper limit of the storage number of the reserved number related to the second operating port 92A (4 times) is hit. It becomes a high probability state (chance zone) where the probability is raised. During this period, the probability of winning a big hit or a special hit is about 40%, and the winning probability will be temporarily increased by reaching the ceiling.

In addition, in this embodiment, "200 times" is set for the number of games to reach the ceiling, and when the game shifts to the game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A by reaching the ceiling, The ceiling is reset when the game state ends (the game count counter is cleared to 0). That is, it is configured to shift to the above chance zone in a cycle of 200 games.

The high-frequency support mode in the present embodiment is also roughly divided into a high-frequency support mode A that shifts when the ceiling is reached and a high-frequency support mode B that shifts when a jackpot or V prize is won. The difference is provided so that the support by the electric accessory 93A is given preferential treatment over the high frequency support mode A. However, for the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling, the end reference number of times is one, and when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A reaches the upper limit, it becomes unnecessary to launch more game balls. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a large increase in investment in a situation where the relief function by reaching the ceiling is exhibited.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 73 and 74, the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing, normal processing) executed by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 is mainly different from the first embodiment. explain.

(Timer interrupt processing)
As shown in FIG. 73, regarding the timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment, the V prize processing in step S2406 is added to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) shown in the first embodiment. ing. Although the details will be described later, the presence or absence of winning (V winning) in the advantageous winning portion 334B of the variable winning device 83B is monitored by this V winning process.

(Normal processing)
As shown in FIG. 74, in the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S2501. In the following step S2502, the variation type counter CS is updated, and in step S2503, the game times control process is executed. A part of the game times control process in step S2503 (process for switching the support mode) has been changed from the first embodiment. Details of the support mode switching process in this embodiment will be described later.

After that, the transition process to the special hit gaming state is executed in step S2504, the V distribution setting process is executed in step S2505, and the transition process to the big hit gaming state is executed in step S2506. Details of each of the processes of steps S2504 to S2506 will be described later.

In the following step S2507, the through gate control process is executed, and in step S2508, the electric service support process is executed. Then, in step S2509, the game ball launch control process is executed. Since each of the processes of steps S2507 to S2509 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S2510, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not one cycle (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated (steps S251 to S2512).

Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75, a process for switching the support mode executed as a part of the game times control process in step S2503 will be described.

(Process for switching support mode)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support modes A and B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the game round this time is the game round related to the second operating port 92A. If a negative determination is made in step S2602, the process for switching the support mode is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2603.

In step S2603, the continuation number counter of various counter areas 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2604, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, the process proceeds to step S2605, and the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag or high-frequency support mode B flag) stored in the various flag storage areas 435 is cleared. This switching process ends. By clearing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode of the electric accessory 93A is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S2601, if a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2606. In step S2606, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter stored in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 has reached the upper limit (corresponding to 200 game times). If a negative determination is made in step S2606, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, the process proceeds to step S2607.

In step S2607, "1" is set in the continuation count counter. Then, in the following step S2608, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and the switching process is terminated. That is, when the ceiling is reached, the support mode is promptly switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A without going through the special gaming state.

Next, the transition process to the special hit gaming state in step S2504 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 76 and 77.

(Transition process to special hit game state)
As shown in FIG. 76, in the process of shifting to the special hit game state, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. The jackpot game flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, is stored at the start of the jackpot game, and is erased when the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed (the jackpot game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S2702, and it is determined whether or not the special hit game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special hit game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435. The special winning game flag is a flag indicating that the special winning game is being executed.

If it is determined that the special winning game is not being executed (the special winning game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S2703, and it is determined whether or not the special winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435. .. That is, it is determined whether or not the winning state is a special hit. The special hit flag is a flag stored in various flag storage areas 435 when a special hit is obtained in the winning / failing lottery in the above-mentioned game round control process.

If it is determined that the special hit flag is stored, it is determined in step S2704 whether or not it is the end timing of the game round. If it is not the end timing of the game round, the process of shifting to the special hit game state is terminated as it is. Further, even if an affirmative determination (determination that the big hit game is being executed) is made in step S2701 and a negative determination (determination that the special hit flag is not stored) is made in step S2703, this special hit game is also made. End the transition process to the state.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the game round, the start process of the special hit game is executed in step S2705. In the start processing, the special winning game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435, and it is checked that the variable winning device 83B is in the closed state before the start of the special winning game. Further, in the present start process, the opening period setting process for waiting without starting the opening of the variable winning device 83B at the start of the special winning game is executed. In the opening period setting process, a value corresponding to the opening period is set in the opening timer counter provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. This set value (counter value) is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

In the following step S2706, a process of setting "1" in the round counter RC1 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is executed to set the number of times the round game is executed in the special hit game.

In the following step S2707, an opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 74). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

In the following step S2708, after executing the external signal setting process, the transition process to the special hit game state is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special hit signal provided on the external output terminal board 213 is set to the special hit signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the special hit signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the special hit signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 is special in the management control device. It is possible to grasp that a hit has occurred.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination (determination that the special hit game is being executed) is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2709, and it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the transition process to the special hit game state is terminated as it is.

If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2710, and a special hit opening / closing process for opening / closing the large winning opening 331B of the variable winning device 83B is executed. Here, the opening / closing process for special hits will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77.

(Opening and closing processing for special hits)
In the special hit opening / closing process, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 331B of the variable winning device 83B is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the driving unit (variable winning driving unit) for the shutter 333B of the variable winning device 83B. When the large winning opening 331B is not open, it is determined in step S2802 whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", and in step S2803, the value of the first timer counter TC1 of the RAM 404 is "0". It is determined whether or not it is.

If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" or the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", the main opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" and the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S2804 for the shutter 333B in order to open the variable winning device 83B. The drive unit of is in the drive state.

In the following step S2805, "5000" (corresponding to 10 sec) is set in the first timer counter TC1 as the opening time of the variable winning device 83B. Then, in step S2806, the processing for setting the upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning device 83B in the special winning game is performed. Specifically, "10" is set in the first winning counter PC1 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

After that, in step S2807, the release command is set, and the opening / closing process for this special hit is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 74).

Returning to the explanation of step S2801, if it is determined in step S2801 that the large winning opening 331B is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S2808, and whether or not the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0" is determined. judge. When the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", it is determined in step S2809 whether or not the variable winning device 83B has been won. If no prize has been awarded, the opening / closing process for this special hit is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a prize has been won, a prize command is set in step S2810. This winning command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in the external output processing in the normal processing (FIG. 74). In the following step S2811, the value of the first winning counter PC1 is subtracted by "1". Then, in step S2812, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning counter PC1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the opening / closing process for this special hit is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2812 or step S2808, it means that the closing condition of the large winning opening 331B is satisfied. In this case, in step S2813, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is set to the non-drive state in order to close the large winning opening 331B.

In the following step S2814, the value of the round counter RC1 is subtracted by "1", and the ending start process is executed in step S2815. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the special hit game is set. Specifically, the ending standby time stored in advance in the ROM 403 is set in the ending timer counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The value of the timer counter for the ending is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

Then, in step S2816, after setting the ending command, the main opening / closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in the external output processing in the normal processing (FIG. 74).

Returning to the description of the transition process to the special hit gaming state of FIG. 76, after executing the special hit opening / closing process of step S2710, it is determined in step S2711 whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". do. Further, in step S2712, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the process of shifting to the special winning game state is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the end processing of the special winning game is executed in step S2713, and then the special winning game state is entered. Ends the migration process. Here, the end processing of the special winning game in step S2713 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78.

(End processing of special hit game)
In the end processing of the special hit game, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. This V winning flag is stored in the V winning process in step S2406 in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 73.

Here, the V-winning process in step S2406 and the V-distribution setting process in step S2505 in the normal process as the process related to the V-winning will be described. First, the V distribution setting process in step S307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 79.

(V distribution setting process)
In the V distribution setting process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the special winning game. When it is the start timing, “500” (corresponding to 1 sec) is set in the second timer counter TC2 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 in step S3002. The value (counter value) set in the second timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

In the following step S3003, "1" is set in the distribution number counter HC provided in the various counter areas 434. The data value (counter value) stored in the distribution count counter HC is for the MPU 402 to specify the number of operations of the flow path switching member 336B.

If a negative determination is made in step S3001, or after the process of step S3003 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, by grasping the drive state of the drive unit for the distribution member, whether or not the flow path switching member 336B is located at the retracted position which is the distribution side (V winning side) to the advantageous ball entry unit 334B. Is determined. If the flow path switching member 336B is not located in the retracted position, that is, is located in the protruding position, the process proceeds to step S3005 to determine whether or not the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". .. If the value of the third timer counter TC3 is not "0", the main distribution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0", it is determined in step S3006 whether or not the value of the distribution number counter HC is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S3006, that is, if the value of the distribution count counter HC is "1", the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the retracted position (V winning side) in step S3007. In the following step S3008, "4000" (corresponding to 8 sec) is set in the third timer counter TC3. After the execution of step S3008 or when a positive determination is made in step S3006, the main distribution setting process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S3004, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3004, that is, when the flow path switching member 336B is located at the retracted position (V winning side), the third timer counter TC3 is set in step S3009. It is determined whether or not the value is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the period for causing the flow path switching member 336B to stand by at the retracted position (V winning side) has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3009, the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the protruding position in step S3010, and then the value of the distribution number counter HC is subtracted by "1" in step S3011. After the execution of step S3011 or when a negative determination is made in step S3009, the main distribution setting process is terminated.

Next, the V winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Processing for V prize)
In the V winning process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If the V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3102, and whether or not a V winning has occurred based on the detection state of the V winning detection sensor 338B provided in the variable winning device 83B (the detection sensor). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of 338B) is determined.

If it is determined that the V prize has occurred, it is determined in step S3103 whether or not the V prize is valid. The valid period is a predetermined period, and for example, a period during which the special hit game is executed or a V-side distribution period of the flow path switching member 336B is set as the valid period. If it is determined that the period is not valid, the process proceeds to step S3104, an error command is set as a transmission target to the notification / effect control device 140, and then the V winning process is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 74), and the notification / effect control device 140 controls the display so that a predetermined error notification is executed. It controls the device 410, the lamp unit 26, and the speaker unit 29.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is valid, the process proceeds to step S3105, and the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S3106, a V winning command is set. The V prize command is a command for notifying the notification / effect control device 140 that a V prize has occurred, and the set V prize command is notified / effect by the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 74). It is transmitted to the control device 140. In the notification / effect control device 140, when a V prize command is received, the symbol display device 95, the lamp unit 26, and the speaker unit 29 perform an effect of notifying the occurrence of the V prize or congratulating the V prize. The display control device 410 and the like are controlled so as to be performed.

After the execution of step S3106, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3101 or a negative determination is made in step S3102, the V winning process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the end processing of the special hit game of FIG. 78, if it is determined in step S2901 that the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2902 and the various flags of the RAM 404 are stored. Set the V winning flag in the storage area 435. The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 402 to know that the V jackpot game should be started.

In the following step S2903, a process of erasing the V winning flag, the special winning flag, and the special winning game flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 is executed. In the following step S2904, the V winning command is set, and then the end processing of this special winning game is terminated. The V winning command is a command for notifying the notification / effect control device 140 that the V jackpot game is started and the type of the V jackpot game, and the set V winning command is a normal process (FIG. 74). It is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 by external output processing. The notification / effect control device 140 controls the display control device 410 and the like so that when the V winning command is received, the effect of notifying that the V jackpot game is started is executed by the symbol display device 95 and the like. ..

On the other hand, if a negative determination (determination that the V winning flag is not stored) is made in step S2901, the special winning flag and the special winning game flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are determined in step S2905. Is deleted, and then the end processing of this special hit game is terminated.

Next, the transition process of step S2506 to the jackpot gaming state in the normal process (FIG. 74) will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 81. Of the various processes included in this transition process, the same processes as those included in the above-mentioned transition process to the special hit game state will be simplified as appropriate.

(Transition process to the jackpot game state)
In the process of shifting to the jackpot game state, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the special hit game is being executed. If it is determined that the special hit game is being executed, the transition process to the main jackpot game state is terminated, while if it is determined that the special hit game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S3202 and the jackpot game is started. Determine if it is running.

If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed, it is determined in step S3203 whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. That is, it is determined whether or not the V jackpot game should be started. If it is determined that the V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3204, and it is determined whether or not various jackpot flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 435. That is, it is determined whether or not to start a normal jackpot game that is not a V jackpot game.

If it is determined that the various jackpot flags are not stored, the transition process to the main jackpot gaming state is terminated, while if it is determined that the various jackpot flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S3205 and the game times. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of. If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the game round, the process of shifting to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3205 that it is the end timing of the game round, or if it is determined in step S3203 that the V winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3206 to execute the start processing of the jackpot game. In the start process, the jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and the opening period setting process is executed.

In the following step S3207, the round setting process is executed. Specifically, it is determined which of the 6R jackpot flag, the 10R jackpot flag, and the 5RV jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435. If it is determined that these flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S3208, and the round counter RC1 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is set. Specifically, when the 6R jackpot flag is stored, "6" is set in the round counter RC1, and when the 10R jackpot flag is stored, "10" is set in the round counter RC1 and 5RV. When the jackpot flag is stored, "5" is set in the round counter RC1.

After the execution of step S3207, the opening command is set in step S3208, the external signal setting process is further executed in step S3209, and then the transition process to the main jackpot gaming state is completed.

If it is determined in step S3202 that the jackpot game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3210 to determine whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the transition process to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3211, and a jackpot opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot 331B of the variable winning device 83B is executed. In the jackpot opening / closing process, when the jackpot 331B of the variable winning device 83B is closed, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is set to the driving state on condition that the round counter RC1 is "1" or more. This opens the big winning opening 331B. If the large winning opening 331B is open, a predetermined time (30 sec) has passed since the opening of the large winning opening 331B, or a predetermined number (10) of game balls have been won. Is a condition, the driving of the driving unit for the shutter 333B is stopped, and the large winning opening 331B is closed.

After executing the jackpot opening / closing process in step S3211, it is determined in step S3212 whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is “0”. Further, in step S3213, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the transition process to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the big hit game is executed in step S3214, and then the main big hit game. End the transition process to the state. Here, the transition process at the end of the jackpot game in step S3214 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Transition processing at the end of the jackpot game)
In the transition process at the end of the jackpot game, first, in step S3301, the high frequency support mode B flag is set in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. As a result, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is switched to the high frequency support mode B.

In the following step S3302, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a 6R jackpot or a 5RV jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 6R jackpot flag or the 5RV jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303, and "6" is set in the continuation count counter of various counter areas 434. As a result, the high-frequency support mode B is continued until the number of games executed after the jackpot game ends (specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A) reaches six.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3302, that is, if the jackpot game this time is triggered by a 10R jackpot, the process proceeds to step S3304, and "100" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode B is continued until the number of games executed after the jackpot game ends (specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A) reaches 100 times.

After executing each process of steps S3303 and S3304, the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, the game count counters in various counter areas 434 are reset (cleared to 0). After that, the process proceeds to step S3306, the various flags for the jackpot gaming state stored in the various flag storage areas 435 are erased, and the transition process at the end of the jackpot is completed.

(About the basic game flow)
Next, the basic game flow of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each gaming state.

As described above, in the normal gaming state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it is not possible to expect a prize in the second operating port 92A. Therefore, the player launches a game ball on the left route (so-called left-handed) and plays a game aiming at winning a prize in the first operating port 91A.

When a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A, a winning / failing lottery is executed based on the winning. If a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot is achieved by the hit / fail lottery, the variable winning device 83B shifts to the jackpot game state in which the variable winning device 83B is opened / closed over a plurality of rounds. Since only the game ball flowing down the right route can win the variable winning device 83B, the player increases the amount of rotation operation of the game ball launching handle 41 and launches the game ball to the right route. Will be done (so-called right-handed). After the end of the jackpot game state, the player shifts to the above chance zone (hereinafter referred to as a special game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In the special gaming state, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the first special gaming state in which the reference number of end of the game rounds related to the second operating port 92A is "6" and the electric accessory The support mode by 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the second special game state in which the end reference number of game times related to the second operating port 92A is "100" is included, and the big hit triggered by the 6R big hit. After the game state ends, the game shifts to the first special game state, and after the big hit game state triggered by the 10R jackpot ends, the game shifts to the second special game state.

In the first special gaming state, since the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B, it becomes easy to generate a prize in the second operating port 92A. Only the game ball flowing down the right route can win a prize in the second operating port 92A. Therefore, at the time of transition to the first special game state, the notification prompting the player to continue right-handed even after the end of the big hit game is executed.

The first special gaming state and the second special gaming state will be continued until the number of times the game is executed related to the second operating port 92A reaches the above-mentioned end reference number (6 times or 100 times), which has already been described. As described above, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the probability of becoming a special win is higher than that of the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, and the special winning is included. In addition, the actual winning probability will increase significantly from 1/200 to 1/10.

Further, in the special gaming state, while the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, the second operating port 92A is held by holding the second operating port 92A acquired during the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state. The fourth special gaming state in which the gaming round according to the above is executed is included. If neither the big hit nor the special hit is won in the game times in the 1st special game state or the 2nd special game state (when all the results are lost), the game shifts to the 4th special game state. ..

In the present embodiment, the second operating port 92A has a holding function in which the storage upper limit of the number of holdings is four. Therefore, if four hold information related to the second operating port 92A is stored at the end of the high frequency support mode B, the second operating port 92A is reached four times even after the high frequency support mode B ends. It will be possible to receive a winning or losing lottery based on the winning prize. That is, even if the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode and the game is internally in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state is as long as the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A at the end of the high-frequency support mode B. Is extended (continued). By the way, the probability (continuation rate) of a special hit or a big hit in the winning / failing lottery related to the second operating port 92A is about 35%. The total continuation rate including the game times executed during the first special game state is about 65%, and the total continuation rate including the game times executed during the second special game state is almost 100%. Become.

When all four game times in the fourth special game state are out of the normal game and all the reserved information related to the second operating port 92A is exhausted, the game returns to the normal game state. That is, if the hold related to the second operating port 92A is used up without any special hit or big hit, the special gaming state is demoted to the normal gaming state. That is, the actual winning probability decreases from 1/10 to 1/200. In this case, the player returns the launch mode of the game ball to left-handed, and again aims at the big hit based on the winning of the first operating port 91A.

On the other hand, when a special hit is made in any of the first special game state, the second special game state, and the fourth special game state, the game shifts to the special hit game state. In the special winning game state, the special winning game in which the variable winning device 83B is opened and closed is executed in the high-frequency winning mode described above. Since only the game ball flowing down the right route can win the variable winning device 83B, when a special hit occurs, the player strikes right to play the game. Then, when the V winning is generated in the special winning game, after the special winning game is completed, the variable winning device 83B shifts to the V jackpot game state in which the variable winning device 83B is opened and closed over a plurality of rounds (5 rounds).

By the way, when the special winning game is executed in the high frequency winning mode, the opening time of the variable winning device 83B and the period during which the V winning is allowed are longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball, and go to the right route. As long as the game ball is continuously fired, it is possible to easily generate a V prize.

After the V jackpot gaming state is completed, the process shifts to the first special gaming state. Further, when a big hit occurs in any of the first special game state, the second special game state, and the fourth special game state, the game shifts to the big hit game state. After the jackpot gaming state ends, if the jackpot gaming state is triggered by a 6R jackpot, the game shifts to the first special gaming state, and if the jackpot gaming state is triggered by a 10R jackpot, the second special game is played. Move to the state. In this way, by repeating big hits and special hits during the special game state, the player has a chance to greatly increase the number of balls he has.

In the special game state shown in the present embodiment, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode A, and the third special game in which the reference number of times of the end of the game times related to the second operating port 92A becomes "1". The state is included. In the third special gaming state, since the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A, it becomes easy to generate a prize in the second operating port 92A. Only the game ball flowing down the right route can win a prize in the second operating port 92A. Therefore, at the time of transition to the third special gaming state, a notification prompting the player to strike right is executed.

Here, the ceiling is reset by resetting the game count counter when the V jackpot game state or the jackpot game state ends. Then, in the first normal game state, when the executed game times reach the ceiling, the game shifts to the third special game state.

The third special gaming state will be continued until the number of times the game is executed related to the second operating port 92A reaches the above-mentioned end reference number (1 time), but as described above, the second operating port 92A In the lottery based on the winning prize, the lottery based on the winning prize in the first operating port 91A is given preferential treatment so that the probability of winning a special win is higher, and the actual winning probability including the special winning is 1 /. It will increase significantly from 200 to 1/10.

If a special hit is made during the third special hit game state, the game shifts to the special hit game state, and when a V prize is generated during this special hit game state, the player shifts to the V big hit game state. Then, after the end of the V jackpot gaming state, the state shifts to the first special gaming state. Further, if a big hit occurs during the third special game state, the game shifts to the above-mentioned big hit game state, and after the end of the big hit game state, the game shifts to the first special game state or the second special game state.

On the other hand, if neither the big hit nor the special hit is won in the game times in the third special game state (when all the results are lost), the game shifts to the fourth special game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the second operating port 92A has a holding function in which the storage upper limit of the number of holdings is four. Therefore, if four hold information related to the second operating port 92A is stored at the end of the high frequency support mode A, the second operating port 92A is reached four times even after the high frequency support mode A ends. It will be possible to receive a winning or losing lottery based on the winning prize. That is, even if the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode and the game is internally in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state is as long as the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A at the end of the high-frequency support mode A. Is extended (continued). By the way, the probability (continuation rate) of a special hit or a big hit in the winning / failing lottery related to the second operating port 92A is about 35%. Then, the total continuation rate including the game times executed during the third special game state is about 40%.

When all four game times in the fourth special game state are missed and all the reserved information related to the second operating port 92A is exhausted, the normal game state is restored. That is, if the hold related to the second operating port 92A is used up without any special hit or big hit, the special gaming state is demoted to the normal gaming state. In this case, the player returns the launch mode of the game ball to left-handed, and again aims at the big hit based on the winning of the first operating port 91A.

When the game ball is launched to the right route, the winning of the first operating port 91A is avoided. However, there is a possibility that the hold information related to the first operating port 91A acquired during the normal gaming state remains immediately after the transition to the special gaming state, and the holding information related to the second operating port 92A has not been acquired. There is. Although the hold information related to the second operating port 92A is preferentially digested over the holding information related to the first operating port 91A, the holding information related to the second operating port 92A has been acquired. If not, the game times related to the first operating port 91A can be executed in the special game state. Regarding the lottery related to the second operating port 92A, although the difference in advantage is provided so as to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery related to the first operating port 91A, the game times related to the second operating port 92A are executed. It is feared that the termination of the high frequency support mode without being performed or being executed insufficiently will be a great disadvantage to the player. In this respect, in this embodiment, as described above, the reference number of times for ending the high frequency support mode is set for each operating port, and the game times related to the first operating port 91A are executed during the special gaming state. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent the high frequency support mode from ending before the game round according to the second operating port 92A is executed.

In the present embodiment, in the chance zone (special game state), the special effect for the chance zone, which is executed over a plurality of game times, is executed. Here, a configuration that is a prerequisite for the special effect for the chance zone, specifically, a preliminary confirmation process that is executed as a part of the winning process for the operating port (see step S2403 in FIG. 73) in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162. This will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84.

(Preliminary confirmation process)
In the pre-confirmation process, first, the pass / fail confirmation process is performed with reference to the hit / fail determination table for the operating port in step S3401 and the value of the hit random number counter C1 acquired in step S2403. Specifically, it is determined whether the reserved information acquired this time corresponds to a big hit and a special hit.

If the jackpot is supported, an affirmative judgment is made in step S3402, the process proceeds to step S3403, the RAM 404 stores information indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot, and the hold command scheduled to be transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 is used. Memorize information indicating that it is a big hit.

If a special hit is supported, a negative determination is made in step S3402 and an affirmative determination is made in step S3404, and the process proceeds to step S3405. In step S3405, the RAM 404 stores information indicating that it is a special hit, and the notification / effect control device 140 stores the information indicating that it is a special hit in the hold command scheduled to be transmitted.

If the deviation is dealt with, a negative determination is made in each of step S3402 and step S3404, and the prior confirmation process is terminated as it is.

In the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, it is possible to grasp in advance from the information included in the hold command received from the main control device 162 that a big hit or a special hit will occur.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of games executed after the special gaming state (specifically, the jackpot gaming state or the V jackpot gaming state) ends, the number of games executed reaches the upper limit (ceiling). 3 It will shift to the special game state. The third special gaming state corresponds to the high frequency support mode A, and the special effect for the chance zone can be achieved by acquiring the hold information related to the second operating port 92A during the third special gaming state. It can be executed from the 3 special game state to the 4th special game state.

The special effects for the chance zone are the opening part that encourages the player to launch the game ball toward the second operating port 92A, and the game times that are executed in the third special game state and the fourth special game state that shifts immediately afterwards. It is composed of three parts: a main part in which the content of the production is determined based on all the game results of the above, and an ending part that functions as a connection to the special game state after the result of the result is clearly stated. The opening part starts at the timing when the game round that reaches the ceiling ends, shifts to the main part at the timing when the first game round in the third special game state starts, and the ending part at the timing when the game round ends. Move to. After that, the ending part ends at the timing when the fourth special gaming state ends and the normal gaming state shifts.

In this embodiment, a device is devised to prevent the ending part from becoming excessively long while sufficiently securing the execution time of the main part of the special effect for the chance zone. Specifically, for the game times related to the second operating port 92A executed after the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the ceiling, the special variation display is performed as a table for determining the variation display time. The time table is referenced. Specifically, the variation display time table for determining the variation display time of the game times related to the second operating port 92A executed immediately after reaching the ceiling is the variation referred to when determining the variation display time in other cases. It is provided separately from the display time table.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 85, “60 sec” is set as the variable display time in the game round (for example, the 201st game round) related to the second operating port 92A executed immediately after reaching the ceiling. In the four game times (for example, the 202nd to 205th game times) related to the second operating port 92A (the same number as the holding upper limit related to the second operating port 92A), the variable display time is set to "0. "5 sec" is set. That is, the variable display time of the game times related to the second operating port 92A executed immediately after reaching the ceiling is longer than the sum of the variable display times of the four game times executed thereafter. This is a device for securing the playback time of the moving image, reducing the amount of data for the special effect for the chance zone, avoiding the shortage of hold related to the second operating port 92A, and suppressing the extension of the ending part.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the flow of the game at the time of entering the chance zone will be supplementarily described. FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when entering the chance zone, and illustrates a case where a special hit is made in the chance zone.

(Flow of the game when entering the chance zone)
At the timing of tf1 during the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the number of games executed after the end of the special gaming state is the 199th game round, and at the timing of tf2, the number of games after the end of the special gaming state is 200. The game round, which is the second round to reach the ceiling, has started. All of these game times correspond to the out-of-game results. In the game that reaches the ceiling, the symbol combinations (“1” symbol, “3” symbol, “4” symbol) corresponding to the ceiling arrival are stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a (on the effective line) of the symbol display device 95. It is clearly stated to the player that the player will move to the chance zone when the ceiling is reached.

The support mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode A at the timing of tf3 when the game round to reach the ceiling is completed, and the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is for the chance zone corresponding to the chance zone (third special game state). The opening part of the special production will start. Specifically, at the timing of tf3, the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is "0", and the game in the chance zone is in a waiting state until a prize is generated in the second operating port 92A. .. In the above opening part, "BONUS confirmed if the fairy can be caught" is displayed on the display screen 95a as a message indicating the start of the chance zone, and the BGM is switched to the one corresponding to the chance zone. Then, at the timing of tf3, a message (right-handed notification) prompting the launch of the game ball toward the right route is started.

After that, at the timing of tf4 when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs, the special production for the chance zone shifts from the opening part to the main part. As a result, on the display screen 95a, the fairy character and the character of the girl chasing the fairy character are displayed. In the present embodiment, the final display (result display) in the main part is determined after the elapse of a predetermined waiting time after shifting to the main part. That is, it is determined at a predetermined timing in the main part whether to display the result indicating that the fairy has been successfully captured or the result display indicating that the fairy has failed to be captured.

In the example shown in FIG. 86, the number of holds related to the second operating port 92A has reached the upper limit at the timing of tf5 in the main part, specifically, at the timing before the predetermined timing, and four of these holds. Eye hold corresponds to a special hit. Therefore, at the end of the main part, a result display indicating that the fairy has been successfully captured is executed, and it is clearly indicated that the player has been hit. The above-mentioned right-handed notification ends at the timing of tf5 when the number of holdes related to the second operating port 92A reaches the upper limit.

After that, at the timing of tf6 when the game round in the third special game state ends, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and the special effect for the chance zone shifts to the ending part. When the electric accessory 93A is in the open state at the timing of tf6, it is forcibly switched to the closed state, and further winning of the second operating port 92A is avoided.

After the transition from the third special gaming state to the fourth special gaming state, the remaining hold relating to the second operating port 92A is promptly exhausted at the timing of tf6, the timing of tf7, the timing of tf8, and the timing of tf9. In the example shown in FIG. 86, the last game round related to the second operating port 92A corresponds to the special hit, and the game shifts to the special hit game state at the timing of tf10 when the game round ends. At the timing of this tf10, the special effect for the chance zone (specifically, the ending part) ends, and the effect for the special hit game state is executed.

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, high-frequency support is provided when the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a winning result. It shifts to the third special game state corresponding to mode A. In the high frequency support mode A, it is possible to win a prize in the second operating port 92A, and in the determination (lottery) based on the winning in the second operating port 92A, not only the big hit result but also the special winning result can be obtained. Therefore, the advantage (winning probability) in the determination is greatly increased. In other words, by reaching the ceiling, it will shift to a chance zone with a higher advantage than the previous gaming state. In this way, if the configuration is such that the player shifts to the chance zone when the ceiling is reached, the player's willingness to play can be appropriately stimulated. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotonicization of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game.

When the ball reaches the ceiling, a prize is awarded to the second operating port 92A, which not only suppresses the decrease in the number of balls held, but also raises the probability of transition to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state or special hit gaming state). Will be. In such a configuration, even if the stay period in the high frequency support mode A is shortened, the benefit can be suitably exhibited, so that the extension of the game after reaching the ceiling can be suitably suppressed.

The number of games that reach the ceiling is reset when the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling ends. Such a configuration is preferable in order to realize a configuration in which the ceiling is shallow and the benefits of the ceiling are reduced, and a weak ceiling function is exhibited in a short cycle. That is, it is preferable in suppressing the monotonicization of the game.

The number of games related to the end reference number of times is counted when the number of games related to the second operating port 92A is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being poorly enjoyed.

The probability of a special winning result in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A is 1/10, and the upper limit number of stored information and the above-mentioned end reference number of times in the holding area Rb for the second operating port The sum of and is specified to be the same as the reciprocal of the above probability. As described above, if the upper limit of storage and the reference number of terminations are specified, the effect of generating the chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing the monotonicization of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

<Modification 1>
In the fifth embodiment, the end reference number of the third special gaming state (6 times), which shifts when the ceiling is reached, is compared with the end reference number (6 times) of the first special gaming state, which shifts when the special hit occurs. (1 time) is configured to be less, but it is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the number of termination reference times of the third special gaming state, which shifts when the ceiling is reached, is larger than the number of termination reference times of the first special gaming state, which shifts when the special hit is triggered. The number of termination reference times of the first special gaming state that shifts when a hit is triggered may be configured to be the same as the number of termination reference counts of the third special gaming state that shifts when the ceiling is reached.

<Modification 2>
In the fifth embodiment, the ceiling is reached as compared with the end reference number of times of the first special game state (6 times) and the end reference number of times of the second special game state (100 times), which are shifted by the big hit. The number of times for ending the third special game state (1 time) to be transferred is set to be smaller, but the number is not limited to this. Compared to the number of end reference times of the first special game state and the number of end reference times of the second special game state that shifts with the jackpot as a trigger, the number of end reference times of the third special game state that shifts with the ceiling arrival as a trigger will be larger. The number of end reference times of the first special game state, the number of end reference times of the second special game state, and the number of end reference times of the third special game state, which shifts when the ceiling is reached. And may be configured to be the same number.

<Modification 3>
In the fifth embodiment described above, in the case of a special hit, the variable winning device 83B is opened in a high frequency winning mode and the V winning is substantially confirmed, but the variable winning device 83B is used as a special winning. The first special hit is opened in the high frequency winning mode and the V winning is substantially confirmed, and the second special hit in which the variable winning device 83B is opened in the low frequency winning mode and the V winning is substantially impossible is provided. You may.

<Modification example 4>
In the fifth embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port = 1/200 and the number of games to reach the ceiling = 200 times. In other words, the number of games that reach the ceiling matches the reciprocal of the winning probability. It is also possible to change this so that the number of games that reach the ceiling is an integer smaller than the reciprocal of the winning probability (for example, 50 times, 100 times, 150 times).

<Modification 5>
In the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the gaming progresses based on the winning of the first operating port 91A. In this case, the probability of a jackpot result is 1/200, and the number of games that reach the ceiling described above is specified to be the same as the reciprocal of the probability. It is also possible to change this and specify the number of games to reach the ceiling so that the number is less than the reciprocal of the probability. In this way, if the number of games that reach the ceiling is specified, the effect of generating the chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing the monotony of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment described above, it is assumed that the probability of becoming a big hit or a special hit during the special gaming state (chance zone) that shifts when reaching the ceiling is set to about 40%, and that the transition to the chance zone is triggered by reaching the ceiling. About half of them are configured so that the chance zone can be completed without winning either the big hit or the special hit. In other words, by setting the ceiling low, the frequency of transition to the chance zone triggered by reaching the ceiling is increased, while by setting the structure so that the advantage in the chance zone is not excessively high, the monotonicization of the game is suppressed. It was configured to be. The present embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in that the relief function of the player is strengthened by increasing the benefit when reaching the ceiling while raising the ceiling. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the fifth embodiment. First, a hit / fail table for the working port will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the winning / failing table referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is “7”, “307”, There are a total of three "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the big hit. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the deviation (normal deviation). As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/200.

As shown in FIG. 87 (b), in the winning / failing table referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is “7”, “307”, There are a total of three "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the big hit. In addition, in this pass / fail table, a total of "3", "5", "13", "15", "23", "25" ... "583", "585", "593", "595" 120 pieces correspond to special hits. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to either the big hit or the special hit correspond to the deviation (normal deviation). As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/200 and the special hit probability is 1/5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery result based on the winning of the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A does not include the special deviation shown in the first embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A may be configured to be a special loss, or the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A may be a special loss. It may be configured so that it may be a special deviation in any of the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A and the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A.

In the case of 6R jackpot and 10R jackpot, the game state (first special game state or second special game state) in which the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state (big hit game state). It is the same as the fifth embodiment in that it shifts to the gaming state). However, as shown in FIG. 88, in the case of a 6R jackpot, "1 time" is set as the end reference number, and in the case of a 10R jackpot, "3 times" is set as the end reference number. ..

In addition, when the special hit → special hit game state → V prize → 5RV jackpot is reached, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state (big hit game state). It is the same as the fifth embodiment in that it shifts to the (first special gaming state). However, in the case of a 5RV jackpot, "1 time" is set as the above-mentioned end reference number of times.

That is, in the case of a 5RV jackpot or a 6R jackpot, the probability of winning is increased for a total of 5 times, which is the end reference number of times (1 time) + the upper limit of the number of reserved numbers related to the second operating port 92A (4 times). It becomes a stochastic state. During this time, the probability of a big hit or a special hit is about 67%. In addition, in the case of a 10R jackpot, a total of 7 times, which is the end reference number of times (3 times) + the upper limit of the storage number of the reserved number related to the second operating port 92A (4 times), is a high probability state in which the hit probability is raised. Become. During this time, the probability of a big hit or a special hit is almost 80%.

Also in this embodiment, when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A (third special game state). In that respect, it has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment. In this high-frequency support mode A-compatible game state, the number of games executed after the end of the open / close execution mode, specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A is the end reference number of times (time reduction number: 100 times in this embodiment). ), And when the end reference number of times is reached, the game state shifts to the low frequency support mode compatible game state (normal game state).

In the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A that shifts when reaching the ceiling, the total of 104 times of the end reference number (100 times) + the upper limit of the storage number of the reserved number related to the second operating port 92A (4 times) is hit. It becomes a high probability state (chance zone) where the probability is raised. During this period, the probability of becoming a big hit or a special hit is almost 100%, and the winning probability is raised by reaching the ceiling, so that the big hit or the special hit in the chance zone becomes rich.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of games to reach the ceiling is set to 600, and when the game shifts to the game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A by reaching the ceiling, the game is concerned. When the state ends, the ceiling is reset (the game count counter is cleared to 0). That is, it is configured to shift to the above chance zone in 600 game round cycles.

(About the basic game flow)
Next, the basic game flow of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each gaming state.

In the normal gaming state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it is not possible to expect a prize in the second operating port 92A. Therefore, the player launches a game ball on the left route (so-called left-handed) and plays a game aiming at winning a prize in the first operating port 91A.

When a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A, a winning / failing lottery is executed based on the winning. If a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot is achieved by the hit / fail lottery, the variable winning device 83B shifts to the jackpot game state in which the variable winning device 83B is opened / closed over a plurality of rounds. Since only the game ball flowing down the right route can win the variable winning device 83B, the player increases the rotation operation amount of the game ball launching handle 41 and launches the game ball to the right route. Will be done (so-called right-handed). After the end of the jackpot game state, the player shifts to the above chance zone (special game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In the special gaming state, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the first special gaming state in which the reference number of endings of the game times related to the second operating port 92A is "1" and the electric accessory The second special game state in which the support mode by 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B and the reference number of times of the end of the game rounds related to the second operating port 92A is "3", and the support mode by the electric accessory 93A are the high frequency support modes. The third special game state in which the end reference number of game times related to the second operation port 92A becomes A is "100", and the second operation port 92A acquired during the first special game state to the third special game state. The fourth special gaming state in which the gaming round according to the second operating port 92A is executed by the hold relating to the above is included.

After the jackpot gaming state triggered by the 6R jackpot ends, the game shifts to the first special gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state triggered by the 10R jackpot ends, the game shifts to the second special gaming state, which triggers the special hit. A V prize is generated during the special hit game state, and after the 5RV jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to the first special game state, and the number of games executed after the special game state ends is the upper limit (ceiling: 600). When it reaches the 3rd special game state, it shifts to the 3rd special game state, and it is executed without winning either the big hit or the special hit in the 1st special game state to the 3rd special game state (all results are lost). When the number of games reaches the above-mentioned end reference number, the system shifts to the fourth special game state.

The first special game state to the third special game state will be continued until the number of times the game times related to the second operating port 92A are executed reaches the above-mentioned end reference number of times (1 time, 3 times, 100 times). In the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A is given preferential treatment so that the probability of becoming a special win is higher, and the lottery including the special winning is substantially. The winning probability will increase significantly from 1/200 to 1/5.

By the way, the probability (continuation rate) of a special hit or a big hit in the winning / failing lottery related to the second operating port 92A is about 60%. The total continuation rate including the game times executed during the first special game state is about 67%, and the total continuation rate including the game times executed during the second special game state is about 80%. The total continuation rate including the game times executed during the third special game state is almost 100%.

According to the sixth embodiment described in detail above, when the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a winning result, the frequency is high. It shifts to the third special game state corresponding to the support mode A. Here, even if the high-frequency support mode A is set, the following inconveniences may occur if the probability of a winning result remains low. That is, even though the player has reached the ceiling, the period until the player can obtain the sufficient benefit (transition to the special gaming state) is extended, or high-frequency support is provided before the sufficient benefit is obtained. It is assumed that the chance zone including mode A ends (run through occurs). This is not preferable because it causes a factor that greatly reduces the player's willingness to play. In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to win a prize in the second operating port 92A by changing from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, and the determination based on the winning in the second operating port 92A (lottery). ) Can be a special hit result as well as a big hit result. In other words, the winning probability (probability of transition to the special gaming state) will be greatly increased by reaching the ceiling. The sum (for example, 104 times) of the upper limit of the number of stored information (for example, 4) and the end reference number of times (for example, 100 times) in the holding area Rb for the second operating port is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of winning. Therefore, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the transition to the special gaming state is richly or substantially determined by reaching the ceiling. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

If, for example, there is a limit to the number of games that can be played in the high-frequency support mode A when the player reaches the ceiling, there is a strong concern about running through. In this respect, according to the above configuration, the influence of the limitation on the number of games when reaching the ceiling can be alleviated. That is, even when the high-frequency support mode A with a limited number of times is adopted by reaching the ceiling, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

When shifting from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the result can be greatly increased. This is preferable in order to shorten the period of stay in the high-frequency support mode A and to suppress the extension of the period until the above-mentioned sufficient benefit is given, in order to exert the above-mentioned relief function when reaching the ceiling.

If a big hit result is obtained in the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the game shifts to the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode B through the special gaming state. In the configuration shown in this feature, the number of end reference times of the high frequency support mode B that shifts when the ceiling is reached is larger than the number of end reference times of the high frequency support mode A that shifts when the special hit result is triggered. The transition to the special gaming state at the time of arrival is given preferential treatment. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned relief function can be suitably exerted.

In the configuration where both the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency support mode B triggered by the winning result are executed based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the high-frequency support is supported. The benefits will be the same if the winning result is obtained during the mode. In order to improve the satisfaction of the player, it is preferable to increase the privilege in the case of winning result, but the benefit that can be expected when reaching the ceiling is also increased due to the influence, so the relief function by reaching the ceiling is excessively strong. There is concern that it will become. In particular, as described above, it is expected that the above concern will increase in a configuration in which the transition to the special gaming state is concentrated or substantially determined by reaching the ceiling. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the upper limit number of times (ceiling) is made larger than the reciprocal of the probability of a jackpot result (1/200), the benefit expected from reaching the ceiling is increased and the ceiling is reached. The above concerns can be dispelled by reducing the chances of becoming.

<Modification 1>
According to the sixth embodiment, in the third special game state where the transition is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the end reference number of times is set so that the probability of a big hit or a special hit during the special game state is almost 100%. However, it is not limited to this. In the third special gaming state that shifts when the ceiling is reached, the end reference number of times may be set so that the probability of a big hit or a special hit during the special gaming state is 95% or more (preferably 99% or more). ..

<Modification 2>
In order to realize a configuration in which the next big hit will be rich by reaching the ceiling, the following configuration is also possible. That is, the game count counter is reset when the ceiling is reached, and the number of games that reach the ceiling and the number of end reference times in the third special game state that shifts due to reaching the ceiling are the same, or the number of games that reach the ceiling is higher than the number of games that reach the ceiling. It is also possible to configure the configuration in which the number of termination reference times in the third special gaming state that shifts upon arrival is larger.

<Modification 3>
When a special hit result is obtained in the third special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the second is compared with the case where the special hit result is obtained under other circumstances. The variation display time of the pattern on the operation port display unit D2 may be shortened. The player should promptly enjoy the expected benefits by shortening the variable display time when a special hit result is obtained during the fourth special game state and shortening the time required to shift to the special game state. Is possible.

<Modification example 4>
High-frequency support mode that shifts when the jackpot result or special hit result is triggered Compared to the special game state (first special game state or second special game state) that supports B, the high-frequency support mode that shifts when the ceiling is reached. The special gaming state corresponding to A (third special gaming state) may have a configuration in which the support by the electric accessory 93A is stronger (for example, the period of opening is longer). With such a configuration, in the high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling, the winning frequency to the second operating port 92A becomes high, and the number of holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port is increased. Will increase. Therefore, the variation display time (operation period of the game rotation operation) of the pattern of the operation port display unit D2 in the game round after reaching the ceiling is shortened, and the period from reaching the ceiling to enjoying the above benefits is extended. It can be suitably suppressed.

<7th embodiment>
One of the features of this embodiment is that the game is suppressed from becoming monotonous when the 6R normal jackpot is reached and the game shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. I'm trying. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetric gauge (see FIG. 6), but in the present embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetric gauge. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, the game board unit 80A will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 80aA. A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like are arranged in each opening. When the game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82A, and the variable winning device 83A, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry portion, and the detection result is used. Based on this, a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 80aA, and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out opening 86.

Further, in the game board 80aA, a large number of game nails 87 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged. .. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations such as the game nail 87 and the windmill, and the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are adjusted so as to generate a prize with an appropriate probability.

The actuating port unit 82A is provided by the first actuating port 91A and the second actuating port 92A arranged directly under the first actuating port 91A, similarly to the actuating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. In particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric accessory 93A as an opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80aA, and the center frame 96A is roughly divided into a route in which the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE detours from the right side of the center frame 96A and a route detours from the left side. It is the same as the above-mentioned first embodiment in the point that it is done. However, in the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the left route can win the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, but cannot win the variable winning device 83A and the through gate 84A. Therefore, the game ball launched to the right route can win the second operating port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, while the first operating port 91A cannot be won. The arrangement of the 1 operating port 91A, the 2nd operating port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A has been changed. It should be noted that the game ball launched to the left route may be configured so that the second operating port 92A cannot be won.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route according to the game state, the game can be advanced advantageously. By encouraging such technical intervention, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Here, in the present embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in the present embodiment is the first operating port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A. It has a holding area Ra for the second working port and a holding area Rb for the second working port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is won in the second operating port 92A. is doing.

The holding area Ra for the first operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the first operating port 91A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area to the fourth area. Further, the holding area Rb for the second operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second. Each numerical information (holding information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area → third area → fourth area.

In the present embodiment, when the holding information is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second working port (specifically, the first area). Is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When the hold information is not stored in the hold area Rb for the second operating port and the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first working port, the holding area for the first working port is stored. The hold information stored in Ra (specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, any of the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is configured to be a special deviation, but in the present embodiment, the first operating port is configured. The configuration differs from that of the first embodiment in that only one of the lottery based on the winning of the 91 and the second operating port 92 can be a special deviation. Hereinafter, the hit / fail table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 92, the pass / fail table for the first operating port includes a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). And are provided.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 92 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of 6 pieces of "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 92 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the out-of-order results (specifically, the out-of-order results). That is, in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the configuration does not become the "special deviation" shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 93, the pass / fail table for the second operating port includes a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). And are provided.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 93 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of 6 pieces of "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 93 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing. Further, in a situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode and the winning / failing table for the high probability mode are referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the value of the random number that is a special deviation (that is, that is). , Special deviation information), all of which are "5", "15", "25", "35" ... "585", "595", for a total of 60 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "5", "15", "25", "35" ... "585", "595" correspond to the special deviation result. Then, all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to either the jackpot or the special deviation correspond to the deviation result (specifically, the normal deviation result).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A does not result in a special loss, and the winning destination corresponding to the special loss is the electric accessory 93A. 2 Limited to the actuation port 92A.

As the distribution table, a distribution table for the first operating port (see FIG. 94 (a)) and a distribution table for the second operating port (see FIG. 94 (b)) are provided. .. Regarding the distribution table for the first operating port, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to 6R normal jackpot A, and "15 to 29" corresponds to 6R probability variation jackpot. It corresponds to. Regarding the distribution table for the second operating port, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to 6R normal jackpot B, and "15 to 29" corresponds to 6R probability variation jackpot. It corresponds to.

Here, various jackpots are compared with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 95. In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, after the special gaming state ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode B. This second normal gaming state is continued until the next big hit.

When the 6R normal jackpot A or the 6R normal jackpot B is reached, the process shifts to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special gaming state. As described above, after the transition to the third normal game state, when the number of games executed during the third normal game state reaches the end reference number, the first low probability mode and low frequency support mode are supported. It shifts to the normal game state. That is, the number of times is limited in the third normal game state. In the present embodiment, the counting of the number of games in the third normal game state is limited to the game times executed based on the winning of the second operating port 92A.

When the 6R normal jackpot A is reached, "10 times" is set as the end reference number, and when the 6R normal jackpot B is reached, "20 times" is set as the end reference number. And, as already explained, the upper limit of the storage number of the reserved number related to the second operating port 92A is "4". That is, when the 6R normal jackpot A is reached, the maximum number of game times related to the second operating port 92A is "10 times" + the holding upper limit "4 times", which is a total of 14 times. In that case, the game times related to the second operating port 92A are configured to be executed a total of 24 times, that is, the maximum number of times of the end reference number is "20 times" + the upper limit of the hold is "4 times".

In the present embodiment, if a special deviation occurs during the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times, the end reference number of times of the high-frequency support mode is overwritten (reset), and the high-frequency support mode is substantially extended. One of the features is that it is configured to be used. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 96, a process for exerting such a function, specifically, a process for switching the support mode will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Process for switching support mode)
In the process for switching the support mode, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A or the high frequency support mode B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, the process proceeds to step S3502. In step S3502, it is determined whether or not the number of times limit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S3502, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3502, the process proceeds to step S3503.

In step S3503, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game round is out of the special. If a negative determination is made in step S3503, the process proceeds to step S3506. In step S3506, the continuation number counter of various counter areas 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S3507, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S3507, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3507, the process proceeds to step S3508, and the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically, the high-frequency support mode A flag and the high-frequency support mode B flag) stored in the various flag storage areas 435 and the number of times. The restriction flag is cleared and the switching process ends. By clearing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S3503, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, the high frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. At this time, if the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, the high-frequency support mode B flag is deleted. The number-of-times limit flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 is retained as it is. As a result, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode A.

In the following step S3505, the continuation number counters of the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 are overwritten (reset), and the switching process is terminated. Specifically, "20" is set in the continuation number counter. This will substantially extend the high frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S3501, if a negative determination is made in the step S3501, the process proceeds to step S3509. In step S3509, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game round is out of the special. If a negative determination is made in step S3509, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3509, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, the high frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is switched to the high frequency support mode A. In the next step S3511, the number-of-times limit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in step S3512, the continuation number counters of the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 are set, and the switching process is terminated. Specifically, "20" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A is continued until the game rounds related to the second operating port 92A are executed 20 times.

(Flow of the game)
Here, the flow of the game (game flow) will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each gaming state.

The first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is composed of a main stage and a special stage (mission stage). The main stage is a stage to stay when the game round based on the winning of the first operating port 91A is executed, and the special stage stays when the gaming round based on the winning of the second operating port 92A is executed. It's a stage.

More specifically about the special stage, when shifting from the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B and the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A to the first normal gaming state. This is a stage in which the player temporarily stays in the game, and the upper limit of the number of games to be executed matches the upper limit of the number of stored information in the reserved area Rb for the second operating port. That is, immediately after the transition from the third normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the stage moves to the special stage on condition that the hold information related to the second operating port 92A is stored. .. Then, if the special stage does not result in a big hit or a special deviation, that is, if all the hold related to the second operating port 92A ends in the normal deviation, the stage moves from the special stage to the main stage.

As described above, the first normal gaming state corresponds to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, even if the game ball is fired to the right route and the support is won, the winning of the second operating port 92A is substantially avoided. Since the game ball launched to the right route cannot win a prize in the first operating port 91A, it becomes difficult to receive a lottery based on the winning in the operating ports 91A and 92A. On the other hand, for the game ball launched to the left route, the winning of the second operating port 92A is avoided, while the winning of the first operating port 91A may occur. For the above reasons, it is possible to proceed with the game so that it is more advantageous for the player to aim at the left route than to aim at the right route. If the game ball is launched to the right route during the first gaming state, a warning is given to urge the launch destination to return to the left route.

If a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved in the lottery during the first normal game state, the game shifts to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special game state. The second normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode B, and the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the investment (decrease in the number of balls held) by launching the game ball to the right route. During the second normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route wins a prize in the second operating port 92A, and the game progresses centering on the game times related to the second operating port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, there is a 1/10 chance that the special deviation will occur, but the special deviation during the second normal gaming state will be invalid and will be treated as a normal deviation. .. That is, even if a special deviation occurs during the second normal gaming state, the special deviation does not trigger the transition to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A.

If a 6R normal jackpot is won in the lottery during the first normal game state and the second normal game state, the game shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special game state. .. The third normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode B, and the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the investment (decrease in the number of balls held) by launching the game ball to the right route.

During the third normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route wins a prize in the second operating port 92A, and the game progresses centering on the game times related to the second operating port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, there is a probability of about 1/10 that the special will be missed. If the special deviation occurs during the third normal game state, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode B to the high frequency support mode A, and "20" times are set as the end reference number. That is, the transition from the third normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state is performed.

If a 6R probability variation jackpot is reached during the 4th normal gaming state, the game shifts to the 2nd normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special gaming state. On the other hand, if a special deviation occurs during the 4th normal game state, the end reference number of times is reset to "20" times, and the 4th normal game state is extended. In this way, if the fourth normal game state can be looped, the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease (investment) in the number of balls held.

During the 4th normal game state, the game progresses without becoming a big hit or a special deviation, and the number of game times executed (specifically, the game times related to the 2nd operating port 92A) is the end reference number (20 times). When it reaches, it shifts to the first normal gaming state. Specifically, when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is "0", the stage shifts to the main stage, and when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is other than "0", the stage shifts to the special stage. ..

In the special stage, the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A will be executed for the number of pending times. If the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A results in a special loss, the game shifts to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A.

According to the seventh embodiment described in detail above, when a normal jackpot result is obtained in the first normal gaming state, the game shifts to the third normal gaming state via the special gaming state. The third normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode B, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the winning of the second operating port 92A. A limit is set for the number of times in the third normal game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the third normal game state reaches the end reference number (first end reference number), the low frequency support mode is supported. Shifts to the first normal game state of. This makes it difficult to enter the second operating port 92A. Here, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, a special deviation result may occur. If a special deviation result is obtained in the third normal gaming state, the game shifts to the fourth normal gaming state without going through the special gaming state. The fourth normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode A, and the game times related to the second operating port 92A are executed as in the third normal game state, and in this state, the number of times the game times are executed is the end criterion. It will be continued until the number of times (second end reference number of times) is reached. Here, when the transition from the third normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state is made, the progress of the game rounds related to the second operating port 92A will continue. This makes it possible to aim for a big hit while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

If a special deviation result occurs during the fourth normal game state, the end reference number (second end reference number) is reset. That is, the fourth normal game state loops. In this loop, since the loop does not go through the special gaming state, the game proceeds smoothly even if the loop is repeated.

The second end reference number is specified to be the same as the first end reference number. Therefore, in the case of the third normal game state → the fourth normal game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being substantially damaged by the timing of the special deviation result (the game times of the determination result). This is preferable in order to realize the diversification of the game by the above-mentioned loop function and to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game.

In the fourth normal gaming state, it is stipulated that the probability of a special deviation result (1/10) is higher than the probability of a jackpot result (1/100). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the above-mentioned loop function is not exerted well due to frequent big hits and the like.

<Modification 1>
In the seventh embodiment described above, if a special deviation occurs during the high frequency support mode B with a limited number of times, the mode is switched to the high frequency support mode A and the end reference number of times is reset. It is not limited to this. During the high frequency support mode B, the lottery for the special deviation may not be performed, or the special deviation may be invalidated (handled in the same manner as the normal deviation). That is, when the special deviation occurs during the high frequency support mode A, the high frequency support mode A is maintained and the end reference number of times is overwritten (reset), while the special deviation occurs during the high frequency support mode B. In this case, the high frequency support mode B may be maintained and the end reference number of times may not be overwritten (reset). In such a configuration, when the player shifts to the third normal game state, the game is specially missed in the game round related to the remaining hold of the second operating port 92A, which is executed after the third normal game state ends. In that case, it will shift to the fourth normal gaming state.

<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the end reference number (20 times) set when the special deviation occurs is higher than the end reference number (10 times) set when the 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) occurs. The number of times) was increased, but it is not limited to this. For example, the number of end reference times set when the 6R normal jackpot A (at the time of the first hit) is reached may be the same as the number of end reference times set when the special hit is lost. Further, the number of end reference times set when the special deviation occurs may be smaller than the number of end reference times set when the 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) is reached.

<Modification 3>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the end reference number (20 times) set when the 6R normal jackpot B (during consecutive villas) is reached, and the end reference number (20 times) set when the special deviation occurs. The number is the same as the number of times), but it is not limited to this. For example, the number of end reference times set when the special deviation occurs may be larger than the number of end reference times set when the 6R normal jackpot B is reached.

<Modification example 4>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the number of termination reference times set when a special deviation occurs is set uniformly (20 times), but the number is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the configuration in which the number of termination reference times set according to the type of special deviation is different. For example, as special deviations, the first special deviation in which the set end reference number is the first end reference number (for example, "20 times") and the set end reference number are the second end reference times (for example, "40 times"). ”) May be provided with a second special deviation.

<Modification 5>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A is configured so as not to be a special deviation, but the present invention is not limited to this. The lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A may also be configured to be a special omission.

<Modification 6>
When the normal jackpot result is obtained in the game times related to the second operating port 92A, when the normal jackpot result is obtained in the game times related to the first operating port 91A, or when the game times related to the second operating port 92A are obtained. It may be specified that the number of termination reference times set is larger than that in the case of a special deviation result. With such a configuration, if a normal jackpot result is obtained during the above-mentioned loop, the advantage of the player is increased, and an accent can be generated in the game in the loop.

<8th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a part of the probability variation jackpot is used as an opportunity to shift to a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode (fifth normal game state described later), and the game executed in this normal game state. One of the features is that the support mode by the electric accessory is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A when the number of times reaches the upper limit (ceiling). Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetric gauge (see FIG. 6), but in the present embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetric gauge. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, the game board unit 80A will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 80aA. A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like are arranged in each opening. When the game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82A, and the variable winning device 83A, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry portion, and the detection result is used. Based on this, a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 80aA, and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out opening 86.

Further, in the game board 80aA, a large number of game nails 87 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged. .. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations such as the game nail 87 and the windmill, and the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are adjusted so as to generate a prize with an appropriate probability.

The actuating port unit 82A is provided by the first actuating port 91A and the second actuating port 92A arranged directly under the first actuating port 91A, similarly to the actuating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. In particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric accessory 93A as an opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE by the center frame 96A is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that detours from the left side. It is the same as the above-mentioned first embodiment in the point that it is done. However, in the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the left route can win the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, but cannot win the variable winning device 83A and the through gate 84A. Therefore, the game ball launched to the right route can win the second operating port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, while the first operating port 91A cannot be won. The arrangement of the 1 operating port 91A, the 2nd operating port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A has been changed. It should be noted that the game ball launched to the left route may be configured so that the second operating port 92A cannot be won.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route according to the game state, the game can be advanced advantageously. By encouraging such technical intervention, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Here, in the present embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 99.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in the present embodiment is the first operating port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A. It has a holding area Ra for the second working port and a holding area Rb for the second working port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is won in the second operating port 92A. is doing.

The holding area Ra for the first operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the first operating port 91A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area to the fourth area. Further, the holding area Rb for the second operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second. Each numerical information (holding information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area → third area → fourth area.

In the present embodiment, when the holding information is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second working port (specifically, the first area). Is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When the hold information is not stored in the hold area Rb for the second operating port and the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first working port, the holding area for the first working port is stored. The hold information stored in Ra (specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, a lottery based on winning a prize in the operating ports 91 and 92 may result in a special deviation, but in the present embodiment, the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 are provided. The configuration is different from the first embodiment in that the special deviation is omitted (excluded) from the lottery result based on the winning. Hereinafter, the pass / fail table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 100, as the pass / fail table for the operating port, there are a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). It is provided.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 100 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of 6 pieces of "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 100 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the out-of-order results (specifically, the out-of-order results). That is, in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A, the configuration does not become the "special deviation" shown in the first embodiment.

The distribution table for the operation port is divided into a distribution table for the first operation port and a distribution table for the second operation port. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 101 (a), in the distribution table for the first operating port, 6R normal jackpot results (low probability correspondence special game results) and 6R probability variation jackpot results (high probability correspondence) are distributed to the game results. Special game result), 2R probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result) are set. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and "10 to 19" corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result. "20-29 correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 101 (b), in the distribution table for the second operating port, the 6R normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence special game result) and the 6R probability variation jackpot result (high probability correspondence) are distributed to the game result. Special game result) is set. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result.

Here, each jackpot will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 102.

When the 6R normal jackpot result is obtained, the player shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state. As described in the first embodiment, after the transition to the third normal gaming state, the number of games executed during the third normal gaming state reaches the end reference number (specifically, "40 times"). If this is the case, the game shifts to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. That is, the number of times is limited in the third normal game state. In the present embodiment, the counting of the number of games in the third normal game state is limited to the game times executed based on the winning of the second operating port 92A.

In the case of a 6R normal jackpot, "300 times" is set as the ceiling (upper limit) described above at the end of the special gaming state. When the number of game rounds executed after the end of the special game state reaches the ceiling, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is switched to the high frequency support mode A, so that investment (reduction of the number of balls held) is suppressed. It will be.

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, after the end of the special gaming state, the game shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. As described in the first embodiment, the second normal gaming state will be continued until the next big hit.

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, "100 times" is set as the ceiling (upper limit) described above at the end of the special gaming state. However, even if the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the ceiling, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A remains in the high frequency support mode B, that is, in the second normal game state. Become.

On the other hand, in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, after the end of the special gaming state, the game shifts to the fifth normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Further, in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, "100 times" is set as the above-mentioned ceiling (upper limit) at the end of the special gaming state. When the number of game rounds executed after the end of the special game state reaches the ceiling, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is switched to the high frequency support mode A, so that investment (reduction of the number of balls held) is suppressed. It will be.

In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, the hurdle to the next jackpot will be lowered by switching to the high probability mode, but the game times have increased excessively in this gaming state (fifth normal gaming state). In some cases, the increased investment may reduce the player's willingness to play. In this respect, in the fifth normal game state, the ceiling is reached at an early stage and additional investment is suppressed, thereby suppressing the occurrence of such inconvenience. In addition, by switching to the high frequency support mode A when reaching the ceiling, the game progresses mainly in the game times related to the second operating port 92A, and the game times related to the second operating port 92A become a big hit. In this case, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the satisfaction level of the player by configuring the configuration so that the 2R probability variation jackpot does not occur (a configuration in which a certain amount of ball can be expected). Hereinafter, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 103 and 104, the first implementation of the process for exerting such a function, specifically, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode and the process for switching the support mode. The difference from the form will be mainly explained.

(Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode)
As shown in FIG. 103, in the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode (special game state) this time is triggered by the 6R probability variation jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3601, the process proceeds to step S3602, and the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode B flag set in this way, the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode B is referred to in the support lottery in the subsequent electric service support processing, and the through-gate display unit DS displays. The variable display time table for the high frequency support mode B is referred to as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the pattern.

In the following step S3603, the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the winning / losing table for the high-probability mode will be referred to in the winning / losing lottery in the subsequent game rounds.

After that, in step S3604, "100 times" is set as the number of games used as a criterion for determining the ceiling. Then, in step S3605, the game count counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 are reset (cleared to 0), and in step S3606, various flags for the open / close execution mode stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 ( (Big hit flag, etc.) is erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is stopped.

The value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1" each time the game round is executed, and when the value of the continuation count counter becomes "0", the high frequency support mode B ends. That is, the upper limit (the above-mentioned end reference number of times), which is the number of games that can be executed during the high frequency support mode B, is defined by the value of the continuation number counter.

Returning to the description of step S3601, if a negative determination is made in step S3601, that is, if the current jackpot is not a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process proceeds to step S3607. In step S3607, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a 2R probability variation jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3607, each process of step S3603 to step S3606 described above is executed, and then the transition process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3607, that is, if the current jackpot is a 6R normal jackpot, the number-of-times limit flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 in step S3608, and high-frequency support is provided in step S3609. Set the mode B flag. After that, in step S3610, "40" is set in the continuation number counter, and in the following step S3611, "300 times" is set as the number of games used as a criterion for determining the ceiling.

After that, in step S3605, the game count counter is reset, and in step S3606, various flags (big hit flag, etc.) for the open / close execution mode stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the open / close execution mode is set. Stop the output of the corresponding external signal.

Next, the process for switching the support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 104.

(Process for switching support mode)
In the process for switching the support mode, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A or the high frequency support mode B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3701, the process proceeds to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the number of times limit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S3702, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the process proceeds to step S3703.

In step S3703, the continuation number counter of various counter areas 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S3704, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S3704, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3704, the process proceeds to step S3705, and the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically, the high-frequency support mode A flag and the high-frequency support mode B flag) stored in the various flag storage areas 435 and the number of times. The restriction flag is cleared and the switching process ends. By clearing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S3701, if a negative determination is made in step S3701, that is, if the low frequency support mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S3706. In step S3706, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is the upper limit, that is, the value set in step S3604 or step S3611. If a negative determination is made in step S3706, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3706, the process proceeds to step S3707.

In step S3707, the high frequency support mode A flag is set in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode A flag set in this way, the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode A is referred to in the support lottery in the subsequent electric service support processing, and the through-gate display unit DS displays. The variable display time table for the high frequency support mode A will be referred to as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the pattern. Further, the opening time when the electric accessory 93A is switched to the open state as a result of winning the support is the time corresponding to the high frequency support mode A.

In the following step S3708, the number-of-times limit flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in step S3709, "400" is set in the continuation number counter, and the switching process is terminated. As a result, the transition will continue the high frequency support mode A until the number of games reaches "400 times" or until the jackpot is reached.

According to the eighth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the fourth normal corresponding to the high frequency support mode A Move to the game state. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, the monotonicization of the game can be suitably suppressed. Here, regarding the upper limit number of times to reach the ceiling, there are fewer cases where the probability variable jackpot result (specifically, the jackpot result corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) is obtained, as compared with the case where the normal jackpot result is obtained. It is configured to be (shortened) to be. Here, since the high-probability mode shifts to the special gaming state at an earlier timing than the low-probability mode, the effect of the ceiling function can be suitably exhibited by setting the upper limit number of times to be small. This can suitably contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game progresses without a big hit result even though the high probability mode is set, which is contrary to the player's expectation. The investment will be large. This is expected to be a factor that greatly reduces the player's willingness to play. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the upper limit number of times is lowered to shift to the high frequency switching mode at an early timing to suppress investment. By doing so, the effect of diversifying the game (effect of improving the degree of attention to the game) can be suitably exhibited.

If the above-mentioned relief function by reaching the ceiling acts excessively, the technical significance (diversification of the game) of providing the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode may decrease. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the upper limit number of times so as to be equal to or more than the reciprocal of the probability of a jackpot result in each game state, the diversification of games and the above-mentioned relief function are suitably coexisted. be able to.

As the number of stored information on hold increases, the variation display time (operation period of the game rounding operation) of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port becomes short. This is preferable in order to facilitate the progress of the game. However, on the premise of such a configuration, the following inconveniences may occur by applying the configuration related to the relief function. That is, when the ceiling is reached in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A is entered, the game times in the normal gaming state are fast. An event may occur in which the benefit ends before the benefit of reaching the ceiling is fully experienced. It is feared that this will be a factor that greatly reduces the player's attention to the relief function. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, setting the end reference number of times to be larger than the upper limit number of times can contribute to solving the above concern.

The lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A is given preferential treatment to the player over the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A. When the ceiling is reached in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, not only the investment is suppressed, but also the above lottery is given preferential treatment, so that the player is doubled in the rescue function. If a fit occurs in a normal gaming state that supports a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, expectations for reaching the ceiling will increase. This can contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

The lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A includes the lottery result that triggers the transition to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode as the lottery result, and goes to the second operating port 92A. In the lottery based on the winning of the above, the lottery result that triggers the transition to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode is not included as the lottery result. With such a configuration, the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode are supported again while the relief function is being exerted by reaching the ceiling during the normal gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode. As a result of the lottery that triggers the transition to the game state, it is possible to avoid an event such as the benefit of the ceiling substantially disappearing (wasteful pulling).

<Modification 1>
In the eighth embodiment, the ceiling (upper limit) is different depending on the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot), but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the ceiling (upper limit) the same regardless of the type of jackpot.

<Modification 2>
As 2R probability variation jackpot (so-called latent probability), 2R probability variation jackpot A and 2R probability variation jackpot B are provided, and the ceiling (upper limit) when 2R probability variation jackpot A and the ceiling (upper limit) when 2R probability variation jackpot B is reached. It is also possible to make the configuration different.

<Modification 3>
In the eighth embodiment described above, the ceiling (upper limit) is set according to the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot), but this may be changed as follows. That is, the ceiling (upper limit) may be set according to the operating port that triggered the big hit. For example, when a big hit is made based on a prize in the first operating port 91A, the first ceiling is set as the ceiling (upper limit), and a big hit is made based on a winning in the second operating port 92A. A second ceiling may be set as the ceiling (upper limit). In this case, if the first ceiling is set lower than the second ceiling, it is possible to prevent the player's investment from becoming excessively large, and if the second ceiling is set lower than the first ceiling, the player's investment can be suppressed. The sharpness of the game can be suitably enhanced.

<Modification example 4>
In the eighth embodiment described above, the ceiling (upper limit) set is lower in the case of a probability variation jackpot (specifically, 2R probability variation jackpot) than in the case of a normal jackpot (specifically, 6R normal jackpot). However, it is not limited to this. In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, the ceiling (upper limit) set may be higher than in the case of a 6R normal jackpot.

<Modification 5>
In the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode, the first end reference number is set as the end reference number in the low probability mode and the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, which shifts when the ceiling is reached, and the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode is supported. In the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A, which shifts in the gaming state when the ceiling is reached, the second end reference number is set as the end reference number, and the second end reference number is set as described above. It is also possible to specify that the number of times is less than the first termination reference number. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the relief function from becoming a factor that incites gambling.

<Modification 6>
Similar to the first embodiment, the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A are collectively arranged on a predetermined flow path in the game area PE, and the holding area Ra for the first operating port and the second operating port are arranged. When the hold information is stored in both the hold areas Rb for the operation port, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second operation port may be prioritized as the execution target of the game round.

According to the configuration shown in this modification, even when the player reaches the ceiling in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode and shifts to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. , There is no need to change the launch destination of the game ball to enjoy the benefits of the rescue function. Therefore, even if the rescue function is suddenly exerted without going through the special gaming state, it is possible to suppress the wasteful consumption of the game ball and preferably improve the satisfaction level of the rescue function. can.

<9th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the game shifts to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, the high probability mode is maintained until the next big hit (so-called probability change machine). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first is that an upper limit is set for the number of games in which the high-probability mode is maintained after the transition to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode (so-called ST machine). The embodiment and the configuration of the above are different.

When the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode, it is assumed that the game is played with the expectation that it will be a big hit at an early stage. In spite of the rising expectations for big hits, the progress of the game without becoming a big hit is a factor that gives the player the impression that the investment is wastefully bulky, and the game It is feared that the player's willingness to play will decrease as he / she is willing to approach the above upper limit. It is assumed that such an event becomes more prominent in a gaming machine having a lower hit probability in the high probability mode. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

The configuration of the game board unit in this embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the holding function (holding ball storage area) related to the operating port is the same as that of the eighth embodiment. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. The configuration is the same as that of the eighth embodiment in that the game times related to the second operating port 92 are executed with priority over the game times related to the first operating port 91.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 100, as the pass / fail table for the operating port, there are a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). It is provided.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 105 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of two, "7" and "307". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7" and "307" correspond to the big hit result. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 105 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "107". , "207", "307", "407", "507", a total of six. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the out-of-order results (specifically, the out-of-order results). That is, in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92, the configuration does not become the "special deviation" shown in the first embodiment.

(Distribution table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 106 (a), in the distribution table for the operating ports 91 and 92, the 10R probability variation jackpot A (high probability corresponding special game result) and the 10R probability variation jackpot B (high) are distributed to the game results. Probability correspondence special game result) is set. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 10R probability variation jackpot A, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the 10R probability variation jackpot B.

When the 10R probability variation jackpot A is reached, the process shifts to the fifth normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the special gaming state. This high-probability mode ends when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (high probability upper limit: 100 times), and the mode is switched to the low-probability mode.

When the 10R probability variation jackpot B is reached, the system shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the special gaming state. This high-probability mode ends when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (high probability upper limit: 100 times), and the mode is switched to the low-probability mode. Further, the high frequency support mode ends when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (high support upper limit: 50 times). In the present embodiment, when the high support upper limit is reached, the ceiling is reached as described above, and the high frequency support mode B is switched to the high frequency support mode A. An upper limit (50 times in this embodiment) is also set for the number of continuations of this high-frequency support mode A, and the mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode when the high-probability mode ends.

Here, in the first embodiment described above, there is a difference so that the base (ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shots of game balls) is higher in the high frequency support mode B than in the high frequency support mode A. However, in the present embodiment, the difference is provided so that the high frequency support mode A has a higher base than the high frequency support mode B. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 107, a specific configuration for generating such a difference will be described with a focus on differences from the first embodiment.

In the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the support in the support lottery is halved, and the number of times the electric accessory 93 is switched to the open state when the support is won is "1 time" and the opening time. Is specified to be "0.1 sec". Further, it is stipulated that the variable display time of the pattern (normal figure) in the through gate display unit DS is "10 to 20 sec" and the definite display time of the pattern is "0.5 sec".

In the high frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the support in the support lottery is 1 / 1.1, and the number of times the electric accessory 93 is switched to the open state when the support is won is "1 time". Moreover, the opening time is specified to be "2 sec". Then, it is stipulated that the variable display time of the pattern (normal figure) in the display unit DS for the through gate is "0.5 sec" and the definite display time of the pattern is "0.5 sec".

In the high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the support in the support lottery is halved, and when the support is won, the number of times the electric accessory 93 is switched to the open state is "2 times" and is open. The time is specified to be "3 sec" and the interval time for switching to the open state is "0.2 sec". Then, it is stipulated that the variable display time of the pattern (normal figure) in the display unit DS for the through gate is "0.5 sec" and the definite display time of the pattern is "0.5 sec".

In general, the above-mentioned bases increase in the order of low frequency support mode <high frequency support mode B <high frequency support mode A, and in high frequency support mode B, the game is played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held compared to the low frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode A, it is possible to advance the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held more than in the high frequency support mode B.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 108, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode executed as a part of the game state transition process of the normal process (see step S404 of FIG. 23) is the same as the first embodiment. The differences will be mainly explained.

(Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode)
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode (special game state), first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode this time corresponds to the 10R probability variation jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3802. In step S3802, the high frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is switched to the high frequency support mode B.

In the following step S3803, "50" is set in the high support continuation number counter provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The high support continuation counter is a counter for defining the number of continuations of the game times corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and is subtracted by "1" each time the game times are executed during the high frequency support mode. ..

After executing the setting process of step S3803, or when a negative determination is made in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3804. In step S3804, the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the lottery mode of the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 is switched to the high probability mode.

In the following step S3805, "100" is set in the high-accuracy continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The high-probability continuation counter is a counter for defining the number of continuations of the game times corresponding to the high-probability mode, and is subtracted by "1" each time the game times are executed during the high-probability mode.

In step S3806, the game count counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 are reset (cleared to 0). Then, in step S3807, the various flags for the special gaming state stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the transition process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the process for switching between the lottery mode and the support mode (for the process for switching the support mode in FIG. 39), which is executed as a part of the game time control process (step S403 in FIG. 23) of the normal process. Equivalent) will be explained.

(Process for switching between lottery mode and support mode)
In the process for switching between the lottery mode and the support mode, first, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the high probability mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3902. In step S3902, the high-accuracy continuation number counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 are updated. Specifically, the value of the high-accuracy continuation counter is subtracted by "1".

In the following step S3903, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-accuracy continuation number counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S3903, the process proceeds to step S3904 and the high-probability mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 is erased. As a result, the lottery mode of the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 is switched from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

After executing the process of step S3904, or when a negative determination is made in any of steps S3901 and S3903, the process proceeds to step S3905. In step S3905, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A or the high frequency support mode B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3905, the process proceeds to step S3906. In step S3906, the high support continuation number counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 are updated. Specifically, the value of the high support continuation counter is subtracted by "1".

In the following step S3907, it is determined whether or not the value of the high support continuation number counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S3907, the process proceeds to step S3908 and the high frequency support mode flag A or the high frequency support mode B flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 is deleted. As a result, the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is switched from the high frequency support modes A and B to the low frequency support mode.

After executing the process of step S3908, or when a negative determination is made in any of steps S3905 and S3907, the process proceeds to step S3909. In step S3909, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 has reached the upper limit (“50” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S3909, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3909, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, the high frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is switched to the high frequency support mode A. After that, the process proceeds to step S3911, and "50" is set in the high support continuation counts provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 to end the switching process.

(Changes in the ball held as the game progresses)
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the change of the holding ball with the progress of the game will be supplementarily described. FIG. 110A is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is obtained, and FIG. 110B is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the 10R probability variation jackpot B is achieved.

In the example shown in FIG. 110A, the game shifts to the special gaming state corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot A at the timing of tg1. At the timing of tg2 when this special game state ends, the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode, and the jackpot probability increases from 1/300 to 1/100. After that, the high probability mode is maintained until the number of executed game times reaches 100.

Immediately after the special game state ends, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. At the timing of tg3 in which the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches 50, the support mode is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A. As a result, the progress of the game is accelerated, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed to be almost zero. That is, after the end of the special gaming state, it becomes a state advantageous to the player, and if the game times progress without becoming a big hit, it is further promoted to a state advantageous to the player.

Then, at the timing of tg4 in which the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches 100, the support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is switched to the low probability mode. As a result, the jackpot probability returns from 1/100 to 1/300.

In the example shown in FIG. 110 (b), the state shifts to the special gaming state corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot B at the timing of th1. At the timing of th2 when this special gaming state ends, the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode, and the jackpot probability increases from 1/300 to 1/100. After that, the high probability mode is maintained until the number of executed game times reaches 100.

Immediately after the special gaming state ends, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B. At the timing of th3 when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches 50, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode B to the high frequency support mode A. As a result, the progress of the game is further accelerated, and the reduction of the number of balls held is suppressed to be almost zero. That is, after the end of the special gaming state, it becomes a state advantageous to the player, and if the game times progress without becoming a big hit, it is further promoted to a state advantageous to the player.

Then, at the timing of th4 when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches 100, the support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is switched to the low probability mode.

In the present embodiment, after shifting to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B, the support mode has a high frequency when the number of times the game is executed reaches 50 times without a big hit result. Support mode A is set. As a result, the frequency of winning the second operating port 92 increases. After that, when the number of games after the end of the special game state reaches 100, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonicization of the game while ensuring the superiority of the player in the high probability mode.

In a type of gaming machine (so-called ST machine) in which an upper limit is set for the number of times a game is executed in a normal gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode, the probability that a jackpot result will be obtained decreases as the number of times the game is executed approaches the upper limit. , The player's expectation can be greatly reduced. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode A is set when the ceiling is reached, so that the winning frequency to the second operating port 92 becomes higher than before, and the investment is suppressed. ..

Further, as in the first embodiment, the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 are collectively arranged in a predetermined flow path in the game area PE, while the gaming times relating to the second operating port 92. Is configured to be executed with priority over the game times related to the first operating port 91. By shifting from the normal gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode B to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode A when reaching the ceiling, the game times related to the second operating port 92 can be increased. More opportunities to be executed. As a result, the player's advantage is greatly increased by reaching the ceiling, and the degree of attention to the game after reaching the ceiling can be suitably improved.

In the high frequency support mode A, the average number of reserved information stored in the reserved ball storage area (reserved area Rb for the second operating port) when the game ball is continuously launched toward the operating port 92. Is changed to "3.5", and when the game ball is continuously launched toward the operating port 92 in the high frequency support mode B, the holding ball storage area (holding area Rb for the second operating port) The average number of pending information stored in is changed to "2.5". When the number of reserved information stored in the second operating port holding area Rb is "3", the variation display time of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2 is shorter than in the case of "2". According to such a configuration, the game can be played by shifting from the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A when the ceiling is reached. It is possible to change the speed of progress. This makes it possible to more preferably suppress the monotonicization of the game.

<Modification 1>
In the ninth embodiment, the high-frequency support mode A that switches after the end of the special gaming state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot A ends in accordance with the switching to the low-probability mode of the lottery mode (low-frequency support mode). However, the configuration is not limited to this.

The configuration may be such that the high-frequency support mode A is switched to the low-frequency support mode before switching from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. That is, the special gaming state → the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode (fifth normal gaming state) → the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A (the sixth normal gaming state) → high. The configuration may be such that the transition is made in the order of the normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the low frequency support mode (fifth normal gaming state) → the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode (first normal gaming state).

Further, the configuration may be such that after switching from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, the high-frequency support mode A is switched to the low-frequency support mode. That is, the special gaming state → the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode (fifth normal gaming state) → the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A (the sixth normal gaming state) → low. The configuration may be such that the transition is made in the order of the normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode A (fourth normal gaming state) to the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode (first normal gaming state).

<Modification 2>
As the 10R probability variation jackpot A shown in the ninth embodiment, the 10R probability variation jackpot A1 and the 10R probability variation jackpot A2 are provided, and the ceiling set when the 10R probability variation jackpot A1 is set is 50 times, and the 10R probability variation jackpot A2. It is also possible to set the ceiling to 20 times when it becomes. With such a configuration, when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is obtained, the promotion timing (the timing of the tg3) can be changed depending on the type, and diversification of the game can be suitably realized.

<Modification 3>
As the 10R probability variation jackpot B shown in the ninth embodiment, the 10R probability variation jackpot B1 and the 10R probability variation jackpot B2 are provided, and the ceiling set when the 10R probability variation jackpot B1 is reached is set 50 times and the high frequency support mode B is performed. It is also possible to set the number of continuations to 50, set the ceiling to be 20 times when the 10R probability variation jackpot B2 is reached, and set the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode B to 20 times. With such a configuration, when the 10R probability variation jackpot B is obtained, the promotion timing (the th3 timing) can be changed depending on the type thereof, and diversification of the game can be suitably realized.

<Modification example 4>
In the ninth embodiment, the number of games (50) that can stay in the normal game state (fifth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot A. (Times) and the number of games (50 times) that can stay in the normal game state (sixth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A are configured to match, but the configuration is not limited to this. No.

10R Probability change The number of games that can stay in the normal game state (fifth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the special game state triggered by the jackpot A is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A is supported. It is also possible to configure the game so that the number of games that can be stayed in the normal game state (sixth normal game state) is larger than the number of games that can be played.

In addition, the number of games that can stay in the normal game state (fifth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot A is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It is also possible to configure the game so that the number of games that can be stayed in the normal game state corresponding to A (sixth normal game state) is less than the number of games that can be played.

<Modification 5>
In the ninth embodiment, the number of games that can stay in the normal game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot B (second normal game state). The configuration is such that the number of games (50 times) that can stay in the normal game state (sixth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A matches (50 times), but is limited to this. is not it.

The number of games that can stay in the normal game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability change jackpot B is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. It is also possible to configure the game so that the number of games that can be stayed in the corresponding normal game state (sixth normal game state) is larger than the number of games that can be played.

In addition, the number of games that can stay in the normal game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot A is high probability mode and high frequency support. It is also possible to configure the game so that the number of games that can be stayed in the normal game state corresponding to the mode A (sixth normal game state) is smaller than the number of games that can be played.

<Modification 6>
In the ninth embodiment described above, a difference is provided so that the base of the high-frequency support mode A is higher than that of the high-frequency support mode B, but this is changed and the frequency is higher than that of the high-frequency support mode A. A difference may be provided so that the support mode B has a higher base.

<Modification 7>
When shifting from the high-frequency support modes A and B to the high-frequency support mode A, it is optional whether or not to go through the low-frequency support mode (game times corresponding to the low-frequency support mode).

<Modification 8>
In the ninth embodiment, when the 10R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained, 50 game rounds are executed in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. It shifts to the normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and high frequency support mode A, and when the number of executions of the game times after the end of the special game state reaches 100 times, it shifts to the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. It was configured to be migrated. That is, it is stipulated that the number of games staying in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode is the same as the number of games staying in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode A. .. This has been changed so that the number of games staying in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode is larger than the number of games staying in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A. Alternatively, the number of games staying in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode may be less than the number of games staying in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode A. May be specified in.

In addition, when the 10R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained, the high probability mode and high frequency support are triggered by the fact that 50 game times are executed in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. It is configured to shift to the normal gaming state corresponding to the mode A, and to shift to the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches 100 times. That is, it is stipulated that the number of games staying in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B is the same as the number of games staying in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. did. This has been changed so that the number of games staying in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is larger than the number of games staying in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A. It may be specified, and the number of games staying in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B is smaller than the number of games staying in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. It may be specified to be.

<Modification 9>
In the ninth embodiment, when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot result is 100, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency. It is configured to be in support mode, but is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to configure the high-frequency support mode A to continue even after the transition to the low-probability mode. According to the configuration shown in this modification, after the end of the special gaming state, the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B → the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A → the low probability mode and the high The transition is made in the order of the normal gaming state corresponding to the frequency support mode A → the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from rapidly decreasing when the mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode.

<10th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special deviation result, the fourth normal game state is set. The value of the continuation counter that defines the number of remaining games is set (overwritten) to "400", and the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode is triggered by the special deviation result. 4 A configuration that promptly shifts from the normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling without triggering another gaming state such as the first normal gaming state, that is, the fourth normal gaming state is promptly extended. It was configured.

One of the features of this embodiment is that the behavior when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special deviation result is devised. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 111A, in the high frequency support mode A that shifts when the special deviation occurs, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 becomes blue, and the transition occurs when the ceiling is reached. In the frequency support mode A, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is differentiated so as to be green. Therefore, by checking the background color of the display screen 95a, the player can easily identify whether the current high-frequency support mode A is triggered by the special deviation result or the arrival at the ceiling. In the following explanation, the high-frequency support mode A that shifts when the special deviation occurs is referred to as "high-frequency support mode A1", and the high-frequency support mode A that shifts when reaching the ceiling is appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A2". .. By the way, the support modes of the high frequency support modes A1 and A2 are common, and the base (the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out to the number of game balls fired) is configured so that there is no difference between the two. Then, it is the same as the first embodiment.

Next, the flow of the start notification of the high frequency support mode A will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 111 (b) to 111 (c).

As shown in FIG. 111 (b), in the game rounds in which the special misses occur and the game shifts to the high frequency support mode A1, the symbol combination corresponding to the special misses in the game rounds is stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a (confirmed display). ). Specifically, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on any of the effective lines via the reach display. Then, the background color of the display screen 95a is changed from white to blue at the start of the next game round, and the remaining number of games of the high frequency support mode A1 is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

On the other hand, in the game round that shifts to the high frequency support mode A2 when the ceiling is reached, as shown in FIG. 111 (c), the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling reach in the game round is displayed on the display screen 95a. It may be stopped (confirmed). Specifically, when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the symbol combination including the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on any of the effective lines via the reach display. On the other hand, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, the symbol combination corresponding to the complete disconnection is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) without going through the reach display. At this time, the background color of the display screen 95a is also maintained in blue.

In the game times when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 sec) corresponding to the reach display is set as in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. On the other hand, in the game round that reaches the ceiling during the fourth normal game state, the variable display time that does not correspond to the reach display is set with reference to the variable display time table shown in FIG. 27 (a2). ..

Here, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 112, the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation result will be supplementarily described.

At the timing of ti1, the game times corresponding to the normal deviation result are started, and at the timing of ti2, the game times corresponding to the special deviation result are started. At the timing of ti3 when the game round corresponding to the special deviation result is completed, the system shifts to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A1. In line with this, "40" is set in the continuation number counter.

After that, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1" and the value of the game count counter is added by "1" each time the game round progresses (see, for example, the timing of ti4). At the timing of ti5 during the 4th normal game state corresponding to the special deviation result, the game round to reach the ceiling is started. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 112, the ceiling is reached while the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the special deviation result is continuing, that is, before the value of the continuation number counter becomes “0”. Regarding this game round, it corresponds to the normal out-of-normal result that does not correspond to the reach display, and due to the benefit of the high frequency support mode, the number of holdings related to the operating ports 91 and 92 is also moving near the upper limit. For this reason, the variation display time of the pattern on the display unit for the operating port and the variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device are about 3 to 5 sec due to the influence of the time shortening function, and the game rounds that reach the ceiling rapidly progress. There is.

In the game times when the ceiling is reached, the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a at the timing of the confirmation display, so that the player is clearly shown that the ceiling has been reached. Then, at the timing of ti6 when the game round ends, the value of the continuation number counter is overwritten with "400", and another game is changed from the 4th normal game state corresponding to the special deviation result to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the ceiling arrival. It is migrating without going through the state. Along with this, the background color of the display screen 95a has been changed from blue to green.

Here, during the high frequency support mode A, the electric accessory 93 is frequently switched to the open state. The electric accessory 93 is in the open state at the timing of ti6 when the game round that reaches the ceiling ends, but the electric accessory 93 is in the open state until the opening time set at the time of switching to the open state elapses. It will be maintained as it is, and the opening time will not be forcibly shortened. That is, even when the trigger of the fourth normal gaming state is switched from the special deviation result to reaching the ceiling as described above, the behavior of the electric accessory 93 is not disturbed. The winning support in the fourth normal gaming state will end when the value of the continuation number counter becomes "0" or when the big hit result is obtained before that.

<Modification 1>
In the tenth embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by the special disengagement result, the symbol combination (“CHANGE” symbol) indicating the ceiling arrival in the game times of reaching the ceiling is used. A configuration that clearly indicates that the ceiling has been reached by stopping and displaying the combination of symbols including) and a configuration that clearly indicates that the ceiling has been reached by changing the background color of the display screen 95a from the next game that reaches the ceiling. However, it is not limited to this. The specific configuration for clearly indicating the arrival at the ceiling is arbitrary, and one of the above two configurations can be omitted. That is, in the game times in which the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, it is possible to omit the function of clearly indicating the ceiling arrival by the symbol combination. Further, it is also possible to unify the background color of the display screen 95a between the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation result and the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Modification 2>
In the tenth embodiment described above, the number of times of termination reference (“20” times or “40” times) set when shifting to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation result is triggered by reaching the ceiling. 4 The number of times is less than the end reference number (“400” times) set when shifting to the normal gaming state, but the number is not limited to this. More than the end reference number set when shifting to the 4th normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation result, and more than the ending reference number set when shifting to the 4th normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling. Alternatively, the end reference number set when shifting to the 4th normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation result and the ending reference number set when shifting to the 4th normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling are set. The number may be the same.

<Modification 3>
If the electric accessory 93 is in the open state at the timing when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by the special disengagement result, the electric accessory 93 is forcibly switched to the closed state. It is also possible to configure it.

<11th embodiment>
If the special deviation result is obtained during the high frequency support mode, the special deviation result becomes invalid and the benefit cannot be enjoyed, which gives the player the impression that the special deviation result was a so-called wasteful deduction. It becomes a factor to give. This is not preferable because it causes a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. In particular, if such an event occurs just before the end of the high frequency support mode and it catches the player's eyes, the above concern becomes greater. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the device will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

The patterns that are stopped and displayed (confirmed) on the operating port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D) are individually selected for each lottery result based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92. It is provided. That is, when the lottery result based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 is the 6R normal jackpot result, the 6R normal jackpot result corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2, and the operating ports 91 and 92 are stopped. If the lottery result based on the winning of the prize is the 6R probability variation jackpot result, the pattern corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the display units D1 and D2 for the operating port, and the lottery result based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92. When is the special disconnection result A, the pattern corresponding to the special disconnection result A is stopped and displayed on the actuation port display units D1 and D2, and the lottery result based on the winning of the actuation ports 91 and 92 is the special disconnection result B. In that case, the design corresponding to the special disconnection result B is stopped and displayed on the actuation port display units D1 and D2, and if the lottery result based on the winning of the actuation ports 91 and 92 is the normal deviation result, the operation port display unit. The pattern corresponding to the normal deviation result is stopped and displayed on D1 and D2 (see FIG. 113 (a)).

As described in detail above, the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 have a configuration in which the symbol combination for which the stop display is displayed does not differ depending on the gaming state. On the other hand, among the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a), the symbol combinations corresponding to the special deviation results are configured to differ depending on the gaming state.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 113 (b) and 113 (c), when a special deviation result occurs during the normal gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the symbol display device. While the symbol combinations of "3", "1", and "4", which are the symbol combinations corresponding to the special deviation result, are stopped and displayed on 95 (display screen 95a), the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode (display screen 95a) is displayed. If a special deviation result occurs during the 2nd normal game state to the 4th normal game state), the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) can be used with a symbol combination other than the above symbol combination, specifically, the normal deviation result. The symbol combination of is stopped and displayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 115, the variable display time table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be supplementarily described. FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram showing a variation display time table corresponding to a normal deviation result, and FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram showing a variation display time table corresponding to a special deviation result.

The variable display time table corresponding to the normal deviation result is the same as that of the first embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 114 (a1) illustrates a variation display time in the case of a complete deviation in the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", either "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information When the number is "2", any of "7, 8, 9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored pending information is "3" to "8", it is set. Any of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the first normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

FIG. 114 (a2) illustrates the variation display time in the case of complete deviation in the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", either "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information When the number is "2", any of "7, 8, 9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored pending information is "3" to "8", it is set. Any of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the fourth normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec". That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the fourth normal gaming state is the same as the setting mode of the variable display time in the first normal gaming state.

FIG. 114 (a3) exemplifies the variation display time in the case of complete deviation in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", any of "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored pending information is "1". If it is "8", one of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the second normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

FIG. 114 (a4) illustrates the variation display time in the case of complete deviation in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", any of "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored pending information is "1". If it is "8", one of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the third normal gaming state is the same as the setting mode of the variable display time in the second normal gaming state. In the third normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

By the way, in any of the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state, in the game times in which the reach display (out-of-reach) corresponding to the out-of-order result occurs, the variable display time is irrespective of the number of stored information. Is set to any of "20 to 30 sec". This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result (see FIG. 28), and in the case of the jackpot result, a relatively long time in the range. If it is easy to set and the result is off, it is easy to set a relatively short time in the range. That is, the difference is provided so that the reach display having a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach display having a short variable display time.

Also in this embodiment, the variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 sec) corresponding to the reach display is set in the game times when the game reaches the ceiling.

Next, the variable display time table corresponding to the special deviation result will be described. FIG. 115 (a1) illustrates a variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In the case of a special deviation in the first normal game state, any one of "20 to 30 sec" is set as the variable display time regardless of the number of stored information on hold. This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result.

FIG. 115 (a2) illustrates a variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", either "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information When the number is "2", any of "7, 8, 9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored pending information is "3" to "8", it is set. Any of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time. That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the fourth normal gaming state is the same as in the case of deviation from normal (see FIG. 114 (a2)). In the fourth normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

FIG. 115 (a3) illustrates a variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", any of "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored pending information is "1". If it is "8", one of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the second normal gaming state is the same as in the case of deviation from normal (see FIG. 114 (a3)). In the second normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

FIG. 115 (a4) illustrates a variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", any of "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored pending information is "1". If it is "8", one of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the third normal gaming state is the same as in the case of deviation from normal (see FIG. 114 (a4)). In the third normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

In the game times when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 sec) corresponding to the reach display is set as in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. On the other hand, in the game times in which the ceiling is reached during the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the reach is reached with reference to the variable display time tables shown in FIGS. 114 (a2) and 115 (a2). A variable display time that does not correspond to the display is set.

Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 116, a variation display mode of the symbol in each game round will be described.

As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the game times in which the normal deviation result (complete deviation result) that does not support reach display is performed, the variable display of each symbol row stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) is displayed. Is started at the start of the game round. After that, without shifting to the reach display, the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row is stopped in this order, and the symbol combination corresponding to the normal out-of-order result that does not correspond to the reach display is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). This variation display mode is the same in the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the game times that result in a special deviation in the normal game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) is stopped and displayed. The variable display of each symbol row is started at the start of the game round. After that, it stops in the order of the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row and shifts to the reach display. After the transition to the reach display, the symbol combinations (“3” symbol, “1” symbol, and “4” symbol combination) corresponding to the special deviation result are stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the middle symbol column is displayed. It will be stopped. By this combination of symbols, it is clearly shown to the player that the result is a special deviation.

As shown in FIG. 116 (c), in the game times that result in a special deviation in the normal game state (second normal game state to fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a). ) Is stopped and displayed, the variable display of each symbol row is started at the start of the game round. After that, without shifting to the reach display, the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row is stopped in this order, and the symbol combination corresponding to the normal out-of-order result that does not correspond to the reach display is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). That is, it is difficult to specify from the symbol combination whether or not this game round is a special out-of-order result.

According to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, even if the game progresses without a big hit result, the special off result or the ceiling is reached, so that the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A is entered. Can be migrated. By shifting to the fourth normal gaming state, the frequency of winning prizes in the second operating port 92A increases, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the soundness of the game. However, if a special deviation result is obtained in a normal gaming state corresponding to a high frequency support mode such as the 4th normal skill state, the special deviation result becomes invalid and is treated in the same manner as the normal deviation result. This is preferable for suppressing the increase in gambling, but if the player understands that the special result has occurred, it gives the player the impression that he or she has wasted luck. It is feared that it will become. This can be a factor that reduces the motivation to play. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when a special deviation result is obtained during the first normal gaming state, a symbol combination for clearly indicating the special deviation result on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is provided. While the stop display is displayed, if a special out-of-order result is obtained during the 4th normal game state (the same applies to the 2nd normal game state and the 3rd normal game state), the same symbol combination as in the case of the normal out-of-game result is obtained. Is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, even if a special deviation result occurs during the fourth normal gaming state (the same applies to the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state), it can be made inconspicuous. .. This can suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience and contribute to the improvement of the player's satisfaction. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, if a special deviation result occurs during the first normal game state, the variable display time becomes the variable display time corresponding to the reach display, and during the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode such as the fourth normal game state. If the result is a special deviation, the variable display time will be the variable display time that does not support reach display. As described above, even if a special deviation result occurs during the high frequency support mode, the above effect can be more preferably exhibited by advancing the game inconspicuously. In particular, if a special deviation result occurs during the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode such as the 4th normal skill state, the normal deviation occurs during the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode such as the 4th normal skill state. The same variable display time table as in the case of the result (not compatible with reach display) is referred to, and the variable display time is set in a common manner. As a result, the game times that result in the special deviation can be confused with the game times that result in the normal deviation, and the above effect can be suitably enhanced.

<Modification 1>
In the eleventh embodiment described above, a symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop display (confirmed display) when the special deviation result A is obtained, and a stop display on the symbol display device 95 when the special deviation result B is obtained. (Confirmed display) The combination of symbols is unified, but it is not limited to this. A symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop and display when the special deviation result A is obtained (a symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result A) and a symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop and display when the special deviation result B is obtained. It may be different from (the combination of symbols corresponding to the special deviation result B).

Further, when the symbol combination for the special deviation result A and the symbol combination for the special deviation result B are individually provided so that the type of the special deviation result can be identified from the symbol combination, the special has a relatively high advantage. When the result B is lost, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination corresponding to the special loss result B (normal symbol combination corresponding to the loss result) is stopped and displayed to make it unclear that the result is special B. When the special deviation result A having a relatively low advantage is obtained, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result A may be stopped and displayed to clearly indicate that the special deviation result A is obtained. Further, when the special deviation result B having a relatively high advantage is obtained, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result B is stopped and displayed to clearly indicate that the special deviation result B is obtained, while the relative advantage is obtained. When the special deviation result A is low, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result A (the symbol combination corresponding to the normal deviation result) is stopped and displayed to make it unclear that it is the special deviation result A. It may be configured to be used.

<Modification 2>
In the eleventh embodiment described above, if a special deviation result is obtained during the normal gaming state (second normal gaming state to fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the symbol display device 95 is normally disconnected. The design is such that the symbol combination corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. If a special deviation result occurs during the normal gaming state (third normal gaming state to fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal deviation result is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 95. On the other hand, the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode B-compatible normal game state (fourth normal game state), which is a game state that is more advantageous than the high-frequency support mode A-compatible normal game state that shifts when the special deviation result is triggered. If a special deviation result is obtained inside, the symbol display device 95 may be configured to stop and display the combination of the "3" symbol, the "1" symbol, and the "4" symbol corresponding to the special deviation result. Is.

<Modification 3>
When the special deviation result is made unclear every time, the difference between the probability of the special deviation result grasped by the player and the probability of the actual special deviation result becomes large. It is feared that this may be a factor that gives the player a negative impression such as "incompatibility with the pachinko machine" or "poor flow". In view of such an event, a configuration that determines whether or not to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result on the symbol display device 95 according to the remaining number of times in the fourth normal game state, specifically, the remaining number of games. When is more than a predetermined number of times, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result is stopped and displayed, and when it is less than the predetermined number of times, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result is not stopped and displayed.

<Modification example 4>
Before the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 432 is subject to the hit / fail judgment, it is configured to predetermine whether or not the hold information corresponds to the special deviation result, and the result is determined according to the result. It is also possible to execute the advance notice effect (so-called look-ahead effect). In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, there is a high possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable due to the occurrence of the advance notice effect during the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. Therefore, in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, it is desirable to regulate at least one of the above-mentioned prior identification and the advance notice effect so as to refrain from the advance notice effect.

<12th embodiment>
As shown in the first embodiment, in the configuration in which the upper limit (end reference number of times) is provided in the fourth normal game state that shifts when the ceiling is reached, the jackpot result during the fourth normal game state. There is a possibility that the fourth normal game state will end without becoming. In a configuration in which the value of the game count counter that influences the ceiling function is reset (cleared to 0) only when a big hit occurs, that is, in a configuration in which the ceiling is not reset when the above event (hereinafter, also referred to as running through) occurs, the following Since the ceiling will not be reset until it becomes a big hit, there is a possibility that investment will increase significantly after the above run-through. Here, the gaming machine is generally connected to a data display device provided in the gaming hall, and the number of games after the big hit is displayed on the data display device, and the manager of the gaming hall displays this data. It can be determined whether or not the ceiling has not been reached by referring to the device. However, in the game hall, the power of the game machine and the data display device is turned off after the business hours are over, and the power is turned on on the morning of the business day. Since the number of games is reset (cleared to 0) by such a power supply operation (OFF → ON), it is difficult to determine whether the ceiling has not been reached after the power supply operation. It is assumed that the difficulty in grasping the state of the gaming machine in this way is a factor that reduces the convenience of the administrator. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the support mode switching process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 117.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S9001, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9001, the process proceeds to step S9002. In step S9002, it is determined whether or not the number of times limit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S9002, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9002, the process proceeds to step S9003. In step S9003, the continuation number counter of various counter areas 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S9004, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S9004, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S9004, the process proceeds to step S9005, and the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically, the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number-of-times limit flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 are cleared. This switching process ends. By clearing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S9001, if a negative determination is made in the step S9001, the process proceeds to step S9006. In step S9006, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9006, the process proceeds to step S9007. In step S9007, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S9007, the process proceeds to step S9008. In step S9008, the continuation count counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S9009, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation count counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the switching process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S9009, the process proceeds to step S9015. In step S9015, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode A this time is the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. If a negative determination is made in step S9015, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared in step S9005, and the switching process is terminated. That is, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S9015, the process proceeds to step S9016. In step S9016, the special notification preparation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. After that, in step S9005, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared, and the switching process is terminated. That is, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S9006, if a negative determination is made in step S9006, that is, if the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S9010. In step S9010, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S9010, the process proceeds to step S9011. In step S9011, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special deviation. If it does not correspond to the special deviation, a negative determination is made in step S9011, and the switching process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9011 (when corresponding to a special deviation) or when an affirmative determination is made in step S9010 (when the ceiling is reached), the process proceeds to step S9012. In step S9012, the high frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in the following step S9013, the number-of-times limit flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. After that, the process proceeds to step S9014, the continuation count counter setting process is executed, and then the switching process is terminated.

In the continuation count counter setting process, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit (when the ceiling is reached) in the current game round, "400" is set in the continuation count counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A will continue until the high-frequency support mode A becomes a big hit or the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 400 times. If the result of this game is a special deviation A, "20" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A will continue until the high-frequency support mode A becomes a big hit or the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 20 times. If the result of this game is a special deviation B, "40" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A will continue until the high-frequency support mode A becomes a big hit or the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 40 times.

Returning to the explanation of step S9007, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit (when the ceiling is reached) during the high frequency support mode A, "400" is set (overwritten) in the continuation count counter in step S9014. ), And the process for switching is completed. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A is extended so that the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A becomes 400. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special deviation, the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode A is continued is reset (overwritten), and other normal game states, etc. are changed. The upper limit of the 4th normal gaming state will be raised without going through.

Next, the main process executed by the MPU 402 of the main control unit 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 118. As shown in the first embodiment, the main process is a process started when the power is turned on, and after the main process is executed, the process proceeds to the normal process (see FIG. 23).

(Main processing)
In the main process, first, in step S9101, the start-up process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, it waits for about 500 msec to wait for the control board (payout control device 242 or the like) on the slave side to be in an operable state.

In the following step S9102, it is determined whether or not 1 sec, which is the permission prohibition period, has elapsed since the start-up process of step S9101. If 1 sec has not elapsed, the process of step S9102 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of processes in step S9102. For example, if the time required from the negative determination in step S9102 to the execution of the process of step S9102 again is 0.1 msec, the count value becomes 10,000 times, and after the start-up process of step S9101. It is determined that 1 sec has elapsed from. The specific configuration of the time measurement is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock. If it is determined in step S9102 that 1 sec has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S9103.

In step S9103, access to RAM 404 is permitted. After that, in step S9104, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 166 provided in the power supply / emission control device 243 is ON, and in the following step S9105, whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 404. Is determined. Further, in step S9106, the RAM determination value is calculated, and in the subsequent step S9107, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 404. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 404 are correctly stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the reset switch 166. If the reset switch 166 is pressed (if it is ON), the process proceeds to steps S9108 to S9109. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to steps S9108 to S9109 in the same manner. In step S9108, the used area of RAM 404 is cleared to 0, and in step S9109, the initialization process of RAM 404 is executed. In the process of step S9108, the values of the game count counter and the continuation count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 are reset (cleared to 0). If the special notification preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas, the special notification preparation flag is deleted.

On the other hand, when the reset switch 166 is not pressed, the power failure flag storage area is stored in step S9115, provided that the power failure flag is stored and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Clear the power failure flag stored in.

After executing the process of step S9115 or step S9109, the process proceeds to step S9110. In step S9111, it is determined whether or not the special notification preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If the special notification preparation flag is not stored, the initial command setting process is executed in step S9111 to output the initial command to the payout control device 242. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S9111, and the process proceeds to normal processing. The MPU of the payout control device 242 recognizes that communication with the main control device 162 is normally performed by inputting an initial command from the main control device 162.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S9111, the process proceeds to step S9113. In step S9113, the special notification start process is executed. In the following step S2514, the special notification preparation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 is deleted. After that, each process of step S2511 and step S2512 is executed to shift to the normal process. In the special notification start processing in step S9113, the special notification start command is set. This special notification start command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 (see FIG. 23) of the normal process. The notification / effect control device 140 starts special notification based on the reception of this special notification start command.

Here, the special notification process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 119 (a). The special notification process is a process executed as a part of the periodic process in the MPU 442.

(Processing for special notification)
In the special notification process, first, in step S9201, it is determined whether or not the special notification is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S9201, it is determined in step S9202 whether or not the special notification start command has been received from the main control device 162. If a negative determination is made in step S9202, the special notification process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9202, the process proceeds to step S9203 to execute the special notification start processing, and then the special notification processing ends. In the special notification start process of step S9203, as shown in FIG. 119 (b) → FIG. 119 (c), the annular illuminated portion 26 of the front door frame 14 is fully lit. The hall manager of the gaming hall can easily identify whether or not the gaming machine is in the state after running through the ceiling from the presence or absence of light emission of the annular illumination unit 26.

Returning to the description of step S9201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S9201, that is, if the special notification is being executed, the process for canceling the special notification is executed in steps S9204 to S9206. Here, first, the special notification control process executed as a part of the normal process (see FIG. 23) by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 120.

(Special notification control processing)
In the special notification control process, first, in step S9301, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 166 is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S9301, the special notification control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9301, the special notification release process is executed in step S9302. In the special notification cancellation process, a special notification cancellation command is set. This special notification release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 (see FIG. 23) of the normal process. In the following step S9302, the game count counters in the various counter areas 434 are reset (cleared to 0) to end the special notification control process.

Returning to the description of the special notification process of FIG. 119 (a), in step S9204, it is determined whether or not the special notification release command is received from the main control device 162. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9204, the special notification release process is executed in step S9205. In the special notification release process, as shown in FIG. 119 (c) → FIG. 119 (b), the above-mentioned annular illumination unit 26 is turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step S9204, the process proceeds to step S9206 to determine whether or not the effect button 35 provided on the front door frame 14 has been operated (whether or not it has been turned ON). If a negative determination is made in step S9206, the special notification process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9206, the special notification cancellation process of step S9205 is executed, and then the special notification process is terminated.

As described in detail above, when the reset switch 166 is operated (when it is turned on) while the special notification is being executed, the game count counter is reset (cleared to 0) and the special notification is performed. Is released. On the other hand, when the effect button 35 is operated (turned on) while the special notification is being executed, the special notification is sent without resetting (clearing 0) the game count counter. It will only be released.

When the game is executed without canceling the special notification, the light emitting effect in the annular illumination unit 26 is preferentially executed as the game progresses. However, when the progress of the game is stopped, the light emitting mode in the annular illumination unit 26 returns to the mode corresponding to the special notification (all lighting). Further, when the operation corresponding effect is executed while the game is in progress, the effect button 35 may be operated by the player, but the effect button 35 is given priority in the light emission effect accompanying the progress of the game. Even if is operated, the special notification is not canceled and the suspended state is maintained.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a big hit result, the fourth normal game corresponding to the high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode A) Move to the state. In the fourth normal game state, the winnings to the operating ports 91 and 92 occur frequently, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to rescue the player. Here, the end reference number of times (400 times) is set in the fourth normal game state shifted by reaching the ceiling, and even when the ceiling is reached, a big hit result is obtained during the fourth normal game state. There is a possibility that the fourth normal game state will end without any problem (running through the ceiling). This is preferable in order to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from becoming excessive and causing excessive gambling. However, after running through the ceiling, the number of times the game is executed, which is stored by the game number counter, remains unreset, and it becomes impossible to reach the ceiling again. Here, if the power switch is turned from OFF to ON without operating the reset switch 166 in the state after running through the ceiling, special notification is executed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the state is after running through the ceiling. It is preferable to support the grasp of the state after running through the ceiling by turning on the power in this way in order to improve the convenience of the administrator.

When any of the effect button 35 and the reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification is being executed, the special notification is canceled. On the other hand, when the reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification is being executed, the number of times the game is executed stored in the game number counter is reset. According to such a configuration, the manager of the gaming hall can easily select the correspondence to the gaming machine in which the special notification is executed according to the business form of the gaming hall and the like. That is, it is possible to select whether to cancel only the above-mentioned special notification and leave it in the state of running through the ceiling, or to reset the ceiling. With such a configuration, the above effect can be more preferably exhibited.

The effect button 35 as the "first operating means" is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, and the reset switch 166 as the "second operating means" is arranged on the back side of the gaming machine. With such an arrangement, it is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience that the number of executions is reset by the player while improving the convenience of the administrator.

<Modification 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, the operating means for canceling the special notification (effect button 35) is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine (specifically, the front door frame 14), and the operating means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling. (Reset switch 166) is arranged on the back side of the gaming machine (specifically, the main control device 162), but the present invention is not limited to this. Both the operating means for canceling the special notification and the operating means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling may be arranged on the back side of the gaming machine.

The operation means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling are arranged at a position where the player cannot operate, for example, a position where the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 can be opened so that the pachinko machine can be accessed from the front. If it is, it is sufficient, and it is not always necessary to dispose of it in the main control device 162.

<Modification 2>
In the twelfth embodiment, the effect button 35 is configured to have both a function as an operation means for operation-compatible effect and a function as an operation means for canceling special notification, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. An operation means for canceling the special notification may be provided separately from the effect button 35.

<Modification 3>
If the game is executed under the condition that the special notification is not canceled and the game is continued, the ring-shaped illumination unit 26 may be regulated so that the light emitting effect accompanying the progress of the game is not executed. It is possible.

<Modification example 4>
As a special notification, a first special notification using the annular illumination unit 26 and a second special notification using the symbol display device 95 (for example, a counter display indicating the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling, and the counter is "when running through the ceiling". The configuration is such that 9999 "and" 0000 "are fixed at a specific value) are executed in parallel, and when the effect button 35 or the reset switch 166 is operated during the execution of the special notification, the first It is also possible to configure the configuration in which the second special notification is continued while the special notification is canceled.

<Modification 5>
In the twelfth embodiment, when the effect button 35 is operated during the execution of the special notification, the special notification is canceled, but the present invention is not limited to this. By operating the effect button 35, it is possible to switch the mode of the special notification from a mode in which the discriminating power is relatively high (a mode in which the discriminating power is easily conspicuous) to a mode in which the discriminating power is relatively low (a mode in which the discriminating power is inconspicuous). In such a configuration, even if the device for executing the special notification is changed from the annular illumination unit 26 to another device (for example, the symbol display device 95 or the lamp unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine). good.

<Modification 6>
In the twelfth embodiment, the special notification is executed by fully lighting the annular illuminated portion 26 of the front door frame 14, but the specific mode of the special notification is arbitrary. At least it is sufficient if it is possible to distinguish between a gaming machine that is executing special notification and a gaming machine that is not executing special notification. For example, special notification is executed by setting the annular illumination unit 26 to a special light emitting mode. It may be configured to be used. Further, it is also possible to configure the special notification to be executed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, or to execute the special notification by the voice output from the speaker unit 29.

<Modification 7>
In the game hall, the work time is shortened by turning the power on / off collectively for each island facility, instead of turning the power on / off individually for each game machine. Therefore, when the power is turned off → the power is turned on (restarted) while the special notification is being executed, the following effects can be expected by configuring the configuration in which the special notification is canceled. That is, if the operation of the effect button 35 and the reset switch 166 is not indispensable for canceling the special notification, it is not necessary to individually perform the release operation for each gaming machine, which contributes to the improvement of work efficiency. can.

In addition, if a ball enters the ball entry part such as the operating ports 91, 92 or the game round is started while the special notification is being executed, the special notification is temporarily restricted. It is also possible to configure it so that it can be released or released.

<Modification 8>
In the twelfth embodiment, the effect button 35 is connected to the notification / effect control device 140, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to connect the effect button 35 to the main control device 162.

<13th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the behavior when the ceiling arrival and the jackpot overlap is characteristic. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetric gauge (see FIG. 6), but in the present embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetric gauge. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, the game board unit 80A will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 80aA. A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like are arranged in each opening. When the game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82A, and the variable winning device 83A, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry portion, and the detection result is used. Based on this, a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 80aA, and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out opening 86.

Further, in the game board 80aA, a large number of game nails 87 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged. .. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations of the game nail 87, the windmill, and the like, and the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are adjusted so as to generate a prize with an appropriate probability.

The actuating port unit 82A is provided by the first actuating port 91A and the second actuating port 92A arranged directly under the first actuating port 91A, similarly to the actuating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. In particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric accessory 93A as an opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE by the center frame 96A is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that detours from the left side. It is the same as the above-mentioned first embodiment in the point that it is done. However, in the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the left route can win the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, but cannot win the variable winning device 83A and the through gate 84A. Therefore, the game ball launched to the right route can win the second operating port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, while the first operating port 91A cannot be won. The arrangement of the 1 operating port 91A, the 2nd operating port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A has been changed. It should be noted that the game ball launched to the left route may be configured so that the second operating port 92A cannot be won.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route according to the game state, the game can be advanced advantageously. By encouraging such technical intervention, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Here, in the present embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 122.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in the present embodiment is the first operating port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A. It has a holding area Ra for the second working port and a holding area Rb for the second working port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is won in the second operating port 92A. is doing.

The holding area Ra for the first operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the first operating port 91A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area to the fourth area. Further, the holding area Rb for the second operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second. Each numerical information (holding information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area → third area → fourth area.

In the present embodiment, when the holding information is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second working port (specifically, the first area). Is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When the hold information is not stored in the hold area Rb for the second operating port and the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first working port, the holding area for the first working port is stored. The hold information stored in Ra (specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, a lottery based on winning a prize in the operating ports 91 and 92 may result in a special deviation, but in the present embodiment, the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 are provided. The configuration is different from the first embodiment in that the special deviation is omitted (excluded) from the lottery result based on the winning. Hereinafter, the pass / fail table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 123, as the pass / fail table for the operation port, there are a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). It is provided.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 123 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of 6 pieces of "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 123 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the out-of-order results (specifically, the out-of-order results). That is, in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A, the configuration does not become the "special deviation" shown in the first embodiment.

The distribution table for the operation port is divided into a distribution table for the first operation port and a distribution table for the second operation port. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 124.

As shown in FIG. 124 (a), in the distribution table for the first operating port, 6R normal jackpot results (low probability correspondence special game results) and 6R probability variation jackpot results (high probability correspondence) are distributed to the game results. Special game result), 2R probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result) are set. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and "10 to 19" corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result. "20-29 correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 124 (b), in the distribution table for the second operating port, the 6R normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence special game result) and the 6R probability variation jackpot result (high probability correspondence) are distributed to the game result. Special game result) is set. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result.

Here, each jackpot will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 125.

When the 6R normal jackpot result is obtained, the player shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state. As described in the first embodiment, after the transition to the third normal gaming state, the number of games executed during the third normal gaming state reaches the end reference number (specifically, "40 times"). If this is the case, the game shifts to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. That is, the number of times is limited in the third normal game state. In the present embodiment, the counting of the number of games in the third normal game state is limited to the game times executed based on the winning of the second operating port 92A.

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, after the end of the special gaming state, the game shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. As described in the first embodiment, the second normal gaming state will be continued until the next big hit. On the other hand, in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, after the end of the special gaming state, the game shifts to the fifth normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

Here, with reference to FIG. 126, a supplementary explanation will be given to the flow of the game when the ceiling arrival and the jackpot overlap.

In the example shown in FIG. 126 (a), the game progresses without a big hit result in the first normal game corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the game number executed after the end of the special game state is the upper limit ( It has reached the ceiling). The 6R normal jackpot result is obtained in the game times (400th game times) that reach the ceiling, and the player shifts to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. It has transitioned to a special game state without any problems. After the end of the special gaming state, the process shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B.

In the example shown in FIG. 126 (b), the game progresses without a big hit result in the first normal game corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the game number executed after the end of the special game state is the upper limit ( It has reached the ceiling). The 6R probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the game times (400th game times) that reach the ceiling, and the system shifts to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. It has transitioned to a special game state without any problems. After the end of the special gaming state, the process shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B.

In the example shown in FIG. 126 (c), the game progresses without a big hit result in the first normal game corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the game number executed after the end of the special game state is the upper limit ( It has reached the ceiling). The 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the game times (400th game times) that reach the ceiling, and the system shifts to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A triggered by the arrival at the ceiling. It has transitioned to a special game state without any problems. After the end of the special gaming state, the process shifts to the fifth normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

As described in detail above, if any of the ceiling arrival, the 6R normal jackpot result, the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is not given to the player. In such a configuration, it is feared that the player's satisfaction will be greatly reduced because the benefits are drowned out even though the ceiling is reached. In this embodiment, measures are taken in consideration of such circumstances. Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 127 (a), the first fluctuation start processing executed as a part of the fluctuation display control processing (see FIG. 41) in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 will be described. The first variation start process is a process for starting the effect for the game round based on the reception of the change start command from the main control device 162, and the change of the symbol such as the reach display as the effect for the game round. Set the display mode.

(First fluctuation start processing)
In the first fluctuation start processing, first, the fluctuation start command received this time in step S9401 is read, and the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control device 162, the type command is also transmitted. In step S9401, the type command received together with the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and from the command, information on the probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the special deviation result, information on the normal deviation result, and reaching the ceiling. Identify various information related to the game result, such as the information of. Then, in step S9401, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not there is a big hit, information on the type of big hit if it is a big hit, information on whether or not there is a special loss, and if it is a special loss, the type of special loss. Information, information on whether or not reach has occurred, information on whether or not the ceiling has been reached, information on fluctuation display time, etc. are grasped when the jackpot is not won and the special is not out of order, and the grasped information is stored in the register of MPU442.

In the following step S9402, based on the information grasped in step S9401, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is the game result corresponding to the jackpot result. When the current game result is a jackpot result (6R probability variation jackpot result or 6R normal jackpot result), it is determined in the following step S9411 whether or not the current game round is a game round that reaches the ceiling. If a negative determination is made in step S9411, the effect setting process for big hits is executed in the following step S9403. The effect setting process for the jackpot includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for the jackpot to be stopped and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation display mode determination for determining the variation display mode of the symbol for the jackpot. It is roughly divided into processing (effect pattern determination processing).

In the stop result determination process for the jackpot, the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination, "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination, "3" symbol, "3" symbol , "3" symbol combination, "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination, "5" symbol, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination, "6" symbol, "6" Symbol, "6" symbol combination, "7" symbol, "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination, "8" symbol, "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination, "9" symbol, "9" symbol The combination of the symbols and the symbols "9" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot (see, for example, FIG. 45 (a)).

As already explained, when a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for big hits, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game result in the type command are obtained. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the above is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S9411, that is, if the current game round is a game round that reaches the ceiling and corresponds to the jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S9412. In step S9412, the effect setting process at the time of duplication is executed. The details of this overlapping effect setting process will be described later.

If it is determined in step S9402 that the result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S9404. In step S9404, it is determined whether or not the ceiling is reached in this game round. When the ceiling is reached, an affirmative determination is made in step S9404 and the process proceeds to step S9407. In step S9407, the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed. The effect setting process for reaching the ceiling includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for reaching the ceiling to be stopped and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation for determining the variation display mode of the symbol for reaching the ceiling. It is roughly classified into a display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process).

In the stop result determination process for reaching the ceiling, the stop result in which the combination of the symbols for reaching the ceiling is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling (see FIG. 45 (b)).

When it reaches the ceiling, the result is notified via the reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for reaching the ceiling, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the game in the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S9404, the process proceeds to step S9406. In step S9406, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special deviation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9406, the process proceeds to step S9407. In step S9407, the effect setting process for special deviation is executed. The effect setting process for special deviation includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for special deviation to be stopped and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation for determining the variation display mode of the symbol for special deviation. It is roughly classified into a display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process).

In the stop result determination process for special deviation, the stop result in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special deviation is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation as in the case of reaching the ceiling (see FIG. 45 (b)). ).

In the case of a special deviation, the result is notified via the reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for special deviation, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game in the type command. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S9406, the process proceeds to step S9408 to execute the effect setting process for complete deviation. In the effect setting process for complete off, it is grasped whether or not reach occurs in this game round. When reach occurs, the effect setting process for generating reach is executed, and when reach does not occur, the effect setting process for non-reach is executed.

The effect setting process for the reach generation includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for the reach-compatible complete disconnection to be stopped and displayed and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation display mode of the symbol for the reach-compatible complete disconnection. It is roughly classified into a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) for determining.

In the stop result determination process for reach-corresponding complete deviation, the stop symbol is determined so as not to be any of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the variation display mode determination process for reach correspondence complete deviation, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time are acquired. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the game result in is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

The effect setting process for non-reach generation includes the stop result determination process for determining the stop display of the symbol combination for non-reach complete off and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the symbol for non-reach complete off. It is roughly classified into a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) for determining a variable display mode.

In the stop result determination process for non-reach complete disconnection, the stop symbol is determined so that it does not become any of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival. .. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the variation display mode determination process for non-reach complete deviation, the variation display pattern table for non-reach correspondence storage stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time is acquired. And the effect pattern corresponding to the game result in the type command is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

After executing any of the processes of steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412, the process proceeds to step S9409. In step S9409, a process of outputting commands including stop result and effect pattern information determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412 to the display control device 410 as stop result commands and pattern commands is executed. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 in order to execute the effect in the current game round, based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After the process of step S9409 is executed, in the following step S9410, the process of starting the effect for the game round is executed, and then the process for starting the variation is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the effect pattern determined in the above steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412, and the effect for the game round is started.

Here, the overlap setting process in step S9412 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 127 (b). In the overlapping time setting process, in step S9501, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is either the 2R probability variation jackpot result or the 6R normal jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9501, the normal setting process is executed in step S9502. The normal setting process is the same as the effect setting process for the jackpot shown in step S9403.

That is, in the stop result determination process constituting the normal setting process, the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game round. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area.

6R Normal jackpot result, "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination, "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination, "6" symbol, "6" symbol Any one of the "6" symbol, the "6" symbol combination, the "8" symbol, the "8" symbol, and the "8" symbol combination is set as a symbol combination for which the stop display (confirmed display) is performed.

In the case of 2R probability variation jackpot result, "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination, "3" symbol, "3" symbol, "3" symbol combination, "5" symbol, "5" symbol Any one of the "5" symbol, the "5" symbol combination, the "9" symbol, the "9" symbol, and the "9" symbol combination is set as a symbol combination for which the stop display (confirmed display) is performed.

When a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variable display mode determination process that constitutes the normal setting process, the variable display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variable display time and type command of the variable start command received this time are acquired. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the game result in is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S9501, that is, if the jackpot result this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot result, the special setting process is executed in step S9503. The special setting process is also composed of a stop result determination process and a variation display mode determination process as in the normal setting process of step S9502.

In the stop result determination process that constitutes the special setting process, the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game round. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. Last stop line Stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the information of the determined stop result is stored in the stop result address storage area. Then, a symbol combination of "7" symbol, "7" symbol, and "7" symbol is set as a symbol combination to be stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the final stop line stored in the stop result address storage area.

When a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variable display mode determination process that constitutes the special setting process, the variable display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variable display time and type command of the variable start command received this time are acquired. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the game result in is determined. Further, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

In the following description, the variation display mode of the symbol determined in step S9503 is referred to as a special variation display embodiment, and the variation display embodiment of the symbol determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and step S9502 ( Distinguish from normal variable display mode).

(Comparison of variable display mode)
Here, referring to FIG. 128, the variation display mode (normal variation display mode) when the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlap, and the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap. The difference from the variable display mode (special variable display mode) of the case will be described. FIG. 128 (a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the ceiling arrival and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlap, and FIG. 128 (b) shows the game flow when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap. It is a timing chart exemplifying.

In the game round where the ceiling arrival and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlap, as illustrated in FIG. 128 (a), the fluctuation display of the pattern on the operation port display unit is displayed at the timing of tj1 when the game round starts. The variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) is started. At the timing of tj2 when a predetermined time has passed from the start of the fluctuation, the reach display is shifted, and at the timing of tj3, the symbol corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the display unit for the operating port, and the symbol display device 95 The symbol combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). As a result, it is clearly shown to the player that the 2R probability variation jackpot result has been obtained. In this variable display mode, the game shifts to the special gaming state without clearly indicating that the ceiling has been reached.

The game flow when the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result overlap is basically the same as in FIG. 128 (a), and the symbol combination finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display) is the 6R normal jackpot. Since the difference is that the symbol combination corresponds to the result, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the game round where the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, as illustrated in FIG. 128 (b), the fluctuation display of the pattern on the operation port display unit is displayed at the timing of tk1 when the game round starts. The variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) is started. At the timing of tk2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the reach display is shifted, and at the timing of tk3, the symbol combination corresponding to the arrival at the ceiling is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed) on the symbol display device 95. As a result, it is clearly shown to the player that the ceiling has been reached. However, at the timing of this tk3, the variable display of the pattern on the display unit for the operating port is still ongoing. At the timing of tk4, in which the same length as the confirmed display time has elapsed from the timing of tk3, the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 is restarted. From the timing of tk1 to the timing of tk4 constitutes the first half part in the special variation display mode, and in view of the fact that it is clearly indicated that the ceiling has been reached in this first half part, the first half part is "for specifying ceiling arrival". It can be said that it is a "part".

At the timing of tk5 after the latter half part in the special variation display mode is started at the timing of tk4, the symbol corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the display unit for the operating port, and the symbol display device 95 is displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). The execution time of the latter half part is shorter than that of the first half part, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) without going through the reach display. From the timing of tk4 to the timing of tk5 constitutes the latter half part in the special variation display mode, and in view of the fact that it is clearly shown that the 6R probability variation jackpot result was obtained in this latter half part, the latter half part is "6R probability variation". It can also be said that it is a part for clarifying the jackpot result.

In addition, when either the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the fluctuation display time of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port overlaps, and the operation port when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap. The variable display time table is set so that the length is basically the same as the variable display time of the pattern on the display unit. As described above, by making the first half part corresponding to the reach display relatively long and shortening the second half part not supporting the reach display, the variation display is repeated twice when the special variation display mode is executed. The feeling of strangeness is reduced.

When the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without a big hit result, the system shifts to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. In the fourth normal game state, the winnings to the operating ports 91A and 92A occur frequently, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to rescue the player. Here, when the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the investment of the player is large when the ceiling is reached. For this reason, it is feared that if it is conspicuous that the benefit cannot be enjoyed even though the player has reached the ceiling, the player's willingness to play will be reduced. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot result is obtained in the game times reaching the ceiling (when overlapping), the determination result is a 6R probability variation jackpot result, a 2R probability variation jackpot result, or a 6R. Normally, different display effects are executed depending on whether the result is a big hit. Specifically, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result (the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the high frequency support mode for long continuation) is obtained in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached, an effect is executed to clearly indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached. , 2R probability variation jackpot result (big hit result that triggers the transition to the low frequency support mode) or 6R normal jackpot result (big hit result that triggers the transition to the high frequency support mode of short continuation) in the game times when the upper limit is reached. If this happens, an effect that does not clearly indicate that the maximum number of times has been reached is executed. With such a configuration, if the result is a 6R probability variation jackpot and the special game state → high frequency support mode is set, the player can be made to imagine that it is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. When the result of 2R probability variation jackpot is changed from special game state to low frequency switching mode, the player can be made to imagine that the benefit is not generated in the first place by not specifying the ceiling arrival, and 6R probability variation jackpot. As a result, when shifting to the high frequency support mode, which is much shorter than when reaching the ceiling, it is possible to make the player imagine that the benefits are not occurring in the first place by not specifying the arrival at the ceiling. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the satisfaction level of the player and preferably realize the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

<Modification 1>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when the 6R normal jackpot result that triggers the transition to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B overlaps with the ceiling arrival, the normal setting process is executed. However, the configuration is not limited to this. When the 6R normal jackpot result overlaps with the ceiling arrival, it is possible to configure the configuration in which the special setting process is executed. In other words, in the game times where the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result overlap, the first half part that stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival (temporarily stopped display) and the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result are stopped and displayed ( It is also possible to configure the variable display of the symbol to be executed in the special variable display mode composed of the latter half part to be confirmed).

<Modification 2>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the number of end reference times set when the ceiling is reached is larger than the number of end reference times set when the 6R normal jackpot result is obtained. Not limited to. 6R It is possible to make the number of end reference times set when a normal jackpot result is the same as the number of end reference times set when the ceiling is reached, or it is set when the ceiling is reached. The number of end reference times set when a 6R normal jackpot result is obtained may be larger than the number of end reference times. By combining these configurations with the configurations shown in the above-mentioned modification 1, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

<Modification 3>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the latter half part (the part that clearly shows the jackpot result) is shorter than the first half part (the part that clearly shows the arrival at the ceiling) in the special variation display mode, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not something. The first half part and the second half part may be configured to have the same length, or the second half part may be configured to be longer than the first half part.

Also, in the latter half part, the symbol combination (“7” symbol, “7” symbol, “7” symbol symbol combination) corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) without going through the reach display. However, in the latter half part as well, the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result may be stopped and displayed (confirmed display) via the reach display as in the first half part.

<Modification example 4>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the variable display time table referred to when one of the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlaps, and the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap. The variable display time table referred to in is the same. That is, when one of the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlaps, and when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the variation display time (design) of the pattern on the operation port display unit The variable display time of the symbol on the display device 95) is configured to be common. This may be changed as follows. That is, the variable display time table referred to when one of the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result and the 2R probability variable jackpot result overlaps, and the variable display time referred to when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variable jackpot result overlap. A table is provided separately, and the pattern on the display unit for the operating port is displayed when the ceiling arrival and one of the 6R normal jackpot result and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlap, and when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap. The variation display time (the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 95) may be different. For example, when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the fluctuation display time of the pattern on the operation port display unit is larger than when one of the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlap. (The fluctuation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 95) may be configured to be long. For example, in the configuration in which the reach display is executed in each of the first half part and the second half part as shown in the above modification 3, when one of the ceiling arrival, the 6R normal jackpot result, and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlaps. Rather than the case where the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the variation display time of the pattern on the display unit for the operating port (the variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95) is set to be longer. Has technical significance.

<Modification 5>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the symbol combination indicating the ceiling arrival and the symbol combination indicating the 6R probability variation jackpot result are stopped and displayed respectively. , The structure clearly indicates the arrival at the ceiling and the result of the 6R probability variation jackpot, but at least the specific configuration for indicating the arrival at the ceiling is arbitrary. For example, in a game in which the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, a moving image or a still image (cut-in image of a character or the like) for showing the ceiling arrival is displayed on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a). Alternatively, it is possible to output a sound effect indicating reaching the ceiling or a BGM from the speaker unit 29.

<Modification 6>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the ceiling arrival is clearly indicated in the first half part and the 6R probability variation jackpot result is clearly indicated in the second half part. That is, the configuration is specified in the order of reaching the ceiling → 6R probability variation jackpot result, but the configuration is not limited to this. When the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the 6R probability variation jackpot result is clearly indicated in the first half part and the ceiling arrival is clearly indicated in the second half part, that is, the 6R probability variation jackpot result → ceiling arrival is specified in this order. It is also possible to configure it.

<Modification 7>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the second normal gaming state that shifts when the 6R probability variation jackpot result is obtained is configured to be continued until the next jackpot result is obtained, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. As for the second normal gaming state, the number of times may be limited as in the third normal gaming state. For example, when the result of the 6R probability variation jackpot is changed to the second normal gaming state, the number of executions of the game times executed without the jackpot result after the end of the special gaming state becomes the predetermined end reference number. It may be configured to shift to the first normal gaming state. The predetermined number of end reference times may be the same as, for example, the number of end reference times set by reaching the ceiling, or may be larger than the end reference number of times.

<14th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, in the fourth normal game state in which the special deviation result is triggered, the remaining number of games in the fourth normal game state is notified. In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the notification of the number of remaining games is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. 129, the types of special deviation results in the present embodiment will be described.

In the present embodiment, the special deviation result A, the special deviation result B, and the special deviation result C are provided as the special deviation result. Regarding the special deviation result A to the special deviation result C, although it is an opportunity to shift to the high frequency support mode A, there is a difference in the number of games that can be executed during the high frequency support mode A, that is, the end reference number of times. It is provided.

Specifically, when the special deviation result A is obtained, "20 times" is set as the end reference number, and when the special deviation result B is obtained, "40 times" is set as the end reference number. If the result of deviation is C, "100 times" is set as the end reference number of times. In other words, preferential treatment is given so that the number of termination criteria increases in the order of special deviation result A <special deviation result B <special deviation result C. In such a configuration, when a special deviation result is obtained, the player's expectation is that the special deviation result C is obtained.

(Game board unit 80C)
As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 130, a hold display area is set at the lower part of the display screen 95aC of the symbol display device 95C. The hold display area is a hold number display area Da in which the same number of units hold display areas as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins in the operating openings 91 and 92 are arranged in the left-right direction and displayed in a section. It is composed of an execution target display area Dc capable of displaying a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the game times.

In the center frame 96C of the game board unit 80C, the lower part (lower frame part) of the display screen 95aC, specifically, the position closer to the first unit hold display area Da that constitutes the hold number display area Da (execution target display area Dc). A number display unit 88C, which is a counter for displaying the number of remaining games until the end of the high-frequency support mode A, is provided at a position directly below. The number display unit 88C is a segment display connected to the notification / effect control device 140, and is a target of display control by the notification / effect control device 140. The notification / effect control device 140 displays the number of times corresponding to the end reference number of times on the number of times display unit 88C when shifting to the high frequency support mode A, and the number of times is decremented by "1" each time the game times progress. Display control is performed as follows. In other words, each time the hold icon MP shifts from the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area) to the execution target display area Dc in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, the number display unit. The remaining number of games displayed on 88C is subtracted by "1".

In the present embodiment, the display of the remaining number of games in the number display unit 88C is configured not to be executed in a game state other than the fourth normal game state, but is not limited to this. For example, the remaining number of games may be displayed on the number display unit 88C even in another game state (a game state in which the number of games is limited) such as the third normal game state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133, the configuration related to the variation display of the symbol of each game round and the outline of the variation display will be described. FIG. 131 is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of display on the symbol display device 95C (display screen 95aC).

Three symbol rows, left, middle, and right, are set as the symbol rows displayed on the symbol display device 95C. The variable display area of the symbol on the display screen 95a is roughly divided into a left variable display area DL, a medium variable display area DM, and a right variable display area DR corresponding to each of the symbol rows, and the symbols of each symbol row have periodicity. It is displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom). In each variable display area DL, DM, DR, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed in the variable display area. It has become so.

As shown in (j) to (t) of FIG. 132, as the above-mentioned symbols, a total of 10 kinds of main symbols of numbers "1" to "9" and a heart, and a sub-design which is a picture imitating a shell are used. It is composed of.

As shown in FIG. 133 (schematic diagram showing each symbol row), in the left symbol row and the middle symbol row, 10 main symbols are arranged in ascending order with the sub symbols in between. On the other hand, in the right symbol row, 10 main symbols are arranged in descending order with the sub symbols in between. The "heart" symbol is arranged between the "1" symbol and the "9" symbol.

Returning to the description of FIG. 131, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a left rising line L4, and a right rising line L5 are set on the display screen 95aC of the symbol display device 95C. .. Then, in each game, the fluctuation display of the symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol row → the right symbol row → the middle symbol row, and the fluctuation display of all the symbol rows ends (confirmed display), so that the jackpot result is obtained. , It is clearly shown to the player whether the result is a special deviation result or a normal deviation result. Specifically, the "1" symbol to the "9" symbol are symbols for big hits, and the same combination of big hit symbols is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on any of the above effective lines L1 to L5 to make a big hit. The result is clearly indicated (see FIG. 134 (a)). The "heart" symbol is a symbol for special deviation, and the combination of these "heart" symbols is clearly displayed as a stop display (confirmed display) on any of the above effective lines L1 to L5 to indicate that it is a special deviation result. (See FIG. 134 (b)).

According to the relationship between the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 133 and the effective line shown in FIG. 131, the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is displaced under the condition that the revariation display described later is executed. However, the event that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result passes on the effective line is avoided. This is preferable in order to prevent the player from misidentifying the special deviation result and the jackpot result.

When the above-mentioned reach display is performed, the effective lines L1 to L5 are first terminated in the left variation display area DL and then the symbol variation display is terminated in the right variation display area DR. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a symbol having the same number in at least one of the above, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the symbol is performed in the medium variation display area DM. This will be the reach display. Then, when the open / close execution mode occurs, the symbol that is the same as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variation display of the symbol in the middle symbol row is terminated.

In the present embodiment, after the combination of "heart" symbols corresponding to the special deviation result is stopped and displayed via the reach display, the end reference number set this time is notified to the player using the symbol combination. It is one of the features that it is. Specifically, for the game rotation effect executed by the symbol display device 95C in the game times corresponding to the special deviation result, the change display start of the symbol → the reach effect → the temporary stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result is displayed. It consists of two parts, the first half part to be executed and the second half part to notify the end reference number of times. In the game times that result in the special deviation, the special deviation setting process that is a part of the special deviation effect setting process (see step S1907 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 is performed. The composition is such that the outline of the production is decided. Hereinafter, the setting process for special deviation will be described with reference to FIG. 136.

(Setting processing for special disconnection)
As shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the special deviation setting process, first, in step S4001, a temporary stop line for temporarily stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result is determined. Specifically, among the effective lines L1 to L5, the line for temporarily stopping and displaying the combination of the "heart" symbols is determined.

In the following step S4002, the variation display pattern of the symbols until the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result is temporarily stopped and displayed, that is, the outline of the effect in the first half part is determined. Specifically, one of the above-mentioned normal reach A to B and super reach A to C is determined as the variation display pattern of the symbol in the first half part.

In the following step S4003, the final stop line for displaying the combination of the variable display pattern of the symbol after the temporary stop (the variable display pattern of the symbol in the latter half part) and the "heart" symbol at the time of transition to the final stop display (confirmed display). And decide. Regarding the variable display of the symbols in the latter half part, the variable display (hereinafter, also referred to as re-variable display) is performed so that all the symbol columns scroll synchronously while maintaining the combination of the "heart" symbols, and the combination of the "heart" symbols is displayed. Each time it reaches the temporary stop line, the number of times display unit 88C is configured to additionally display the end reference number of times.

However, how long such rotation display continues depends on the type of special deviation result, that is, the set end reference number of times. In addition, the final stop line where the "heart" symbol combination is stopped and displayed at the time of confirmation display does not always match the temporary stop line, and an effective line different from the temporary stop line may be determined as the final stop line. .. Here, with reference to FIG. 135 (b), the relationship between the special deviation result and the variable display pattern will be supplementarily described.

When the game result of this time is the special deviation result A in which 20 times is set as the end reference number, the number of rotations in the latter half part is set to be 2 or more and less than 3 times. For example, when the number of rotations = 2 rotations, the rotation display ends at the timing when the combination of the "heart" symbols is rotated twice. That is, the temporary stop line and the final stop line match. On the other hand, when the number of rotations = 2 rotations + α, the rotation display is continued even after the combination of the "heart" symbols makes two rotations and reaches the temporary stop line, and the combination of the "heart" symbols is changed. The rotation display ends before reaching the temporary stop line again. That is, the temporary stop line and the final stop line do not match.

When the game result of this time is the special deviation result B in which 40 times is set as the end reference number, the number of rotations in the latter half part is set to be 4 rotations or more and less than 5 rotations. For example, when the number of rotations = 4 rotations, the rotation display ends at the timing when the combination of the "heart" symbols is rotated 4 times. That is, the temporary stop line and the final stop line match. On the other hand, when the number of rotations = 4 rotations + α, the rotation display is continued even after the combination of the "heart" symbols makes 4 rotations and reaches the temporary stop line, and the combination of the "heart" symbols is changed. The rotation display ends before reaching the temporary stop line again. That is, the temporary stop line and the final stop line do not match.

When the game result of this time is the special deviation result C in which 100 times is set as the end reference number, the number of rotations in the latter half part is set to be 10 times. In this case, the rotation display ends at the timing when the combination of the "heart" symbols is rotated 10 times. That is, the temporary stop line and the final stop line match.

In the determination of step S4002, a difference is provided so that the probability that the normal reach A to B will be executed increases as the special deviation result with a larger number of set end reference times increases. In other words, if the result is a special deviation after the normal reach, the difference is set so that the expectation that a larger number of termination criteria will be set than the case where the result is a special deviation through the super reach is increased. ing. This is a device for realizing smooth game progress by preventing the variable display time of the game times from becoming unnecessarily long even when the number of rotations in the latter half part increases.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 136, among the processes for advancing the effect of the game times related to the special deviation result executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, the process for advancing the second half part (hereinafter, special). The latter half part processing for disconnection) will be explained. The second half part processing for special deviation is a processing that constitutes a part of the first variable middle processing (see step S1805 in FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, and is executed during the second half part. Will be done.

(Second half part processing for special removal)
In the second half part processing for special deviation, first, it is determined whether or not the revariation display of the symbol combination in the second half part is being performed. If the revariation display is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S4101 and the process proceeds to step S4102. In step S4102, it is determined whether or not the combination of the "heart" symbols is the timing for displaying the light emission of the effective line (temporary stop line) on which the temporary stop is displayed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4103, the effective line light emission process is executed, and then the latter half part process is terminated. In the effective line light emission processing, the effective line light emission command is transmitted to the display control device 410, and the effective line light emission sound effect is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 410 controls the symbol display device 95C so as to make the temporary stop line emit light brightly based on the reception of the effective line light emission command. As a result, the line on which the symbol combination is stopped and displayed is clearly shown to the player.

If a negative determination is made in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4104. In step S4104, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the re-variation display. If a negative determination is made in step S4104, the latter half part processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4104, the process proceeds to step S4105, the revariation display start processing is executed, and then the processing for the latter half of the present is terminated. In the re-variation display start processing, a re-variation start command is transmitted to the display control device 410, and the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to one corresponding to the re-variation. The display control device 410 starts the re-variation display of the symbol combination during the temporary stop display based on the reception of the re-variation start command.

Returning to the description of step S4101, if the revariation display is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in the step S4101 and the process proceeds to step S4106. In step S4106, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to accelerate or decelerate the symbol sequence being re-variablely displayed while maintaining the synchronized state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4016, the process proceeds to step S4107, the fluctuation speed change process is executed, and then the latter half part process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the scroll speed is changed as the combination of the "heart" symbols approaches the temporary stop line, and the scroll speed is changed as the scroll speed increases as the distance from the temporary stop line increases. The ROM 443 stores a speed change table that defines the relationship between the fluctuation speed and the scroll position of the symbol, and in the process of step S4107, the fluctuation speed is determined with reference to the speed change table. The display control device 410 changes the fluctuation display speed of the symbol so as to have the fluctuation speed determined by the notification / effect control device 140.

Returning to the description of step S4106, if a negative determination is made in step S4106, the process proceeds to step S4108. In step S4108, it is determined whether or not the combination of the "heart" symbols reaches the effective line (temporary stop line) during the light emission display. If a negative determination is made in step S4108, the latter half part processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4108, the process proceeds to step S4109 to execute the count-up process. In this count-up process, the number displayed on the number display unit 88C is added by "10". That is, in the present embodiment, each time the combination of the "heart" symbols reaches the effective line during the light emission display, the remaining number of games displayed on the number display unit 88C is added by "10". ..

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 137, among the processes for advancing the production of the game times related to the special deviation result executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, the variation end processing for the special deviation (hereinafter, (Referred to as variable end processing for special deviation) will be described. The special deviation end variation process is a process that constitutes a part of the first variation end process (see step S1806 in FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140.

(Variation end processing for special deviation)
In the special deviation end variation process, first, the definite display process is executed in step S4201. Specifically, a confirmation display command is transmitted to the display control device 410, and a sound effect corresponding to the confirmation display (final stop display) is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on the reception of the confirmation display command, the display control device 410 causes the final stop line determined in step S4003 to display the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol as the final stop.

When the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is displayed as the final stop on the effective line other than the effective line being displayed in the light emission, that is, when the temporary stop line and the final stop line do not match, it is denied in step S4202. After making a judgment, the variable end processing for this special deviation is terminated as it is. When the final stop display of the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is displayed on the effective line during the emission display, that is, when the temporary stop line and the final stop line match, an affirmative judgment is made in step S4202. The process proceeds to step S4202. In step S4202, the count-up process is executed. In this count-up process, the number displayed on the number display unit 88C is added by "10". That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining number of games displayed on the number display unit 88C is added by "10" at the timing when the combination of the "heart" symbols is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line during the light emission display.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the flow of the game rotation effect of the game times that results in the special deviation will be described. FIG. 138 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game rotation effect of the game times in which the special deviation result B is obtained during the first normal game state.

At the timing of ti1 when the game round starts, the variable display of the pattern on the display unit for the operating port and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 95C are started. This game round corresponds to the special deviation result B, and at the timing of ti2, which has passed a predetermined period from the timing of ti1, the "heart" symbol in the left symbol row and the "heart" symbol in the right symbol row are effective. The stop display (temporary stop display) is displayed on the line L2, and the reach display is displayed.

At the timing of ti3 after that, the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) on the effective line L2 as the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result B. As a result, it is clearly shown to the player that the result is a special deviation. However, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is similarly stopped and displayed regardless of any of the special deviation results A to C. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to specify the end reference number of times set from the symbol combination stopped and displayed at this point. At the timing of ti3, the variable display of the pattern on the display unit for the operating port is continued.

At the timing of ti4 after the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L2, "0" is displayed on the number display unit 88C (remaining number counter) when the effective line L2 is light-emittingly displayed. Is displayed. At the timing of the following ti5, each symbol string that has been stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) maintains the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol, and the symbol sequence starts synchronous scrolling. That is, the transition from the temporary stop display to the above-mentioned re-variation display.

At the timing of ti6 when the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol makes one round and reaches the effective line L2 again, the value of the remaining number of times counter is added and becomes "0" → "10". After that, the synchronous scrolling of the symbol string is continued, and each time the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol reaches the valid line L2, the value of the remaining count counter is added and becomes "10" → "20" → "30" (ti7). Timing, timing of ti8). At the timing of ti9 when the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol finishes the last lap and the stop display (final stop display) is displayed on the effective line L2, the value of the remaining count counter is added and the value changes from "30" to "40". , The variable display of the pattern on the display unit for the actuating port ends, and the pattern corresponding to the special off result B is stopped and displayed. Then, at the timing of ti10 after the confirmed display period has elapsed, the state shifts from the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A.

According to the fourteenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

As shown in this embodiment, when a big hit result is obtained, the support mode is changed to the high frequency support mode (specifically, the high frequency support mode B) via the special game state (open / close execution mode). If the support mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode (specifically, the high-frequency support mode A) without going through the special game state (open / close execution mode) when a special out-of-order result is obtained, the support mode can be changed. It is possible to diversify the flow of the game when changing to a higher-ranking one and contribute to suppressing the monotony of the game.

In particular, when the support mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode A due to a special deviation result, one of 20, 40, and 100 times is set as the end reference floor of the high-frequency support mode. Further diversification of games is realized by the composition. Here, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when a special deviation result is obtained, the special deviation is temporarily displayed by temporarily stopping and displaying the symbol combination (the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol) corresponding to the special deviation result. The result is clearly shown to the player. After that, the symbol combination is lap-displayed before the final stop display is displayed, and the value of the remaining count counter is updated (added) in conjunction with the lap display. The player can grasp that the special deviation result has been obtained based on the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display), and then, according to the lap of the symbol combination. By updating the value of the remaining number counter, it is possible to grasp the end reference number of times this time. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game when shifting to the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special deviation result.

If the value of the remaining number counter is added and displayed each time the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol laps, the player expects that the lap operation will continue as long as possible, and the frequency is high due to the effect. It is possible to preferably suppress the impression that the transition to the normal gaming state corresponding to the support mode A is unnecessarily delayed.

As described above, in the configuration in which the value of the remaining count counter is updated in conjunction with the lap display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result (the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol), the symbol combination collapses in the lap process. When such a situation occurs, it gives the impression that the lap is not performed well, that is, the value of the remaining number counter is not updated, and there is a concern that the degree of attention to the effect will be lowered at an early stage. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the orbital display is performed so that the symbol combination of the "heart" symbols is maintained, more specifically, the orbital display is performed by synchronizing each symbol row. , The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. It should be noted that such a configuration is also preferable in order to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the stop display of the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol itself was a mistake.

Further, in the present embodiment, the other symbol combinations that pass through the effective line during the lap display are configured so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the jackpot results are not included. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress unnecessary fanning as if promoted to a big hit, and it is possible to suitably avoid misidentification by the player. This is preferable in order to suppress a decrease in attention to the update of the value of the remaining count counter linked to the special lap display.

As shown in the present embodiment, if the stop line in which the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed) and the stop line that triggers the update of the value of the remaining count counter are aligned, It is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the diversification of the production. This is preferable in order to preferably exert the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention. In this embodiment, in particular, the lap display is terminated when the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol reaches another valid line before the valid line (stop line) that triggers the update of the value of the remaining count counter. Is possible. This is preferable in order to realize diversification of production.

As shown in the present embodiment, when the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed), the value of the remaining count counter is left hidden, and after the symbol combination is variably displayed, the above If the configuration is such that the display of the value of the remaining number counter is started when the stop line is reached, the symbol combination can be circulated at least once. This is preferable in order to widen the range of the set end reference number of times and to suppress the flow of the lap display → the update of the remaining number of times caused by it from becoming obsolete.

<Modification 1>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the symbol display device 95C causes the symbol display device 95C to stop and display (temporarily stop) the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result while the variable display of the symbol on the display unit for the operating port is being executed. In the latter half part, a special effect that notifies the end reference number of times is executed, but the specific configuration for securing the time to execute the special effect is optional. , It is also possible to change as follows.

For example, in the game times that result in a special deviation, a fixed display time longer than the fixed display time of the other game times may be set, and the above special effect may be executed during the fixed display. In addition, the above special effect is not executed in the game times that result in the special deviation result B, and the above special effects are executed during the first game times after shifting to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. May be. In this case, it is preferable to set the variable display time in the first game round to be a sufficient time to execute the special effect. If the first game round corresponds to the jackpot result, the symbol combination displayed at the end of the special effect is changed from the symbol combination corresponding to the special off result to the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. (Promote) is good.

<Modification 2>
In the 14th embodiment described above, in the latter half part, the remaining number counter is incremented by "10" each time the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol makes one round and reaches the target line. It is not always necessary to limit the value to one type. In the latter half part, when the symbol combination of the "heart" symbols makes one round and reaches the target line, one of a plurality of candidates may be added. For example, there may be a case where the remaining number of times counter is added by "10" and a case where "20" is added.

<Modification 3>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the scroll speed of the symbol string is accelerated / decelerated during the special variation display, but the scroll speed of the symbol sequence may be constant during the special variation display.

<Modification example 4>
In the special variation display, each symbol sequence is configured to go around in synchronization, but the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices if the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is formed at least when the target line is reached, and in the process, each symbol row is asynchronously orbited so that the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol collapses. Does not deny.

<Modification 5>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the temporary stop line and the target line that triggers the count-up of the remaining count counter are the same effective lines, but the temporary stop line and the target line that triggers the count-up of the remaining count counter are set. It may be different.

<Modification 6>
In the fourteenth embodiment, as a special variation display, each symbol string is synchronously scrolled so that the symbol combination of the "heart" symbols is maintained, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if it is configured so that a symbol combination of "heart" symbols is formed at least when the target line that triggers the count-up of the remaining count counter is reached, and the movement of each symbol row can be made asynchronous. be.

<Modification 7>
In the fourteenth embodiment, after the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the valid line, the timing at which the lap display is started (a period of the same length as the confirmed display time has elapsed from the temporary stop). The configuration is such that "0" is displayed on the remaining count counter at (timing), but the present invention is not limited to this. At the timing when the symbol combination of the "heart" symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the valid line, "0" may be displayed on the remaining count counter.

Further, the initial value displayed on the remaining number of times counter is not limited to "0", but may be set to "10", which is the minimum value.

<Modification 8>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the number of remaining games is displayed on the number display unit 88C, but this is changed and the number of remaining games is displayed on the symbol display device 95C (display screen 95aC). It is also possible.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a special notice effect for notifying the transition to the 4th normal gaming state is executed in the game times before the gaming times in which the transition condition to the 4th normal gaming state is satisfied. That is one of the features. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetric gauge (see FIG. 6), but in the present embodiment, the game board unit 80D (game board 80aD) is a left-right asymmetric gauge. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, the game board unit 80D will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board unit 80D.

The game board 80aD is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 80aD. A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like are arranged in each opening. When the game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82A, and the variable winning device 83A, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry portion, and the detection result is used. Based on this, a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 80aD, and the game ball that has not entered the various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Further, in the game board 80aD, a large number of game nails 87 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged. .. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations such as the game nail 87 and the windmill, and the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are adjusted so as to generate a prize with an appropriate probability.

The actuating port unit 82A is provided by the first actuating port 91A and the second actuating port 92A arranged directly under the first actuating port 91A, similarly to the actuating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. In particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric accessory 93A as an opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means).

The game board 80aD is provided with a center frame 96A so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE by the center frame 96A is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that detours from the left side. It is the same as the above-mentioned first embodiment in the point that it is done. However, in the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the left route can win the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, but cannot win the variable winning device 83A and the through gate 84A. Therefore, the game ball launched to the right route can win the second operating port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, while the first operating port 91A cannot be won. The arrangement of the 1 operating port 91A, the 2nd operating port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A has been changed. It should be noted that the game ball launched to the left route may be configured so that the second operating port 92A cannot be won.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route according to the game state, the game can be advanced advantageously. By encouraging such technical intervention, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The hold display area is a hold number display area Da in which the same number of units hold display areas as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins in the operating openings 91 and 92 are arranged in the left-right direction and displayed in a section. It is composed of an execution target display area Dc capable of displaying a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the game times. The hold number display area Da can be switched between a display mode composed of four unit hold display areas and a display mode composed of eight unit hold display areas.

The winning destination of the game ball flowing down the left route is mainly the first operating port 91A, and during the low frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the hold related to the first operating port 91A. On the other hand, the winning destination of the game ball flowing down the right route is mainly the second operating port 92A, and the game proceeds mainly based on the hold related to the second operating port 92A during the high frequency support mode. Due to such circumstances, in many cases, the number of hold icons displayed in the hold number display area Da is four or less. Therefore, as for the display mode of the hold number display area Da, as illustrated in FIG. 139, the hold number display area Da is basically composed of four unit hold display areas, and the number of hold icons is four. Only when the value exceeds the above, the display mode is switched to the display mode composed of eight unit hold display areas. It is also possible to omit the function of switching the display mode of the reserved number display area Da depending on the situation.

In the center frame 96A of the game board unit 80D, the lower part (lower frame part) of the display screen 95aA, specifically, the position closer to the first unit hold display area Da that constitutes the hold number display area Da (execution target display area Dc). A number display unit 88D, which is a counter for displaying the number of remaining games until the end of the high-frequency support mode A, is provided at a position directly below. The number display unit 88D is a segment display connected to the notification / effect control device 140, and is a target of display control by the notification / effect control device 140. The notification / effect control device 140 displays the number of times corresponding to the end reference number of times on the number of times display unit 88D when shifting to the high frequency support mode A, and the number of times is decremented by "1" each time the game times progress. Display control is performed as follows. In other words, each time the hold icon MP shifts from the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area) to the execution target display area Dc in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, the number display unit. The remaining number of games displayed on 88C is subtracted by "1".

In the present embodiment, the display of the remaining number of games in the number display unit 88D is not executed in a game state other than the fourth normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the remaining number of games may be displayed on the number display unit 88D even in another game state (a game state in which the number of games is limited) such as the third normal game state.

Further, on the back side of the game board 80aD, a special effect device that gives a notice effect of the special disengagement result (transition to the fourth normal game state) in the game times executed before the game times that result in the special disengagement. 500D is provided. The special effect device 500D is arranged at a position overlapping the right route in the front view of the gaming machine, specifically below the number display unit 88D described above and on the side of the operating port unit 82A (specifically, the first operating port 91A). It is visible from the front of the gaming machine through the gaming board 80aD. The hold display area on the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A is surrounded by the special effect device 500D, the variable display area ME of the symbol on the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A, and the first operating port 91A provided with the special deviation. It can be said that there is. Details of the specific configuration of the special effect device 500D will be described later.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the storage of the reserved information based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 140.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in the present embodiment is the first operating port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A. It has a holding area Ra for the second working port and a holding area Rb for the second working port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is won in the second operating port 92A. is doing.

The holding area Ra for the first operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the first operating port 91A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area to the fourth area. Further, the holding area Rb for the second operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second. Each numerical information (holding information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area → third area → fourth area.

In the present embodiment, when the holding information is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second working port (specifically, the first area). Is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When the hold information is not stored in the hold area Rb for the second operating port and the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first working port, the holding area for the first working port is stored. The hold information stored in Ra (specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, any of the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is configured to be a special deviation, but in the present embodiment, the first operating port is configured. The configuration differs from that of the first embodiment in that only one of the lottery based on the winning of the 91 and the second operating port 92 can be a special deviation. Hereinafter, the hit / fail table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 141, the pass / fail table for the first operating port includes a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). And are set.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 141 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of 6 pieces of "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 141 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing.

Further, in a situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode and the winning / failing table for the high probability mode are referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the value of the random number that is a special deviation (that is, that is). , Special deviation information), all of which are "2", "4", "6", "12", "14" ... "596", for a total of 150 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "2", "4", "6", "12", "14" ... "596" correspond to the special deviation result. Then, all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to either the jackpot or the special deviation correspond to the deviation result (normal deviation result).

As shown in FIG. 142, the pass / fail table for the second operating port includes a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). And are set.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 142 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of 6 pieces of "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 142 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the out-of-order results (usually out-of-order results). That is, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the configuration does not become the "special deviation" shown in the first embodiment.

Next, a preliminary confirmation process (see step S306 in FIG. 22) for a hold notice (including the above notice effect) executed as a part of the timer interrupt process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 and a hold command setting process (FIG. 22). 22 step S307) will be described.

(Preliminary confirmation process)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 143, in the pre-confirmation process, first, in step S4301, the operation hold storage number N and the common hold number CRN stored in the hold number storage area of the hold ball storage area 432A are read and applied. The information on the number of reserved pieces is stored in the register of the MPU 402. After that, in step S4302, it is confirmed whether or not the hold information acquired by this winning prize includes the information corresponding to the jackpot result or the information corresponding to the special missed result. Since the details of this determination are the same as the hit / fail determination process in step S702, the description thereof will be omitted.

When it is confirmed in the confirmation process of step S4302 that a big hit is obtained, an affirmative determination is made in step S4303 and the process proceeds to step S4304. In step S4304, the jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, and the pre-confirmation process is terminated. In step S4304, out of the pending information acquired in step S304 based on this prize, the information for type determination, that is, the value of the acquired type counter C2 is grasped, and the jackpot type is referred to by referring to the distribution table. To judge. The information stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S4304 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

When it is confirmed in the confirmation process of step S4302 that the special deviation occurs, a negative determination is made in step S4303 and an affirmative determination is made in step S4350, and the process proceeds to step S4306. In step S4306, the special deviation occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, and the pre-confirmation process is terminated. In step S4306, out of the reserved information acquired in step S304 based on this prize, the information for type determination, that is, the value of the acquired type counter C2 is grasped, and the special deviation is performed with reference to the distribution table. Determine the type. The information stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S4306 includes the information related to the type of special deviation.

If it is confirmed in the confirmation process of step S4302 that the deviation is normal, a negative determination is made in steps S4303 and S4350, and the process proceeds to step S4307. In step S4307, the reach confirmation process at the time of disconnection is normally executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 acquired in step S304 is grasped, and it is confirmed whether or not the loss reach occurs by referring to the lottery table for the loss reach generation. If the out-of-reach does not occur (if the out-of-reach occurs completely), a negative determination is made in step S4308, and the prior confirmation process ends. If an out-of-reach occurs, an affirmative determination is made in step S4308 and the process proceeds to step S4309. In step S4309, the out-of-reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, and the pre-confirmation process is terminated. The information stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S4309 includes information related to a rough type of out-of-reach (whether or not it is super reach).

Next, the setting process of the hold command will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 144.

(Pending command setting process)
In the hold command setting process, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. If the jackpot occurrence information is stored, the process proceeds to step S4402, and the jackpot correspondence hold command is set. The jackpot support hold command contains information about the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4401, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot occurrence information is not stored in the register of the MPU 402, the process proceeds to step S4403 and is the special deviation occurrence information stored in the register of the MPU 402? Judge whether or not. If the special deviation occurrence information is stored, the process proceeds to step S4404, and the special deviation response hold command is set. The special outlier response hold command contains information about the type of special outlier.

If a negative determination is made in step S4403, the process proceeds to step S4405, and it is determined whether or not the deviated reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. If the loss reach occurrence information is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S4405, the process proceeds to step S4406, and the loss reach correspondence hold command is set. The out-of-reach support hold command includes information related to the rough type of out-of-reach (whether or not it is super reach). If a negative determination is made in step S4405, the process proceeds to step S4407. In step S4407, a hold command that does not support loss reach (a hold command that supports complete loss) is set.

When setting the hold command in steps S4402, S4404, and S4406, the change display time is determined with reference to the value of the change type counter CS, and the information related to the change display time is stored in the hold command. .. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to in the same manner as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S714. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140, and the notification / effect control device 140 can grasp the variation display mode of the symbol based on the hold command. As described above, in the case of complete deviation, the variable display time may change according to the number of reserved information stored at the start of the game round related to the reserved information. Therefore, when setting the hold command for complete disconnection, the information related to the variable display time is not stored.

After executing the command setting process of any one of step S4402, step S4404, step S4406, and S4407, in step S4408, a process of setting information on the number of pending commands for the pending command is executed. The information of the hold command is configured as a plurality of bytes of information. In step S4408, first, the information on the number of holds stored in the register of the MPU 402 is read in step S4301 in the immediately preceding prior confirmation process (FIG. 143), and then the information is read. , The information on the number of holds read above is stored by arithmetic processing such as logical sum for the bit for the information on the number of holds in the hold command that has already been set. Thereby, in order to specify the number of the hold information corresponding to the hold command for the hold command set in any of the processes of step S4402, step S4404, step S4406, and S4407. Information will be included. After executing the process of step S4408 described in detail above, the hold command setting process ends.

The hold command including the information on the number of holds in step S4408 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 by the external output process in step S401 in the next normal process (FIG. 23). By receiving such a hold command, the notification / effect control device 140 identifies that the hold information has increased. Further, the notification / effect control device 140 adds information for holding notice, which will be described later, to the hold command and transmits the information to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 executes a hold display, hold notice process, or the like based on the received hold command.

Next, the process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 will be described. The processes related to the hold notice are roughly classified into a command correspondence process for determining a command from the main control device 162 and a hold notice effect setting process for determining the mode of the hold notice.

(Processing for pending commands)
In the hold command correspondence process, when the hold command transmitted by the main control device 162 is received, the process corresponding to the information included in the received hold command is executed. The hold command correspondence process is executed as a part of the periodic process that is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the hold command correspondence process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold command is received. The command received by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RAM 444. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, and even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, each of them is used. The processing corresponding to the command can be executed well. When determining whether or not the corresponding hold command has been received, it is determined whether or not the jackpot corresponding hold command has been received in the area to be read this time in the command storage area 461. The configuration for reading such a command is the same for reading other commands such as the fluctuation start command.

When a hold command is received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area 467 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, and is configured to be able to store one hold information for each area. The hold information stored in each area is sequentially shifted to the lower area side by receiving a shift command from the main control device 162, that is, when the game round is started. Specifically, while clearing the data of the first area Rc1, the second area Rc2 → the first area Rc1, the third area Rc3 → the second area Rc2, the fourth area Rc4 → the third area Rc3 ... The data in each area is shifted such as area Rc8 → 7th area Rc7. In the hold information storage area of the notification / effect control device 140, the hold information is chronologically stored regardless of the entry destination, as in the hold ball storage area 432 of the main control device 162 (specifically, the hold area RE for the operation port). It is structured to be stored together. Specifically, the information on the number of holds included in the command received this time is specified, and the above-mentioned various information is stored in the area corresponding to the information on the number of holds specified in the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

When the above-mentioned hold command is received, the hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 444, and when the shift command is received, the shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas. Each of these flags triggers the setting process for the hold notice effect (setting process for the hold notice effect) described below, and is deleted when the setting process for the hold notice effect is completed.

In the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, the jackpot advance notice effect setting process is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area. Here, the jackpot notice effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 145. The jackpot advance notice effect setting process is a process executed as a part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle), and is executed on condition that the above-mentioned hold command or shift command is received. It is a process to be performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the opportunity to execute the jackpot notice effect is when the hold information is acquired with the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A, or when the hold information is digested with the progress of the game. There is.

(Big hit notice production setting process)
In the jackpot notice effect setting process, first, it is determined in step S4501 whether or not the jackpot notice effect is being performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, the main jackpot notice effect setting process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S4501, the process proceeds to step S4502.

In step S4502, it is determined whether or not the jackpot advance notice effect regulation flag described later is stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S4502, the main jackpot notice effect setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4502, the process proceeds to step S4503.

In step S4503, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control device 162. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4503, the lottery process at the time of receiving the hold command is executed in step S4504, and it is determined whether or not to perform the jackpot notice effect. If a negative determination is made in step S4503, the process proceeds to step S4505. In step S4505, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control device 162. If a negative determination is made in step S4505, that is, if it is determined that neither the hold command nor the shift command has been received, the jackpot advance notice effect setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4505, the lottery process at the time of receiving the shift command is executed in step S4506, and it is determined whether or not to perform the jackpot notice effect.

After executing the lottery process of step S4504 or step S4506, the process proceeds to step S4507. In step S4507, it is determined whether or not the jackpot notice effect has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S4507, the main jackpot notice effect setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4507, the process proceeds to step S4508. In step S4508, the jackpot notice effect detailed determination process is executed. In the following step S4509, the jackpot notice effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444, and in step S4510, the special off-notice effect regulation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. The jackpot notice effect flag set in step S4509 will be erased when the jackpot notice effect is completed. In step S4501, it is determined whether or not the jackpot advance notice effect is being performed based on whether or not the jackpot advance notice effect flag is set. After that, the jackpot notice selection start process is executed in step S4511, and the jackpot notice effect setting process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, the jackpot notice effect detailed determination process of step S4508 will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing a jackpot notice effect detailed determination process, and FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot notice effect.

(Detailed decision processing for jackpot notice production)
As shown in FIG. 146, in the jackpot notice effect detailed determination process, first, the display mode change target is determined in step S4601.

The jackpot notice effect shown in the present embodiment is executed by changing the mode of the hold display displayed in the hold display area NE of the symbol display device 95A (display screen 95aA) to one corresponding to the jackpot notice effect. Specifically, among the hold icon MPs displayed in the hold number display area Da, those corresponding to the corresponding game times (corresponding hold) are changed (in the present embodiment, the color is changed). Specifically, there are multiple patterns of colors for the hold icon MP, specifically white (level 0), blue (level 1), yellow (level 2), and red (level 3). Hold icon MP changes color to a color other than white.

If the hold corresponds to the jackpot result, it is easier to select in the order of level 3> level 2> level 1, and if the hold corresponds to the normal off result, level 1> level 2 > It is easier to select in the order of level 3. That is, when the jackpot notice effect is executed, the higher the final level, the higher the expectation that leads to the jackpot result.

Regarding the jackpot notice effect, a fixed notice effect that is maintained until the color of the changed hold icon MP shifts to the execution target display area Dc, and a step that the color changes until the color shifts to the execution target display area Dc. It is roughly divided into up-type notice production.

In step S4601, the hold icon whose color is to be changed is determined. In the following step S4602, the final color (display mode) after the corresponding hold icon is moved to the execution target display area Dc is determined. Then, based on the result, in step S4603, the initial color (display mode) is determined.

After that, in step S4604, the remaining number of shifts until the remaining corresponding hold icon MP moves to the execution target display area Dc is grasped, and the above-mentioned step-up pattern is determined based on the grasped number of shifts. If the initial color and the final color match, no step-up occurs.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the hold display area NE and the like based on the hold command and the shift command received from the main control device 162 via the notification / effect control device 140. Hereinafter, the hold display control command correspondence process executed by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 148. The hold display control command correspondence process is a process executed as a part of a periodic process (command correspondence process) started in a predetermined cycle (2 msec in the present embodiment).

(Process corresponding to command for hold display control)
In the hold display control command correspondence process, first, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the hold command has been received from the notification / effect control device 140. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, the process proceeds to step S4702. In step S4702, the value of the hold number counter (holding number SN) provided in various counter areas of the work RAM 474 is added by 1.

After executing the counter update process in step S4702, the process proceeds to step S4703. In step S4703, an additional flag is set in the work RAM 474. In the hold display control process described later, a process of adding the hold icon MP to the hold number display area Da is performed based on this addition flag. After that, the process corresponding to the command for this hold display control is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S4701, if a negative determination is made in step S4701, that is, if the hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4704. In step S4704, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the notification / effect control device 140. If a negative determination is made in step S4704, the process for responding to the hold display control command is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, the process proceeds to step S4705. In step S4705, the value of the hold number counter (holding storage number SN) provided in various counter areas of the work RAM 474 is subtracted by 1.

After executing the counter update process in step S4705, the process proceeds to step S4706. In step S4706, the shift flag is set in the work RAM 474. In the hold display control process described later, a process of shifting the hold icon MP is performed based on this shift flag. After that, the process corresponding to the command for this hold display control is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 149, the hold display process executed as a part of the periodic process by the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 will be described.

(Hold display processing)
In the hold display process, first, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the additional flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4801, the process proceeds to step S4802. In step S4802, it is determined whether or not to change the color of the hold icon to be additionally displayed this time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the color of the hold icon to be added this time is other than white from the items determined in the jackpot advance notice detailed determination process of FIG. 146.

If a negative determination is made in step S4802, a normal additional process is executed in step S4803. Specifically, when the execution target display area Dc is empty, the white hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the execution target display area Dc. When the execution target display area Dc is filled, the youngest unit (closest to the execution target display area Dc) among those for which the hold icon MP is not displayed (empty) in the unit hold display area is held. A white hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the display area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4802, a special additional process is performed in step S4804. Specifically, when the execution target display area Dc is empty, the hold icon MP of the color (blue, yellow, or red) determined in step S4603 is additionally displayed in the execution target display area Dc. .. When the execution target display area Dc is filled, the youngest unit (closest to the execution target display area Dc) among those for which the hold icon MP is not displayed (empty) in the unit hold display area is held. The hold icon MP of the color (either blue, yellow, or red) determined in step S4603 is additionally displayed in the display area.

After executing the process of step S4803 or step S4804, the additional flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 are erased in step S4805, and the hold display process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S4801, if a negative determination is made in step S4801, the process proceeds to step S4806. In step S4806, it is determined whether or not the shift flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474. If a negative determination is made in step S4806, the hold display process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4806, the process proceeds to step S4807. In step S4807, it is determined whether or not to change the color of the hold icon being displayed at the time of this shift from the matters determined in the jackpot notice effect detailed determination process of FIG. 146.

If a negative determination is made in step S4807, a normal shift process is executed in step S4808, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S4807, a special shift process is performed in step S4807. For these normal shift processing and special shift processing, after hiding the hold icon MP displayed in the execution target display area Dc, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da is displayed in the execution target display area Dc. Shift to the side. Specifically, the hold icon MP displayed in the first unit hold display area is moved to the execution target display area Dc, and the hold icon MP displayed in another unit hold display area is moved to the unit hold display area to the left of the other unit hold display area. Move to each. By repeating such movements, the displayed hold icon MP moves to the execution target display area Dc in chronological order, and is erased via the execution target display area Dc. Here, in the normal shift process, the colors of all the hold icons are not changed before and after the shift, whereas in the special shift process, the color of the corresponding hold icon among the hold icons is changed with the shift. It differs in that it is composed.

After executing the shift process of step S4808 or step S4809, the shift flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the work RAM 474 is erased in step S4810, and the hold display process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 150, the flow of the jackpot notice effect will be described. FIG. 150 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first big hit notice effect which is not compatible with step-up, and FIG. 150 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second big hit notice effect which is compatible with step-up. In addition, in FIG. 150, the display mode of the hold number display area Da is a display mode composed of four unit hold display areas (first unit hold display area Da1 to fourth unit hold display area Da4). Illustrate.

In the example shown in FIG. 150 (a), the hold icon MP is added to the third unit hold display area Da3 based on the winning of the first actuating port 91A. This hold corresponds to the jackpot result, and the color of the hold icon MP added to the third unit hold display area Da3 by winning the jackpot notice effect is red. The big hit notice effect this time corresponds to the first big hit notice effect that does not support step-up, and the hold icon is in the order of FIG. 120 (a2) → FIG. 120 (a3) → FIG. 120 (a4) → FIG. 120 (a5). The color will be maintained at red as the MP shifts. By starting the jackpot notice effect during the game round before the game round related to the hold icon MP is started, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 150 (b), the hold icon MP is added to the third unit hold display area Da3 based on the winning of the first actuating port 91A. This hold corresponds to the jackpot result, and the color of the hold icon MP added to the third unit hold display area Da3 by winning the jackpot notice effect is blue. The big hit notice effect this time corresponds to the second big hit notice effect that supports step-up, and the hold icon MP is in the order of FIG. 120 (b2) → FIG. 120 (b3) → FIG. 120 (b4) → FIG. 120 (b5). The color changes from blue to yellow to red in the process of shifting.

As shown in FIG. 120 (b), the color of the hold icon MP changes a plurality of times as the game progresses. For example, even if the color that finally changes is red, first change it to a lower color (blue or yellow) with lower expectations, and expect more at the timing when the hold icon MP shifts. Step up (promote) to a higher color with a higher degree. By using these two types of jackpot notice effects together, even if the color has a low degree of expectation, there is a possibility that the color will change to a color with a high degree of expectation until the corresponding game times are reached. As a result, it is possible to prevent the attention to the jackpot notice effect from decreasing at an early stage.

As described in detail above, the jackpot notice effect is executed by the symbol display device 95A for symbol display. On the other hand, the special effect of notifying the disengagement is executed by the special effect device 500D provided separately from the symbol display device 95A. Hereinafter, the special effect device 500D will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a front view of the special effect device 500D.

(Special production device 500D)
The special effect device 500D is a light emitting effect device that irradiates light to the front of the game machine through the transparent game board 80aD, and the portion of the special effect device 500 facing the back surface of the game board 80aA (opposing portion 501D) , A notice decoration unit 511D for executing a special disengagement notice effect, and a notification decoration unit 512D for notifying that the result is a special disengagement result are provided.

The notice decoration unit 511D and the notification decoration unit 512D are provided side by side so that the former is on the left side and the latter is on the right side. It is arranged so as to be close to the display area Da, the execution target display area Dc, and the actuation port unit 82A. The distance from the first operating port 91A, which may result in special disconnection, to the special effect device 500D (specifically, the decorative portion 511D for advance notice) is a variation of the symbol on the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A from the first operating port 91A. It is shorter than the distance to the display area ME.

The notification decoration unit 512D can be switched between a lighting state and a lighting state, and when the high frequency support mode A is set to a special disconnection result, the above notification is performed by switching from the lighting state to the lighting state. It has become. Then, it is maintained in the lit state during the high-frequency support mode A, and is switched to the off state when the number of games executed in the high-frequency support mode A reaches the above-mentioned end reference number and the high-frequency support mode A ends. It is composed.

The notice decoration unit 511D includes a blue first light emitting unit 521D, a yellow second light emitting unit 522D, and a red third light emitting unit 523D, and the first light emitting unit 521D, the second light emitting unit 522D, and the second light emitting unit 522D. The light emitting unit 523D can be individually switched between the lighting state and the extinguishing state.

The special off-prediction notice effect is step 1 (see FIG. 152 (a)) in which only the first light emitting unit 521D is lit, step 2 (see FIG. 152 (b)) in which the second light emitting unit 522D is lit. 3 The light emitting unit 523D has a step 3 (see FIG. 152 (c)) in which the light emitting unit 523D is lit, and the expectation degree as a special deviation result changes by stepping up as the game round progresses. ing. For example, in the case of step 1, the expectation of a special deviation result is 30%, in the case of step 2, the expectation of a special deviation result is 50%, and in the case of step 3, the special deviation result is obtained. The degree of expectation is set to be 80%. In the special disconnection notice effect corresponding to the special disconnection result, it is clearly shown that the special disconnection result was obtained by finally turning on the notification decorative part 512D (see, for example, FIG. 152 (d)), and the normal deviation result is supported. In the special disengagement notice effect, it is clearly shown that the special disengagement result was not obtained by turning off the notice decoration unit 511D and the notification decoration unit 512D.

In the special off-notice notice effect shown in the present embodiment, the above step does not always proceed when the game round progresses, and the step may not progress even when the game round progresses. Further, the steps are not always advanced one step at a time, and some steps may be skipped and the steps may be advanced. Incidentally, although the details will be described later, even if the result is a special deviation, the special deviation notice effect does not always occur, and the notification decoration unit 512D is switched to the lighting state without going through the special deviation notice effect. In some cases.

In the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, the special off-notification effect setting process is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area. Here, the special deviation notice effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 153. The special off-notice effect setting process is a process executed as a part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle) during the first normal game state.
(Special off-notice effect setting process)
In the special deviation notice effect setting process, first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the confirmation display in the game times corresponding to the normal deviation. If a negative determination is made in step S4901, the special off-notice effect setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4901, the process proceeds to step S4902.

In step S4902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot notice effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot advance notice effect flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S4902, the special off-notice effect setting process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S4902, the process proceeds to step S4903.

In step S4903, it is determined whether or not the subsequent hold stored is included in the hold corresponding to the special deviation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4903, the process proceeds to step S4904. In step S4904, it is determined whether or not the hold corresponding to the special loss includes the hold corresponding to the loss reach in the preceding hold. If a negative determination is made in step S4904, the process proceeds to step S4905. In step S4905, it is determined whether or not the hold corresponding to the jackpot is included in the hold preceding the hold corresponding to the special deviation. If a negative determination is made in step S4905, the process proceeds to step S4906. In step S4906, a lottery process (lottery process corresponding to this precursor) is executed to determine whether or not to execute the special missed notice effect corresponding to the special missed result. In this lottery process, it is determined whether or not to execute the special missed notice effect by referring to the special missed notice effect lottery table for the present precursor stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443. The probability of winning in this lottery process is 50%. In other words, about half of the cases where the special deviation result is obtained are notified via the special deviation notice effect that the special deviation result is obtained, while the other half are special without going through the special deviation notice effect. It is configured to notify that the result of the deviation has occurred.

Returning to the description of step S4903, if a negative determination is made in step S4903, the process proceeds to step S4907. In step S4907, the latest hold is temporarily set as a hold subject to the special out-of-order notice effect, and it is determined whether or not the hold preceding the temporarily set hold includes a hold corresponding to the out-of-reach. do. If a negative determination is made in step S4907, the process proceeds to step S4908. In step S4908, it is determined whether or not the hold corresponding to the jackpot is included in the hold preceding the temporarily set hold. If a negative determination is made in step S4905, the process proceeds to step S4909. In step S4909, a lottery process (lottery process corresponding to a sign of ghost) is executed to determine whether or not to execute a special missed notice effect that does not correspond to the special missed result. In this lottery process, it is determined whether or not to execute the special out-of-order notice effect by referring to the special out-of-order notice effect lottery table for the sign of the ghost stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443. The probability of winning in this lottery process differs depending on the tentatively set hold variable display mode. Specifically, when the variable display mode is normal reach A to B, the winning probability is 1%, and when the variable display mode is super reach A to C, the winning probability is 3%.

If the special missed notice effect is won in the lottery process of steps S4906 and S4909, an affirmative determination is made in step S4910, the process proceeds to step S4911, and the special missed notice effect detailed determination process is executed. If the special loss notice effect is not won in the lottery process of steps S4906 and S4909, or if an affirmative judgment is made in steps S4904, S4905, S4907, S4908, a negative judgment is made in step S4910 and the result is as it is. This special disconnection notice effect setting process ends.

Here, the special deviation notice effect detailed determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 154.

In the process of determining the details of the special effect notice effect, first, in step S5001, the final display mode of the special effect device 500D is determined. That is, it is determined which of the above steps 1 to 3 is to be performed. Specifically, whether or not the hold that triggered the start of this special missed notice effect (hereinafter referred to as "corresponding hold") corresponds to the special missed result, and if it does not correspond to the special missed result, the corresponding hold. Which of steps 1 to 3 is to be determined based on the variation display mode according to the above and the number of holds preceding the corresponding hold. For example, if the corresponding hold that triggered the start of this special out-of-order notice corresponds to the special out-of-order result, the probability of being selected in the order of step 1 <step 2 <step 3 is increased. .. When the corresponding hold does not correspond to the special out-of-order result, the probability of being selected in the order of step 3 <step 2 <step 1 is set to be high. In addition, when the corresponding hold when the special off-notice effect is executed corresponds to the reach display, in the reach display executed by the symbol display device 95A, "heart" is displayed on at least one of the effective lines. The structure is such that a reach line is formed by the design.

In the following step S5002, the number of remaining shifts until the corresponding hold is executed is grasped. Then, in step S5003, the step-up pattern is determined based on the final display mode (steps 1 to 3) determined in step S5001 and the number of remaining shifts grasped in step S5002.

For example, when the corresponding game times correspond to the special deviation result and the final display mode is step 3, the step-up pattern is as follows: step 1 (first light emitting unit 521D = light emitting state) → step 2 ( The pattern of the second light emitting unit 522D = light emitting state) → step 3 (third light emitting unit 523D = light emitting state) and step 1 (first light emitting unit 521D = light emitting state) → step 3 (third light emitting unit 523D = light emitting state). The pattern that becomes step 2 (second light emitting unit 522D = light emitting state) → the pattern that becomes step 3 (third light emitting unit 523D = light emitting state), and the pattern that becomes step 3 (third light emitting unit 523D = light emitting state) from the beginning. ) Is determined by referring to the number of remaining shifts.

Returning to the description of FIG. 153, after executing the special deviation notice effect detailed determination process in step S4911, the process proceeds to step S4912. In step S4912, a special off-notice effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. The special missed notice effect flag is a flag for grasping whether or not the special missed notice effect is being executed by the MPU 442. In the following step S4913, the jackpot advance notice effect regulation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. The jackpot notice effect regulation flag set in step S4913 is erased when the special off-notice effect is completed. After that, in step S4914, the special disconnection notice effect start process is executed, and the special disconnection notice effect setting process is terminated. As described in detail above, in the present embodiment, the special deviation notice effect is started at the game times that normally result in the deviation, and the start timing is the final display timing of the symbol combination in the game times. It has become.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 155, the special deviation notice effect execution process executed as a part of the periodic process in the MPU 442 will be described.

(Special off-notice notice production execution processing)
In the special deviation notice effect execution process, first, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the special deviation notice effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the special off-notice effect execution process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the process proceeds to step S5102. In step S5102, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the symbol display device 95A. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5102, the process proceeds to step S5103.

In step S5103, it is determined whether or not the step-up is generated at the current timing with reference to the step-up pattern determined in step S5003. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the process proceeds to step S5104. In step S5104, the light emitting target addition process is executed with reference to the step-up pattern determined in step S5003. For example, in the corresponding game times corresponding to the special deviation result that triggered the start of the special deviation notice effect this time, the notification decoration unit 512D is switched from the off state to the on state. After executing the light emitting target addition process in step S5104, or when a negative determination is made in step S5103, the special off-notice effect execution process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S5102, if a negative determination is made in the step S5102, the process proceeds to step S5105. In step S5105, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the final display of the symbol combination in the symbol display device 95A is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S5105, the process proceeds to step S5106. In step S5106, the extinguishing process of turning off the notice decoration portion 511D of the special effect device 500D is executed. That is, regardless of whether or not the corresponding game times correspond to the special out-of-order result, the special out-of-order notice effect by the advance notice decoration unit 511D ends at the timing when the confirmation display is completed.

After that, the special notice effect effect flag and the jackpot notice effect restriction flag stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444 are erased, and the special notice effect execution process is terminated. By erasing the jackpot notice effect regulation flag, it becomes possible to execute the jackpot notice effect thereafter.

Here, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 156, the flow of the special out-of-order notice effect will be illustrated. In the example of FIG. 156, the transition to the fourth normal gaming state is triggered by the special deviation result during the first normal gaming state, and the fact that the special deviation result is obtained precedes the corresponding game times. It is announced by the special production device 500D at the game times of.

At the timing of tj1, the variable display of the pattern on the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 95A are started. At the timing of tj2 during this game round, a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A, and the number of holdings is increased from "2" to "3". This added hold corresponds to a special off result.

The game times started at the timing of tj1 usually correspond to the out-of-order result, and at the timing of the definite display (timing of tj3) in which this result is clearly shown, the special out-of-order notice effect is started. Specifically, the first light emitting unit 521D of the special effect device 500D (preliminary decoration unit 511D) is switched from the off state to the on state (step 1).

The game times started at the timing of tj4 also correspond to the normal deviation result, and at the timing of the definite display (timing of tj5) where this result is clearly shown, the special deviation notice effect is stepped from step 1 to step 2. It's up. Specifically, the second light emitting unit 522D of the special effect device 500D (preliminary decoration unit 511D) is switched from the off state to the on state.

The game times started at the timing of tj6 also correspond to the normal deviation result, and at the timing of the definite display (timing of tj7) where this result is clearly shown, the special deviation notice effect is stepped from step 2 to step 3. It's up. Specifically, the third light emitting unit 523D of the special effect device 500D (preliminary decoration unit 511D) is switched from the off state to the on state.

At the timing of the following tj8, a game round (corresponding game round) corresponding to the special missed result that triggered the special missed notice effect this time has started. This game time corresponds to the reach display, and at the timing of tj10, it shifts to the reach display. Specifically, in the symbol display device 95A, a reach line is formed by a "heart" symbol. After that, the notification decoration unit 512D of the special effect device 500D is switched from the off state to the on state at the timing of the definite display (timing of tj11) in which the special off result is clearly indicated.

At the timing of tj12 after the confirmed display time has elapsed, the fourth normal gaming state is entered, and the advance notice decorative section 511D (light emitting section 521D to 523D) is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state. That is, the special disengagement notice effect is completed while the notification decoration unit 512D is kept in the lit state.

According to the fifteenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

As shown in this embodiment, when a big hit result is obtained, the support mode is changed to the high frequency support mode (specifically, the high frequency support mode B) via the special game state (open / close execution mode). If the support mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode (specifically, the high-frequency support mode A) without going through the special game state when a special out-of-order result is obtained, the high-frequency support mode is higher. It is possible to diversify the flow of the game when changing to, and contribute to suppressing the monotony of the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, whether or not the result is a jackpot result is specified (predicted) before the corresponding game round is started, and the jackpot notice effect (“first special effect” is specified based on the result of the future identification. It is configured to execute (corresponding to The special out-of-order notice effect (corresponding to the "second special effect") is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game from the game times before the corresponding game times. However, in the configuration of shifting to the special gaming state triggered by the jackpot result, the player who expects the transition to the special gaming state will pay attention to the jackpot notice effect. If the jackpot notice effect is started while the special missed notice effect is being executed, it is highly likely that the player's attention will shift from the special missed notice effect to the jackpot notice effect. It is feared that this will hinder the successful exertion of the effect of increasing the attention to the game by the special off-notice effect. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the configuration is set so as to prevent the start of a new big hit notice effect when the special off-notice effect is executed, the above-mentioned concern can be suitably dispelled. This is preferable in order to coexist the above-mentioned two types of advance notice effects.

As shown in the present embodiment, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the jackpot notice effect is regulated when the special off-notice effect is executed, in order to alleviate the restrictions on the effect mode of the special off-notice effect. That is, not only in the case where the special out-of-order notice effect is started immediately after the execution condition is satisfied, but also in the case where the start is intentionally delayed in the situation where the execution condition of the special out-of-order notice effect is satisfied internally. Even so, the competition between the big hit notice effect and the special off-notice effect can be suitably suppressed, and the restrictions relating to the effect mode of the second special effect can be suitably relaxed.

As shown in the present embodiment, if the execution condition of the special missed notice effect can be satisfied during the execution of the big hit notice effect, it is possible to suitably secure the execution opportunity of the special missed notice effect. Then, if the execution condition of the special missed notice effect is satisfied during the execution of the big hit notice effect, the player can be encouraged to pay attention to the special missed notice effect by canceling the big hit notice effect. As described above, when the big hit notice effect is canceled, the cancellation behavior itself can be taken as a part of the effect by stopping the big hit notice effect after the start of the special off-notice effect, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved. A practically preferable configuration can be realized.

As described above, in the configuration in which the advance notice effect is started in the game times before the corresponding game times, it is expected that the expectation of the player will increase at the start of the advance notice effect. Therefore, in using the jackpot notice effect and the special off notice effect together, it is preferable that the start (beginning) of each advance notice effect is overlooked if the timing at which each advance notice effect is started is different in the game times. Can be suppressed. In this embodiment, in particular, the jackpot notice effect is configured to be started at the start of the game round (at the time of shift), whereas the special off-notice notice effect is shifted to the final display in the game round. It is configured to start from time to time. Such a difference in timing can contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game in each part from the first half to the second half of the game.

In the case of a special out-of-game result, the game immediately shifts to the normal game state compatible with high-frequency support mode A after the end of the game round, so the support mode switching suddenly compared to the case of a big hit result. Prone. This is expected to cause confusion for players and cause wasteful investment. In this respect, in the embodiment, when a big hit result is obtained, the symbol combination indicating that fact is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 95A, whereas the special off result is not possible. It is suggested by the special effect device 500D provided separately from the symbol display device 95A. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the mixing and equalization of the jackpot result and the special deviation result, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences.

In the present embodiment, in particular, whether or not a special deviation result is obtained is specified (pre-specified) in advance, and the special deviation notice effect is executed according to the specific result. Since this special out-of-order notice effect is executed at least in the game times before the game times related to the reserved information that has been specified in advance, the player predicts in advance that there is a possibility of a special out-of-order result. It becomes possible to do. With such a configuration, the sudden feeling described above can be reduced, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be further suppressed.

In the configuration in which the lottery result is notified by the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 95A, the attention to the game times is rapidly reduced by notifying that the result is non-winning (normally out of order result). Can be. Therefore, if the special disconnection notice effect is started under such a situation, that is, the special disconnection notice effect is started during the confirmation display corresponding to the normal deviation result, the special disconnection notice effect is described above. It is possible to suitably suppress the rapid decrease in the degree of attention.

Further, in the configuration in which the jackpot result is notified by the symbol display device 95A, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the symbol display device 95A. Therefore, it is preferable to start the special off-preliminary notice effect during the definite display, which reduces the need to pay attention to the symbol display device 95A, in order to prevent the advance notice effect from being overlooked.

In the configuration in which the hold information is acquired based on the ball entering the operating port 91A (operating port unit 82A), the player can pay attention to the operating port 91A. Therefore, by arranging the special effect device 500D so as to be closer to the operating port 91A as compared with the symbol display device 95A (specifically, the variable display area ME), it is possible to suitably reduce the chance that the special off-preliminary effect is overlooked. can.

Further, in the configuration in which the hold information is acquired based on the entry of the ball into the operating port 91A (operating port unit 82A), the player can pay attention to the movement of the gaming ball toward the operating port 91A and the operating port 91A. .. Therefore, by arranging the special effect device 500D behind the portion closer to the operation port 91A in the flow path (left route) through which the game ball flows toward the operation port 91A, there is an opportunity that the special out-of-order notice effect is overlooked. It can be preferably reduced.

By configuring the notification decoration unit 511D to suggest the possibility of the determination result before the notification decoration unit 512D of the special effect device 500D notifies (explicitly) that the result is a special deviation. , The chance that the notification in the notification decoration unit 512D is overlooked can be suitably reduced.

As described above, in a gaming machine of a type in which a game progresses based on a ball entering the operating port 91A, the player's attention tends to be directed to the operating port 91A. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, of the warning decoration unit 511D and the notification decoration unit 512D, the warning decoration unit 511D is specially arranged so as to be closer to the operating port 91A (the operating port that may result in special disconnection). By forming the effect device 500D, the above-mentioned overlook suppression effect can be more preferably exhibited.

When the symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display device 95A, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the symbol display device 95A. Therefore, it is preferable that the step-up is overlooked if the display of the notice decoration unit 511D is stepped up (the display mode is switched) in the situation where the symbol combination is confirmed display (stop display). Can be suppressed.

In addition, there is a possibility that the attention to the game may be momentarily reduced by the stop display of the symbol combination, but as shown in the present embodiment, the symbol combination is confirmed and displayed (stop display). If the display mode of the notice decoration unit 511D is switched under the circumstances, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game.

Acquired based on the entry into the operation port 91A (operation port unit 82A) → Avoid unnecessary entry in a gaming machine of the type in which an upper limit (4) is provided for the number of stored information to be stored. Adjustments may be made to temporarily refrain from launching operations. The player who makes such an adjustment pays attention to the movement of the game ball in and around the operating port 91A, and pays attention to the display of the hold number display area. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the special effect device 500D is formed so that the advance notice decoration unit 511D of the advance notice decoration unit 511D and the notification decoration unit 512D is closer to the reserved number display area. The above-mentioned overlook suppression effect can be more preferably exerted.

<Modification 1>
In the fifteenth embodiment described above, the symbol display device 95A is configured to determine whether or not to perform the special out-of-order notice effect at the timing (start timing) of shifting to the final display of the symbol combination, but the configuration is limited to this. It's not something. For example, as in the case of deciding whether or not to perform the jackpot notice effect, whether to perform the special off-notice effect at the timing when the hold is newly acquired (added) based on the winning of the first operating port 91A. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

In addition, it is not always necessary to match the timing of deciding whether or not the special out-of-order notice effect is possible and the timing of starting the special out-of-date notice effect, and the timing of deciding whether or not the special out-of-date notice effect is possible and the timing of starting the special out-of-date notice effect. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the special deviation notice effect can be started later than the decision to execute the special deviation notice effect. For example, it is also possible to determine whether or not to execute the special out-of-order notice effect during the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 95A, and to start the special out-of-order notice effect during the final display on the symbol display device 95A. Is.

<Modification 2>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the special advance notice effect is stepped up by the advance notice effect device 00D during the final display of the symbol (symbol combination) in the symbol display device 95A. In addition, it is also possible to configure the symbol display device 95A to cause a step-up of the special off-prediction notice effect during the variable display of the symbol.

<Modification 3>
In the fifteenth embodiment, if a game time corresponding to the reach display can be executed before a predetermined game time, a special out-of-order notice effect in which the predetermined game time is set as the corresponding game time is avoided. However, it is not limited to this. Regardless of whether or not the game times corresponding to the reach display are executed before the predetermined game times, the special out-of-order notice effect may be executed with the predetermined game times as the corresponding game times.

In place of or in addition to this, if the game times corresponding to the jackpot result can be executed before the predetermined game times, the special out-of-order notice effect with the predetermined game times as the corresponding game times is avoided. However, it is not limited to this. Regardless of whether or not the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are executed before the predetermined game times, the special off-notice effect may be executed with the predetermined game times as the corresponding game times.

<Modification example 4>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the execution period of the jackpot notice effect and the execution period of the special off-notice effect may partially overlap, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the structure so that the execution period of the jackpot notice effect and the execution period of the special off-notice effect do not overlap.

<Modification 5>
It is also possible to have a configuration in which the other can be started while one of the jackpot notice effect and the special miss notice effect is being executed. For example, the special missed notice effect may be started while the jackpot notice effect is being executed, while the big hit notice effect may not be started while the special missed notice effect is being executed. While the big hit notice effect may be started while the notice effect is being executed, the special off-notice effect may not be started while the big hit notice effect is being executed.

<Modification 6>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the special effect device 500D is configured to give notice in the preceding game times that the special effect result, which is one of the triggers for the transition to the fourth normal game state, will occur. Instead of or in addition to this, it is also possible to use the special effect device 500D to give notice in the preceding game times that the ceiling will be reached, which is one of the triggers for the transition to the fourth normal game state. Specifically, every time the game round progresses in the game round executed before the game round that reaches the ceiling in the first normal game state, the first light emitting unit 521D → the second light emitting unit 522D → the third light emitting unit 523D. It is also possible to switch the notification decoration unit 512D to the lighting state at the game round (for example, the confirmation display timing) immediately before shifting to the fourth normal gaming state by lighting in the order of.

<Modification 7>
The special production notice effect shown in the fifteenth embodiment is configured to be executed by the special production device 500D, which is a dedicated production device, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the special missed notice effect to be executed by the symbol display device 95A as in the jackpot notice effect. For example, the symbol display device 95A may perform the same effect as the effect executed by the special effect device 500D. Specifically, an image imitating the special effect device 500D is displayed on the symbol display device 95A, and the display mode of this image is changed to steps 1 to 3 and the like to execute the special off-preliminary effect. Is also possible.

<Modification 8>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the setting is such that the establishment of the start condition of the big hit notice effect is avoided during the special miss notice effect, and the establishment of the start condition of the special miss notice effect is avoided during the big hit notice effect. , Not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the start condition of the big hit notice effect can be satisfied even during the special miss notice effect, and the start condition of the special miss notice effect may be satisfied even during the big hit notice effect. For example, if the start condition of the other notice effect is satisfied during one of the notice effects that have been started earlier, the other notice effect ends when it is assumed that the other notice effect has progressed under the surface of the water. It is preferable that the other advance notice effect is started at the latest step reached at the timing.

<Modification 9>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the special out-of-order notice effect is given preferential treatment over the jackpot notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the special missed notice effect is executed, the jackpot notice effect is regulated, and when the big hit notice effect is executed, the special missed notice effect may be restricted.

<Modification 10>
In the fifteenth embodiment, if the special missed notice effect is started during the big hit notice effect, the big hit notice effect is canceled halfway, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot notice effect may be canceled when the special missed notice effect is started, or the jackpot notice effect may not be canceled, but the new jackpot notice effect may not be executed. May be good.

<Modification 11>
Not only the hold information that triggered the start of the special out-of-order notice effect, but also other hold information (other stored hold information) that follows the hold information, which regulates the start of the jackpot notice effect. May be.

<Modification 12>
In the fifteenth embodiment described above, the configuration in which the big hit notice effect is started at the start of the game round (at the time of shift) and the special off-notice notice effect is started at the transition to the final display has been illustrated. The start timing of the notice effect and the start timing of the special off notice effect may be arbitrarily changed. However, in order to effectively exert the effect of improving the degree of attention due to the difference in timing, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the start timing of each advance notice effect is divided between the first half portion and the second half portion of the game round.

<Modification 13>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the special effect device 500D is used to perform an effect suggesting that the result is a special deviation, but instead of or in addition to this, the special effect device 500D is used to reach the ceiling. It may be configured to execute an effect suggesting that. In such a configuration, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by providing a plurality of games that reach the ceiling as in the other embodiments.

<16th embodiment>
In the fifteenth embodiment, the special notice effect (special notice effect) is executed in the game times before the game times that result in the special deviation. In the present embodiment, the configuration related to this special out-of-order notice effect is different from the above 15th embodiment. Specifically, regarding the special deviation notice effect shown in the fifteenth embodiment, even if the special deviation notice effect occurs, the normal deviation result ends and the special deviation result is not necessarily determined. The special disengagement notice effect shown in the present embodiment is different in that the special disengagement result is determined when the special disengagement notice effect occurs (confirmed effect). In addition, in order to make the special out-of-order notice effect function as a final effect, the configuration related to the advance notice effect device has been changed in order to enhance the impact of the effect. Hereinafter, the advance notice effect device according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board unit, and FIG. 158 is a vertical sectional view of the advance notice effect device.

(Special production device 500E)
As shown in FIG. 157, in the front view of the game board unit 80E, the special effect device 500E is located at a position overlapping the right route formed in the game area PE, specifically below the number display unit 88D described above and operates. It is arranged at a position on the side of the mouth unit 82A (specifically, the first operating port 91A).

As shown in FIG. 158, the special effect device 500E includes an effect mechanism 600E for performing a special release notice effect and a pedestal for fixing the effect mechanism 600E to the back block of the game board unit 80E. In the state where the back block and the back block are combined (see FIG. 7), the effect mechanism 600E faces the back of the game board 80aE with a slight gap. The game board 80aE has transparency, and the player can visually recognize the effect mechanism 600E from the front of the game machine through the game board 80aE.

The effect mechanism 600E includes a light emitting unit 630E and a case 660E for accommodating the light emitting unit 630E. The light emitting unit 630E includes a light emitting board 640E on which a plurality of light emitting bodies 641E (specifically, LEDs) are mounted, and a holder 651E that holds the light emitting board 640E so that the mounting surface of the light emitting body 641E faces the front of the gaming machine. Has been done. Specifically, both the light emitting substrate 640E and the holder 651E have a disk shape, and the light emitting substrate 640E is fixed to the holder 651E in a state of being fitted in a recess formed in the center of the holder 651E. The light emitting board 640E is connected to the notification / effect control device 140 via a connection terminal such as a slip ring, and the light emission control (switching control between the lighting state and the extinguishing state) of the light emitting body 641E is performed by the notification / effect control device 140. Will be executed.

The case 660E is formed by combining a back cover 680E that covers the light emitting unit 630E from the rear and a front cover 670E that covers the light emitting unit 630E from the front in the front and rear. The front cover 670E is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the light from the light emitter 641E is emitted to the front of the gaming machine through the front cover 670E → the gaming board 80aE.

The front cover 670E has a disk-shaped facing portion 671E facing the back surface of the light emitting substrate 640E and the game board 80aE, and a columnar shaft portion 673E standing rearward from the facing portion 671E. A bearing hole 652E penetrating back and forth is formed in the central portion of the light emitting unit 630E (light emitting substrate 640E and holder 651E). By inserting the shaft portion 673E into the bearing hole 652E, the light emitting unit 630E can rotate around the shaft portion 673E. That is, the light emitting unit 630E is housed in the case 660E in a rotatable state. Hereinafter, the central axis that is the center of rotation of the light emitting unit 630E is referred to as "central axis CL1".

An annular stopper portion 672E that abuts from the front on the holder 651E of the light emitting unit 630E is formed on the back surface portion of the facing portion 671E. The displacement of the light emitting unit 630E to the front is regulated by the stopper portion 672E. In the state where the light emitting unit 630E is in contact with the stopper portion 672E in this way, a gap is secured between the light emitting substrate 640E and the back surface of the facing portion 671E, and the contact between the light emitting body 641E and the facing portion 671E is avoided. It has become. Further, the convex portion formed in the central portion of the holder 651E is in contact with the back cover 680E, and the rearward displacement of the light emitting unit 630E is restricted by the back cover 680E.

The rear cover 680E is equipped with a drive mechanism 690E that rotates the light emitting unit 630E. The drive mechanism 690E includes a motor 691E as a drive unit and gears 653E and 692E for transmitting the power of the motor 691E to the light emitting unit 630E. The motor 691E is connected to the notification / effect control device 140, and the motor 691E is driven and controlled by the notification / effect control device 140.

The front cover 670E in the present embodiment is a decorative cover in which a plurality of decorative portions 711E, 721E, and 731E are formed on the front portion of the facing portion 671E. The decorative portions 711E, 721E, and 731E are arranged in the rotation direction of the light emitting unit 630E, and the light emitting unit 630E rotates about the central axis CL1 so that the decorative portions 711E, 721E, and 731E have a positional relationship with the light emitting body 641E. Is configured to change. Hereinafter, the decorative portions 711E, 721E, and 731E formed on the front cover 670E will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160. FIG. 159 (a) is a front view of the special effect device 500E, FIG. 159 (b) is a schematic view showing the positional relationship between the passage path of the light emitting body 641E and the light diffusing portion and the non-light diffusing portion, and FIG. It is a horizontal sectional view of. In FIG. 160, the decorative portions 711E, 721E, and 731E are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the facing portion 671E is composed of a flat surface portion 701E, the first decorative portion 711E, the second decorative portion 721E, and the third decorative portion 731E, which are the decorative portions.

The first decorative portion 711E has a plurality (four) of annular convex portions 713E that are convex forward from the flat surface portion 701E. All of the annular convex portions 713E have a circular shape centered on the central axis CL5 extending in the front-rear direction, and are arranged side by side in the radial direction of the central axis CL5. A small gap (annular groove portion 714E) is provided between each annular convex portion 713E, and a difference is provided so that the distance between these gaps is larger from the central axis CL5.

The second decorative portion 721E has a plurality (four) of annular convex portions 723E that are convex forward from the flat surface portion 701E. All of the annular convex portions 723E have a circular shape centered on the central axis CL6 extending in the front-rear direction, and are arranged side by side in the radial direction of the central axis CL6. A small gap (annular groove portion 724E) is provided between each annular convex portion 723E, and a difference is provided so that the distance between these gaps is larger from the central axis CL5.

The third decorative portion 731E has a plurality (four) of annular convex portions 733E that are convex forward from the flat surface portion 701E. All of the annular convex portions 733E have a circular shape centered on the central axis CL7 extending in the front-rear direction, and are arranged side by side in the radial direction of the central axis CL6. A small gap (annular groove portion 734E) is provided between each annular convex portion 733E, and a difference is provided so that the distance between these gaps is larger from the central axis CL6.

The first decorative portion 711E, the second decorative portion 721E, and the third decorative portion 731E are arranged so that the distances from the central axis CL1 to the respective central axes CL5 to CL7 are different. The diameter (inner diameter and outer diameter) of the annular convex portion 713E of the portion 711E, the diameter of the annular convex portion 723E of the second decorative portion 721E (inner diameter and outer diameter), and the diameter of the annular convex portion 733E of the third decorative portion 731E (inner diameter and outer diameter). Although the configuration is different in that the outer diameter) is different, the basic structure is the same. In the following description, the detailed structure will be described centering on the first decorative portion 711E, but the same applies to the detailed structure of the second decorative portion 721E and the third decorative portion 731E.

As shown in FIG. 160, the side surface 718E (the inner surface facing the central axis CL5 side and the outer surface facing opposite to the central axis CL5 side) of the annular convex portion 713E both face the direction intersecting the central axis CL5 and are annular. The convex portion 713E is formed so as to taper toward the tip (front end). When the light from the light emitter 641E is applied to the annular convex portion 713E of the first decorative portion 711E, at least a part of the light is diffused to the other annular convex portion 713E or the annular groove portion 714E, and then the annular convex portion 713E. It is ejected to the front of the gaming machine through the portion 713E and the annular groove portion 714E (see FIG. 160 (b)).

Since this diffusion direction is the radial direction (orthogonal direction) of the central axis CL5, the emission pattern when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is a linear shape (specifically, a band shape) extending in the radial direction of the central axis CL5 (Fig.). See region BE in 161). On the other hand, when the light from the light emitter 641E is applied to the flat surface portion 701E (including the partition portion 715E partitioned by the annular convex portion 713E), the light passes through the facing portion 671E as it is and diffuses. It is ejected to the front of the gaming machine in a suppressed state (see FIG. 160 (a)). That is, the light emitting pattern when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is dotted (see region SE in FIG. 161). In the following description, the annular convex portions 713E, 723E, 733E and the annular groove portions 714E, 724E, 734E are referred to as "light diffusion portions 712E, 722E, 732E", and the flat surface portions 701E and the partition portions 715E, 725E, 735E are appropriately "non-". It is referred to as "light diffusing unit 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E".

The light emitting body 641E orbits (displaces) with the rotation of the light emitting unit 630E. The orbital PL around which the light emitter 641E orbits is a circle centered on the central axis CL1, and the central axis CL1 is separated from the central axis CL5 of the first decorative portion 711E. Therefore, the distance from the central axis CL5 to the optical axis LA of the light emitting body 641E changes due to the rotation of the light emitting unit 630E, and the light emitting body 641E straddles the light diffusing portion 712E with the rotation of the light emitting unit 630E (rearward). Displace (to cross). As a result, the linear (detailed band-shaped) light emitting pattern that emerges from the first decorative portion 711E changes so as to change the position and orientation of the first decorative portion 711E in the light diffusing portion 712E (see FIG. 161). ..

Here, with reference to FIG. 159 (b), the positional relationship between the orbital PL of the light emitter 641E and the light diffusing portion and the non-light diffusing portion will be described. In FIG. 159 (b), the portion to which the dot hatching is applied is the light diffusing portion, and the portion to which the dot hatching is not applied is the non-light diffusing portion.

First, the light emitting body 641E shown in the present embodiment has a first light emitting body 641aE, a second light emitting body 641bE, a third light emitting body 641cE, a fourth light emitting body 641dE, and a fifth light emitting body according to the distance from the central axis CL1. It is roughly classified into a body 641eE and a sixth light emitter 641fE. Specifically, the distance from the central axis CL1 is larger in the order of the first light emitting body 641aE <second light emitting body 641bE <third light emitting body 641cE <fourth light emitting body 641dE <fifth light emitting body 641eE <sixth light emitting body 641fE. It has become.

In the first light emitting body 641aE, when the light emitting unit 630E rotates about the central axis CL1, the orbital PLa around which the first light emitting body 641aE orbits is the light diffusing portion 712E of the first decorative portion 711E when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. And the non-light diffusing unit 715E and the non-light diffusing unit 701E are arranged so as to overlap each other. The light irradiation destination (supply destination) by the first light emitting body 641aE becomes the non-light diffusing unit 701E → the light diffusing unit 712E → the non-light diffusing unit 715E → the light diffusing unit 712E → the non-light diffusing unit as the light emitting unit 630E rotates. It will change repeatedly in the order of 701E.

In the second light emitting body 641bE, when the light emitting unit 630E rotates about the central axis CL1, the orbital PLb around which the second light emitting body 641bE orbits is the light diffusing part 712E of the first decorative part 711E when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The non-light diffusing portion 715E, the light diffusing portion 732E of the third decorative portion 731E, and the non-light diffusing portion 701E are arranged at overlapping positions. The light irradiation destination (supply destination) by the second light emitting body 641bE becomes the non-light diffusing unit 701E → the light diffusing unit 712E → the non-light diffusing unit 715E → the light diffusing unit 712E → the non-light diffusing unit as the light emitting unit 630E rotates. It changes repeatedly in the order of 701E → light diffusing unit 732E → non-light diffusing unit 701E.

In the third light emitting body 641cE, when the light emitting unit 630E rotates around the central axis CL1, the orbital PLc around which the third light emitting body 641cE orbits is the light diffusing part 712E of the first decorative part 711E when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. And the non-light diffusing section 715E, the light diffusing section 722E of the second decorative section 721E, the light diffusing section 732E and the non-light diffusing section 735E of the third decorative section 731E, and the non-light diffusing section 701E are arranged at overlapping positions. ing. The light irradiation destination (supply destination) by the third light emitting body 641cE becomes the non-light diffusing unit 701E → the light diffusing unit 712E → the non-light diffusing unit 715E → the light diffusing unit 712E → the non-light diffusing unit as the light emitting unit 630E rotates. The change is repeated in the order of 701E → light diffusing unit 722E → non-light diffusing unit 701E → light diffusing unit 732E → non-light diffusing unit 735E → light diffusing unit 732E → non-light diffusing unit 701E.

In the fourth light emitting body 641dE, when the light emitting unit 630E rotates about the central axis CL1, the orbital PLd around which the fourth light emitting body 641dE orbits is the light diffusing portion 712E of the first decorative portion 711E when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. And the non-light diffusing section 715E, the light diffusing section 722E and the non-light diffusing section 725E of the second decorative section 721E, the light diffusing section 732E and the non-light diffusing section 735E of the third decorative section 731E, and the non-light diffusing section 701E. It is placed in a position that overlaps with. The light irradiation destination (supply destination) by the fourth light emitting body 641dE becomes the non-light diffusing unit 701E → the light diffusing unit 712E → the non-light diffusing unit 715E → the light diffusing unit 712E → the non-light diffusing unit as the light emitting unit 630E rotates. 701E-> light diffusion unit 722E-> non-light diffusion unit 725E-> non-light diffusion unit 701E-> light diffusion unit 732E-> non-light diffusion unit 735E-> light diffusion unit 732E-> non-light diffusion unit 701E.

In the fifth light emitting body 641eE, when the light emitting unit 630E rotates about the central axis CL1, the orbital PLe around which the fifth light emitting body 641eE orbits is the light diffusing part 712E of the first decorative part 711E when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The light diffusing portion 722E of the second decorative portion 721E, the light diffusing portion 732E of the third decorative portion 731E, and the non-light diffusing portion 701E are arranged at positions overlapping with each other. The light irradiation destination (supply destination) by the fifth light emitting body 641eE becomes the non-light diffusing unit 701E → the light diffusing unit 712E → the non-light diffusing unit 701E → the light diffusing unit 722E → the non-light diffusing unit as the light emitting unit 630E rotates. It changes repeatedly in the order of 701E → light diffusing unit 732E → non-light diffusing unit 701E.

In the sixth light emitting body 641fE, when the light emitting unit 630E rotates about the central axis CL1, the orbital PLf around which the sixth light emitting body 641fE orbits is the light diffusing part 712E of the first decorative part 711E when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The light diffusing portion 722E of the second decorative portion 721E, the light diffusing portion 732E of the third decorative portion 731E, and the non-light diffusing portion 701E are arranged at positions overlapping with each other. The light irradiation destination (supply destination) by the fifth light emitting body 641eE becomes the non-light diffusing unit 701E → the light diffusing unit 712E → the non-light diffusing unit 701E → the light diffusing unit 722E → the non-light diffusing unit as the light emitting unit 630E rotates. It changes repeatedly in the order of 701E → light diffusing unit 732E → non-light diffusing unit 701E.

It should be noted that at least a part of the light emitting bodies (fourth light emitting body 641dE, fifth light emitting body 641eE, sixth light emitting body 641fE) to be supplied with light to the first decorative part 711E (light diffusing part 712E) is orbital. The diameters of PLd, PLe, and PLf are larger than the diameter (inner diameter and outer diameter) of the first decorative portion 711E, and the light emitter to which light is supplied to the second decorative portion 721E (light diffusing portion 722E). For all (third light emitter 641cE, fourth light emitting body 641dE, fifth light emitting body 641eE, sixth light emitting body 641fE), the diameters of the orbitals PLc, PLd, PLe, PLf are the diameters of the second decorative portion 721E (inner diameter and outer diameter). The diameter is larger than the diameter), and at least a part of the light emitting bodies (third light emitting body 641cE, fourth light emitting body 641dE, fifth) to be supplied with light to the third decorative portion 731E (light diffusing portion 732E). For the light emitter 641eE and the sixth light emitter 641fE), the diameters of the orbitals PLc, PLd, PLe, PLf are larger than the diameters (inner diameter and outer diameter) of the third decorative portion 731E.

Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 162, the special disengagement notice effect by the special effect device 500E will be described. If a hold corresponding to the special loss result is acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, it is announced that the special loss result will be obtained in the game times preceding the game times corresponding to the hold. The player may be notified by the production. In the special out-of-order notice effect, the rotation of the light emitting unit 630E is started at the final display timing of the symbol combination in the preceding game round. After the rotation speed reaches the steady rotation speed during the confirmation display, all the light emitters 641E are switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the special effect device 500E displays a dot-shaped light emitting pattern and a linear (specifically, band-shaped) light emitting pattern. This special out-of-order notice effect will be continued until the transition to the fourth normal gaming state. Regarding the positional relationship between the light emitting body 641A and the decorative portions 711E, 721E, and 731E, a line may be formed by at least one of the other light emitting bodies 641A under the condition that the point-shaped light emitting pattern is displayed by the light emitting body 641A of 1. It is stipulated that a light emitting pattern in the shape (specifically, a band shape) is displayed. That is, during the special disengagement notice effect, the point-shaped light emitting pattern and the linear (specifically, band-shaped) light emitting pattern are displayed in a mixed manner at any rotation angle.

Here, after the light emitting body 641A is switched to the lighting state, for example, FIG. 162 (a) → FIG. 162 (b) → as the rotation angle of the light emitting unit 630E changes while the light emitting body 641E is kept in the lighting state. As shown in FIG. 162 (c) → FIG. 162 (d), the position and shape of the light emitting pattern will change. In particular, the larger the distance from the central axis CL1 to the light emitter 641E, the higher the displacement speed of the pattern, but for patterns far from the central axis CL1, the distance that the display is continued is longer than that of the near pattern. This prevents the visibility from being significantly reduced as compared with the light emitting pattern displayed at a position close to the central axis CL1.

According to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, by rotating the light emitting unit 630E, the light diffusing portions 712E, 722E, and 732E of the front cover 670E (corresponding to the “decorative cover” and the “cover”) are irradiated with light. The light emitting body 641E is displaced so as to pass through a predetermined orbital PL including a position where the light is emitted to the non-light diffusing portions 701E, 715E, 725E, and 735E of the front cover 670E. In the light emitting effect device, the light from the light emitting unit 630E (light emitting body 641E) is irradiated to the non-light diffusing units 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E and the light diffusing units 712E, 722E, 732E. The appearance (light emission mode) of a special effect device 500D can be significantly changed. This makes it possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the light emission effect using the special effect device 500D. When performing such a light emitting effect, it is assumed that the change in the position of the decorated front cover 670E itself may be a factor that deteriorates the appearance of the special effect device 500D or reduces the impact of the light emitting effect. Will be done. In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by rotating the light emitting unit 630E among the front cover 670E and the light emitting unit 630E. Further, by making the light emitting unit 630E a rotary type, the light emitting mode can be continuously and repeatedly changed, so that the execution period of the light emitting effect can be secured to some extent and the sustainability of the attention-improving effect can be suitably enhanced. But it is preferable.

As shown in the present embodiment, if the light emitting unit 630E is rotated under the condition that the light emitting body 641E is maintained in the lighting state, the light emitting part (position) is also changed in addition to the change in the light emitting pattern. It can be changed seamlessly, and the above-mentioned effect can be further enhanced.

In the front cover 670E, the light diffusing portion is configured by the uneven decoration. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress that the presence of the light diffusing portion is a factor that deteriorates the appearance of the front cover 670E. The light diffusing units 712E, 722E, and 732E are arranged differently in the rotation direction, and the light emitting body 641E has one of a plurality of light diffusing units 712E, 722E, and 732E as the light emitting unit 630E rotates. It is configured to be displaced from the position where the light is irradiated to another position where the other light diffusing part is irradiated via the position where the non-light diffusing part 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E is irradiated with the light. There is. As described above, when the light diffusing portion is displaced from one light diffusing portion to another light diffusing portion, the sharpness when changing the light emitting pattern can be enhanced by configuring the configuration so as to pass through the position corresponding to the non-light diffusing portion.

The light emitting unit 630E is configured so that when any one of the plurality of light emitting bodies 641E irradiates the non-light diffusing portion with light, any of the other light emitting bodies 641E irradiates the light diffusing portion with light. ing. With such a configuration, it is possible to simultaneously display a light emitting pattern with light diffusion and a light emitting pattern without light diffusion. This is advantageous in improving the appearance of the light emitting effect and preferably exerting the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention.

As shown in the present embodiment, if the front side of the facing portion 671E of the front cover 670E is formed with irregularities to which the functions of light diffusion and decoration are imparted and the back side is flat, the light emitting unit 630E and the front surface are formed. The operating gap between the cover 670E (specifically, the facing portion 671E) can be reduced to promote the thinning of the special effect device 500D.

The light applied to the light diffusing portions 712E, 722E, 732E is diffused in the arrangement direction (direction intersecting the predetermined axis) of the linear light diffusing portions 712E, 722E, 732E. As a result, the light emitting pattern becomes a band shape extending in the direction intersecting the predetermined axis. The band-shaped light emitting pattern is displaced by the operation of the light emitting unit 630E, and the band-shaped light emitting pattern is displaced to enhance the visual impact of the light emitting effect. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

As shown in the present embodiment, if the optical axis is displaced so as to straddle a plurality of annular convex portions 713E and the like, the light diffusion mode (light emission pattern) is achieved by the annular convex portion 713E intersecting the optical axis. ) Can be changed. It is preferable to diversify the light emitting pattern in this way in order to suppress the monotonousness of the light emitting effect.

In a configuration in which the annular convex portion 713E or the like, which is an uneven decoration, also functions as a light diffusing portion, it is assumed that the operation of the front cover 670E reduces the visual impact. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the light emitting unit 630E located behind the front cover 670E is operated instead of the front cover 670E, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be avoided.

The light emitting unit 630E is a rotary type, and the light emitting mode can be continuously and repeatedly changed. This is preferable in order to secure the execution period of the light emission effect to some extent and to suitably enhance the sustainability of the attention-improving effect. In particular, as shown in the present embodiment, the central axis CL1 which is the rotation central axis of the light emitting unit 630E is configured to be separated from the central axes CL5 to CL7 and to be parallel to those axes CL5 to CL7. This is preferable in order to cause a change in the emission pattern with rotation.

As shown in the present embodiment, if the side surface 718E of the annular convex portion 713E or the like is inclined with respect to the central axis CL5 or the like, a part of the light from the light emitter 641E is reflected and the other annular convex portion is formed. It can lead to 713E. This is preferable in order to lengthen the total length when the light emitting pattern is strip-shaped and to emphasize the difference in appearance (dot-shaped / strip-shaped).

The bottom of the annular groove portion 714E as a "flat surface portion" is formed between the annular convex portions 713E, and the rotational trajectory through which the light emitting body 641E passes and the annular groove portion 714E are formed so as to overlap each other when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Has been done. According to such a configuration, the shape of the light emitting pattern (for example, the total length) depends on the case where the light from the light emitting body 641E is irradiated on the side surface 718E and the case where the light from the light emitting body 641E is irradiated on the bottom portion of the annular groove portion 714E. ) Can be changed. That is, the shape of the light emitting pattern changes as the position of the light emitting pattern changes. Such a configuration is preferable in order to suppress the monotonicization of the light emission effect.

As shown in the present embodiment, if the width (groove width) of the bottom of each annular groove portion 714E is different, it is more preferable to change the shape (for example, the total length) of the light emitting pattern according to the light irradiation target. Can be generated in.

Further, the length of the portion where the orbital passage of one light emitting body and the light diffusing portion overlap with the rotation of the light emitting unit 630E, and the orbital and light diffusing portion through which the other light emitting body passes with the rotation of the light emitting unit 630E. The length of the part that overlaps with is different. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the rotation range (angle) in which the light emitting pattern is displayed in one light diffusing portion is different. In a configuration in which the decoration of the cover functions as a light diffusing portion, restrictions on the shape and size of the light diffusing portion may become stronger in order to exert the function as a decoration. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if a plurality of light emitting bodies can pass behind one light diffusing portion and the above rotation range is different, the appearance of the light emitting effect is improved. However, the inconvenience caused by it can be suitably eliminated.

<Modification 1>
In the 16th embodiment, the rotation position (phase) between the light emitting unit 630E and the case 660E (specifically, the facing portion 671E) is changed by rotating the light emitting unit 630E. It does not deny the configuration in which the rotation position (phase) of the light emitting unit 630E and the case 660E (specifically, the facing portion 671E) is changed by rotating the case 660E.

Further, although the decorative portions 711E, 721E, and 731E are configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine, these decorative portions 711E, 721E, and 731E may be formed so as to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine. For example, a semi-transparent sticker or the like having light transmission is arranged on the front surface or the back surface of the gaming board 80aE, and the sticker is configured to obstruct the visibility of the decorations 711E, 721E, 731E, while the light of the light emitter 641E is emitted. It is also possible to make it visible from the front of the gaming machine. In the case where the case 660E is rotated as described above, the decorative portions 711E, 721E, and 731E are made invisible, so that the special disengagement notice effect (light emission effect) is not started. It is possible to suitably suppress that the impact of the effect is reduced due to the detection that the off-preliminary effect is started.

<Modification 2>
In the 16th embodiment, the decorative portions 711E, 721E, and 731E are formed so as to be circular when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, but the light emitting pattern is linear and at least one of its orientation and position is changed. If this is possible, the specific shapes of the decorative portions 711E, 721E, and 731E may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the decorative portions 711E, 721E, and 731E can be made elliptical or polygonal when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

The non-light diffusing portions 715E, 725E, and 735E are provided in the central portion of the decorative portions 711E, 721E, and 731E, but the present invention is not limited thereto. These non-light diffusing units 715E, 725E, and 735E can be omitted.

<Modification 3>
In the 16th embodiment, the groove width (gap) of the annular groove portion 714E is formed so as to be larger as it is farther from the central axis CL5, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the groove width (gap) of the annular groove portion 714E may be formed so as to be smaller as it is farther from the central axis CL5, or the groove width (gap) of the annular groove portion 714E may be constant regardless of the distance from the central axis CL5. It may be formed so as to be. Similar changes may be made to the other annular groove portions 724E and 734E, or the groove width setting patterns may be different between the annular groove portion 714E, the annular groove portion 724E, and the annular groove portion 734E.

<Modification example 4>
In the 16th embodiment, the annular convex portions 713E, 723E, and 733E are formed so that the cross sections of the annular convex portions 713E, 723E, and 733E are substantially triangular, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Regarding the cross sections of the annular protrusions 713E, 723E, and 733E, if at least a part of the light from the illuminant 641E can be reflected backward to exert the function of guiding to other adjacent annular protrusions. It may be changed arbitrarily. For example, it can be formed so as to be a substantially semicircle.

<17th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a new special effect device 500F is constructed by applying the configuration of the effect mechanism 600E shown in the 16th embodiment to the special effect device 500D shown in the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164, the special effect device 500F in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a horizontal sectional view of the special effect device 500F, and FIG. 164 is a front view of the special effect device 500F.

(Special production device 500F)
As shown in FIG. 163, the special effect device 500F includes an effect mechanism 600F, a pedestal for fixing the effect mechanism 600F to the back block of the game board unit 80F, and a decorative sticker 501F fixed to the back of the game board 80aF. In a state where the game board 80aF and the back block are combined (see FIG. 7), the effect mechanism 600F faces the decorative sticker 501F of the game board 80aF with a slight gap. The game board 80aF has transparency, and the player can visually recognize the special effect device 500F, specifically the decorative sticker 501F, from the front of the game machine through the game board 80aF.

The effect mechanism 600F includes a light emitting unit 630F and a synthetic resin case 660F that houses the light emitting unit 630F. The light emitting unit 630F is composed of a light emitting board 640F on which a plurality of light emitting bodies 641F (specifically, LEDs) are mounted, and a holder 651F that holds the light emitting board 640F so that the mounting surface of the light emitting body 641F faces the front of the gaming machine. Has been done. Specifically, both the light emitting substrate 640F and the holder 651F have a disk shape, and the light emitting substrate 640F is fixed to the holder 651F in a state of being fitted in a recess formed in the center of the holder 651F. The light emitting board 640F is connected to the notification / effect control device 140 via a connection terminal such as a slip ring, and the light emission control (switching control between the lighting state and the extinguishing state) of the light emitting body 641F is performed by the notification / effect control device 140. Will be executed.

The case 660F is formed by combining a back cover 680F that covers the light emitting unit 630F from the rear and a front cover 670F that covers the light emitting unit 630F from the front in the front and rear. The front cover 670F has light transmission, and the light from the light emitter 641F is emitted to the front of the gaming machine through the front cover 670F → the decorative sticker 501F → the gaming board 80aF.

The front cover 670F has a disk-shaped facing portion 671F facing the light emitting substrate 640F and the decorative seal 501F, and a columnar shaft portion 673F standing rearward from the facing portion 671F. A bearing hole 652F that penetrates back and forth is formed in the central portion of the light emitting unit 630F (light emitting substrate 640F and holder 651F). By inserting the shaft portion 673F into the bearing hole 652F, the light emitting unit 630F can rotate around the shaft portion 673F. That is, the light emitting unit 630F is housed in the case 660F in a rotatable state. Hereinafter, the rotation center axis of the light emitting unit 630F is referred to as "center axis CL1".

An annular stopper portion 672F that abuts from the front on the holder 651F of the light emitting unit 630F is formed on the back surface of the facing portion 671F. The displacement of the light emitting unit 630F to the front is regulated by the stopper portion 672F. In the state where the light emitting unit 630F is in contact with the stopper portion 672F in this way, a gap is secured between the light emitting substrate 640F and the back surface of the facing portion 671F, and the contact between the light emitting body 641F and the facing portion 671F is avoided. It has become. Further, the convex portion formed in the central portion of the holder 651F is in contact with the back cover 680F, and the rearward displacement of the light emitting unit 630F is restricted by the back cover 680F.

The rear cover 680F is equipped with a drive mechanism 690F that rotates the light emitting unit 630F. The drive mechanism 690F includes a motor 691F as a drive unit and gears 653F and 692F for transmitting the power of the motor 691F to the light emitting unit 630F. The motor 691F is connected to the notification / effect control device 140, and the motor 691F is driven and controlled by the notification / effect control device 140.

As shown in FIG. 164, in the present embodiment, a plurality of bulging portions 711F, 721F, 731F that bulge toward the decorative seal 501F are formed on the front surface of the facing portion 671F in the front cover 670F. That is, the front surface of the facing portion 671F is roughly classified into a flat surface portion 701F and bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F that bulge from the flat surface portion 701F. The bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F are arranged in the rotation direction of the light emitting unit 630F, and the bulging portions 711F, 721F, 731F and the light emitting body 641F are formed by rotating the light emitting unit 630F around the central axis CL1. The configuration is such that the positional relationship changes. Hereinafter, the bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F formed on the front cover 670F will be supplementarily described. In FIG. 163, the bulging portions 711F, 721F, and 731F are not shown.

The first bulging portion 711F has a plurality (four) of annular convex portions 713F that are convex forward from the flat surface portion 701F. All of the annular convex portions 713F have a circular shape centered on the central axis CL5 extending in the front-rear direction, and are arranged side by side in the radial direction of the central axis CL5. A small gap (annular groove portion 714F) is provided between each annular convex portion 713F, and a difference is provided so that the distance between these gaps is larger from the central axis CL5.

The second bulging portion 721F has a plurality (four) of annular convex portions 723F that are convex forward from the flat surface portion 701F. Each of the annular convex portions 723F has a circular shape centered on the central axis CL6 extending in the front-rear direction, and is arranged side by side in the radial direction of the central axis CL6. Small gaps (annular groove portion 724F) are provided between the annular convex portions 723F, and the gaps are provided so that the farther from the central axis CL5, the larger the gap.

The third bulging portion 731F has a plurality (four) of annular convex portions 733F that are convex forward from the flat surface portion 701F. All of the annular convex portions 733F have a circular shape centered on the central axis CL7 extending in the front-rear direction, and are arranged side by side in the radial direction of the central axis CL6. A small gap (annular groove portion 734F) is provided between each annular convex portion 733F, and a difference is provided so that the distance between these gaps is larger from the central axis CL6.

The first bulging portion 711F, the second bulging portion 721F, and the third bulging portion 731F are arranged so that the distances from the central axis CL1 to the respective central axes CL5 to CL7 are the same. The outer shape is also unified. In the following description, the detailed structure will be described centering on the first bulging portion 711F, but the same applies to the detailed structure of the second bulging portion 721F and the third bulging portion 731F.

The side surface of the annular convex portion 713F (the inner surface facing the central axis CL5 side and the outer surface facing opposite to the central axis CL5 side) both face the direction intersecting the central axis CL5, and the annular convex portion 713F is the tip (front end). It is formed so as to taper toward. When the light from the light emitting body 641F is applied to the annular convex portion 713F of the first bulging portion 711F, at least a part of the light is diffused to the other annular convex portion 713F or the annular groove portion 714F, and then the annular portion 713F. It is ejected to the front of the gaming machine through the convex portion 713F and the annular groove portion 714F.

Since this diffusion direction is the radial direction (orthogonal direction) of the central axis CL5, the light emitting pattern when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is a linear shape (strip shape) extending in the radial direction of the central axis CL5. On the other hand, when the light from the light emitting body 641F is applied to the flat surface portion 701F (including the partition portion 715F partitioned by the annular convex portion 713F), the light passes through the facing portion 671F as it is and diffuses. It is ejected to the front of the gaming machine in a suppressed state. That is, the light emitting pattern when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is dotted. The principle of such a change in the light emission pattern is the same as that of the sixteenth embodiment.

In the following description, the annular convex portions 713F, 723F, 733F and the annular groove portions 714F, 724F, 734F are referred to as "light diffusing portions 712F, 722F, 732F", and the flat surface portions 701F and the partition portions 715F, 725F, 735F are appropriately "non-". It is referred to as "light diffusing unit 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F".

The light emitting body 641F orbits (displaces) with the rotation of the light emitting unit 630F. The orbital PL around which the light emitter 641F orbits is a circle centered on the central axis CL1, and the central axis CL1 is separated from the central axis CL5 of the first bulging portion 711F. Therefore, the rotation of the light emitting unit 630F changes the distance from the central axis CL5 to the optical axis of the light emitting body 641F, and the light emitting body 641F straddles the light diffusing unit 712F (crosses the rear) as the light emitting unit 630F rotates. (Like) to displace. As a result, the linear light emitting pattern that emerges from the first bulging portion 711F changes so as to change the position and orientation of the first bulging portion 711F in the light diffusing portion 712F.

(Decorative sticker 501F)
Here, the decorative sticker 501F attached to the back surface of the game board 80aF will be supplementarily described. The decorative sticker 501F is a transparent sealing material having light transmission, and is provided with a warning decorative unit 511F for executing a special disconnection notice effect and a notification decorative unit 512F for notifying that the result is a special disconnection result. .. The notice decoration part 511F corresponds to the notice decoration part 511D in the fifteenth embodiment, and the notice decoration part 512F corresponds to the notice decoration part 512D in the fifteenth embodiment.

The notice decoration unit 511F and the notification decoration unit 512F are provided side by side so that the former is on the left side and the latter is on the right side. It is arranged so as to be close to the display area Da, the execution target display area Dc, and the actuation port unit 82A. The distance from the first operating port 91A, which may result in special disconnection, to the special effect device 500F (specifically, the decorative portion 511F for advance notice) is a variation of the symbol on the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A from the first operating port 91A. It is shorter than the distance to the display area ME.

The notification decoration unit 512F can be switched between a lighting state and a lighting state, and is configured to perform the above notification by switching from the lighting state to the lighting state when a special disconnection result is triggered. Then, it is maintained in the lit state during the high-frequency support mode A, and is switched to the off state when the number of games executed in the high-frequency support mode A reaches the above-mentioned end reference number and the high-frequency support mode A ends. It is composed.

The notice decoration part 511F is composed of a blue first notice part 521F, a yellow second notice part 522F, and a red third notice part 523F, which are the first notice part 521F, the second notice part 522F, and the first. 3 The notice unit 523F can be individually switched between the lighting state and the extinguishing state. The first notice unit 521F, the second notice unit 522F, and the third notice unit 523F correspond to the first light emitting unit 521D, the second light emitting unit 522D, and the third light emitting unit 523D shown in the fifteenth embodiment.

The special off-notice notice effect has a step 1 in which only the first notice unit 521F is in the lighting state, a step 2 in which the second notice unit 522F is in the lighting state, and a step 3 in which the third notice unit 523F is in the lighting state. By stepping up as the game times progress, the degree of expectation that will result in a special deviation changes. For example, in the case of step 1, the expectation of a special deviation result is 30%, in the case of step 2, the expectation of a special deviation result is 50%, and in the case of step 3, the special deviation result is obtained. The degree of expectation is set to be 80%. In the special disconnection notice production corresponding to the special disconnection result, it is clearly indicated that the special disconnection result was obtained by finally turning on the notification decoration part 512F, and in the special disconnection notice production corresponding to the normal deviation result, it is for notice. When the decorative unit 511F and the notification decorative unit 512F are turned off, it is clearly indicated that the special disengagement result was not obtained.

It should be noted that the specific configuration of the special deviation notice effect shown in the present embodiment is the same as that of the fifteenth embodiment. For example, the above step does not always proceed when the game round progresses, and the step may not progress even when the game round progresses. Further, the steps are not always advanced one step at a time, and some steps may be skipped and the steps may be advanced. Incidentally, even if the result is a special disengagement, the special disengagement notice effect does not always occur, and the notification decoration unit 512F may be switched to the lighting state without going through the special disengagement notice effect.

In the present embodiment, a fanning effect indicating that a special off-prediction notice effect is started (a sign) that an effect having the same appearance as the final effect of the special off result shown in the 16th embodiment is started. It is different from the 16th embodiment in that it is configured to be executed as. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 164, a device for executing two types of effects (special off-preliminary effect and fanning effect) using the special effect device 500F will be described.

The light emitting body 641F shown in the present embodiment has a first light emitting body 641aF, a second light emitting body 641bF, a third light emitting body 641cF, a fourth light emitting body 641dF, and a fifth light emitting body 641eF according to the distance from the central axis CL1. , 6th light emitter 641fF is roughly classified. Specifically, the distance from the central axis CL1 is larger in the order of the first light emitting body 641aF <second light emitting body 641bF <third light emitting body 641cF <fourth light emitting body 641dF <fifth light emitting body 641eF <sixth light emitting body 641fF. It has become.

In the first light emitting body 641aF, when the light emitting unit 630F rotates about the central axis CL1, the entire orbital PLa around which the first light emitting body 641aF rotates is the non-light diffusion portion 701E of the front cover 670 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is arranged so as to overlap with.

Further, the first light emitting body 641aF is arranged so that a part of the orbital PLa overlaps with the notification decorative portion 512F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the light emitting unit 630F is in a standby position which is a predetermined rotation position. The first light emitting body 641aF is configured to be located behind the notification decorative portion 512F when the first light emitting body 641aF is on standby. The light emitting unit 630F is configured to stay in the standby position under the condition that the above-mentioned fanning effect is not executed.

In the second light emitting body 641bF, when the light emitting unit 630F rotates about the central axis CL1, the orbital PLb around which the second light emitting body 641bF orbits is a light diffusing portion of the first bulging portion 711F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is arranged at a position overlapping the 712F, the light diffusing portion 722F of the second bulging portion 721F, the light diffusing portion 732F of the third bulging portion 731F, and the non-light diffusing portion 701F. By rotating the light emitting unit 630F while the second light emitting body 641bF is lit, the light irradiation destination (supply destination) by the second light emitting body 641bF is changed from the non-light diffusing unit 701F to the light diffusing unit 712F to the non-light diffusing unit. The change can be repeated in the order of section 701F → light diffusing section 722F → non-light diffusing section 701F → light diffusing section 732F → non-light diffusing section 701E.

Further, the second light emitting body 641bF is arranged so that a part of the orbital PLb is overlapped with the notification decorative part 512F, the second notice part 522F, and the third notice part 523F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the light emitting unit 630F. Is in the standby position, the second light emitter 641bF is located behind the third warning unit 523F. By lighting the second light emitter 641bF in the state of being arranged in the standby position, the third warning unit 523F is turned on.

In the third light emitting body 641cF, when the light emitting unit 630F rotates around the central axis CL1, the orbital PLc around which the third light emitting body 641cF orbits is a light diffusing portion of the first bulging portion 711F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The 712F and the non-light diffusing section 715F, the light diffusing section 722F and the non-light diffusing section 725F of the second bulging section 721F, the light diffusing section 732F and the non-light diffusing section 735F of the third bulging section 731F, and the non-light diffusing section 735F. It is arranged at a position overlapping with the portion 701F. By rotating the light emitting unit 630F while the third light emitting body 641cF is lit, the light irradiation destination (supply destination) by the third light emitting body 641cF is changed from the non-light diffusing unit 701F to the light diffusing unit 712F to the non-light diffusing unit. Unit 715F → Light diffusion unit 712F → Non-light diffusion unit 701F → Light diffusion unit 722F → Non-light diffusion unit 725F → Light diffusion unit 722F → Non-light diffusion unit 701F → Light diffusion unit 732F → Non-light diffusion unit 735F → Light diffusion unit It can be repeatedly changed in the order of 732F → non-light diffusing unit 701E.

Further, in the third light emitting body 641cF, a part of the orbital PLc is arranged so as to overlap the notification decorative part 512F, the second notice part 522F, and the third notice part 523F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the light emitting unit 630F. Is in the standby position, the third light emitter 641cF is located behind the second warning unit 522F and behind the notification decorative unit 512F. By lighting the third light emitting body 641cF on the second warning unit 522F side in the state of being arranged in the standby position, the second warning unit 522F is turned on. Further, when the notification decoration unit 512F is turned on, the third light emitting body 641cF on the notification decoration unit 512F side is lit with the light emitting unit 630F arranged at the standby position.

In the fourth light emitting body 641dF, when the light emitting unit 630F rotates about the central axis CL1, the orbital PLd around which the fourth light emitting body 641dF orbits is a light diffusing portion of the first bulging portion 711F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The 712F and the non-light diffusing section 715F, the light diffusing section 722F and the non-light diffusing section 725F of the second bulging section 721F, the light diffusing section 732F and the non-light diffusing section 735F of the third bulging section 731F, and the non-light diffusing section 735F. It is arranged at a position overlapping with the portion 701F. By rotating the light emitting unit 630F while the fourth light emitting body 641dF is lit, the light irradiation destination (supply destination) by the fourth light emitting body 641df can be changed from the non-light diffusing unit 701F to the light diffusing unit 712F to the non-light diffusing unit. Unit 715F → Light diffusion unit 712F → Non-light diffusion unit 701F → Light diffusion unit 722F → Non-light diffusion unit 725F → Light diffusion unit 722F → Non-light diffusion unit 701F → Light diffusion unit 732F → Non-light diffusion unit 735F → Light diffusion unit It can be repeatedly changed in the order of 732F → non-light diffusing unit 701E.

Further, in the fourth light emitting body 641dF, a part of the orbital PLd when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is arranged so as to overlap the notification decorative part 512F, the second notice part 522F, and the third notice part 523F, and the light emitting unit 630F. When is on standby at the standby position, the fourth light emitter 641dF is configured to be located behind the notification decorative portion 512F. When the notification decoration unit 512F is turned on, the fourth light emitting body 641dF is turned on with the light emitting unit 630F arranged at the standby position.

In the fifth light emitting body 641eF, when the light emitting unit 630F rotates about the central axis CL1, the orbital PLe around which the fifth light emitting body 641eF orbits is a light diffusing portion of the first bulging portion 711F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is arranged at a position overlapping the 712F, the light diffusing portion 722F of the second bulging portion 721F, the light diffusing portion 732F of the third bulging portion 731F, and the non-light diffusing portion 701F. By rotating the light emitting unit 630F while the fifth light emitting body 641eF is lit, the light irradiation destination (supply destination) by the fifth light emitting body 641eF is changed from the non-light diffusing unit 701F to the light diffusing unit 712F to the non-light diffusing unit. The change can be repeated in the order of section 701F → light diffusing section 722F → non-light diffusing section 701F → light diffusing section 732F → non-light diffusing section 701F.

Further, the fifth light emitting body 641eF is arranged so that a part of the orbital PLe overlaps with the notification decorative part 512F and the first notice part 521F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the rotation position of the light emitting unit 630F is on standby. When waiting at the position, the fifth light emitter 641eF is configured to be located behind the notification decorative portion 512F. When the notification decoration unit 512F is turned on, the fifth light emitting body 641eF is turned on with the light emitting unit 630F arranged at the standby position.

In the sixth light emitting body 641fF, when the light emitting unit 630F rotates about the central axis CL1, the orbital PLf around which the sixth light emitting body 641fF orbits is a light diffusing portion of the first bulging portion 711F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is arranged at a position overlapping the 712F, the light diffusing portion 722F of the second bulging portion 721F, the light diffusing portion 732F of the third bulging portion 731F, and the non-light diffusing portion 701F. By rotating the light emitting unit 630F while the sixth light emitting body 641fF is lit, the light irradiation destination (supply destination) by the sixth light emitting body 641fF is changed from the non-light diffusing unit 701F to the light diffusing unit 712F to the non-light diffusing unit. The change can be repeated in the order of section 701F → light diffusing section 722F → non-light diffusing section 701F → light diffusing section 732F → non-light diffusing section 701F.

Further, the sixth light emitting body 641fF is arranged so that a part of the orbital PLf overlaps with the notification decorative portion 512F and the first warning section 521F when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the rotation position of the light emitting unit 630F is the standby position. The sixth light emitter 641fF is located behind the first notice unit 521F and behind the notification decoration unit 512F. By turning on the sixth light emitting body 641fF on the side of the first notice unit 521F in the state of being arranged in the standby position, the first notice unit 521F is turned on. Further, when the notification decoration unit 512F is turned on, the sixth light emitting body 641fF on the notification decoration unit 512F side is lit with the light emitting unit 630F arranged at the standby position.

In the fifteenth embodiment described above, it is determined at the transition timing to the final display whether or not to execute the special deviation notice effect, and if it is decided to execute the special deviation notice effect, the special deviation notice is given at the transition timing. It was configured to start the production. In the present embodiment, the start timing of the special missed notice effect is the same as that of the fifteenth embodiment, but whether or not to execute the special missed notice effect is the timing before that (details are suspended). The configuration is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment in that the configuration is determined by the acquired timing).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 (a) and 165 (b), the flow of the special out-of-order notice effect will be described.

In the special off-preliminary notice effect, the light emitting unit 630F is put on standby in order to switch the first notice section 521F, the second notice section 522F, and the third notice section 523F to the off / on state according to the step-up pattern set this time. The light emission control of each light emitting body 641F is executed in the state of being stopped at the position.

For example, if it is clearly indicated that the result is a special deviation after stepping up in the order of step 1 → step 2 → step 3, the sixth illuminant is displayed at the timing of the definite display in the game times before the corresponding game times. Of the 641fF, the one located behind the first notice unit 521F is turned on. As a result, the first warning unit 521F is turned on (step 1). At the timing of the confirmation display of the game times executed after the completion of step 1, the third light emitter 641cF located behind the second warning unit 522F is turned on. As a result, the second warning unit 522F is turned on (step 2). At the timing of the confirmation display of the game times executed after the completion of step 2, the second light emitter 641bF is turned on. As a result, the third warning unit 523F is turned on (step 3).

In the corresponding game times executed after the step-up is completed, the first light emitting body 641aF, the fourth light emitting body 641dF, the fifth light emitting body 641eF, the second light emitting body 641bF, and the third light emitting body are executed at the timing of the confirmation display. Of the body 641cF and the sixth light emitting body 641fF, those located behind the notification decorative portion 512F are newly turned on. As a result, the notification decorative portion 512F is turned on (see FIG. 165 (b)).

As described above, before the special out-of-order notice effect is executed, a fanning effect that is a precursor of the special out-of-date notice effect may be executed. In this fanning effect, first, the rotation of the light emitting unit 630E is started during the variable display of the symbol in the game round (timing before the final display timing of the symbol combination). After the rotation speed becomes a steady rotation speed during the fluctuation display, a part of the first light emitting body 641aF and the third light emitting body 641cF (behind the second warning unit 522F in the state of being arranged in the above standby position). (Positioned), a part of the fourth light emitter 641dF and the sixth light emitter 641fF (the one located behind the first notice unit 521F in the state of being arranged at the standby position) is turned on. As a result, the point-shaped light emitting pattern and the linear light emitting pattern are dynamically displayed on the special effect device 500E. In this way, before the special out-of-order notice effect is started, the player's attention to the special effect device 500F is attracted by the fanning effect, thereby suppressing the oversight of the special out-of-date notice effect.

<18th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached, the investment is further suppressed by shifting to the normal gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. Although such a configuration is preferable for improving the soundness of the game, there is room for improvement in attracting attention to the change in the flow of the game due to reaching the ceiling. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a left-right symmetric gauge (see FIG. 6), but in the present embodiment, the game board unit 80B (game board 80aB) is a left-right asymmetric gauge. The arrangement of various game parts provided in the game area PE has been changed. Hereinafter, the game board unit 80B in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a front view of the game board unit 80B.

(Game board unit 80B)
The game board 80aB is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 80aB. A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83B, a through gate 84A, and the like are arranged in each opening. When the game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82A, and the variable winning device 83B, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry portion, and the detection result is used. Based on this, a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player.

Further, in the game board 80aB, a large number of game nails 87 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. .. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations such as the game nail 87 and the windmill, and the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are adjusted so as to generate a prize with an appropriate probability. An out port 86 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 80aB, and the game ball that has not entered the various ball entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

The actuating port unit 82A has a first actuating port 91A and a second actuating port 92A arranged directly under the first actuating port 91A, similarly to the actuating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. Have. Of the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, the latter is provided with an electric accessory 93A as an opening / closing assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). When the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is set to the low frequency support mode, it is practically impossible to win a prize in the second operating port 92A, and by shifting to the high frequency support mode, the second operating port 92A is reached. Will be allowed to win.

The game board 80aB is provided with a center frame 96A so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80aB, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE by the center frame 96A is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that detours from the left side. It is the same as the above-mentioned first embodiment in the point that it is done. However, in the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the left route can win the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, while the variable winning device 83B and the through gate 84A cannot win the prize. , The game ball launched to the right route can win the second operating port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83B, but the first operating port 91A cannot be won. The arrangement of 91A, the second operating port 92A, the variable winning device 83B, and the through gate 84A has been changed. It should be noted that the game ball launched to the left route may be configured so that the second operating port 92A cannot be won.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route according to the game state, the game can be advanced advantageously. By encouraging such technical intervention, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The hold display area is a hold number display area Da in which the same number of units hold display areas as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins in the operating openings 91 and 92 are arranged in the left-right direction and displayed in a section. It is composed of an execution target display area Dc capable of displaying a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the game times. The hold number display area Da can be switched between a display mode composed of four unit hold display areas and a display mode composed of eight unit hold display areas.

The winning destination of the game ball flowing down the left route is mainly the first operating port 91A, and during the low frequency support mode, the game progresses mainly based on the hold related to the first operating port 91A. On the other hand, the winning destination of the game ball flowing down the right route is mainly the second operating port 92A, and the game proceeds mainly based on the hold related to the second operating port 92A during the high frequency support mode. Due to such circumstances, in many cases, the number of hold icons displayed in the hold number display area Da is four or less. Therefore, as for the display mode of the hold number display area Da, as illustrated in FIG. 139, the hold number display area Da is basically composed of four unit hold display areas, and the number of hold icons is four. Only when the value exceeds the above, the display mode is switched to the display mode composed of eight unit hold display areas. It is also possible to omit the function of switching the display mode of the reserved number display area Da depending on the situation.

In the present embodiment, the configuration according to the variable winning device 83B is different from the variable winning device 83 shown in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the specific configuration of the variable winning device 83B will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a schematic view showing the internal structure of the variable winning device 83B.

(Variable winning device 83B)
Inside the variable winning device 83B, a ball passage 332B through which a game ball flowing into the entrance (large winning opening 331B) of the variable winning device 83B passes is formed. The ball passage 332B branches into the first branch passage 334B and the second branch passage 335B at the intermediate position, and the flow destination of the game ball is directed to the first branch passage 334B side and the second branch passage 335B side in this branch portion. A switchable flow path switching member 336B is provided. The drive unit (specifically, the solenoid) for the flow path switching member 336B is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. The flow path switching member 336B stands by at a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 332B in a state where a drive signal is not input from the main control device 162 (non-excitation state), and is in a state where a drive signal is input (excitation state). ) Is configured to stand by at a retracted position where protrusion to the ball passage 332B is avoided.

In the state where the flow path switching member 336B is arranged at the protruding position, the inlet portion of the first branch passage 334B is blocked by the flow path switching member 336B. In this state, the inflow of the game balls that have reached the branch portion into the first branch passage 334B is avoided, and the game balls flow into the second branch passage 335B.

When the drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 336B is output from the main control device 162 and the drive unit is in the excited state, the flow path switching member 336B moves to the retracted position where the protrusion to the ball passage 332B is avoided. The entrance portion of the first branch passage 334B is opened. As a result, the inflow destination of the game ball is changed. In this state, the inflow of the game balls that have reached the branch portion into the second branch passage 335B is avoided, and the game balls flow into the first branch passage 334B. The movement of the flow path switching member 336B is predetermined by the result of a lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A.

An upstream side detection sensor 391d is arranged in a portion of the ball passage 332B on the upstream side of the branch portion, and a portion on the downstream side of the branch portion, specifically, the first branch passage 334B and the second branch passage. Downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are arranged in the branch passage 335B. The upstream side detection sensor 391d and the downstream side detection sensors 338B and 339B are connected to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 transfers to the variable winning device 83B based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 391d. The presence or absence of a prize is specified, and if a prize is generated, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Further, the remaining state of the game ball is monitored based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 391d and the downstream side detection sensors 338B and 339B.

In the main control device 162 shown in the present embodiment, it is specified that the ball has entered the first branch passage 334B by the detection information (detection signal) from the downstream side detection sensor 338B attached to the first branch passage 334B. If this is the case, the lottery mode after the end of the special game state (details will be described later in the V jackpot game state) is switched to the high probability mode (so-called V probability machine). In the present embodiment, the first branch passage 334B corresponds to the "advantageous entry portion" or "V", and the winning of the first branch passage 334B is also referred to as "V winning".

(Reserved ball storage area)
Next, in the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the storage of the reserved information based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 168.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in the present embodiment is the first operating port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A. It has a holding area Ra for the second working port and a holding area Rb for the second working port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is won in the second operating port 92A. is doing.

The holding area Ra for the first operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the first operating port 91A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area to the fourth area. Further, the holding area Rb for the second operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second. Each numerical information (holding information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area → third area → fourth area.

In the present embodiment, when the holding information is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second working port (specifically, the first area). Is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. When the hold information is not stored in the hold area Rb for the second operating port and the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first working port, the holding area for the first working port is stored. The hold information stored in Ra (specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, the low probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low as the lottery mode in which a lottery is performed based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is relative to the probability of winning a jackpot. A high-probability mode is provided. In other words, the winning / failing table for the operating port to be referred to is switched according to the lottery mode. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first embodiment and the configuration are configured in that the winning / failing lottery for the operating port is executed with reference to the same winning / failing table in any gaming state. Is different. Further, the configuration is different from that of the first embodiment in that the configuration is such that different winning / failing tables are referred to depending on the winning destination of the game ball. Hereinafter, the pass / fail table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 170.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 169 (a), in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A, the value of the random number (that is, the winning information) that is the big hit is "7. , "107", "207", "307", "407", "507", for a total of six. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the big hit. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the deviation (normal deviation). As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 169 (b), in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A, the value of the random number (that is, the winning information) that is the big hit is "7. , "37", "57", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the deviation (normal deviation). As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/20.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery result based on the winning of the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A does not include the special deviation shown in the first embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A may be configured to be a special loss, or the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A may be a special loss. It may be configured so that it may be a special deviation in any of the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A and the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A.

Next, a distribution table for each of the actuation ports 91A and 92A will be described with reference to FIG. 170.

(Distribution table for operating port)
In the distribution table for the first operating port 91A, a total of 15 of the values of the type counters C2 of "0" to "29", "0" to "14", correspond to the 3R jackpot A (3R jackpot result A). A total of 15 pieces of "15" to "29" correspond to the 3R jackpot B (3R jackpot result B). That is, when the jackpot is won, the probability of the 3R jackpot result A and the 3R jackpot result B is 50%, respectively.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second operating port 92A, a total of 6 of the values of the type counters C2 of "0" to "29", "0" to "5", are 6R jackpot A (6R jackpot). It corresponds to the result A), and a total of 24 pieces of "6" to "29" correspond to the 6R jackpot B (6R jackpot result B). That is, when the jackpot is won, about 20% of the jackpot results are 6R jackpot results A, and the remaining 80% are 6R jackpot results B.

As shown in FIG. 171, there is a difference in the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode between the 3R jackpot result and the 6R jackpot result. The number of rounds in the former is "3", while the number of rounds in the latter is "6". In other words, if the result is a 6R jackpot, it will be a chance to increase the number of balls you have at once.

Here, in the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the flow path switching member 336B in the variable winning device 83B differs depending on the type of jackpot. As this distribution mode, a low frequency winning mode and a high frequency winning mode are provided.

In the low-frequency winning mode, the flow path switching member 336B switches from the protruding position to the retracted position immediately after the shutter 333B of the variable winning device 83B is switched from the closed state to the open state, and immediately after that (specifically, the game that has flowed into the large winning opening). Before the sphere reaches the branch position), the flow path switching member 336B is returned to the protruding position. Specifically, the flow path switching member 336B after the shutter 333B is switched to the open state rather than the time required for the game ball flowing into the large winning opening 331B to reach the distribution position at the timing when the shutter 333B is switched to the open state. The time it takes for the product to return to the protruding position is shorter. As a result, a configuration is realized in which winning a prize in the advantageous ball-entry portion 334B is substantially avoided.

On the other hand, in the high-frequency winning mode, the flow path switching member 336B switches from the protruding position to the retracted position immediately after the shutter of the variable winning device 83B switches from the closed state to the open state, which is the same as the low-frequency winning mode. However, the flow path switching member 336B will remain in the retracted position for a predetermined time (8 sec) thereafter. This time is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 sec) x the maximum number of winnings (10) = 6 sec, and most of the game balls fired to the right route reach the variable winning device 83B. Therefore, as long as the game ball is continuously launched to the right route, the winning of the advantageous ball portion 334B is substantially confirmed.

For the 3R jackpot result A and the 6R jackpot result A, the distribution mode of the flow path switching member 336B is the jackpot result in which the low frequency winning mode is used. This is a jackpot result in which the division mode is a high-frequency winning mode. That is, in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the lottery mode after the end of the special gaming state has a 50% probability of shifting to the high probability mode, and in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A. The lottery mode after the end of the special gaming state is configured to be a lottery result of shifting to the high probability mode with a probability of 80% (see FIG. 170).

Further, when the 3R jackpot result A and the 6R jackpot result A are obtained, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A shifts to the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special gaming state. This high-frequency support mode B-compatible game state is continued until the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state, specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A reaches the end reference number, and the end reference When the number of times is reached, the support by the high frequency support mode B ends. When the 3R jackpot result A is obtained, "100 times" is set as the end reference number of times.

On the other hand, when the 3R jackpot result B and the 6R jackpot result B are obtained, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A shifts to the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special gaming state. This gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode B will be continued until the next big hit result is obtained.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 172, the V distribution setting process, which is the control process for the flow path switching member 336B executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, will be described. The V distribution setting process shown in the present embodiment is a process executed as a part of the large winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 31).

(V distribution setting process)
In the V distribution setting process, first, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the third round (V challenge round) in the special gaming state. When it is the start timing of the third round, “50” (corresponding to 0.1 sec) is set in the third timer counter TC3 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 in step S5202. The value (counter value) set in the third timer counter TC3 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

In the following step S5203, "1" is set in the distribution number counter HC provided in the various counter areas 434, and the V distribution setting process is completed. The data value (counter value) stored in the distribution count counter HC is for the MPU 402 to specify the number of operations of the flow path switching member 336B.

Returning to the description of step S5201, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, the process proceeds to step S5204. In step S5204, it is determined whether or not the value of the distribution count counter HC is “0”. If the value of the distribution count counter HC is "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, and the present V distribution setting process is terminated as it is. If the value of the distribution count counter HC is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S5240 and the process proceeds to step S5205.

In step S5205, it is determined from the drive state of the drive unit for the distribution member whether or not the flow path switching member 336B is located at the retracted position which is the distribution side (V winning side) to the advantageous ball entry unit 334B. .. If the flow path switching member 336B is not located in the retracted position, that is, is located in the protruding position, the process proceeds to step S5206 to determine whether or not the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". .. If the value of the third timer counter TC3 is not "0", the main distribution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0", the process proceeds to step S5207.

In step S5207, a process of moving the flow path switching member 336B from the protruding position to the retracted position is performed. As a result, the flow path in the variable winning device 83B is switched to the V winning side. In the following step S5208, it is determined whether or not the current distribution mode is a high-frequency winning mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5208, the process proceeds to step S5209, and "4000" (corresponding to 8 sec) is set in the third timer counter TC3. If a negative determination is made in step S5208, the process proceeds to step S5210, and "40" (corresponding to 0.08 sec) is set in the third timer counter TC3.

Returning to the description of step S5205, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5205, that is, if the flow path switching member 336B is arranged at the retracted position, the process proceeds to step S5211. In step S5211, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter TC3 is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the period for causing the flow path switching member 336B to stand by at the retracted position (V winning side) has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S5211, the present V distribution setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5211, the process proceeds to step S5212, and the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the protruding position. As a result, it becomes impossible to win a prize (V prize) in the advantageous ball portion 334B thereafter. After that, in step S5213, a process of subtracting the value of the distribution number counter HC by "1" is executed, and the main distribution setting process is completed.

Next, the V winning process executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 173. The V winning process shown in the present embodiment is a process executed as a part of the game state transition process (FIG. 30).

(Processing for V prize)
In the V winning process, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If the V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S5302, and whether or not a V winning has occurred based on the detection state of the V winning detection sensor 338B provided in the variable winning device 83B (the detection sensor). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of 338B) is determined.

If it is determined that the V prize has occurred, it is determined in step S3303 whether or not the V prize is valid. The effective period is a period in which measurement (counting) is started with the displacement of the flow path switching member 336B to the retracted position, and the length thereof is shorter than the period in which the flow path switching member 336B is maintained in the retracted position. It has become long.

If it is determined that the period is not valid, the process proceeds to step S5304, an error command is set as a transmission target to the notification / effect control device 140, and then the V winning process is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 23), and the notification / effect control device 140 controls the display so that a predetermined error notification is executed. It controls the device 410, the lamp unit 26, and the speaker unit 29.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is valid, the process proceeds to step S5305, and the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S5306, a V winning command is set. The V prize command is a command for notifying the notification / effect control device 140 that a V prize has occurred, and the set V prize command is notified / effect by the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 23). It is transmitted to the control device 140. In the notification / effect control device 140, when a V prize command is received, the symbol display device 95, the lamp unit 26, and the speaker unit 29 perform an effect of notifying the occurrence of the V prize or congratulating the V prize. The display control device 410 and the like are controlled so as to be performed.

After the execution of step S5306, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5301 or a negative determination is made in step S5302, the V winning process is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 174, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described. The transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode shown in the present embodiment is a process executed as a part of the game state transition process (FIG. 30).

(Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode)
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, first, in step S5401, the high frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is switched to the high frequency support mode B. In the following step S5402, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is triggered by either the 3R jackpot result B or the 6R jackpot result B. If a negative determination is made in step S5402, the process proceeds to step S5403, and the number-of-times limit flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S5404, "100" is set in the continuation number counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

The value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1" each time the game round is executed, and when the value of the continuation count counter becomes "0", the high frequency support mode B ends. That is, the upper limit (the above-mentioned end reference number of times), which is the number of games that can be executed during the high frequency support mode B, is defined by the value of the continuation number counter.

After executing the process of step S5404, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, the process proceeds to step S5405. In step S5405, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If the V winning flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S5405, the process proceeds to step S5406, and the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the subsequent lottery mode becomes the high probability mode.

After executing the process of step S5406, or when a negative determination is made in step S5404, the process proceeds to step S5407. In step S5407, the game count counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 are cleared (reset) to 0. After that, in step S5408, various flags (big hit flag, etc.) for the open / close execution mode stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is stopped.

Next, a preliminary confirmation process (see step S306 in FIG. 22) for a hold notice (including the above notice effect) executed as a part of the timer interrupt process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 and a hold command setting process (FIG. 22). 22 step S307) will be described.

(Preliminary confirmation process)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 175, in the pre-confirmation process, first, in step S5501, the operation hold storage number N and the common hold number CRN stored in the hold number storage area of the hold ball storage area 432A are read and applied. The information on the number of reserved pieces is stored in the register of the MPU 402. After that, in step S5502, it is confirmed whether or not the hold information acquired by this winning prize contains the information corresponding to the jackpot result. Since the details of this determination are the same as the hit / fail determination process in step S702, the description thereof will be omitted.

When it is confirmed in the confirmation process of step S5502 that a big hit is obtained, an affirmative determination is made in step S5503 and the process proceeds to step S5504. In step S5504, the jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, and the pre-confirmation process is terminated. In step S5504, out of the pending information acquired in step S304 based on this prize, the information for type determination, that is, the value of the acquired type counter C2 is grasped, and the jackpot type is referred to by referring to the distribution table. To judge. The information stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S5504 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

When it is confirmed in the confirmation process of step S5502 that the result is a deviation (normal deviation result), a negative determination is made in step S5503 and the process proceeds to step S5505. In step S5505, the reach confirmation process at the time of disconnection is normally executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 acquired in step S304 is grasped, and it is confirmed whether or not the loss reach occurs by referring to the lottery table for the loss reach generation. If the out-of-reach does not occur (if the out-of-reach occurs completely), a negative determination is made in step S5506, and the prior confirmation process ends. If an out-of-reach occurs, an affirmative judgment is made in step S5506 and the process proceeds to step S5507. In step S5507, the out-of-reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, and the pre-confirmation process is terminated. The information stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S5507 includes information related to a rough type of out-of-reach (whether or not it is super reach).

Next, the setting process of the hold command will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 176.

(Pending command setting process)
In the hold command setting process, first, in step S5601, it is determined whether or not the jackpot occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 402. If the jackpot occurrence information is stored, the process proceeds to step S5602, and the jackpot correspondence hold command is set. The jackpot support hold command contains information about the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5601, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot occurrence information is not stored in the MPU 402 register, the process proceeds to step S5603, and is the out-of-reach occurrence information stored in the MPU 402 register? Judge whether or not. If the loss reach occurrence information is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, the process proceeds to step S5604, and a loss reach correspondence hold command is set. The out-of-reach support hold command includes information related to the rough type of out-of-reach (whether or not it is super reach). If a negative determination is made in step S5603, the process proceeds to step S5605. In step S5605, a hold command that does not support loss reach (a hold command that supports complete loss) is set.

When setting the hold command in steps S5602, S5604, and S5605, the change display time is determined with reference to the value of the change type counter CS, and the information related to the change display time is stored in the hold command. .. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to in the same manner as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S714. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140, and the notification / effect control device 140 can grasp the variation display mode of the symbol based on the hold command. As described above, in the case of complete deviation, the variable display time may change according to the number of reserved information stored at the start of the game round related to the reserved information. Therefore, when setting the hold command for complete disconnection, the information related to the variable display time is not stored.

After executing the command setting process of any one of step S5602, step S5604, and step S5605, in step S5606, the process of setting the information on the number of pending numbers for the reserved command is executed. The information of the hold command is configured as a plurality of bytes of information. In step S4408, first, the information on the number of holds stored in the register of the MPU 402 is read in step S5501 in the immediately preceding prior confirmation process (FIG. 175), and then the information is read. , The information on the number of holds read above is stored by arithmetic processing such as logical sum for the bit for the information on the number of holds in the hold command that has already been set. As a result, information for specifying the number of the hold information corresponding to the hold command for the hold command set in any of the processes of step S5602, step S5604, and step S5605. Will be included. After executing the process of step S5606 described in detail above, the hold command setting process ends.

The hold command including the information on the number of holds in step S5606 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 by the external output process in step S401 in the next normal process (FIG. 23). By receiving such a hold command, the notification / effect control device 140 identifies that the hold information has increased. Further, the notification / effect control device 140 adds information for holding notice, which will be described later, to the hold command and transmits the information to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 executes a hold display, hold notice process, or the like based on the received hold command.

Next, the process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 will be described. The processes related to the hold notice are roughly classified into a command correspondence process for determining a command from the main control device 162 and a hold notice effect setting process for determining the mode of the hold notice.

(Processing for pending commands)
In the hold command correspondence process, when the hold command transmitted by the main control device 162 is received, the process corresponding to the information included in the received hold command is executed. The hold command correspondence process is executed as a part of the periodic process that is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the hold command correspondence process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold command is received. The command received by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the RAM 444. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, and even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, each of them is used. The processing corresponding to the command can be executed well. When determining whether or not the corresponding hold command has been received, it is determined whether or not the jackpot corresponding hold command has been received in the area to be read this time in the command storage area 461. The configuration for reading such a command is the same for reading other commands such as the fluctuation start command.

When a hold command is received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area 467 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, and is configured to be able to store one hold information for each area. The hold information stored in each area is sequentially shifted to the lower area side by receiving a shift command from the main control device 162, that is, when the game round is started. Specifically, while clearing the data of the first area Rc1, the second area Rc2 → the first area Rc1, the third area Rc3 → the second area Rc2, the fourth area Rc4 → the third area Rc3 ... The data in each area is shifted such as area Rc8 → 7th area Rc7. In the hold information storage area of the notification / effect control device 140, the hold information is chronologically stored regardless of the entry destination, as in the hold ball storage area 432 of the main control device 162 (specifically, the hold area RE for the operation port). It is structured to be stored together. Specifically, the information on the number of holds included in the command received this time is specified, and the above-mentioned various information is stored in the area corresponding to the information on the number of holds specified in the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

When the above-mentioned hold command is received, the hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 444, and when the shift command is received, the shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas. Each of these flags triggers the setting process for the hold notice effect described below, and is deleted when the setting process for the hold notice effect is completed.

In the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, the jackpot advance notice effect setting process is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area. The jackpot notice effect setting process is a process executed as a part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle), and is executed on condition that the above-mentioned hold command or shift command is received. It is a process. That is, in the present embodiment, the opportunity to execute the jackpot notice effect is when the hold information is acquired with the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A, or when the hold information is digested with the progress of the game. There is.

The jackpot notice effect shown in the present embodiment is executed by changing the mode of the hold display displayed in the hold display area NE of the symbol display device 95A (display screen 95aA) to one corresponding to the jackpot notice effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177, among the hold icon MPs displayed in the hold number display area Da, those corresponding to the corresponding game times (corresponding hold) are changed (in the present embodiment, the color is changed). ). Specifically, there are multiple patterns of colors for the hold icon MP, specifically white (level 0), blue (level 1), yellow (level 2), and red (level 3). Hold icon MP changes color to a color other than white.

If the hold corresponds to the jackpot result, it is easier to select in the order of level 3> level 2> level 1, and if the hold corresponds to the normal off result, level 1> level 2 > It is easier to select in the order of level 3. That is, when the jackpot notice effect is executed, the higher the final level, the higher the expectation that leads to the jackpot result.

Regarding the jackpot notice effect, the step-up non-compliant notice effect (first jackpot notice effect) that is maintained until the color of the changed hold icon MP shifts to the execution target display area Dc, and the execution target display area Dc. It is roughly divided into a step-up notice production (second big hit notice production) in which the color changes before the shift.

In the first big hit notice effect, the big hit notice effect is started during the game round before the game round related to the hold icon MP is started, so that the player can be attracted to the game. On the other hand, in the second big hit notice effect, the color of the hold icon MP changes as the game progresses. For example, even if the color that finally changes is red, first change it to a lower color (blue or yellow) with lower expectations, and expect more at the timing when the hold icon MP shifts. Step up (promote) to a higher color with a higher degree. By using these two types of jackpot notice effects together, even if the color has a low degree of expectation, there is a possibility that the color will change to a color with a high degree of expectation until the corresponding game times are reached. As a result, it is possible to prevent the attention to the jackpot notice effect from decreasing at an early stage.

In the gaming machines described in detail above, the game is basically aimed at a big hit, but if the game reaches the ceiling without a big hit, the investment is suppressed by the high frequency support mode A. Not only that, the probability of shifting to the high probability mode in the case of a big hit and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the case of a big hit will be increased. In other words, when the ball is in front of (close to) the ceiling, the expectation for a large number of balls will increase if the ball hits the jackpot after reaching the ceiling rather than hitting the jackpot before reaching the ceiling. Under these circumstances, it is expected that the tension of the game in front of the ceiling will increase. Although an appropriate feeling of tension in a game is preferable for increasing the degree of attention to the game, it is feared that such a long-lasting state of tension may cause fatigue of the player. In the present embodiment, the above concern is alleviated by configuring the structure in which the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is executed in the game times before the game times in which the ceiling is reached in a part of the case where the ceiling is just before the ceiling. It is one of the features that it is. Hereinafter, the ceiling arrival confirmation effect processing executed as a part of the periodic processing by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 178.

(Processing for finalizing the arrival at the ceiling)
In the process for determining the ceiling arrival, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not the ceiling arrival confirmation effect flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. Although the details will be described later, the ceiling arrival confirmation effect flag is a flag that is stored when the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is started and is erased when the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S5791, the process proceeds to step S5702.

In step S5702, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control device 162. If the hold command has not been received, a negative determination is made in step S5702, and the process for confirming the arrival of the main ceiling is terminated as it is. If the hold command has been received, an affirmative determination is made in step S5702 and the process proceeds to step S5703. In step S5703, it is determined whether or not the hold until reaching the ceiling (hold for the number of remaining games) is secured. If the hold is insufficient, a negative determination is made in step S5703, and the process for confirming the arrival of the main ceiling is terminated. If the hold is secured, an affirmative determination is made in step S5703 and the process proceeds to step S5704.

In step S5704, it is determined whether or not the hold that is digested by the time the ceiling is reached includes the hold corresponding to the jackpot result. If the hold corresponding to the jackpot result is not included, a negative determination is made in step S5704 and the process proceeds to step S5705. In step S5705, the final production lottery process is executed. In the final effect lottery process, it is determined whether or not to execute the ceiling arrival final effect by referring to the final effect lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 451 of the ROM 443. The probability of winning in the lottery is 50%.

If the lottery in step S5705 is won, an affirmative determination is made in step S5706 and the process proceeds to step S5707. In step S5707, the ceiling arrival confirmation effect start process is executed. Specifically, the golden effect is displayed on the outer peripheral portion of the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A, and the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to the BGM corresponding to the ceiling arrival confirmation effect.

After starting the ceiling arrival confirmation effect, the jackpot notice effect regulation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444 in step S5708. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot notice effect from being newly started until the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is completed. If the notice effect restriction flag is set in a situation where the big hit notice effect has not started yet, the big hit advance notice effect is canceled without being executed.

In the following step S5709, the ceiling arrival confirmation effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444. After that, in step S5710, the process of starting the suggestion to stop firing is executed, and the process for determining the arrival at the main ceiling is completed. By the start processing of the suggestion to stop firing, the characters "stop firing" are displayed on the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. If the hold until reaching the ceiling is secured, it is suggested in step S5710 that the launch is stopped regardless of whether the hold for the jackpot result is included or whether the ceiling arrival confirmation effect occurs. After executing the start process, the process for confirming the arrival of the main ceiling is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S5701, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5701, that is, if the ceiling arrival confirmation effect flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444, the process proceeds to step S5711. In step S5711, it is determined whether or not the ceiling has been reached. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the final game round to reach the ceiling is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S5711, the process proceeds to step S5712. In step S5712, it is determined whether or not the jackpot notice effect is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S5712, the process for confirming the arrival of the main ceiling is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5712, the process proceeds to step S713.

In step S5713, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to cancel (cancel) the jackpot notice effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the release timing, which is the timing during the confirmation display in the game round, has come. If a negative determination is made in step S5713, the process for confirming the arrival of the main ceiling is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5713, the jackpot notice effect canceling process is executed in step S5714, and then the main ceiling arrival confirmation effect processing is terminated.

In the jackpot notice effect cancellation process, the speaker unit 29 outputs a sound effect for canceling the jackpot notice effect, and the color of the hold icon MP whose color has been changed to blue, yellow, and red is changed to white. More specifically, after performing a dynamic display in which the white effect is converged from the golden effect displayed on the outer periphery of the display screen 95aA toward the hold icon MP whose color has been changed, the color of the hold icon MP is changed to white. To change to.

Returning to the description of step S5711, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5711, that is, if the ceiling is reached, the process proceeds to step S571. In step S5715, the end processing of the firing stop suggestion is executed. As a result, the characters "stop firing" displayed on the display screen 95aA are hidden. In the following step S5716, the end processing of the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is executed. As a result, the BGM for the ceiling arrival confirmation effect output from the speaker unit 29 is turned off. Specifically, since the transition to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to the BGM corresponding to the transition destination normal gaming state. Further, the golden effect displayed on the outer periphery of the display screen 95aA is hidden.

After executing the ceiling arrival confirmation effect end process, the jackpot notice effect restriction flag stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444 is deleted in step S5717. As a result, the regulation of the jackpot notice production is lifted. After that, in step S5718, the ceiling arrival confirmation effect flag stored in the various flag storage areas 466 of the RAM 444 is erased, and the process for the main ceiling arrival confirmation effect is completed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 179, the flow of the ceiling arrival confirmation effect will be illustrated. FIG. 179 is a timing chart showing the flow of the ceiling arrival confirmation effect, and illustrates a case where the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is started during the jackpot notice effect corresponding to the deviation result (normal deviation result).

At the timing of tk1, the number of reservations related to the first operating port 91A is reduced from "3" to "2" with the start of the 395th game round after the end of the special game state. At the timing of tk2 during the 395th game round, a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A, and the number of reservations related to the first operating port 91A is increased from "2" to "3". However, at the timing of tk2, although the number of holds has increased, the hold to reach the ceiling has not been secured (the hold is insufficient).

At the timing of tk3, the number of reservations related to the first operating port 91A is reduced from "3" to "2" with the start of the 396th game round after the end of the special gaming state. At the timing of tk4 during the 396th game round, a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A, and the number of reservations related to the first operating port 91A is increased from "2" to "3". Even at the timing of tk5 immediately after that, a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A, and the number of reservations related to the first operating port 91A is increasing from "3" to "4".

At the timing of tk5, the number of holds increases and the hold that reaches the ceiling is secured, and all the holds that are consumed by the time the hold reaches the ceiling correspond to the off result (normal off result). Based on these conditions, a lottery is being executed as to whether or not to execute the ceiling arrival confirmation effect. In the example shown in FIG. 179, the lottery is won, and the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is started at the timing of the tk5. At the same time as the start of the ceiling arrival confirmation effect, the suggestion of stopping the firing is started on the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A.

Here, at the timing of tk5, the jackpot notice effect is being executed with the 397th game time as the corresponding game time. Originally, this jackpot notice production is scheduled to continue until the timing of tk8 when the 397th game round ends, but it is decided to cancel (cancel) when the ceiling arrival confirmation production is executed. Is done. Then, the jackpot notice effect is canceled (cancelled) at a timing before the timing of tk8, specifically, at the timing of tk6 during the confirmation display in the 396th game round.

At the timing of tk7, the number of reservations related to the first operating port 91A decreases from "4" to "3" with the start of the 397th game after the end of the special game state, and at the timing of tk8, after the end of the special game state. With the start of the 398th game round, the number of reservations related to the first operating port 91A decreased from "3" to "2", and at the timing of tk9, the 399th game round after the end of the special gaming state was started. Along with this, the number of holdings related to the first operating port 91A has decreased from "2" to "1". Then, at the timing of tk10, the number of reservations related to the first operating port 91A is reduced from "1" to "0" with the start of the 400th game round after the end of the special game state. This 400th game round is a game round that reaches the ceiling, and at the timing of tk11 when the game round ends, the ceiling arrival confirmation effect and the suggestion to stop firing are finished, and the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A ( It has shifted to the 4th normal game state).

According to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, if the game progresses without a big hit result, which is an opportunity to shift to the special game state (open / close execution mode), the game times are executed after the end of the special game state. When the number of times reaches the upper limit (reaching the ceiling), the game shifts to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode (specifically, the high frequency support mode A). In the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 93A attached to the second operating port 92A is frequently opened (accepting state), so that the frequency of entering the second operating port 92A increases, and further investment is made. Will be suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the soundness of the game.

Here, the determination based on the ball entering the second operating port 92A is given preferential treatment to the player in favor of the determination based on the ball entering the first operating port 91A. That is, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is strengthened by shifting to the high frequency support mode and entering the second operating port 92A → determining. In such a configuration, the benefit cannot be enjoyed because the result is a big hit just before reaching the ceiling. Therefore, it is assumed that the player who expects to reach the ceiling will play the game with the expectation that the big hit result will not be obtained at least just before reaching the ceiling. In the configuration shown in this feature, in particular, whether or not the transition to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode occurs due to reaching the ceiling is specified (previously specified) in advance, and the ceiling is reached based on the specified result. It is determined before the game times, and if it is determined that the transition occurs, an effect indicating the transition to the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode is executed before the game times when the ceiling is reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessively high tension in front of the ceiling and give a sense of security to the player who expects to reach the ceiling. This is preferable in order to improve the satisfaction of the player and further improve the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the present embodiment, when the number of stored information stored reaches the number corresponding to the remaining number of times the reserved information reaches the ceiling, whether or not the transition to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode occurs due to the arrival at the ceiling. If it is configured to determine whether or not, it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load due to the implementation of a special effect. For example, the control load can be suitably reduced as compared with a configuration in which it is determined whether or not the above transition occurs each time the pending information is added. As shown in the present embodiment, it is preferable to have a configuration for determining whether or not the above transition occurs when the reserved information is added, in order to promptly start a special effect.

In the configuration in which the judgment based on the ball entering the second operating port 92A to which the electric accessory 93A is attached is given preferential treatment over the judgment based on the ball entering the first operating port 91A, after the ceiling arrival is confirmed in advance. However, it cannot be denied that the launch of the game ball may cause further entry into the first operating port 91A. When the hold information is acquired by such a ball entry, an event may occur in which the benefit of reaching the ceiling cannot be substantially enjoyed. It is feared that this will be a factor that greatly reduces the player's willingness to play. Therefore, if the effect of reaching the ceiling is started and the effect is continued at least until the game times when the effect reaches the ceiling, it is preferable that the effect is overlooked and the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs. Can be suppressed.

<Modification 1>
In the eighteenth embodiment, when the ceiling arrival is confirmed in the game times before the ceiling arrival, the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is performed as an effect of instructing the player that the ceiling arrival is confirmed. It is configured to be executed, but it is not limited to this. Instead of this, if a ceiling arrival suggestion effect occurs as an effect related to the ceiling arrival in the game times before the game time to reach the ceiling (however, within the upper limit of the memory of the hold), the ceiling arrival rich (or) It is also possible to have a configuration that is (possible). In this case, one may be selectively executed from a plurality of effects having different expectations of reaching the ceiling. In other words, it is also possible to have a configuration in which when the hold for reaching the ceiling is secured, the effect of reaching the ceiling is executed even in a part of the case where the hold includes the one corresponding to the jackpot result. be.

<Modification 2>
As shown in the eighteenth embodiment, by shifting to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A by reaching the ceiling, the second operating port is changed from the pattern in which the game times related to the first operating port 91A are the main. In the configuration in which the game times related to 92A change to the main pattern, the remaining hold related to the first operating port 91A may be exhausted even after the transition to the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. If such a remaining hold includes something corresponding to the jackpot result, it is highly likely that the player will not fully enjoy the benefits of reaching the ceiling. In view of these circumstances, when deciding whether or not to execute the ceiling arrival confirmation effect, the jackpot result is obtained for the game times related to the first operating port 91A executed after the transition to the high frequency support mode A. It is possible to realize a practically preferable configuration by determining whether or not the corresponding one is included, and if the corresponding one is included, the configuration is such that the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is avoided. In addition, when deciding whether or not to execute the ceiling arrival confirmation effect instead of such a configuration, it is disadvantageous for the game times related to the first operating port 91A executed after the transition to the high frequency support mode A. It is determined whether or not the one corresponding to the 3R jackpot result A, which is the jackpot result on the side, is included, and if the one corresponding to the 3R jackpot result A is included, the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is avoided. It is also possible to. Incidentally, in such a configuration, the one corresponding to the 3R jackpot result B, which is the jackpot result on the advantageous side for the game times related to the first operating port 91A executed after the transition to the high frequency support mode A, is included. If this is the case, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the ceiling arrival confirmation effect can be executed.

<Modification 3>
In the eighteenth embodiment, the ceiling arrival confirmation effect can be started at the timing when the hold for the ceiling arrival is acquired. However, regarding the start timing of the ceiling arrival confirmation effect, the execution of the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is performed. It may be arbitrarily changed as long as the timing is after the determination is made. For example, the ceiling arrival confirmation effect may be started at the start timing of the game times (for example, the game times immediately after) executed after the hold for reaching the ceiling is secured.

<Modification example 4>
In the eighteenth embodiment, when the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is started during the jackpot notice effect, the jackpot notice effect is canceled (cancelled) in the middle. The present invention is not limited to this, and if the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is started during the jackpot notice effect, the jackpot notice effect may not be canceled (cancelled) in the middle.

In addition, although the release timing of the jackpot notice effect is being confirmed and displayed in the game times, the release timing is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to cancel (cancel) the jackpot notice effect at the start of the ceiling arrival confirmation effect.

<Modification 5>
In the eighteenth embodiment, the probability of a jackpot result (3R jackpot result B) corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A is set to 50%, and the second operation is performed. The probability of a jackpot result (6R jackpot result B) corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode in the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 92A was set to 80%. That is, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A rather than the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the probability of transition to the high probability mode and the number of prize balls in the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) are two. Differences are made so that the elements have higher advantages. The specific configuration is arbitrary as long as the player's advantage can be increased by reaching the ceiling at least. For example, one of the above two elements (probability change probability and number of prize balls) may be configured so that there is no difference in advantage.

<Modification 6>
In the eighteenth embodiment, the notification (suggestion of stopping the launch) to refrain from launching the game ball is started at the timing when the hold for reaching the ceiling is secured, but the function of the notification is omitted. It is also possible.

<Modification 7>
In the configuration that suggests the result of the winning / failing lottery by the reach display, it becomes obvious that the reach display is a so-called ghost effect by starting the ceiling arrival confirmation effect, and the effect of improving the attention to the game by the reach display is effective. It is feared that it will not be exhibited well. In consideration of such circumstances, even if the ceiling arrival is confirmed, if the reach display is executed at any of the game times executed by the time the ceiling is reached, the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is refrained. It is also possible to.

<Modification 8>
In a configuration where the result of the lottery can be suggested by the super reach display with high expectation, which is a big hit, the super reach display with high expectation is executed during the ceiling arrival confirmation production, which wastes the player's anxiety. There is concern that it will be fueled. This is expected to be a factor that reduces the satisfaction of the player. Therefore, when the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is confirmed and the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is executed, the mode of the super reach display executed during the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is a display mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, Super Reach C). ) To a display mode (super reach A) with a low degree of expectation, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. Further, when the ceiling arrival is confirmed and the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is executed, the super reach display executed during the ceiling arrival confirmation effect is changed to the normal reach, which is a display mode with a lower expectation. It is also possible to change (downgrade).

<19th embodiment>
As shown in the first embodiment, the system shifts to the normal game state (second normal game state to fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode triggered by the jackpot result, the special off result, and the arrival at the ceiling. It is preferable to increase the opportunity to shift to the high-frequency support mode as a configuration in order to realize the diversification of games. Here, in the high-frequency support mode B, which shifts with the jackpot result as an opportunity, the winning probability in the support lottery is about twice as much as in the low-frequency support mode (details: 1/2 → 1 / 1.1). Will be changed to. On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode A, which shifts when the special deviation result or the ceiling is reached, the winning probability in the support lottery is not changed and remains the same as the low-frequency support mode (details 1/2 → 1). / 2). In such a configuration, there is room for improvement in enhancing the support function in the high frequency support mode A while avoiding excessive winning of the operating port in the low frequency support mode. One of the features of this embodiment is that some measures have been taken to solve such problems. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the actuating port unit 82G in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 181. FIG. 180 is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit 80G showing the operating port unit 82G and its surroundings, and FIG. 181 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board unit 80G (vertical cross-sectional view of the operating port unit 82G). 0
(Operating port unit 82G)
As shown in FIG. 180, the actuating port unit 82G shown in the present embodiment has the first actuating port 91G and the first actuating port 91G, similarly to the actuating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. It is provided with a second actuating port 92G disposed below. An opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an electric accessory 93G as an opening / closing member (opening / closing means) is attached to the second operating port 92G. The electric accessory 93G includes a movable piece 901G as a pair of left and right shutter members, a spring member (not shown) as a urging means for urging the movable piece 901G to a closed position, and a solenoid type for driving the movable piece 901G. It has a drive unit 911G and the like. The movable piece 901G is displaced from the closed position to the open position against the urging force of the spring member when the drive unit 911G is in the excited state, and is displaced by the urging force of the spring member when the drive unit 911G is in the non-excited state. Displace from the open position to the closed position. As shown in FIG. 180 (a), when the movable piece 901G is arranged in the open position, the ball is allowed to enter the second operating port 92G (hereinafter referred to as an open state or an auxiliary state), while FIG. 180 (b). ), When the movable piece 901G is arranged in the closed position, the ball cannot enter the second operating port 92G (hereinafter, referred to as a closed state or a non-assisted state).

Here, the specific structure of the actuating port unit 82G will be supplementarily described. The actuating port unit 82G has a flat plate-shaped base portion 851G that covers the opening 97G (see FIG. 181) formed in the game board 80aG from the front of the game machine, and the base portion 851G fixes screws or the like to the game board 80a. It is integrated into the game board 80a by being fixed by using a tool.

As shown in FIG. 181, the actuating port unit 82G is formed with a first bulging portion 861G that bulges back and forth from the base portion 851G. In the first bulging portion 861G, the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the front bulging portion that bulges forward from the base portion 851G so as to face upward. This inflow port functions as the first operating port 91G. Further, in the first bulging portion 861G, the first guide that guides the game ball that has flowed into the first operating port 91G to the recovery passage (specifically, the first recovery passage 802G) formed in the base body 251G of the rear block 80b. A passage portion 865G is formed.

The first collection passage 802G is provided with a detection sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball that has reached a predetermined detection position (winning detection position) in the first collection passage 802G. This detection sensor is connected to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 determines the winning of the first operating port 91G based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor.

Below the first bulging portion 861G, a second bulging portion 871G is formed apart from the first bulging portion 861G. The second bulging portion 871G also bulges back and forth from the base portion 851G in the same manner as the first bulging portion 861G. In the second bulging portion 871G, the front bulging portion bulging forward of the base portion 851G is opposed to the base portion 851G with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is composed of a pair of left and right connecting portions 873G connecting the facing portion 872G and the base portion 851G, and is open in both the upper and lower directions.

An inflow port for a gaming ball is formed in a portion of the base portion 851G that is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the facing portion 872G. The inflow port faces the front of the gaming machine, and this inflow port functions as the second operating port 92G. The second bulging portion 871G is formed with a second guide passage portion 875G that guides the game ball that has flowed into the second operating port 92G to the second recovery passage 803G formed in the base body 251G of the rear block 80b. ..

The second recovery passage 803G is provided with a detection sensor 805G for detecting a game ball that has reached a predetermined detection position (winning detection position) in the second recovery passage 803G. The detection sensor 805G is connected to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 determines the winning of the second operating port 92G based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor 805G.

The game balls that have flowed into the first operating port 91G are all guided to the first recovery passage 801G through the first guide passage portion 865G, and the game balls that have flowed into the second operating port 92G are all guided through the second guide passage. It is guided to the second recovery passage 803G through the section 875G.

The movable piece 901G is disposed between the base portion 851G and the facing portion 872G separately on the left and right sides of the second operating port 92G. Specifically, through holes penetrating the base portion 851G in the thickness direction are formed in the left and right sides of the second operating port 92G in the base portion 851G. The shaft body 902G is inserted through the through holes so as to project into the gap between the base portion 851G and the facing portion 872G, and the movable piece 901G is fixed to the protruding portion (tip portion) of the shaft body 902G. There is. The shaft body 902G extends in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 80aG, and is pivotally supported by the base portion 851G so that the central axis coincides with the center axis of the through hole. As a result, the movable piece 901G can rotate around the shaft body 902G and the central axis CL10 of the through hole.

The shaft body 902G is connected to the drive unit 911G via a link mechanism, and the driving force of the drive unit 911G is transmitted to the movable piece 901G via the link mechanism and the shaft body 902G. Specifically, the movable piece 901G rotates in the first predetermined direction about the central axis CL10 by the driving force of the driving unit 911G, and the position of the movable piece 901G is from the open position (see FIG. 182 (a)) to the closed position. (See FIG. 182 (b)).

Incidentally, the link mechanism constituting the electric accessory 93G includes a connecting portion for connecting the movable pieces 901G to each other in order to synchronize the movements of the movable pieces 901G when switching between the open state and the closed state. However, this connecting portion is arbitrary, and it is also possible to make the connecting portion inadequate so that both movable pieces 901G can operate asynchronously when switching between the open state and the closed state. That is, when an external force other than the power of the drive unit 911G is applied to one movable piece 901G, the influence or the other may be suppressed, and the movements of both movable pieces 901G may be allowed to be asynchronous. ..

As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the movable piece 901G extends in a direction intersecting (specifically, orthogonal to) the central axis CL10, for example, in a vertical direction when arranged in a closed position. In the state where the movable pieces 901G are arranged in the closed position, one end of the movable pieces 901G protrudes upward through the upper opening of the second bulging portion 871G, and the one end portion is close to the second bulging portion 871G. There is. In this state, the gap between the movable piece 901G (one end portion) and the second bulging portion 871G is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. That is, the gap between the first bulging portion 861G and the second bulging portion 871G is covered from the left and right by the movable piece 901G, and is surrounded by the first bulging portion 861G, the second bulging portion 871G, and the movable piece 901G. The inflow of the game ball into the specific area FE is regulated by the left and right movable pieces 901G.

Each of the left and right movable pieces 901G is formed with flat surface portions 905G facing each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball in a closed position. The flat surface portion 905G constitutes a side wall of a vertical passage that vertically traverses the front of the second operating port 92G in the specific region FE. The vertical passage is connected to the lower opening 874G of the second bulging portion 871G, and the game ball that traverses (passes through) the front of the second operating port 92G goes down without flowing into the second operating port 92G. It is configured to be returned from the specific area FE to the game area PE through the side opening 874G.

The lower opening 874G is located directly above the variable winning device 83, and the game ball that has passed through the lower opening 874G flows down (falls) toward the variable winning device 83 (see FIG. 180). That is, the game ball returned from the lower opening 874G to the game area PE can win a prize in the variable winning device 83.

As shown in FIG. 182 (a) → FIG. 182 (b), the upper end portion (hereinafter referred to as the first end portion 908G) of both movable pieces 901G is rotated with the rotation of the movable piece 901G in the first predetermined direction. It is displaced to the side away from each other, and the gap between the first end portion 908G and the first bulging portion 861G is expanded. When the movable piece 901G reaches the open position (including the maximum rotation position defined by the stopper), there is a gap between the movable piece 901G (specifically, the first end portion 908G) and the first bulging portion 861G. It is a size that allows the inflow of game balls into the specific area FE. That is, an inflow port 921G that allows the inflow of the game ball into the specific region FE appears between the movable piece 901G (specifically, the first end portion 908G) and the first bulging portion 861G.

Further, the lower end portions of both movable pieces 901G (hereinafter referred to as the second end portion 909G) are displaced toward each other as the movable pieces 901G rotate from the closed position to the open position, and are displaced between the second end portions 909G. The gap is reduced so that it is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 182 (b), when the movable piece 901G is arranged in the closed position, the flat surface portion 905G is in a state of being inclined downward toward the second operating port 92G, and flows into the specific region FE from the inflow port 921G. The game ball moves along the inclination of the flat surface portion 905G (specifically, parallel to the front surface of the game board 80a) toward the second end portion 909G (hereinafter, this movement is also simply referred to as "parallel movement").

In the following description, in view of the flow path in which the game ball moves in parallel, the first end portion 908G side of the flat surface portion 905G is "upstream side", and the second end portion 909G side of the flat surface portion 905G is "downstream". Also called "side".

Here, even when the movable piece 901G is arranged in the closed position, the second end portion 909G remains separated from each other, but the gap is the diameter dimension of the game ball, more specifically, the radial dimension. It is reduced to be smaller than. That is, for the game balls that have been translated along the flat surface portion 905G, after moving to the lower end side of the flat surface portion 905G, they are fitted in the gap between the two movable pieces 901G (the state straddling both the movable pieces 901G). It is supported from below by the movable piece 901G, and further translation is restricted by both movable pieces 901G. In the following description, the position of the game ball supported by both movable pieces 901G is also referred to as a "lower limit position".

After the predetermined opening time has elapsed after switching the electric accessory 93G to the open state (specifically, after starting the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G), the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped. The drive unit 911G switches (returns) from the excited state to the non-excited state. When the driving force from the driving unit 911G disappears, the movable piece 901G rotates in the direction opposite to the first predetermined direction (second predetermined direction) due to the urging force of the spring member, and returns to the closed position. ..

The rotation range of the movable piece 901G is defined by a stopper for the standby position and a stopper for the maximum rotation position. Specifically, when the drive unit 911G is in the excited state, the stopper for the maximum rotation position restricts the further rotation of the movable piece 901G in the first predetermined direction, and the drive unit 911G is not. In the excited state, the stopper for the standby position restricts the further rotation of the movable piece 901G in the second predetermined direction. Incidentally, when the movable piece 901G is rotated to the open position / closed position, the operating range of the first end portion 908G is above the central axis CL10, and the operating range of the second end portion 909G is above the central axis CL10. And it is specified to be on the lower side.

The fixed portion of the shaft body 902G in the movable piece 901G is biased toward the second end portion 909G. That is, the distance from the central axis CL10 to the second end 909G is biased to be smaller than the distance from the central axis CL10 to the first end 908G. This is a device to reduce the displacement amount of the second end portion 909G when switching between the closed state and the open state.

When the movable piece 901G rotates from the standby position (closed position) in the first predetermined direction, the gap between the second end portions 909G becomes smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball, and then the first end portion 908G The gap between the first bulging portion 861G and the first bulging portion 861G becomes larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball. That is, the outflow of the game ball from the specific area FE is regulated under the condition that the closed state is maintained. On the other hand, when the movable piece 901G rotates from the maximum rotation position (open position) in the second predetermined direction, the gap between the second end portions 909G first becomes larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball. After that, the gap between the first end portion 908G and the first bulging portion 861G becomes smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. That is, the outflow of the game ball from the specific area FE is allowed under the condition that the open state is maintained.

It should be noted that such a configuration is not essential, and when the movable piece 901G rotates from the standby position (closed position) in the first predetermined direction, the gap between the second end portions 909G is first determined from the diameter of the game ball. It may be configured to align (match) the timing when the size becomes smaller and the timing when the gap between the first end portion 908G and the first bulging portion 861G becomes larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, and the movable piece 901G is the maximum. When rotating in the second predetermined direction from the rotation position (open position), the timing at which the gap between the second end portions 909G becomes larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, and the first end portion 908G and the first bulge The configuration may be such that the timing at which the gap with the portion 861G becomes smaller than the diameter of the game ball is aligned.

Here, as shown in FIG. 183, the flat surface portion 905G is not tilted rearward (that is, is perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 80aG) and is tilted rearward (that is, the game board 80aG). It is composed of a second surface portion 904G (not perpendicular to the front surface of the). Specifically, in the flat surface portion 905G, a predetermined range including the edge portion (lower end edge) of the flat surface portion 905G is a second surface portion 904G that is inclined rearward, and the game ball that has reached the lower limit position is movable. It is in a state of being supported by the second surface portion 904G of the piece 901G (see FIG. 182 (b)). The game ball flowing in from the inflow port 921G moves parallel to the second end portion 909G side in parallel with the front surface of the game board 80a along the flat surface portion 905G, and after reaching the lower limit position, the second surface portion 904G is inclined. It moves backward along the line, that is, toward the second actuating port 92G.

As described above, the second surface portion 904G is formed so as to include the edge portion (lower end edge) on the second end portion 909G side of the flat surface portion 905G. Although the details will be described later, the formation range of the second surface portion 904G is smaller than the formation range of the first surface portion 903G, and the central axis CL10 is projected perpendicularly to the plane portion 905G. It is limited to be closer to the second end 909G.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 to 185, the electric service support process as the drive process of the electric accessory 93G executed as a part of the normal process (see step S406 in FIG. 23) by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162. Will be explained. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process, and FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the electric service opening / closing process.

(Processing for electric service support)
In the electric service support process, first, in step S5801, it is determined whether or not the support by the electric service object 93G is being executed (supporting). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If it is not being supported, a negative determination is made in step S5801 and the process proceeds to step S5802. In step S5802, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the final display of the pattern is completed on the through gate display unit DS. If it is not the timing when the final display of the pattern is completed, the process for supporting the main electric service is terminated by denying it in step S5802. If it is the timing when the confirmation display of the pattern is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step S5802 and the process proceeds to step S5803.

In step S5803, it is determined whether or not the support is won in the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84. If the support is not won, a negative determination is made in step S5803, and the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If the support is won in the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84, a positive determination is made in step S5803 and the process proceeds to step S5804. In step S5804, "2" is set in the round counter RC2 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The round counter RC2 functions as a means for grasping the number of times the electric accessory 93G is opened.

In the following step S5805, the support flags are set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. After that, the opening start process is executed in step S5806, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. In the opening start process, the waiting time for the opening is set. After this standby time has elapsed, the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 93G is started.

Returning to the description of step S5801, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5801, the process proceeds to step S5807. In step S5807, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening set in step S5806 has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, a negative determination is made in step S5807, and the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, an affirmative determination is made in step S5807, and the process proceeds to step S5808. Here, with reference to FIG. 185, the electric service opening / closing process in step S5808 will be described.

(Electrical function opening / closing process)
In the electric function opening / closing process, first, in step S5901, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 93G is open (open state). Whether or not the electric accessory 93G is open is determined by whether or not the drive unit 911G for the electric accessory is in the driving state. If the electric accessory 93G is open, the process proceeds to step S5902, and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC2 is “0”. When the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S5903. In step S5903, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is “0”. The timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time and the interval time of the electric accessory 93G, and the value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is executed. To. If a negative determination is made in step S5903, the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5903, the process proceeds to step S5904.

In step S5904, the electric service release process is executed. Specifically, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G for the electric accessory is started, and the electric accessory 93G is switched from the closed state to the open state. After that, in step S5905, "10" is set in the second winning counter PC2. In the following step S5906, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support modes A and B. Set the timer counter TC2 to "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec) in the high frequency support modes A and B (step S5907), and set the timer counter TC2 to "50" (0) in the low frequency support mode. .1 sec) is set (step S5908).

Returning to the description of step S5901, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5901, that is, if the electric accessory 93G is open, the process proceeds to step S5909. In step S5909, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S5910. In step S5910, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 92G based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 805G for the second operating port 92G. If no prize has been won, the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If a prize has been won, the value of the second prize counter PC2 is subtracted by 1 in step S5911, and in the subsequent step S5912, it is determined whether or not the value of the second prize counter PC2 is "0". If it is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S5912, that is, when the value of the second winning counter PC2 is "0", or when a positive judgment is made in step S5909 (that is, when the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0"). If it is determined), it means that the opening end condition of the electric accessory 93G is satisfied. In this case, in step S5913, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped in order to switch the electric accessory 93G to the closed state.

In the following step S5914, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, when the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the value of the round counter RC2 is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the value of the round counter RC2 is set to "0". Keep it as it is.

After that, in step S5915, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round counter RC2 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S5915, the process proceeds to step S5916, and "500" (corresponding to 1 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2. If it is determined in step S5915 that the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S5917. In step S5917, the ending process is executed. In the start process, the waiting time for the ending of the electric service support is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 403 is set in the waiting time counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

Returning to the description of FIG. 184, after executing the electric service opening / closing process of step S5808, the process proceeds to step S5809. In step S5809, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC2 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S5809, the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5809, the process proceeds to step S5810, and it is determined whether or not the ending waiting time set in step S5917 has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S5810, the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5811, the process proceeds to step S5811. In step S5811, the support flags stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are cleared, and the main electric service support process is terminated. As a result, the regulation of the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84 will be lifted.

As shown in FIG. 186, in the low frequency support mode, the support winning probability is set to 1/2, and the number of times (opening number) of switching the electric accessory 83G to the open state when the support is won is set to 2. Has been done. However, it is stipulated that the time for maintaining the open state (opening time) for each opening is 0.2 sec, and the interval time for the open state → closed state → open state is 1 sec. Further, in the low frequency support mode, it is specified that the variable display time of the pattern (ordinary symbol) in the through gate display unit DS is 10 to 20 sec and the definite display time of the pattern is 0.5 sec.

On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode B, the support winning probability is set to 1 / 1.1, and the number of times (opening number) of switching the electric accessory 83G to the open state when the support is won is set to 2. ing. However, it is stipulated that the time for maintaining the open state (opening time) for each opening is 2 sec, and the interval time for the open state → closed state → open state is 1 sec. Further, in the high frequency support mode B, it is specified that the variable display time of the pattern (ordinary symbol) in the through gate display unit DS is 0.1 sec and the definite display time of the pattern is 0.5 sec.

On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode A, the support winning probability is set to 1/2, and the number of times the electric accessory 83G is switched to the open state (opening number) is set to 2 when the support is won. Has been done. However, it is stipulated that the time for maintaining the open state (opening time) for each opening is 2 sec, and the interval time for the open state → closed state → open state is 1 sec. Further, in the high frequency support mode A, it is specified that the variable display time of the pattern (ordinary symbol) in the through gate display unit DS is 0.1 sec and the definite display time of the pattern is 0.5 sec.

That is, the decrease in the number of balls held when the game ball is launched toward the actuating port unit 82G is configured to decrease in the order of low frequency support mode> high frequency support mode A> high frequency support mode B. ..

Here, with reference to FIG. 180 again, the winning route to the second operating port 92G will be supplementarily described. The game area PE has a first route R1 that bypasses the side of the first bulging portion 861G from the left and right as a winning route to the second operating port 92G, and a downward slope toward the second bulging portion 871G. A second route R2 in which a plurality of game nails are arranged is provided. The game parts such as the game nails constituting the first route R1 in the game area PE have a function of energizing the game ball so that the inflow speed (movement speed along the flat surface portion 905) does not become excessively high. It is stipulated that the inflow speed of the game ball when flowing into the inflow port 921G via the first route R1 is the first predetermined speed (including some variation). In addition, the game parts such as the game nails constituting the second route R2 in the game area PE also have a function of energizing the game ball so that the inflow speed does not become excessively high, and the game ball is via the second route R2. The inflow speed of the game ball when flowing into the inflow port 921G is also specified to be the same as the first predetermined speed (specifically, the second predetermined speed slightly faster than the first predetermined speed). In the present embodiment, the first predetermined speed corresponds to the "predetermined speed".

In the present embodiment, the number of game balls flowing into the inflow port 921G via the first route R1 is larger than the number of game balls flowing into the inflow port 921G via the second route R2. .. That is, the first route R1 is the main route for the inflow to the inflow port 921G. However, regarding the moving speed of the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 921G via the first route R1 (the first predetermined speed), the moving speed of the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 921G via the second route R2 (the above-mentioned first predetermined speed). It is slower than the above second predetermined speed), and the details will be described later, but the probability that the game ball flowing into the inflow port 921G via each route will win the second operating port 92G due to this speed difference is the second. Route R2 is given preferential treatment. In other words, the main route for winning the second operating port 92G in the low frequency support mode is the second route R2.

The main route for winning a prize to the second operating port 92G in the low frequency support mode may be the first route R1, and the inflow probability to the inflow port 921G and the second operating port 92G may be used. The product may be the same for each route R1 and R2, and there may be no difference in superiority or inferiority.

In the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the inflow port 921G does not necessarily win a prize in the second operating port 92G, and at least a part of those game balls does not win a prize in the second operating port 92G. It is configured to return from the specific area FE to the game area PE. By using such a configuration, while setting the probability of winning the support to some extent during the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 92G frequently occurs during the low frequency support mode, and the frequency is high. It suppresses the difference from the support mode from becoming thin. Specifically, the drive unit 911G in the low frequency support mode is driven based on the time required when the game ball flowing into the inlet 921G of the actuating port unit 82G at the first predetermined speed moves along the movable piece 901G. The time and the drive time of the drive unit 911G in the high frequency support mode (particularly the high frequency support mode A) are specified. Here, the relationship between these various times will be described with reference to FIG. 187. FIG. 187 (a) is a schematic view showing a state in which the movable piece 901G is arranged in the open position (specifically, the maximum rotation position), and FIG. 187 (b) shows the movable piece 901G arranged in the closed position (specifically, the standby position). It is a schematic diagram which shows the state which was done.

(Relationship between transit time and drive time)
How the weight of the game ball located on the flat surface portion 905G acts on the movable piece 901G depends on which part of the flat surface portion 905G the game ball is located on, that is, the game on the flat surface portion 905G. It varies greatly depending on the support point (contact point) of the sphere. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), under the situation where the movable piece 901G is arranged at the maximum rotation position, the upstream side (first end) of the second virtual line FL2 on the flat surface portion 905G. When the game ball is located on the portion 908G side), the weight of the game ball acts to push the movable piece 901G in the first predetermined direction, and is downstream from the second virtual line FL2 in the flat surface portion 905G. When the game ball is located on the second end portion 909G side), the weight of the game ball acts to push the movable piece 901G in the second predetermined direction.

The second virtual line FL2 is a line obtained by projecting the central axis CL10 perpendicularly to the flat surface portion 905G, and is a line obtained by projecting the central axis CL10 perpendicularly to the flat surface portion 905G in a state where the movable piece 901G is arranged at the maximum rotation position. This is a line obtained by vertically projecting the central axis CL10. In the state where the movable piece 901G is arranged in the open position (maximum rotation position), the second virtual line FL2 is located on the downstream side (second end portion 909G side) of the first virtual line FL1.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, most of the game balls flowing into the inflow port 921G via the first route R1 and the second route R2 described above are the predetermined range LE in the first surface portion 903G, specifically, the first. It is configured to land in a predetermined range LE including the edge portion (upper end edge) on the end portion 908G side. The moving speed of the game ball landing on the predetermined range LE along the first surface portion 903G is defined to be the first predetermined speed. In the following description, the relationship between the required passage time and the driving time will be described on the premise of such an inflow mode.

The electric accessory 93G is released in the low frequency support mode for the time required for the game ball flowing into the inflow port 921G at the first predetermined speed to move from the inflow port 921G to the second virtual line FL2. It is shorter than the time (opening time TX1: 0.2 sec). Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the inflow port 921G at the first predetermined speed immediately after the electric accessory 93G is opened moves to the downstream side of the second virtual line FL2 before the opening time TX1 elapses. Can be.

On the other hand, regarding the time required T3 for the game ball flowing into the inflow port 921G at the first predetermined speed to move from the inflow port 921G to the boundary portion BL between the first surface portion 903G and the second surface portion 904G. , The opening time of the electric accessory 93G in the low frequency support mode is longer than the opening time TX1. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the inflow port 921G at the first predetermined speed immediately after the electric accessory 93G is opened reaches the boundary portion BL after the opening time TX1 has elapsed. That is, in the low frequency support mode, even if the game ball flows into the inflow port 921G at the right time, the opening time TX1 elapses immediately after the game ball passes through the second virtual line FL2, and the electric accessory 93G is driven. The output of the drive signal to the unit 911G is stopped. Then, the weight of the game ball located downstream of the second virtual line FL2 acts to push the movable piece 901G in the second predetermined direction. After that, the game ball continues to move toward the lower limit position and reaches the second surface portion 904G. Then, as the movable piece 901G rotates from the maximum rotation position to the standby position, the game ball located on the second surface portion 904G loses its support and returns from the specific area FE to the game area PE.

When the moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inflow port 921G greatly exceeds the predetermined speed, the game ball passes through the second surface portion 904G before the support by the movable piece 901G is lost. The prize will be awarded to the second operating port 92G. That is, even in the low frequency support mode, there is room for winning a prize in the second operating port 92G for some game balls.

Regarding the time required for the game ball flowing into the inflow port 921G to be discharged from the specific region FE T5, the movable piece 901G waits until the movable piece 901G starts rotating toward the maximum rotation position again during the low frequency support mode. The time is shorter than TY1. Specifically, the required time T5 is the interval time (1 sec) when the movable piece 901G is repeatedly placed in the open position during the low frequency support mode, or when the support lottery during the low frequency support mode is continuously won. Waiting time for the movable piece 901G to be maintained in the standby position (closed position) from the first opening to the next opening, that is, the variation display time, the fixed display time, and the electric power of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS during the low frequency support mode. The sum of the opening time and the ending time (about 10 sec) of opening the accessory 93G is sufficiently longer than the required time T5. Therefore, even if the support lottery is continuously won during the low frequency support mode, the game ball passing through the specific area FE does not hinder the switching of the electric accessory 93G to the open state.

Incidentally, the time required for the game ball passing through the inflow port 921G via the second route R2 to reach the second surface portion 904G at the second predetermined speed is slightly shorter than the output time of the drive signal in the low frequency support mode. It's getting longer. Therefore, immediately after the electric accessory 93G is opened, the output of the drive signal is stopped at the timing when the game ball flowing into the inflow port 921G via the second route R2 is located on the second surface portion 904G. It will be. Therefore, there is a high probability that the game ball passing through the second route R2 will win a prize in the second operating port 92G. However, since the output time of the drive signal is slightly shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the second operating port 92G, the game ball flowing into the inflow port 921G via the second route R2 Not all of them win the second operating port 92G.

The time required for the above-mentioned movement of the game ball is the same for the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B. However, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 921G at the first predetermined speed has flowed into the inflow port 921G at the first predetermined speed, which is the time required for the game ball to move from the inflow port 921G to the second virtual line FL2. The time required for the game ball to move from the inflow port 921G to the boundary portion BL between the first surface portion 903G and the second surface portion 904G, the game ball flowing into the inflow port 921G moves to the second operating port 92G. The required time T4 is shorter than the time (opening time TX2: 2 sec) in which the electric accessory 93G is opened during the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B. That is, in the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B, even when the game ball moves downstream from the second virtual line FL2, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is continued. The weight of the game ball prevents the movable piece 901G from rotating in the second predetermined direction. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B, most of the game balls flowing into the inflow port 921G win a prize in the second operating port 92G.

Regarding the time required T5 for the game ball flowing into the inflow port 921G to be discharged from the specific region FE, the movable piece 901G is directed to the maximum rotation position again during the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B. The waiting time until the start of rotation is shorter than TY2. Specifically, the required time T5 is used for the interval time (1 sec) when the movable piece 901G is repeatedly placed in the open position during the high frequency support modes A and B, and the support lottery during the high frequency support modes A and B. Waiting time (1 sec) in which the movable piece 901G is maintained in the standby position (closed position) from the previous opening to the next opening when consecutively won, that is, the display unit for the through gate in the high frequency support modes A and B. The sum (about 1 sec) of the variable display time, the definite display time, the opening time and the ending time of the electric accessory 93G opening in the DS is sufficiently longer than the required time T5. Therefore, even if the support lottery is continuously won during the high frequency support modes A and B, the game ball passing through the specific area FE hinders the switching of the electric accessory 93G to the open state. There is no.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the movement of the electric accessory 93G in the low frequency support mode and the flow of the game ball passing through the inflow port 921G will be described.

The game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 921G immediately after the electric accessory 93G is switched to the open state moves in parallel to the downstream side along the movable piece 901G as shown in FIGS. 188 (a) → 188 (b). .. The output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G continues until the game ball straddles the above-mentioned second virtual line FL2 and moves to the downstream side, and the game ball is on the downstream side of the second virtual line FL2 on the first surface portion 903G. It will stop under the condition that it is located at the position where. When the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped, the movable piece 901G starts rotating from the maximum rotation position to the standby position by the urging force of the spring member described above. At this time, the weight of the game ball acts to assist the rotation (see FIG. 188 (c)).

In particular, when the game ball moves to the second surface portion 904G and is supported by the left and right movable pieces 901G, the influence of the own weight of the game ball becomes large, and the movable piece 901G rotates quickly.

At the timing when the game ball reaches the second surface portion 904G, that is, the timing when the required time T3 has elapsed since the game ball passed the inflow port 921G, the second surface portion 904G and the second guide passage portion 875G still communicate with each other. The movement of the game ball from the second surface portion 904G to the second operating port 92G is permitted. However, while the game ball is located on the second surface portion 904G, the descent of the second surface portion 904G progresses, and the communication between the second surface portion 904G and the second guide passage portion 875G is canceled (broken). This makes it impossible for the game ball to move from the second surface portion 904G to the second operating port 92G.

As shown in FIG. 188 (c) → FIG. 188 (d), the movable piece 901G pushed by the game ball continues to rotate toward the standby position, and the game ball can pass through the gap between the second surface portions 904G. Expanded to size. As a result, the game ball located on the second surface portion 904G loses its support, passes in front of the second operating port 92G, and is discharged from the specific region FE.

According to the 19th embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

If a big hit result is obtained, the support mode is changed via the special game state (upgraded to high frequency support mode B), and if a special off result or the ceiling is reached, the support mode is not passed through the special game state. If the support mode is changed (upgraded to high frequency support mode A), the flow of the game when the support mode is changed to a higher one can be diversified, and it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the monotonicization of the game. Here, in both the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B, the time (opening time) in which the electric accessory 93G is in the open state is longer than that in the low-frequency support mode, but it is special. The probability of winning the support lottery in the high frequency support mode B via the gaming state is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, whereas the probability of winning the support lottery in the high frequency support mode A not via the special gaming state is low. It is the same as the support mode. That is, when the low frequency support mode → the high frequency support mode A is changed without going through the special gaming state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In such a configuration, if it is attempted to increase the winning probability of the support lottery in order to strengthen the support function in the high frequency support mode A, even in the low frequency support mode in which the period for opening the electric accessory 93G is short. The chances of winning the support lottery will increase, and the chances that the electric accessory 93G will be open will also increase. In such a configuration, it is annoying to the player that the electric accessory 93G is frequently switched to the open state in a mode in which the ball is virtually impossible to enter (a mode in which the opening time is extremely short). It will be easier to give, and there is concern that it will hinder the improvement of attention to the game.

In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the electric accessory 93G is opened in the situation where the high frequency support mode A is set, the first route R1 is used for the first route. The electric accessory 93G is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the inflow port 921G at a predetermined speed is guided to the second operating port 92G through the specific region FE, and the electric accessory 93G is in the low frequency support mode. When the 93G is opened, the electric accessory 93G is returned to the game area PE through the specific area FE so that the game ball that has passed through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed via the first route R1 is returned to the game area PE. Be controlled. That is, the impression of the player is deteriorated by allowing the game ball to flow into the electric accessory 93G (specific area FE) by securing a certain amount of time (opening time) for maintaining the open state even in the low frequency support mode. Can be suppressed. Then, an excessive prize is given to the second operating port 92G due to an increase in the number of inflows, and an increase in the number of inflows to the electric accessory 93G (specific area FE) causes the other winning portion (variable winning device 83). It is possible to suitably suppress the loss of winning opportunities. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

Since the movable piece 910G starts displacement toward the open position before the game ball reaches the second surface portion 904G (corresponding to the "distribution portion"), the second surface portion 904G is moved to a position where a return passage is formed. You can gain time to displace. This is preferable in suppressing excessive entry into the second operating port 92G and ensuring the superiority of the high frequency support mode A over the low frequency support mode.

The output time of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G in the low frequency support mode is such that the game ball that has passed through the inflow port 921G at the second predetermined speed via the second route R2 reaches the second surface portion 904G. It is stipulated that it will take longer than the time required to do so. In this way, it is preferable to have a configuration in which there is room for winning the second operating port 92G in order to attract attention to the movement of the movable piece 901G even in the low frequency support mode.

As shown in the present embodiment, if it is difficult to win the second operating port 92G for the first route R1 which is the main inflow path to the electric accessory 93G, the excessive winning is suppressed and the prize is high. It is possible to realize a practically preferable configuration for ensuring the sharpness between the frequency support mode A and the low frequency support mode.

In the configuration in which the passage for the game ball formed by the movable piece 901G of the electric accessory 93G functions as a guide passage to the second operating port 92G and a return passage (discharge passage) to the game area PE, it is being returned (discharged). It is disadvantageous for the player that the game ball of (middle) prevents the electric accessory 93G from being switched to the open state. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed returns the time from the stop of the output of the drive signal to the start of the output of the drive signal to the game area PE through the passage (the above passage). By specifying the time required to be discharged) longer than the required time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience and prevent the reliability of the gaming machine from being lowered in order to exert the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention.

When the movable piece 901G functions as a return passage, the inclination of the bottom surface (flat surface portion 905G) of the movable piece 901G is larger than that when the movable piece 901G functions as a guide passage. According to such a configuration, the game ball located in the specific area FE is promptly returned (discharged) from the specific area FE to the game area PE by switching to the closed state. This is advantageous in preventing the game ball from hindering the next opening of the electric accessory 93G and shortening the interval when the opening state is repeated.

In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped and the state is switched to the closed state, the game ball already moving in the flow path toward the second operating port 92G. Can also suppress the winning of the second operating port 92G. Specifically, the game ball is located on the second surface portion 904G of the rolling surface formed by the flat surface portion 905G of the movable piece 901G (specifically, the portion of the flat surface portion 905G that is downstream of the virtual line FL2). In that case, the game ball boosts the displacement (return) of the movable piece 901G to the closed position. That is, when the movable piece 901G returns to the closed position, the movable piece 901G is closed by using the urging force of the spring member as an urging means and the own weight of the game ball located on the second surface portion 904G. Can be quickly restored. As a result, even if there are many chances of winning in the support lottery in the low frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 93G is opened for a short period of time, it is possible to suppress the frequent winning of the second operating port 92G, and the above concerns Can be preferably wiped off. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In the low-frequency support mode, the time (opening time or acceptance time) for opening the electric accessory 93G is extremely shortened (for example, 0.01 sec, etc.) to make it virtually impossible to enter the ball. However, the frequent occurrence of such behavior of the electric accessory (movable piece) tends to give the player an impression that it is bothersome, which hinders the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. It is feared that it will become. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the chance of winning a prize in the second operating port 92G while avoiding an excessively short opening time in the low frequency support mode. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

In the low frequency support mode, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G is stopped after the game ball has passed through the virtual line FL2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the action of the weight of the game ball so as to prevent the movable piece from being displaced to the second position, and to suitably improve the return responsiveness of the movable piece to the second position.

According to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the game ball that has reached the second surface portion 904G is supported at a position straddling the gap between the left and right movable pieces 901G. If the game ball is configured to fit in such a gap, a function (return assist function) that suppresses the disturbance of the behavior of the game ball that has reached the lower limit position and assists the return of the movable piece 901G to the closed position is preferable. It can be demonstrated. Further, by increasing the distance from the central axis CL10 to the contact point with the game ball, the weight of the game ball can be suitably used.

The gap is expanded by pushing the movable piece 901G by the game ball fitted in the gap. At this time, the height position of the game ball supported by the movable piece 901G also changes (descends). When this gap becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball loses its support and falls from the gap. In such a configuration, it is impossible to win a prize in the second operating port 92G through the second surface portion 904G before the gap becomes larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, so that the responsiveness when the prize is disabled is not possible. Can be suitably improved.

As described above, in the configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used to support the return of the movable piece 901G to the closed position, the behavior of the game ball on the movable piece 901G (rolling surface) is disturbed, so that the return assist function is effectively exhibited. It is expected that it will not be done. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the configuration is such that the movement (for example, reversal) of the game ball that has reached the second surface portion 904G to the first surface portion 903G is restricted, the return assist function will not be exhibited well. Can be suppressed.

<Modification 1>
In the nineteenth embodiment, when the game ball passing through the inflow port 921G heads toward the second operating port 92G along the flat surface portion 905G, the moving direction thereof is changed on the second surface portion 904G (lower limit position). By earning the staying time of the game ball in the second surface portion 904G, the winning of the game ball flowing into the inflow port 921G via the first path during the low frequency support mode to the second operating port 92G is substantially achieved. However, it is not limited to this. As long as it is possible to suppress the winning of the second operating port 92G in the low frequency support mode, the specific configuration thereof is arbitrary. For example, in order to increase the staying time of the game ball on the second surface portion 904G in order to support (assist) the rotation (return) of the movable piece 901G to the closed position by using the own weight of the game ball, the second surface portion 904G is used. (Specifically, the portion on the downstream side of the virtual line FL when the flat surface portion 905G is inclined downward to the center side) is meandered in the flow path of the game ball moving toward the second operating port 92G. It is also possible to configure it. That is, in order to suppress the winning of the second operating port 92G in the low frequency support mode, the virtual line FL is on the second surface portion 904G (specifically, the flat surface portion 905G is inclined downward to the center side). It is also possible to apply a deceleration structure that reduces the moving speed of the game ball that moves toward the second operating port 92G (the portion on the downstream side).

<Modification 2>
As shown in the 19th embodiment, in the configuration in which the own weight of the game ball is used to support the rotation (return) of the movable piece to the closed position, the own weight of the game ball is efficiently used as the following configuration. By making it well available, it can contribute to further improvement of responsiveness. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the flat surface portion 905H of the movable piece 901H is bent so as to be convex toward the central axis CL10 in the front view of the gaming machine, and is placed on the second surface portion 904H. It is preferable to configure it so that the pressing force of the positioned game ball does not face the central axis CL10, that is, it can be efficiently used as a force for rotating the movable piece 901G.

<Modification 3>
As shown in the nineteenth embodiment, in the configuration in which the rotation (return) of the movable piece to the closed position is boosted by using the own weight of the game ball, the backflow of the game ball that has reached the lower limit position is prevented. It is possible to contribute to further improvement of the operation stability of the electric accessory by providing the regulation part to regulate. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189 (b), the boundary portion between the first surface portion 903I and the second surface portion 904I is formed into a stepped shape (stepped portion 906I), and the first surface portion 903I is moved to the second surface portion 904I. It is advisable to restrict the movement of the game ball to the first surface portion 903I side.

<Modification example 4>
Regarding the movable piece 901G shown in the 19th embodiment, the central axis CL10 is set so that the distance from the central axis CL10 to the first end 908G is long and the distance from the central axis CL10 to the second end 909G is also long. The configuration is such that the second end portion is biased toward the 909G side, but the present invention is not limited to this. The central axis CL10 may be biased toward the first end 908G so that the distance from the central axis CL10 to the second end 909G is long and the distance from the central axis CL10 to the first end 908G is also long.

<Modification 5>
In the nineteenth embodiment, when the movable pieces 901G are arranged in the open position, a gap is formed between the second end portions 909G of the movable pieces 901G, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. When the movable pieces 901G are arranged in the open position, the second end portions 909G of the movable pieces 901G may be in contact with each other so that the above gap does not occur. However, in the configuration that assists the displacement of the movable piece 901G from the open position to the closed position by using the own weight of the game ball, the contact point with the game ball is kept as far as possible from the central axis CL10 to efficiently reduce the own weight of the game ball. It is preferable to realize the configuration to be used. In view of such circumstances, as described above, when each movable piece 901G is arranged in the open position, it is a technique to make a structure in which a gap is generated between the second end portions 909G of the movable pieces 901G. It is meaningful.

<Modification 6>
In the nineteenth embodiment, the movement direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that has reached the second surface portion 904G moves toward the rear of the game machine (guidance for guiding the game ball to the rear of the game machine). (Structure to function as a means), but instead of or in addition to this, in the flat surface portion 905G of the movable piece 901G, an upright portion that stands up from the flat surface portion 905G is provided at the edge portion on the second end portion 909G side, and the standing portion is provided. It is also possible to change the moving direction of the gaming ball so that the gaming ball in contact with the portion moves toward the rear of the gaming machine. However, in order to smoothly return the game ball to the game area PE, it is preferable to avoid contact between the game ball flowing down the vertical passage and the unevenness of the movable piece 901G as much as possible. In view of such circumstances, it is technically significant to make the second surface portion 904G so as not to protrude from the extension surface of the first surface portion 903G as shown in the nineteenth embodiment.

<Modification 7>
In the nineteenth embodiment, when the movable piece 901G is rotated to the open position / closed position, the operating range of the first end portion 908G is above the central axis CL10, and the operating range of the second end portion 909G is the center. Although it is specified to be above and below the axis CL10, it is also possible that the operating range of the second end 909G is below the center axis CL10.

<Modification 8>
In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the solenoid is applied as the drive unit of the electric accessory 93G is illustrated, but a motor such as a stepping motor may be applied instead of the solenoid. In this case, by performing the first drive control by rotating the output shaft of the motor in the first direction, the electric accessory is switched from the closed state to the open state, while the output shaft of the motor is rotated in the second direction. By performing the second drive control in this way, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the electric accessory is switched from the open state to the closed state. In this case, when switching to the open state, the movable piece 901G is displaced to the open position against the urging force of the urging means such as a spring, and after switching to the open state, the energized state is maintained to maintain the closed state. It is preferable to use a configuration that generates a holding torque that can regulate the switching to.

<Modification 9>
In the nineteenth embodiment, among the game balls that have flowed into the specific area FE from the inflow port 921G, the game balls that have not entered the second operating port 92G are all returned to the game area PE through the lower opening 874G. However, this was changed, and any of the game balls that did not enter the second operating port 92G among the game balls that flowed into the specific area FE from the inflow port 921G are returned to the game area PE. It is also possible to guide the player to the collection passage provided on the back side of the game board 80aG. Further, for example, among the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 921G, any of the game balls that did not enter the second operating port 92G may be configured to win a prize in another winning portion such as a general winning opening. It may be configured to be discharged to the collection passage as it is without being returned to the region PE (a configuration in which it becomes an out ball).

<Modification 10>
In the nineteenth embodiment, the moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inflow port 921G via the first route R1 and the game ball when flowing into the inflow port 921G via the second route R2. The movement speeds of the above are configured to be the same, but the movement speed is not limited to this.

For example, the moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inflow port 921G via the first route R1 is slower than the moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inflow port 921G via the second route R2. It may be configured as. In this case, the movement speed of the game ball when the output time of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G flows into the inflow port 921G via the first route, that is, the time required to reach each position in the specific region FE. It should be decided based on.

Further, the moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inflow port 921G via the first route R1 becomes faster than the moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inflow port 921G via the second route R2. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the movement speed of the game ball when the output time of the drive signal to the drive unit 911G flows into the inflow port 921G via the second route, that is, the time required to reach each position in the specific region FE. It should be decided based on.

<Modification 11>
In the nineteenth embodiment, the number of game balls flowing into the inflow port 921G via the first route R1 is larger than the number of game balls flowing into the inflow port 921G via the second route R2. However, the number of game balls flowing into the inflow port 921G via the first route R1 is smaller than the number of game balls flowing into the inflow port 921G via the second route R2. You may. In such a configuration, preferably, as shown in the above modification 10, the moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inflow port 921G via the first route R1 determines the second route R2. It is preferable that the speed is higher than the moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inflow port 921G via the inflow port.

<Modification 12>
In the nineteenth embodiment, the output time of the drive signal when the support lottery is won and the electric accessory 93G is switched to the acceptance state during the low frequency support mode is set to the inflow port 921G via the first route R1. The time required for the game ball flowing into the inflow port to reach the second surface portion 904G after passing through the inflow port 921G is shorter than, but is not limited to.

For example, the game ball flowing into the inflow port 921G via the first route R1 sets the output time of the drive signal when the electric accessory 93G is switched to the acceptance state by winning the support lottery during the low frequency support mode. It may be shorter than the time required to reach the virtual line FL2 after passing through the entrance 921G.

In addition, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 921G via the first route R1 has the output time of the drive signal when the electric accessory 93G is switched to the acceptance state by winning the support lottery during the low frequency support mode. It may be longer than the time required to reach the second surface portion 904G after passing through the inlet 921G and shorter than the time required to reach the second operating port 92G.

<Modification 13>
The required period until the game ball that has passed through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed is returned from the specific area FE to the game area PE, and the game ball that has passed through the inlet 921G at the first predetermined speed is the second operating port 92G. It should be shorter than the time required to win a prize. Even though the game ball that has flowed into the electric accessory 93G cannot win a prize in the second operating port 92G, staying in the specific area FE for a long time may cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, with the above configuration, such concerns can be suitably dispelled.

<20th embodiment>
In the actuating port unit 82G shown in the 19th embodiment, the movable piece 901G is placed in the open position on the edge portion of the flat surface portion 905G of the movable piece 901G on the side of the second end portion 909G. A second surface portion 904G that inclines downward to the operating port 92G side (rear of the gaming machine) is provided, and the thickness of the gaming board 80aG is such that the moving direction of the game ball that has reached the second surface portion 904G is parallel to the front surface of the gaming board 80aG. The configuration is such that it changes in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the specific configuration for changing the moving direction of the game ball moving in the direction parallel to the front surface of the game board in the thickness direction of the game board is different from the nineteenth embodiment. There is. Hereinafter, the specific configuration of the actuating port unit 82J (movable piece 901J) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 190, focusing on the differences from the 19th embodiment. FIG. 190 is a schematic view of the electric accessory 93J and the second operating port 92J as viewed from the front side of the gaming machine.

The pair of left and right movable pieces 901J constituting the electric accessory 93J are formed so that the entire flat surface portion 905J is inclined backward with the movable pieces 901J arranged at the maximum rotation position (open position). Has been done. The game ball flowing in from the inflow port 921J is guided backward by being supported by the flat surface portion 905J, and the floating of the base portion 851J from the front surface is suppressed. That is, in the present embodiment, the function of guiding the game ball backward is provided to the entire flat surface portion 905J of the movable piece 901J.

A gap is secured between the left and right movable pieces 901J regardless of whether the movable pieces 901J are arranged in the open position or the closed position, and the size (gap dimension) of the gap is the movable piece 901J. Is larger than the diameter of the game ball when is located in the closed position and smaller than the diameter of the game ball when the movable piece 901J is located in the open position (see the gap size LY1). Then, the game ball that has moved to the lower limit position along the flat surface portion 905J under the condition that the movable piece 901J is located in the open position is supported by both movable pieces 901J by fitting into this gap, and the second operating port 92J. Will move towards.

For the game ball that has moved to the lower limit position along the flat surface portion 905J, the lift from the front surface of the base portion 851J is suppressed in the process of reaching the lower limit position, and the second operating port 92J can be quickly won a prize after reaching the lower limit position. It has become.

Here, the lower end of the trajectory (hereinafter referred to as virtual guide surface FB) that the game ball supported by both movable pieces 901J passes when moving backward is when the movable piece 901J is located in the open position. Is located above the lower edge of the second actuating port 92J. For a game ball that moves backward under such a situation, a prize is allowed in the second operating port 92J. On the other hand, when the movable piece 901J is located in the closed position, the virtual guide surface FB is located below the lower end edge of the second operating port 92J, and the game ball that has reached the lower limit position moves backward. If the player tries to move, the game ball is caught on the lower end edge, and the winning of the second operating port 92J is hindered.

In the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, the time required for the game ball passing through the inflow port 921J at the first predetermined speed to reach the virtual line FL2 in the flat surface portion 905J is the driving of the electric accessory 93J. It is specified to coincide with the time for outputting the drive signal to the unit 911J. That is, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 911J is stopped when the game ball flowing into the inflow port 921J reaches the virtual line FL2 immediately after the electric accessory 93J is switched to the open state. That is, after the output of the drive signal is stopped, the movable piece 901J is pushed in the second predetermined direction by the weight of the game ball. In other words, when the electric accessory 93J is switched from the open state to the closed state, the virtual guide surface FB is the second operating port under the condition that the size of the inflow port 921J is large enough to allow the game ball to pass through. It is displaced from a position above the lower edge of the 92G to a position below it.

Until the game ball that has passed through the virtual line FL2 reaches the left and right edges of the second operating port 92J, the movable piece 901J rotates in the second predetermined direction. Then, the angle of the movable piece 901J changes by a predetermined angle (see ANG1) until the game ball reaches the left and right edges of the second operating port 92J, and the virtual guide surface FB described above is the second operating port 92J. It descends below the bottom edge. As a result, the winning of the game ball to the second operating port 92J is avoided. After that, as the rotation of the movable piece 901J in the second predetermined direction progresses, the inflow port 921J becomes large enough to prevent the game ball from passing through (closed state), and the gap between the movable pieces 910J is the size of the game ball. The game ball located in the specific region FE because it is larger than the diameter dimension is discharged from the specific region FE without winning a prize in the second operating port 92J.

<Modification 1>
In the twentieth embodiment, the backward inclination angle of the flat surface portion 905J is configured to be constant between the first end portion 908J and the second end portion 909J, but the present invention is not limited to this. The inclination angle may be different depending on the portion. For example, the inclination angle of the portion of the flat surface portion 905J on the second end portion 909J side may be larger than the inclination angle of the portion on the first end portion 908J side.

<Modification 2>
In the twentieth embodiment, when the movable piece 901J is arranged in the open position, the virtual guide surface FB is located above the lower end edge of the second operating port 92J, and the movable piece 901J is located in the open position. In the process of displacing to the closed position, the virtual guide surface FB is configured to be displaced below the lower end edge of the second operating port 92J, thereby suppressing the winning of the second operating port 92J in the low frequency support mode. .. However, such a configuration is not indispensable, and the virtual guide surface FB is the lower end edge of the second operating port 92J regardless of whether the movable piece 901J is arranged in the open position or the closed position. It is also possible to configure it to be located above.

<Modification 3>
In the twentieth embodiment, when the electric accessory 93J is switched from the open state to the closed state, the virtual guide surface is in a situation where the size of the inflow port 921J is large enough to allow the game ball to pass through. The FB is displaced from the position above the lower end edge of the second operating port 92G to the position below it, but this may be changed as follows. That is, when the electric accessory 93J is switched from the open state to the closed state, the virtual guide surface FB becomes the lower end edge of the second operating port 92J after the size of the inflow port 921J becomes a size that the game ball cannot pass through. It is also possible to displace from a position above the position to a position below the position.

<21st embodiment>
As described above, in the configuration of shifting to the normal game state (fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode A without going through the special game state as a trigger of "special off result" or "ceiling arrival", the high frequency There is concern that the extremely long waiting time until the benefits can be substantially enjoyed despite the transition to the normal gaming state compatible with support mode A will be a factor that reduces the satisfaction of the player. The ceiling. In the present embodiment, the benefit is obtained when the game shifts to the normal game state (fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode A without going through the special game state as a trigger of the "special off result" or "ceiling arrival". One of the features is that it has been devised to prevent the waiting time until it can be practically enjoyed from becoming extremely long. Hereinafter, the device will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 191, the electric service support process executed as a part of the normal process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described.

(Processing for electric service support)
In the electric service support process, first, in step S6001, it is determined whether or not the electric service is being supported by the electric accessory 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If it is not being supported, a negative determination is made in step S6001 and the process proceeds to step S6002. In step S6002, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the final display of the pattern is completed on the through gate display unit DS. If it is not the timing when the final display of the pattern is completed, the process for supporting the main electric service is terminated by denying it in step S6002. When the confirmation display of the pattern is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step S6002 and the process proceeds to step S6003.

In step S6003, it is determined whether or not the support is won in the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84. If the support is not won, a negative determination is made in step S6003, and the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If the support is won in the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84, an affirmative determination is made in step S6003 and the process proceeds to step S6004. In step S6004, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support modes A and B.

If the current support mode is a low frequency support mode, "1" is set in the round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 in step S6005, and various flag storage areas of the RAM 404 are set in the subsequent step S6006. Set the short support flag to 435.

When the current support modes are the high frequency support modes A and B, "2" is set in the round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 in step S6007, and the RAM 404 is set in the subsequent step S6006. Set the long support flag in the various flag storage areas 435.

After executing the processes of steps S6006 and S6008, the process proceeds to step S6009, the opening start process is executed, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. In the opening start processing, a waiting time (0.5 sec) for opening is set (see FIG. 192). After the waiting time has elapsed, the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 93 is started.

The waiting time for the opening is not an essential configuration. It is also possible to omit this waiting time and immediately switch the electric accessory 93 to the open state when the support is won. It is also possible to configure the waiting time for the opening to be different depending on whether the short support flag is set or the long support flag is set.

Returning to the description of step S6001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6001, the process proceeds to step S6010. In step S6101, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening set in step S6009 has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, a negative determination is made in step S6010, and the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, an affirmative determination is made in step S6010, and the process proceeds to step S6011. Here, with reference to FIG. 193, the electric service opening / closing process in step S6011 will be described.

(Electrical function opening / closing process)
In the electric function opening / closing process, first, in step S6101, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 93 is open (open state). Whether or not the electric accessory 93 is open is determined by whether or not the drive unit (solenoid) for the electric accessory is in the drive state (excitation state), that is, whether or not the drive signal is output. .. If the electric accessory 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S6102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC2 is “0”. When the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S6103. In step S6103, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is “0”. The timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time and the interval time of the electric accessory 93, and the value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is executed. To.

If a negative determination is made in step S6103, the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6103, the process proceeds to step S6104. In step S6104, the electric service release process is executed. Specifically, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit of the electric accessory is started, and the electric accessory 93 is switched from the closed state to the open state. After that, "10" is set in the second winning counter PC2 in step S6105.

When the long support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, an affirmative determination is made in step S6106, the process proceeds to step S6107, and "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2. On the other hand, when the short support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, a negative determination is made in step S6106, the process proceeds to step S6108, and the timer counter TC2 is "50" (corresponding to 0.1 sec). To set.

Returning to the description of step S6101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6101, that is, if the electric accessory 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S6109. In step S6109, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S6110. In step S6110, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 92 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor for the second operating port 92. If no prize has been won, the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If a prize has been won, the value of the second prize counter PC2 is subtracted by 1 in step S6111, and in the subsequent step S6111, it is determined whether or not the value of the second prize counter PC2 is "0". If it is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S6112, that is, when the value of the second winning counter PC2 is "0", or when a positive judgment is made in step S6109 (that is, when the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0"). If it is determined), it means that the opening end condition of the electric accessory 93 is satisfied. In this case, in step S6113, the drive signal being output to the drive unit of the electric accessory 93 is stopped in order to close the electric accessory 93.

In the following step S6114, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, when the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the value of the round counter RC2 is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the value of the round counter RC2 is set to "0". Keep it as it is.

After that, in step S6115, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round counter RC2 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S6115, the process proceeds to step S6116, and "100" (corresponding to 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2.
If it is determined in step S6115 that the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S6117.

When the long support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, an affirmative determination is made in step S6117 and the process proceeds to step S6118. In step S6118, “250” (corresponding to 0.5 sec) is set in the ending counter EC provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. On the other hand, when the short support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, a negative determination is made in step S6117 and the process proceeds to step S6119. In step S6119, "7450" (corresponding to 14.9 sec) is set in the ending counter EC provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

The ending counter EC is a counter that is referred to when grasping the ending time after the opening of the electric accessory 93 is completed, and the value is subtracted by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed. Will be done.

Returning to the description of FIG. 191 and executing the electric service opening / closing process in step S6011, the process proceeds to step S6012. In step S6012, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC2 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S6012, the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6012, the process proceeds to step S6013, and it is determined whether or not the ending waiting time set in steps S6118 and S6119 has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S6013, the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6013, the process proceeds to step S6014. In step S6014, the support flags (short support flag and long support flag) stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the main electric service support process is terminated. As a result, the regulation of the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84 and the regulation of the variable display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS will be lifted.

As described in detail above, when the support lottery is won, the support game in which the electric accessory 93 is released is started, and the pattern changes in the next support lottery and the display unit DS for the through gate until the support game is completed. Display is restricted. The support game consists of an opening part that waits for the opening of the electric accessory 93, a main part that opens and closes the electric accessory 93, and an ending part after the opening and closing of the electric accessory 93 is completed. The execution time of is associated with the opening pattern (short opening / long opening). In the short opening, the opening time, which is the execution time of the opening part, is 0.5 sec, the opening time, which is the execution time of the main part, is 0.1 sec, and the ending time, which is the execution time of the ending part, is 14.9 sec. On the other hand, in the long open, the opening time which is the execution time of the opening part is 0.5 sec, the opening / closing time which is the execution time of the main part is 2 sec × 2 + 0.1 sec, and the ending time which is the execution time of the ending part is 0. It will be .5 sec. Regarding whether to open short or open long, the support mode at the start timing of the support game, that is, the support mode flag (high frequency support mode flag A, high frequency support mode flag B) is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. It is decided based on whether or not it is done and its type.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 194, the relationship between the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode A, and the high-frequency support mode B in the present embodiment will be supplementarily described.

In the low-frequency support mode, the support lottery process (low-probability support lottery process) is executed with reference to the support lottery table corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. The probability of winning a support by this lottery is halved. At the same time as this lottery, the variable display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is started, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), so that the result is clearly shown to the player. During the low-frequency support mode, the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is "15 sec", and the final display time of the pattern is "0.5 sec".

In the high-frequency support mode A, the support lottery process (low-probability support lottery process) is executed with reference to the support lottery table corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A. This table is the same as the table referred to during the low frequency support mode, and the probability of winning the support by the lottery is 1/2. At the same time as this lottery, the variable display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is started, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), so that the result is clearly shown to the player. During the high-frequency support mode A, the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is "0.5 sec", and the final display time of the pattern is "0.5 sec". As described above, in the high-frequency support mode A, the support winning probability is the same as that in the low-frequency support mode, but the variable display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS, that is, after the support is won, the electric accessory 93. The waiting time until the is opened is greatly reduced.

In the high-frequency support mode B, the support lottery process (low-probability support lottery process) is executed with reference to the support lottery table corresponding to the high-frequency support mode B. The probability of winning a support by the lottery is 1 / 1.1, which is more favorable than the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode A. At the same time as this lottery, the variable display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is started, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), so that the result is clearly shown to the player. During the high-frequency support mode A, the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is "0.5 sec", and the final display time of the pattern is "0.5 sec".

In this way, during the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 93 is repeatedly switched to the open state by lengthening the variable display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS as compared with the high-frequency support modes A and B. The interval is earned and the difference in advantage between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support modes A and B is clarified.

As already explained, if a big hit result is obtained in the normal game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the low probability mode, which is the most disadvantageous to the player, the high frequency support is performed through the special game state. It shifts to the normal game state corresponding to the mode. In this case, the player can first enjoy the benefits of the big hit result in the special gaming state. Therefore, even if the transition to the high-frequency support mode, which is another benefit, is delayed, such a time lag is unlikely to be a factor that greatly reduces the player's willingness to play. In addition, it is assumed that the time lag becomes less noticeable because the normal gaming state is interrupted by the intervention of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the case of a special out-of-order result or reaching the ceiling in the first normal game state, there is a large time lag until the user shifts to the high frequency support mode A and can enjoy the benefits. It is feared that this will lead to a decrease in the satisfaction of the player and will be a factor that greatly reduces the motivation to play. Such an inconvenience is expected to become more remarkable because the normal gaming state continues without going through the special gaming state when switching from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A. In the present embodiment, it is avoided that the time lag becomes extremely large due to the above-mentioned ingenuity regarding the support game. Hereinafter, with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 195 to 197, from the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode (first normal gaming state) to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A (fourth normal gaming state). The flow of the game at the time of transition will be explained according to the game situation. In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 195 to 197, the case of shifting to the high frequency support mode A is exemplified by the “special deviation result” as an opportunity. The basic flow in the case of shifting to the high-frequency port mode A triggered by "reaching the ceiling" is the same as the example shown in FIGS. 195 to 197, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

(Pattern 1: When the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied during the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the support non-winning in the display unit DS for the through gate)
FIG. 195 (a) shows a case where the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied while the pattern corresponding to the disengagement result (support non-winning) is variablely displayed on the through gate display unit DS. The flow of the game is illustrated.

At the timing of tm1, the variable display of the pattern is started on the operation port display unit D1. This game round corresponds to the special deviation result, and the pattern corresponding to the special deviation result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the timing of tm4. At the timing of tm5 when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round is finished, and the support mode is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A.

Here, at the timing of tm3 before the timing of tm5, the variable display of the pattern is started on the through gate display unit DS. This fluctuation display corresponds to the off result (support non-winning), and the pattern corresponding to the support non-winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the through gate display unit DS at the timing of tm6 after the timing of tm5. ) Has been. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 195 (a), the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied during the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the support non-winning in the through gate display unit DS.

At the timing of tm7 when the final display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is completed, the support lottery is executed again, and the variable display of the pattern based on the result of the support lottery is started on the through-gate display unit DS. In this support lottery, the support was won. Since the high-frequency support mode A is switched at the timing of tm7, the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is significantly shortened.

At the timing of tm8 when the variable display time (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the timing of tm7, the pattern corresponding to the support winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the display unit DS for the through gate. Then, at the timing of tm9 when the final display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is completed, the support game by the electric accessory 93 is started.

In this support game, the opening part is first executed. At the timing of tm10 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the opening part has elapsed, a drive signal is output to the drive unit of the electric accessory 93, and the electric accessory 93 switches from the closed state to the open state (shifts to the main part). do). As a result, the winning of the second operating port 92 is allowed. In the main part, the electric accessory 93 is in the open state (2 sec) → closed state (0.1 sec) → open state (2 sec). At the timing of tm11 when the main part ends, the game shifts to the ending part, and at the timing of tm12 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the ending part has elapsed, that is, at the timing of tm12 when the support game ends, the through gate display unit DS The variable display of the pattern in is started.

In such a flow, there is a time lag between the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tm5) and the time when the player can actually enjoy the benefits. As described above, this benefit is roughly divided into two types: a support lottery in the high frequency support mode A and switching to the open state of the electric accessory 93 (support game by the electric accessory 93).

Time lag (delay time TW1) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tm5) to the execution of the lottery in the high frequency support mode A (timing of tm6) = display unit DS for through gate The remaining variable display time in the above + the fixed display time of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS, and the maximum value of the variable display time of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS set in the low frequency support mode is 15 sec. In view of the above points, the delay time TW1 = 0.5 sec to 15.5 sec.

Time lag (delay time TW2) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tm5) to the opening of the electric accessory 93 = remaining fluctuation display time in the through gate display unit DS + Confirmed display time of the pattern on the display unit DS for through gate + Variable display time of the pattern on the display unit DS for through gate (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + Confirmed display time of the pattern on the display unit DS for through gate (high frequency support) Mode A) + Opening execution time in the support game, and considering that the maximum value of the variation display time of the pattern of the through gate display unit DS set in the low frequency support mode is 15 sec. The delay time TW2 = 2 sec to 17 sec. Since the winning probability of the support lottery in the high frequency support mode A is 1/2, the delay time TW2 becomes longer by that amount if the support lottery continues to be missed.

(Pattern 2: When the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied during the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the support winning in the display unit DS for the through gate)
FIG. 195 (b) shows a game in which the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied while the pattern corresponding to the hit result (support winning) is variablely displayed on the through gate display unit DS. Illustrates the flow of.

At the timing of tn1, the variable display of the pattern is started on the operation port display unit D1. This game round corresponds to the special deviation result, and the pattern corresponding to the special deviation result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the timing of tn4. At the timing of tn5 when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round is finished, and the support mode is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A.

Here, at the timing of nt3, which is earlier than the timing of tun5, the variable display of the pattern is started on the through gate display unit DS. This fluctuation display corresponds to the winning result (support winning), and the pattern corresponding to the support winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the display unit DS for the through gate at the timing of tun6 after the timing of tn5. ing. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 195 (b), the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied during the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the support winning in the through gate display unit DS.

At the timing of tun7 when the confirmed display time (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the timing of tun6, the stop display (confirmed display) of the pattern corresponding to the support winning is completed on the display unit DS for the through gate, and the support by the electric accessory 93 is supported. The game has started.

In this support game, the opening part is first executed. At the timing of tn8 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the opening part has elapsed, a drive signal is output to the drive unit of the electric accessory 93, and the electric accessory 93 switches from the closed state to the open state (shifts to the main part). do). As a result, the winning of the second operating port 92 is allowed. In the main part, the electric accessory 93 is in the open state (2 sec) → closed state (0.1 sec) → open state (2 sec). At the timing of tun9 when the main part ends, the game shifts to the ending part, and at the timing of tun10 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the ending part has elapsed, that is, at the timing of tun10 when the support game ends, the display unit DS for the through gate The variable display of the pattern in is started.

In such a flow, there is a time lag between the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tm5) and the time when the player can actually enjoy the benefits. As already explained, this benefit is roughly divided into two types: a support lottery in the high frequency support mode A and switching to the open state of the electric accessory 93 (support game by the electric accessory 93). In the example shown in FIG. 195 (b), the latter is the case.

Time lag (delay time TW3) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tun5) until the electric accessory 93 is opened = the remaining fluctuation display time in the through gate display unit DS + The final display time of the pattern on the display unit DS for the through gate + the execution time of the opening in the support game, and the maximum value of the variation display time of the pattern on the display unit DS for the through gate set in the low frequency support mode is Considering that it is 15 sec, the delay time TW2 = 1 sec to 16 sec.

(Pattern 3: When the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied during the definite display of the pattern corresponding to the support non-winning in the display unit DS for the through gate)
FIG. 196 (a) shows a case where the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied while the pattern corresponding to the disengagement result (support non-winning) is confirmed and displayed on the through gate display unit DS. The flow of the game is illustrated.

At the timing of tp1, the variable display of the pattern is started on the operation port display unit D1. This game round corresponds to the special deviation result, and the pattern corresponding to the special deviation result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the timing of tp4. At the timing of tp6 when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round is finished, and the support mode is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A.

Here, at the timing of tp3 before the timing of tp6, the variable display of the pattern is started on the through gate display unit DS. This fluctuation display corresponds to the off result (support non-winning), and the pattern corresponding to the support non-winning is stopped and displayed on the through gate display unit DS at the timing of tp5 between the timing of tp4 and the timing of tp6. (Confirmed display). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 196 (a), the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied during the definite display of the pattern corresponding to the support non-winning in the through gate display unit DS.

At the timing of tp7 when the final display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is completed, the support lottery is executed again, and the variable display of the pattern based on the result of the support lottery is started on the through-gate display unit DS. In this support lottery, the support was won. Since the high-frequency support mode A is switched at the timing of tp7, the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is significantly shortened.

At the timing of tp8 when the variable display time (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the timing of tp7, the pattern corresponding to the support winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the display unit DS for the through gate. Then, at the timing of tp9 when the final display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is completed, the support game by the electric accessory 93 is started.

In this support game, the opening part is first executed. At the timing of tp10 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the opening part has elapsed, a drive signal is output to the drive unit of the electric accessory 93, and the electric accessory 93 switches from the closed state to the open state (shifts to the main part). do). As a result, the winning of the second operating port 92 is allowed. In the main part, the electric accessory 93 is in the open state (2 sec) → closed state (0.1 sec) → open state (2 sec). At the timing of tp11 when the main part ends, the game shifts to the ending part, and at the timing of tp12 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the ending part has elapsed, that is, at the timing of tp12 when the support game ends, the display unit DS for the through gate The variable display of the pattern in is started.

In such a flow, there is a time lag between the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tp6) and the time when the player can actually enjoy the benefits. As described above, this benefit is roughly divided into two types: a support lottery in the high frequency support mode A and switching to the open state of the electric accessory 93 (support game by the electric accessory 93).

Time lag (delay time TW4) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tp6) to the execution of the lottery in the high frequency support mode A (timing of tp7) = through gate display unit DS The delay time TW1 = It will be 0 sec to 0.5 sec.

Time lag (delay time TW5) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tp6) until the electric accessory 93 is opened = the remaining confirmed display time on the through gate display unit DS + Fluctuation display time of the pattern on the display unit DS for through gate (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + Confirmed display time of the pattern on the display unit DS for through gate (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + Execution time of the opening in the support game Considering that the maximum value of the fluctuation display time of the pattern of the through gate display unit DS set in the low frequency support mode is 0.5 sec, the delay time TW2 = 1.5 sec to 2 sec. .. Since the winning probability of the support lottery in the high frequency support mode A is 1/2, the delay time TW5 becomes longer by that amount if the support lottery continues to be missed.

(Pattern 4: When the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied during the confirmation display of the pattern corresponding to the support winning in the display unit DS for the through gate)
FIG. 196 (b) shows a game in which the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied while the pattern corresponding to the winning result (support winning) is confirmed and displayed on the through gate display unit DS. Illustrates the flow of.

At the timing of tq1, the variable display of the pattern is started on the operation port display unit D1. This game round corresponds to the special deviation result, and the pattern corresponding to the special deviation result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the timing of tq4. At the timing of tq6 when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round is finished, and the support mode is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A.

Here, at the timing of tq3 before the timing of tq6, the variable display of the pattern is started on the through gate display unit DS. This fluctuation display corresponds to the winning result (support winning), and the pattern corresponding to the support winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed) on the display unit DS for the through gate at the timing of tq5 between the timing of tq4 and the timing of tq6. Is displayed). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 195 (b), the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied during the definite display of the pattern corresponding to the support winning in the through gate display unit DS.

At the timing of tq7, when the confirmed display time (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the timing of tq5, the stop display (confirmed display) of the pattern corresponding to the support winning is completed on the display unit DS for the through gate, and the support by the electric accessory 93 is completed. The game has started.

In this support game, the opening part is first executed. At the timing of tq8 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the opening part has elapsed, a drive signal is output to the drive unit of the electric accessory 93, and the electric accessory 93 switches from the closed state to the open state (shifts to the main part). do). As a result, the winning of the second operating port 92 is allowed. In the main part, the electric accessory 93 is in the open state (2 sec) → closed state (0.1 sec) → open state (2 sec). At the timing of tq9 when the main part ends, the game shifts to the ending part, and at the timing of tq10 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the ending part has elapsed, that is, at the timing of tq10 when the support game ends, the through gate display unit DS The variable display of the pattern in is started.

In such a flow, there is a time lag between the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tm5) and the time when the player can actually enjoy the benefits. As already explained, this benefit is roughly divided into two types: a support lottery in the high frequency support mode A and switching to the open state of the electric accessory 93 (support game by the electric accessory 93). In the example shown in FIG. 196 (b), the latter is the case.

Time lag (delay time TW6) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tq6) until the electric accessory 93 is opened = the remaining confirmed display time on the through gate display unit DS + It is the execution time of the opening in the support game, and considering that the maximum value of the fluctuation display time of the pattern of the through gate display unit DS set in the low frequency support mode is 0.5 sec, the delay time TW6 = 0.5 sec to 1 sec.

(Pattern 5: When the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied while the electric accessory 93 is open)
FIG. 197 illustrates the flow of the game when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied while the electric accessory 93 is open.

At the timing of tr1, the variable display of the pattern is started on the operation port display unit D1. This game round corresponds to the special deviation result, and the pattern corresponding to the special deviation result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the timing of tr5. At the timing of tr8 when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the game round is finished, and the support mode is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A.

Here, at the timing of tr3 before the timing of tr8, the variable display of the pattern is started on the through gate display unit DS. This fluctuation display corresponds to the winning result (support winning), and the pattern corresponding to the support winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the display unit DS for the through gate at the timing of tr4 before the timing of tr5. Has been done. At the timing of tr6 where the definite display time (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the timing of tr4, specifically, at the timing of tr6 between the timing of tr5 and the timing of tr8, the display unit DS for the through gate has a pattern corresponding to the support winning. The stop display (confirmed display) has ended, and the support game by the electric accessory 93 has started. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 197, the condition for shifting to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied during the support game (specifically, during the opening of 93 of the electric motor field).

In this support game, the opening part is first executed. At the timing of tr7 when the execution time (0.5 sec) of the opening part has elapsed, a drive signal is output to the drive unit of the electric accessory 93, and the electric accessory 93 switches from the closed state to the open state (shifts to the main part). do). As a result, the winning of the second operating port 92 is allowed. In the main part, the electric accessory 93 is in the open state (0.1 sec). At the timing of tr9 when the main part ends, the game shifts to the ending part, and at the timing of tr12 when the execution time (14.9 sec) of the ending part has elapsed, that is, at the timing of tr12 when the support game ends, the display unit DS for the through gate The variable display of the pattern in is started.

In such a flow, a time lag occurs from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tr8) until the player can actually enjoy the benefits. As described above, this benefit is roughly divided into two types: a support lottery in the high frequency support mode A and switching to the open state of the electric accessory 93 (support game by the electric accessory 93).

Time lag (delay time TW7) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tr8) to the execution of the lottery in the high frequency support mode A (timing of tr12) = execution of the rest of the support game Considering that the maximum value of the execution time of the support game in the low frequency support mode (short open) is 15.5 sec, the delay time TW1 = 0 sec to 15.5 sec.

Time lag (delay time TW8) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tr8) until the electric accessory 93 is opened (delay time TW8) = remaining execution time of the support game + display unit for through gate The variable display time of the pattern in the DS (corresponding to the high frequency support mode A) + the fixed display time of the pattern in the display unit DS for the through gate (corresponding to the high frequency support mode A) + the execution time of the opening in the support game, which is low. Considering that the maximum value of the execution time of the support game in the frequency support mode (short open) is 15.5 sec, the delay time TW2 = 1.5 sec to 17 sec. Since the winning probability of the support lottery in the high frequency support mode A is 1/2, the delay time TW8 becomes longer by that amount if the support lottery continues to be missed.

In the present embodiment, the average required time when the electric accessory 93 is opened once during the low frequency support mode is the support non-winning probability × (variation display time of the pattern in the display unit DS for the through gate + for the through gate). Definite display time of the pattern on the display unit DS) + Support winning probability x (Variation display time of the pattern on the display unit DS for through gate + Confirmation display time of the pattern on the display unit DS for through gate + Execution time of the support game) .. That is, in the present embodiment, the average required time is "23.25 sec".

If the above-mentioned ending part and opening part are deleted and instead of these, the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is lengthened to secure the above average required time, the through-gate display is displayed. The variation display time of the pattern in the part DS is "23.2 sec". In other words, if the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is set to "23.2 sec", the average required time can be the same as that of the present embodiment. However, when such a configuration is compared with the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the configuration shown in the present embodiment is more advantageous in suppressing the above-mentioned delay time from becoming extremely long. Will be.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 198 to 201, it is compared with the one configured to gain time by lengthening the variable display time of the pattern in the through-gate display unit DS instead of the above-mentioned opening and ending. The group (a) in FIGS. 198 to 201 is a timing chart showing the flow of games in the comparison target, and the group (b) in FIGS. 198 to 201 is a timing chart showing the flow of games in the configuration shown in the present embodiment. ..

(Comparison 1: When the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is satisfied in the latter half of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the support non-winning in the display unit DS for through gate)
FIG. 198 shows the case where the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied while the pattern corresponding to the disengagement result (support non-winning) is variablely displayed on the through gate display unit DS. The flow of the game when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied in the latter half (immediately before the end) of the fluctuation display is illustrated.

In the inverse proportion shown in FIG. 198 (a), the support game is not provided with an opening and an ending. Therefore, when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of ts1, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit is as follows. That is, the time lag (delay time TW11) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of ts1) to the execution of the lottery in the high frequency support mode A (timing of ts2) = display for through gate. The remaining variable display time in the unit DS + the final display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS. Further, the time lag (delay time TW12) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of ts1) to the opening of the electric accessory 93 (timing of ts3) = through gate display unit DS. Remaining variation display time in + Confirmed display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS + Fluctuation display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + The fixed display time (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) is set. Assuming that the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied just before the end of the variable display and the remaining variable display time is almost 0 sec as described above, the delay time TW11 = about 0.5 sec and the delay time TW12 = about. It will be 1.5 sec.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the support game is provided with an opening and an ending. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of tt1 is as follows. It becomes the street. That is, the time lag (delay time TW13) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tt1) to the execution of the lottery in the high frequency support mode A (timing of tt2) = display for through gate. The remaining variable display time in the unit DS + the final display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS. Further, the time lag (delay time TW14) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tt1) to the opening of the electric accessory 93 (timing of tt3) = through gate display unit DS. Remaining variation display time in + Confirmed display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS + Fluctuation display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + Confirmed display time (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + opening execution time in the support game. Assuming that the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied just before the end of the variable display and the remaining variable display time is almost 0 sec as described above, the delay time TW12 = about 0.5 sec and the delay time TW13 = about. It will be 2 sec.

That is, there is no difference between the delay time TW11 and the delay time TW13, and the difference between the delay time TW12 and the delay time TW14 is small (0.5 sec).

(Comparison 2: When the transition condition to high frequency support mode A is satisfied in the first half of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the support non-winning in the display unit DS for through gate)
FIG. 199 shows the case where the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied while the pattern corresponding to the disengagement result (support non-winning) is variablely displayed on the through gate display unit DS. The flow of the game when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied in the first half (immediately after the start) of the fluctuation display is illustrated.

In the inverse proportion shown in FIG. 199 (a), the support game is not provided with an opening and an ending. Therefore, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefits when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of tu1 is as follows. That is, the time lag (delay time TW15) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tu1) to the execution of the lottery in the high frequency support mode A (timing of tu2) = display for through gate. The remaining variable display time in the unit DS + the final display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS. Further, the time lag (delay time TW16) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tu1) to the opening of the electric accessory 93 (timing of tu3) = through gate display unit DS. Remaining variation display time in + Confirmed display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS + Fluctuation display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + The fixed display time (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) is set. Assuming that the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied immediately after the start of the variable display as described above and the remaining variable display time is almost MAX, the delay time TW15 = about 23.7 sec and the delay time TW16 = about. It will be 24.7 sec.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the support game is provided with an opening and an ending. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 199 (b), the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of tv1 is as follows. It becomes the street. That is, the time lag (delay time TW17) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tv1) to the execution of the lottery in the high frequency support mode A (timing of tv2) = display for through gate. The remaining variable display time in the unit DS + the final display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS. Further, the time lag (delay time TW18) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tv1) to the opening of the electric accessory 93 (timing of tv3) = through gate display unit DS. Remaining variation display time in + Confirmed display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS + Fluctuation display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + Confirmed display time (corresponding to high frequency support mode A) + opening execution time in the support game. Assuming that the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied immediately after the start of the variable display and the remaining variable display time is almost MAX as described above, the delay time TW17 = about 15.4 sec, the delay time TW18 = about. It will be 16.9 sec.

That is, the difference between the delay times TW15 and TW16 and the delay times TW17 and TW18 is remarkable (7.8 sec, 8.3 sec).

(Comparison 3: When the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied in the latter half of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the support winning in the display unit DS for the through gate)
In FIG. 200, if the transition condition to the high-frequency support mode A is satisfied while the pattern corresponding to the winning result (support winning) is variablely displayed on the through-gate display unit DS, the variation is described in detail. The flow of the game when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied in the latter half of the display (immediately before the end) is illustrated.

In the inverse proportion shown in FIG. 200 (a), the support game is not provided with an opening and an ending. Therefore, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of tw1 is as follows. That is, the time lag (delay time TW12) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tw1) to the opening of the electric accessory 93 (timing of tw2) = display for through gate. The remaining variable display time in the unit DS + the final display time of the pattern in the through gate display unit DS. Assuming that the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied just before the end of the variation display and the remaining variation display time is approximately 0 sec as described above, the delay time TW19 = about 0.5 sec.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the support game is provided with an opening and an ending. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 200 (b), the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of tx1 is as follows. It becomes the street. That is, the time lag (delay time TW20) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tx1) to the opening of the electric accessory 93 (timing of tx2) = through gate display unit DS. The remaining variable display time in the above + the fixed display time of the pattern in the display unit DS for the through gate + the execution time of the opening in the support game. Assuming that the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied just before the end of the variation display and the remaining variation display time is approximately 0 sec as described above, the delay time TW19 = about 1 sec.

That is, the difference between the delay time TW18 and the delay time TW19 is small (0.5 sec).

(Comparison 4: When the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied in the first half of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the support winning in the display unit DS for the through gate)
In FIG. 201, if the transition condition to the high-frequency support mode A is satisfied while the pattern corresponding to the winning result (support winning) is variablely displayed on the through-gate display unit DS, the variation is described in detail. The flow of the game when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied in the first half (immediately after the start) of the display is illustrated.

In the inverse proportion shown in FIG. 201 (a), the support game is not provided with an opening and an ending. Therefore, when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of ty1, the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit is as follows. That is, the time lag (delay time TW21) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of ty1) to the opening of the electric accessory 93 (timing of ty2) = through gate display unit DS. The remaining variable display time in the above + the fixed display time of the pattern in the display unit DS for the through gate. As described above, assuming that the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied immediately after the start of the variation display and the remaining variation display time is almost MAX, the delay time TW21 = about 23.7 sec.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the support game is provided with an opening and an ending. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 201 (b), the time lag (delay time) until the player can enjoy the benefit when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied at the timing of tz1 is as follows. It becomes the street. That is, the time lag (delay time TW22) from the establishment of the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A (timing of tz1) to the opening of the electric accessory 93 (timing of tz2) = through gate display unit DS. The remaining variable display time in the above + the fixed display time of the pattern in the display unit DS for the through gate + the execution time of the opening in the support game. As described above, assuming that the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied immediately after the start of the variable display and the remaining variable display time is approximately MAX, the delay time TW22 = about 16 sec.

That is, the difference between the delay time TW21 and the delay time TW22 becomes remarkable (7.7 sec).

According to the 21st embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

If a big hit result is obtained, the game shifts to the high frequency support mode via the special game state, and if a special game result is obtained, the game shifts to the high frequency support mode without going through the special game state. For example, it is possible to diversify the flow of the game when changing the support mode to a higher one, and to contribute to suppressing the monotony of the game. Here, in the case of shifting from the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode to the second normal gaming state or the third gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode B via the special gaming state, the special gaming state is used. You can get a lot of balls. In other words, the player can enjoy the benefits of the big hit result in the special gaming state. For this reason, even if the period from returning to the normal gaming state (particularly the third normal gaming state) to being able to enjoy another benefit is extended to some extent, it is a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. It is hard to become. On the other hand, in the case of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A as a result of special deviation, the transition to the fourth normal gaming state is internally performed. Nevertheless, the smoothness of the game progress is reduced by extending the time (delay time) until the benefits can be enjoyed. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play. Further, in order to secure the superiority of the third normal gaming state over the first normal gaming state, it is not preferable that the electric accessory 93 is frequently opened in the first normal gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of opening, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS, but with such measures, the variation display time of the pattern can be taken. As the length increases, the maximum delay time can also increase.

Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the open state during the first normal gaming state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variation display time of the pattern in the display unit DS for the through gate is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay time into a variable display side and an ending side (for example, smoothing), the maximum value of the delay time can be reduced. Therefore, the time until it becomes possible to enjoy the benefits of the 4th normal gaming state while suppressing the frequent switching to the open state during the 1st normal gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the 4th normal gaming state. Can be suppressed from being delayed (it can contribute to smoothing the progress of the game). Further, in the present embodiment, in particular, the execution time of the ending part when the support game is started during the first normal game state is displayed by the through gate display unit DS during the first normal game state. The period is shorter than the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time when is started. With such a configuration, the above effect can be suitably exhibited.

During the ending part, it is more likely that the player will be given the impression that the timing at which the support game is stopped and the benefits can be enjoyed is unnecessarily delayed. On the other hand, it is difficult to give such an impression while the variable display of the pattern is being executed. Therefore, if the execution time of the ending part when the support game is started during the first normal game state does not exceed the variable display time when the variable display of the pattern is started during the first normal game state. , The chance that the transition to the fourth normal gaming state occurs during the ending part is less than the chance that it occurs during the variable display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS. This can alleviate the above concerns.

When the above delay occurs, it is feared that the stress of the player will be locally increased by collecting the delay. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the above concern can be alleviated by arranging the opening part and the ending part before and after the main part and sharing the delay function in each of these parts.

If the support game corresponds to the 4th normal game state when the transition to the 4th normal game state is made during the variable display of the pattern of the through gate display unit DS in the 1st normal game state (corresponding to the winning result). Become. By configuring the configuration so that the switch to the open state corresponding to the fourth normal game state is not carried over from the next support lottery to the winning result, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the player's satisfaction. On the other hand, when the support game has already started (during the support game) and the state shifts to the fourth normal game state, it is necessary to win the subsequent support lottery and execute the support game. Occurs. In this way, since the support game is executed through at least one support lottery and the variable display of the pattern on the display unit DS for the through gate, it is compared with the case of shifting to the fourth normal game state during the variable display of the pattern. And the delay time can be long. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the execution time of the ending part when the support game is started during the first normal game state is started when the variable display of the pattern is started during the first normal game state. By configuring the time to be shorter than the sum of the variable display time and the confirmed display time, a transition to the third normal game state during the support game occurs, and the support game is executed by winning the support lottery thereafter. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the time until the electric accessory 93 is opened (that is, the time until the benefit can be experienced) becomes extremely long.

When the ending part is simply provided, it is assumed that the existence of the ending part hinders the smooth progress of the game in the fourth normal gaming state. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, such a concern can be dispelled by the configuration in which the execution time of the ending part is shortened in the fourth normal gaming state.

When the support game is started during the first normal game state, the execution time of the ending part constituting the support game is longer than the execution time of the main part constituting the support game, and the support is supported during the fourth normal game state. When the game is started, the execution time of the ending part constituting the support game is shorter than the execution time of the main part constituting the support game. In this way, when the support game is started during the 4th normal game state, the main part becomes dominant, and when the support game is started during the 1st normal game state, the ending part becomes dominant. With such a configuration, the effects shown in the feature Y2 and the like can be more preferably exhibited.

<Modification 1>
In the 21st embodiment, the short opening is longer than the sum (15.5 sec) of the variable display time (15 sec) and the definite display time (0.5 sec) of the pattern of the through gate display unit DS in the low frequency support mode. The execution time (14.9 sec) of the ending part of the time is set to be slightly shorter, but the configuration is not limited to this. At least the maximum time until the benefits of the high-frequency support mode A can be enjoyed is when the transition condition to the high-frequency support mode A is satisfied during the variable display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS and during the support game. The difference may be such that the player recognizes the same as the case where the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied. For example, the difference can be extended to 1.5 sec (about 10% of the above sum). Further, the sum (15.5 sec) of the variable display time (15 sec) and the confirmed display time (0.5 sec) of the pattern of the through gate display unit DS in the low frequency support mode, and the execution time of the ending part at the time of opening the short (15.5 sec). It may be configured to be the same as 14.9 sec).

The sum (15.5 sec) of the variable display time (15 sec) and the confirmed display time (0.5 sec) of the pattern of the through gate display unit DS in the low frequency support mode, and the execution time of the support game when the short is opened (15.5 sec). Although it is the same as 15.5 sec), the support at the time of short opening is more than the sum of the variable display time (15 sec) and the confirmed display time (0.5 sec) of the pattern of the through gate display unit DS in the low frequency support mode. It may be changed so that the execution time of the game is shorter.

<Modification 2>
In the 21st embodiment described above, the support game started by winning the support lottery is composed of three parts, an opening part, a main part, and an ending part, but this is changed to make the support game the main part and the support game. It is also possible to configure it with an ending part.

It is also possible to configure the support game with an opening part and a main part, but in such a configuration, the execution time of the opening part is the execution of the opening part shown in the 21st embodiment. It is preferable to change it so that it is the sum of the time and the execution time of the ending part.

<Modification 3>
In the 21st embodiment described above, the execution time of the ending part in the support game is biased to be longer than the execution time of the opening part, but this is changed and the execution time of the opening part in the support game is set to the ending part. The execution time may be biased to be longer than the execution time of, or the execution time of the ending part and the execution time of the opening part in the support game may be aligned to be the same length.

<Modification example 4>
In the 21st embodiment, when the support game is executed during the low frequency support mode, the execution time of the ending part in the support game is set to 14.9 sec, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. When a support game is executed during the low frequency support mode, a plurality of candidates may be provided as the execution time of the ending part in the support game. For example, it is possible to make the execution time of the ending part different depending on the type when the support lottery is won.

<Modification 5>
The specific structure of the electric accessory 93 that influences the winning of the second operating port 92 is arbitrary. For example, the number of movable pieces as an opening / closing member (shutter) may be one. It is also possible to make the movable piece a slide type instead of a rotary type. Further, the operating direction of the movable piece may be changed from the direction parallel to the front surface of the game board 80a to the thickness direction of the game board 80a.

<Modification 6>
In the 21st embodiment, the mode of the support game is the timing at which the final display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is completed (completed), that is, the start timing of the support game, but the present invention is not limited to this. No. For example, after the opening is common to all support modes, the mode of the support game (opening / closing mode and execution time of the ending part) is determined at the end timing of the opening part in the support game, that is, the start timing of the main part. It is also possible to configure it. Further, it is also possible to determine the mode of the support game at the timing when the definite display of the pattern is started on the display unit DS for the through gate or the timing when the variable display of the pattern is started.

<Modification 7>
The variation display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is in the high frequency support mode A than the final display time of the pattern when the variation display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is started during the low frequency support mode. The final display time of the pattern when it is started in may be shortened. In the high frequency support mode A, the winning probability of the support lottery is 1/2 as in the low frequency support mode, and even if the transition condition of the high frequency support mode A is satisfied, there is a possibility that the support non-winning will continue. Therefore, if the fixed display time is shortened as described above, the time lag from switching to the high frequency support mode A until the electric accessory 93 is actually released can be reduced. This is preferable in order to facilitate the progress of the game and reduce the stress of the player.

<Modification 8>
In the 21st embodiment, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode A (both are 1/2), but the probability is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the winning probability of the support lottery in the high frequency support mode A higher than the winning probability of the support lottery in the low frequency support mode.

<Modification 9>
In the 21st embodiment, the execution time of the ending part when the support game is executed during the high frequency support mode A and the execution of the ending part when the support game is executed during the high frequency support mode B Although the time is the same, the execution time of the ending part when the support game is executed during the high frequency support mode A and the execution time of the ending part when the support game is executed during the high frequency support mode B And may be specified individually. That is, the execution time of the ending part may be different between the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B. In this case, it is preferable that the high-frequency support mode A has a shorter execution time of the ending part than the high-frequency support mode B.

<Modification 10>
Similar to other embodiments, a difference in advantage may be provided between the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92. For example, it is possible to make the advantage of the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92 to which the electric accessory 93 is attached higher than the advantage of the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91.

<22nd embodiment>
In the 21st embodiment, when the support game is started during the low frequency support mode, "0.5 sec" is set as the execution time of the opening part. This opening part also has a function of suppressing an excessively long delay time that occurs when the transition condition to the high frequency support mode A is satisfied. It is preferable to secure time in both the opening part and the ending part in order to relieve local stress. However, the existence of such an opening part becomes terrible for the player who expects the opening as soon as possible when the support lottery is won. One of the features of this embodiment is that the device is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 202, focusing on the differences from the 21st embodiment.

Also in this embodiment, the support game is started at the timing when the support lottery is won and the final display of the pattern corresponding to the result is completed (completed). Here, when the support game is started in the situation where the support is low frequency, "0 sec" is set as the execution time of the opening part and "15.4 sec" is set as the execution time of the ending part. Will be done. That is, in the present embodiment, the opening does not occur when the short is opened, and the main part is immediately executed. Then, by adding the time corresponding to the execution time of the opening part shown in the 21st embodiment to the execution time of the ending part, the execution time of the support game at the time of opening the short is the same as that of the 21st embodiment. It is configured to be the same (15.5 sec).

On the other hand, when the support game is started under the situation of high frequency support A and B, "0.8 sec" is set as the execution time of the opening part and the execution time of the ending part is set. "0.2 sec" is set. That is, in the present embodiment, the magnitude relationship between the execution time of the opening part and the execution time of the ending part is reversed at the time of long opening.

<Modification 1>
In the 22nd embodiment, the execution time of the opening part is set to 0 sec, that is, the opening part is not executed in the support game corresponding to the short opening, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if it is specified to be shorter than the execution time of the ending part (15.4 sec) and the execution time of the opening part (0.8 sec) in the support game for long opening, and the support game for short opening is sufficient. However, it does not deny the structure in which the opening part is executed in a short time.

<Modification 2>
In the 22nd embodiment, the execution time of the ending part is set to 0.2 sec in the support game corresponding to the long opening, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the support game corresponding to the long opening, the execution time of the ending part may be set to 0 sec, that is, the ending part may not be executed.

<23rd embodiment>
In the 21st embodiment and the 22nd embodiment, the opening part is executed even at the time of long opening. As already explained, even when the low-frequency support mode is internally switched to the high-frequency support mode A, it is necessary to win the support lottery by the time the electric accessory 93 is actually opened. However, in the high frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the support lottery is halved as in the low frequency support mode. That is, if the support lottery is continuously missed, the time until the electric accessory 93 is opened may be extended. This can reduce the satisfaction of the player and hinder the improvement of the attention to the game. One of the features of this embodiment is that the device is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the 21st embodiment.

In the present embodiment, when the support game (short opening) is started during the low frequency support mode, the opening part is executed as in the 21st embodiment. On the other hand, when the support game (long open) is started during the high frequency support modes A and B, the execution time of the opening part is 0 sec, and the opening part is not substantially executed. With such a configuration, during the low-frequency support mode, the opening part is used to prevent the maximum value of the above-mentioned delay time from becoming excessively large, and the high-frequency support mode A is entered during the support game. When the support game corresponding to the long opening is executed by winning the support lottery after the transition condition is satisfied, the time from the establishment of the transition condition to the opening of the electric accessory 93 can be shortened.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the variable display time table referred to in the first normal game state and the variable display time table referred to in the fourth normal game state are shared, but the first normal game The variable display time table referred to in the state and the variable display time table referred to in the fourth normal gaming state may be provided separately. That is, the range and breakdown of the variable display time set in the first normal gaming state may be different from the range and breakdown of the variable display time set in the fourth normal gaming state.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, if the electric accessory 93 is in the open state when switching from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 93 is forcibly switched to the closed state. As a result, it is configured to avoid further winning of the second operating port 92. In order to avoid winning a prize in the second operating port 92 after switching to the low frequency support mode, for example, when switching from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, the game times (when the end reference number of times is reached) that triggers the switching. It is also possible to switch from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode before the end of the game. Specifically, it is configured to switch from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at a predetermined timing during variable display in the game times when the end reference number of times is reached, or it is confirmed by the game times when the end reference number of times is reached. It is also possible to switch from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the timing when the display is started.

(3) In the configuration in which the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 results in a special loss, the probability of the special loss based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second It is also possible to make a difference from the probability of becoming a special deviation based on the winning of the operating port. For example, the probability of becoming a special deviation based on the winning of the first operating port 91 may be lower than the probability of becoming a special deviation based on the winning of the second operating port 91, or the probability of becoming a special deviation may be lower. The probability of becoming a special deviation based on the winning may be higher than the probability of becoming a special deviation based on the winning of the second operating port.

(4) If the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special disconnection, the gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by the special disconnection based on the number of times the end reference number has been reached (for example). The configuration is such that the game state shifts from the 4th normal game state) to the game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode (for example, the 1st normal game state), and then shifts to the game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. It is optional whether or not to intervene the game state corresponding to the support mode. For example, if the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special disconnection, the gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by the special disconnection is reached based on the number of times the end reference number has been reached (for example, the first). It is also possible to shift from the 4 normal game state) to the game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode (for example, the 4th normal game state) triggered by reaching the ceiling. That is, when the ceiling is reached during the high frequency support mode triggered by the special deviation, when the end reference number of times is reached, a gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) is intervened. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode is continued without any problem.

(5) If a special deviation occurs in a game that reaches the ceiling, the configuration may be such that the mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode when the ceiling is reached (the configuration gives priority to reaching the ceiling), or the special deviation is an opportunity. It may be configured to shift to the high frequency support mode (configuration giving priority to special loss).

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the game count counter is updated regardless of which of the game times related to the first operating port 91 and the game times related to the second operating port 92 is executed. It is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the game count counter to be updated when the game times related to the first operating port 91 are executed, while not being updated when the game times related to the second operating port 92 are executed. .. Further, it is also possible to configure the game count counter to be updated when the game times related to the second operating port 92 are executed, but not updated when the game times related to the first operating port 91 are executed. Is.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game count is counted by the game count counter after the high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling ends. Is started, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit (ceiling), it is possible to start counting the game times by the game count counter from the next game round when the ceiling is reached.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the game count counter is updated (subtracted by "1") at the start of the game round, but the update timing of the value of the game count counter is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to configure the game count counter to be updated (subtract "1") at the timing when the confirmation display is executed or when the game round ends.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the base (award for the number of shots of the game ball) is set so that the number of balls held is slightly reduced regardless of which of the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B is supported. The ratio of the number of balls) was set, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the base so that the number of balls held is slightly increased for at least one of the support modes.

(10) The location of the variable winning device 83 in the gaming area PE is arbitrary. For example, when a left route that detours the variable display unit 85 arranged in the center of the game board 80a from the left side and a right route that detours from the right side are provided as the flow path of the game ball in the game area PE. , The variable winning device 83 may be arranged on one route and restricted so that the game ball fired on the other route cannot reach the variable winning device 83.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, based on the winning / failing lottery (determination processing) performed in the main control device 162, the pattern variation display on the actuating port display units D1 and D2 and the design on the symbol display device 95 are displayed. The configuration is such that the variable display is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. Prior to the winning / failing lottery (determination process) in the main control device 162, it is also possible to start the variable display of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 95.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the change display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is started based on the support lottery (determination process) performed in the main control device 162. Not limited. It is also possible to start the variable display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS prior to the support lottery (determination process) in the main control device 162.

(13) It is also possible to execute an effect linked to the through gate display unit DS on another display device such as a symbol display device, and notify the player of the result of the support lottery by the effect.

(14) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated when a ball enters and becomes a big hit, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. As a result, the present invention is also a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out a medal when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window after the reel is stopped. Can be applied.

Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable / closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The following feature A group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features A1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
When the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the determination by the determination means, the first transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode via the special gaming state.
When the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the determination by the determination means, the second transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Further, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the switching control mode is switched to a higher-level one, the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. The frequency with which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state differs depending on the presence or absence. For example, by giving preferential treatment to the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in investment before shifting to the special gaming state (suppress the decrease in the motivation for playing). , The sharpness of the game can be enhanced by giving preferential treatment to the switching control mode when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained. In particular, if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information that is not the trigger for mass ejection (the trigger for transition to the special game state), the game is promptly changed to the third switching mode. It is possible to improve the satisfaction of the person.

It is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Feature A2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Further, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the switching control mode is switched to a higher-level one, the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. The frequency with which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state differs depending on the presence or absence. For example, by giving preferential treatment to the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in investment before shifting to the special gaming state (suppress the decrease in the motivation for playing). , The sharpness of the game can be enhanced by giving preferential treatment to the switching control mode when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained. In particular, if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information that is not the trigger for mass ejection (the trigger for transition to the special gaming state), the configuration is such that the player promptly switches to the third gaming state (third switching mode). Thereby, the satisfaction level of the player can be improved.

It is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Feature A3. As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the first determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
In both the low probability mode and the high probability mode, the probability that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained by the determination by the determination means is configured to be the same.
The first gaming state corresponds to the first switching mode and the low probability mode.
The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the third gaming state corresponds to the third switching mode and the low probability mode.

If the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the first gaming state, the process shifts to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state. At this time, although the low probability mode is inherited as the determination mode, the switching control mode is changed from the first switching mode to the third switching mode. As a result, it becomes possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while suppressing investment, and a certain kind of player rescue function is exhibited. When such a relief function is exerted, the special game state is not passed through as described above, so that the time required for the function to be exerted can be shortened as much as possible, so that the game is unnecessarily delayed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to give the impression as if it were.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A3, wherein the transition required period by the second transition means is configured to be shorter than the transition required period by the first transition means. ..

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is promptly changed to the third switching mode, and the benefit of the above-mentioned relief function is enjoyed. The time lag until it is possible can be reduced. This is preferable in order to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play, aiming for a determination result (transition to a special gaming state) corresponding to the first determination information.

Feature A5. The variable mechanism control means receives the variable mechanism when the variable mechanism is won by a lottery (support lottery) based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion (for example, a through gate 84) provided in the game area. It is configured to switch to the state,
The second switching mode is configured so that the winning probability in the lottery is changed to be higher than that of the first switching mode.
The third switching mode is configured so that the winning probability in the lottery is the same as that in the first switching mode, but the required period from winning in the lottery to the acceptance state is shortened. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A4.

As shown in this feature, when the first switching mode → the second switching mode is selected, the winning probability in the lottery based on the passage of the passing portion is changed, and when the first switching mode → the third switching mode is selected, the relevant case is concerned. The time required from winning to being accepted is shortened without changing the winning probability. If the configuration is such that the second switching mode and the third switching mode are differentiated by using different parameters as described above, the technical idea shown in the feature A1 or the like can be suitably realized.

Feature A6. The second switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means is higher than that in the third switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A5, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature A6, in the second switching mode, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired, that is, the game balls, as compared with the third switching mode. The value obtained by dividing the number of payouts by the number of shots of the game ball (hereinafter referred to as the base) becomes higher, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. That is, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained and the mode shifts to the second switching mode via the special gaming state, there is a chance to acquire a large number of balls. On the other hand, in the third switching mode, although the above-mentioned base is given preferential treatment over the first switching mode, the degree of the base is suppressed to be lower than that of the second switching mode, so that the relief function becomes excessive. Can be suppressed. With such a configuration, the sharpness of the game can be enhanced by using a plurality of switching modes together.

Feature A7. The third switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means is higher than that in the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A5, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature A7, in the third switching mode, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired, that is, the game balls, as compared with the second switching mode. The value obtained by dividing the number of payouts by the number of shots of the game ball (hereinafter referred to as the base) becomes higher, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. In other words, if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the player shifts to the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state, a large number of balls cannot be expected at that time, but the decrease in the number of balls held is greatly suppressed. It is possible to ask for an opportunity to acquire a large number of balls that have a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information. With such a configuration, the soundness of the game can be suitably improved.

Feature A8. The first switching mode is when the number of times the game is executed in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode becomes the end reference number (for example, 40 times) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7, which is configured to shift to the corresponding predetermined gaming state.

By setting an upper limit (end reference number of times) for the number of games in a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode, it is possible to return from the third switching mode to the first switching mode, and the third switching mode has been established. It is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the tension of the subsequent game.

Feature A9. As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the first determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
In both the low probability mode and the high probability mode, the probability that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained by the determination by the determination means is configured to be the same.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and
A second gaming state (for example, a third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode, and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode and the low probability mode is provided.
The first transition means is configured to shift to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state. And
The second transition means shifts to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state. It is configured to make
A third transition to the first gaming state when the number of times the game is executed in the second gaming state reaches the end reference number of times (for example, 40 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information. Means (a function of shifting from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 at the time of time saving digestion) and
When the number of times the game is executed in the third game state reaches the end reference number of times (for example, 40 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the fourth transition to the first game state is performed. Described in any one of the features A1 to A8, which comprises means (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 at the time of time saving digestion). Game machine.

According to this feature, an upper limit (end reference number of times) is set for the number of games in the third game state, and when the upper limit is reached, demotion (return) from the third game state to the first game state may occur. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the tension of the game after the transition to the third gaming state.

Further, the end reference number of times is set for each of the second gaming state and the third gaming state. It is possible to contribute to the diversification of games by providing a transition route to a limited advantageous state with an upper limit on the number of games, either via or not via the special game state. In such a configuration, the base in the third switching mode may be configured so that the difference from the base in the second switching mode is smaller than the difference from the base in the first switching mode. preferable.

Feature A10. The number of end reference times, which is the standard for shifting to the first gaming state by the fourth transition means, is smaller than the number of end reference times, which is the standard for shifting to the first gaming state by the third transition means. The gaming machine according to feature A9, which comprises means for setting.

As shown in this feature, setting the end reference number of times in the third gaming state to be less than the end reference number of times in the second gaming state raises the frequency of transition to the third gaming state and raises the frequency of transition to the third gaming state. It is advantageous for increasing the frequency of migration. This is preferable in suppressing the monotonicization of the game.

Feature A11. The number of termination reference times, which is the standard for shifting to the first gaming state by the fourth transition means, is set to be the same as the number of termination reference times, which is the reference for shifting to the first gaming state by the third transition means. The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that it has means for playing pachinko and pachislot machines.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the end reference number of times in the third gaming state and the end reference number of times in the second gaming state are aligned, the transition to one gaming state (second gaming state, third gaming state) is made. You can make it look as if there are multiple routes. This is preferable in order to realize the diversification of the game and to prevent it from becoming a factor that causes confusion for the player.

Feature A12. In the first gaming state, when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the fifth game state is shifted to. Transition method and
When shifting to the third gaming state by the fifth transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the third gaming state does not become a determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the end reference number of times (for example, 400 times). ), A sixth transition means (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 at the time of shortened digestion) is provided.
The number of termination reference times, which is the standard for shifting to the first gaming state by the sixth transition means, is larger than the number of termination reference times, which is the reference for shifting to the first gaming state by the fourth transition means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A9 to the feature A11, which is characterized in that it has a configuration to be set.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, and the number of times the game is executed during the first gaming state is the upper limit number (ceiling). In that case, the game shifts to the third gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode. In this way, excessive investment can be suppressed by relieving the player in the third gaming state as a judgment result that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state or reaching the ceiling as the opportunity to shift to the third gaming state. Can contribute. In particular, the game is diversified by relatively increasing the number of end reference times set when the player reaches the ceiling and relatively decreasing the number of end reference times set when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is used. And the enhancement of the relief function can be suitably realized.

Feature A13. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
A second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state.
In the first gaming state, when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the game shifts to the third gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a means to make it.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). The switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when the special game state) is reached or when the number of times the game is executed reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached) during the first game state. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher one, and to contribute to suppressing the monotony of the game. Further, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the switching control mode is switched to a higher-level one, the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. The frequency with which the variable mechanism is in the accepted state differs depending on whether it reaches the ceiling. As a result, further diversification of games will be realized. In particular, it is possible to contribute to the suppression of excessive investment by relieving the player in the third gaming state as a judgment result that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state or as reaching the ceiling when the transition to the third gaming state occurs.

It is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Feature A14. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
A means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state.
In the first gaming state, when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the game shifts to the third gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a means to make it.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and the game times are executed during the first game state. If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when the number of times reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher one It can be diversified and contribute to suppressing the monotony of games. Further, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the switching control mode is switched to a higher-level one, the variable mechanism is accepted depending on whether the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the ceiling is reached. The frequency of the state will be different. As a result, further diversification of games will be realized. In particular, it is possible to contribute to the suppression of excessive investment by relieving the player in the third gaming state by taking the opportunity to shift to the third gaming state as reaching the ceiling.

It is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

The technical ideas shown in the above features A1 to A12 may be applied to the features A13 to A14.

<Characteristic B group>
The following feature B group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and problems that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Feature B1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, the first type gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and the second type gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode (for example, the second normal gaming state). The third normal game state and the fourth normal game state) are provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, the first transition means (main control device) for shifting to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state. In the MPU 402 of 162, the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state triggered by the jackpot result) and
A second transition means for shifting to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state. (A function to shift from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger of the special deviation result).
After shifting to the second type gaming state by the second transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the second type gaming state is the end reference number (for example, 40) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information. 3rd transition means for transitioning to the 1st type gaming state (function of shifting from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 with the time saving digestion as an opportunity) When,
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the game goes through the special game state. It is provided with a fourth transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).
The fourth type of the fourth transfer means is at least the second type when the number of executions of the game times after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit number during the second type game state transferred by the second transfer means. A gaming machine characterized in that the transition to the type 2 gaming state triggered by the arrival of the upper limit number of times is delayed until the number of executions of the gaming times in the gaming state reaches the end reference number.

According to the feature B1, even if the game proceeds while the transition to the special game state (judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not established, the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the end of the special game state When the upper limit of the number of games to be played later is reached (ceiling is reached), the game may shift to the second type game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. By switching to the high frequency switching mode, the frequency of entering the starting ball is increased, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the soundness of the game. However, as described above, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information and the ceiling arrival are used together as an opportunity to shift to the second type gaming state, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the second type gaming state, the ceiling arrival is invalidated, or the second type gaming state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is forcibly terminated. It is feared that some of the benefits that the player should have originally enjoyed will disappear, and the satisfaction of the player will be greatly reduced. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the type 2 gaming state, the ceiling is reached at least until the number of times the game is executed in the type 2 gaming state reaches the end reference number. The transition to the second-class gaming state will be delayed. This can dispel the above concerns and contribute to improving the satisfaction of the player.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launch capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player. A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a means (game ball launching mechanism 110) and a ball entering a ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92 and variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with (payout device 224), and special information (holding information) is acquired when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry section. Special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and acquisition information storage means (main control device) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means. The reserved ball storage area 432) in the RAM 404 of 162) and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The determination means (a function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the determination means is performed, and the determination is made prior to the determination by the determination means or by the determination means. Based on this, the game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. The predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1 and D2) are controlled so that the game rounding operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game time control means (a function of executing a game time control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and as the predetermined determination information, the first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second determination. Information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special deviation result) is provided, the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means ends. A special game state transition means (mainly) for shifting the game state to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). The function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the control device 162), the acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the entry state of the game ball from the acceptance state. The variable ball entry unit (variable winning device 83) as the ball entry unit, which can be switched to the non-acceptance state (closed state), which is difficult to play, and the variable ball entry unit are received when the game shifts to the special gaming state. A control means for a variable ball entry unit that switches between a state and a non-acceptance state (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and an acceptance state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the start ball entry unit. ) And a variable mechanism (electric accessory 93) that can be switched to a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state, and a control means for the variable mechanism (main control) that controls the variable mechanism. The MPU 402 of the device 162 is provided with a function for executing electric service support processing), and as a switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a first-class switching mode (low frequency support mode) is provided. ) And a second-class switching mode (high-frequency support mode) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first-class switching mode. When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the switching mode, the predetermined game corresponding to the second type switching mode is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the state (a function of transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger) and the first transition means. When shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the type 1 switching mode, the number of times the game is executed in the predetermined gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the end reference number (for example, 40 times) is used. A second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first type switching mode (from the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 to the first normal gaming state). The second function when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information. It is equipped with a third transition means (a function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling) that shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the type switching mode. The third transition means is a game rotation during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second type switching mode, which is migrated with the determination result corresponding to the second determination information as an opportunity. When the number of times of execution reaches the upper limit, at least until the number of times of execution of the game in the predetermined game state reaches the end reference number, the predetermined number of times corresponding to the second type switching mode is triggered. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to delay the transition to the gaming state. It is also possible to say.

Feature B2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second / third normal gaming state). ) And a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state. The function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state in the MPU 402 triggered by the jackpot result) and
A second transition means (mainly) for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state. In the MPU 402 of the control device 162, the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation result) and
In the third gaming state transferred by the second transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the third gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the end reference number of times (for example, 40 times). In the case of, a third transition means (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for shortening the time)
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the game goes through the special game state. It is provided with a fourth transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).
The fourth transition means is at least in the third gaming state when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit during the third gaming state transitioned by the second transition means. A gaming machine characterized in that the transition to the third gaming state is delayed when the upper limit is reached until the number of executions of the gaming times reaches the ending reference number.

According to the feature B2, even if the game proceeds while the transition to the special game state (judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not established, the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the end of the special game state When the upper limit of the number of games to be played later is reached (ceiling is reached), the game may shift to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode. By switching to the third switching mode, the frequency of entering the starting ball entry section increases, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the soundness of the game. However, as described above, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information and the ceiling arrival are used together as an opportunity to shift to the third gaming state, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the ceiling reach is invalidated, or if the third game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is forcibly terminated. It is feared that some of the benefits that the player should have originally enjoyed will disappear, and the satisfaction of the player will be greatly reduced. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the ceiling is reached at least until the number of times the game is executed in the third game state reaches the end reference number. The transition to the third gaming state will be delayed. This can dispel the above concerns and contribute to improving the satisfaction of the player.

Feature B3. The switching mode of the variable mechanism when the fourth transition means shifts to the third gaming state is the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism when the second transition means shifts to the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature B2, which is characterized in that it is configured as follows.

As shown in feature B2, when the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state and the transition to the third gaming state triggered by the reaching of the ceiling is performed, the switching modes of the variable mechanisms are arranged so as to be the same. It is possible to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being inferior to the behavior up to that point.

Feature B4. The end reference number of times is the first end reference number of times.
In the third gaming state transferred by the fourth transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the third gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the second end reference number (for example, 400). When the number of times is reached), the fifth transition means (function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is performed. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, wherein the first end reference number of times is specified to be less than the second end reference number of times.

When the delay function shown in the feature B2 is provided, it is assumed that if the benefit of reaching the ceiling is immediately terminated after a large delay, it will be a factor that impairs the player's willingness to play. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the first end reference number <the second end reference number, excessive delay is suppressed and the impression that the benefit after reaching the ceiling is obsolete is suppressed. be able to.

Feature B5. When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit during the third gaming state shifted by the second transition means, the fourth transition means is in the third gaming state. After the transition to the first gaming state by the third transition means triggered by the number of times the game has been executed reaches the end reference number, the transition to the third gaming state triggered by the arrival of the upper limit number of times is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B2 to the feature B4, which is characterized by having a configuration.

As shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state, the game is configured by shifting from the third gaming state to the first gaming state and then returning to the third gaming state. It is possible to add an accent to the rhythm of the game and contribute to suppressing the monotonization of the game.

Feature B6. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit during the third gaming state shifted by the second transition means, the fourth transition means is in the third gaming state. After the transition to the first gaming state by the third transition means triggered by the number of times the game has been executed reaches the end reference number, the transition to the third gaming state triggered by the arrival of the upper limit number of times is performed. It is composed and
The number of games executed during the first gaming state shifted by the third transition means under the situation where the transition to the third gaming state by the fourth transition means is delayed is determined by the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B2 to the feature B4, which is specified so as to be less than the storage upper limit of memorable special information.

As shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state, the game is configured by shifting from the third gaming state to the first gaming state and then returning to the third gaming state. It is possible to add an accent to the rhythm of the game and contribute to suppressing the monotonization of the game. Further, in the configuration in which the first gaming state is intervened, there is a high possibility that the player will be given the impression that the enjoyment of the benefit is unreasonably delayed by repeating the game times in the first gaming state. .. In particular, it is assumed that the number of special information stored due to the intervention of the first game state becomes 0 and the continuous progress of the game times is interrupted, so that such an impression becomes stronger. In this regard, by limiting the number of games executed in the intervening first game state to be less than the upper limit of storage of special information, it is possible to prevent the continuation of game times from being interrupted when returning to the third game state. However, the above concerns can be preferably dispelled.

Feature B7. When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit during the third gaming state shifted by the second transition means, the fourth transition means is in the third gaming state. After the transition to the first gaming state by the third transition means triggered by the number of executions of the gaming times becoming the end reference number, and after the execution of one gaming number in the first gaming state, the said The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B2 to the feature B4, which is configured to shift to the third gaming state when the upper limit of the number of times is reached.

As shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state, the game is configured by shifting from the third gaming state to the first gaming state and then returning to the third gaming state. It is possible to add an accent to the rhythm of the game and contribute to suppressing the monotonization of the game. Further, in the configuration in which the first gaming state is intervened, there is a high possibility that the player will be given the impression that the enjoyment of the benefit is unreasonably delayed by repeating the game times in the first gaming state. .. In this respect, if the configuration is such that the game returns to the third game state after one game round, the above concern can be suitably dispelled.

Feature B8. The feature is that the notification means for notifying the transition to the third gaming state during the first gaming state in which the transition to the third gaming state is delayed by the fourth transition means is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of B5 and B7.

The configuration that secures an opportunity to notify the transition to the third gaming state during the first gaming state encourages attention to each game during the third gaming state before the transition to the first gaming state. Preferred above.

Feature B9. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The game rotation control means has an operation period setting means capable of setting an operation period of the game rotation operation according to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The operation period setting means stores the game times executed during the first gaming state in which the transition to the third gaming state is delayed by the fourth transition means in the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature B8, which is configured to set a predetermined operation period regardless of the number of special information.

As shown in the feature B5 and the like, in the configuration of returning to the third gaming state via the first gaming state, the operation period of the gaming rotation operation of the gaming times executed during the first gaming state varies. The following inconveniences may occur. That is, when the operation period is relatively short, the time for notifying the player of the transition to the third gaming state is insufficient, and when the operation period is relatively long, the transition to the third gaming state is unreasonable. It makes it easier to give the player the impression of being delayed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the game times during the first game state in which the transition to the third game state is delayed are predetermined regardless of the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. As a configuration for setting the operation period, the above concern can be solved by keeping the operation period constant.

Feature B10. When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit during the third gaming state shifted by the second transition means, the fourth transition means is in the third gaming state. Described in any one of the features B2 to B4, which is configured to shift to the third gaming state triggered by the arrival of the upper limit number of times without going through another gaming state after the end. Gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the third game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling are seamlessly connected, the two benefits are 1 It can be put together and the impact can be strengthened.

Feature B11. During the third gaming state transferred by the second transition means, the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state becomes the upper limit number, and the transition to the third gaming state by the fourth transition means is delayed. If the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information during the process, the transition to the fourth transition means triggered by the arrival of the upper limit number of times becomes invalid. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B2 to the feature B10, which is characterized by being configured.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the situation where the transition to the third gaming state triggered by the arrival at the ceiling is about to occur, the third judgment result triggered by the arrival at the ceiling is obtained. It is preferable to configure the transition to the gaming state to be invalid in order to suppress the player's rescue function from becoming excessive.

Feature B12. When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the transition to the third game state is made. Equipped with a special effect execution means that can execute a special effect to indicate that
When the upper limit number of times is reached during the first gaming state, the special effect executing means executes the special effect in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached, while the second transition means is used. Any of the features B2 and B11 characterized in that the special effect is not executed in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached during the third game state. The gaming machine described in one.

When the upper limit is reached (reached the ceiling) during the first game state, it is promptly notified that the player will move to the third game state by executing a special effect at that game time. On the other hand, when the upper limit number of times is reached (reached the ceiling) during the third game state, the special effect is avoided in that game time. In this way, when the transition to the third gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed, the special effect is not intentionally performed, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is used as an opportunity. It is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the transferred third gaming state from decreasing before the end of the gaming state.

Feature B13. When the upper limit number of times is reached during the third gaming state shifted by the second transition means, it is the game number executed after the game number of reaching the upper limit number of times, and the fourth transition. The feature B2 to the feature B11 is provided with a means for notifying the transition to the third gaming state in the gaming round before the transition to the third gaming state triggered by the arrival of the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine described in any one of.

As shown in this feature, when the maximum number of times is reached (ceiling reached) during the third game state, the third game state is entered with the ceiling reached as a trigger in the game times executed after the ceiling is reached. The player is notified of the transition to the third gaming state (reaching the ceiling) in the game round before the transition. With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the expectation that the third gaming state is substantially extended by reaching the ceiling even in the gaming times other than the gaming times that can reach the ceiling.

Feature B14. When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the transition to the third game state is made. Equipped with a special effect execution means that can execute a special effect to indicate that
When the upper limit number of times has been reached during the third gaming state and the number of times the game has been executed during the third gaming state is greater than the predetermined number of times, the special effect executing means has reached the upper limit number of times. While the special effect is executed in each round, if the upper limit is reached during the third gaming state and the number of executions of the gaming times in the third gaming state is less than the predetermined number of times, the upper limit is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B2 to the feature B11, characterized in that the special effect is executed in the gaming times executed after the gaming times.

When the upper limit number of times is reached (reached the ceiling) during the third gaming state, which is triggered by the determination result corresponding to the second determination information, the impression of the player may differ depending on the timing. For example, if the ceiling is reached immediately after the transition, it may give the impression that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is wasteful. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third game state, it is special according to the number of times the game is executed during the third game state (the number of games executed so far). The above concerns can be dispelled by differentiating the timing of occurrence of the effect, that is, the timing of notification of reaching the ceiling.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature B3 to feature B14 may be applied to feature B1.

Incidentally, each technical idea shown in the above-mentioned feature A group may be applied to the feature B1 to the feature B14.

<Characteristic C group>
The following feature C group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features C1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit into the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and equipped with
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry / entry. A second storage means (reservation area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball portion is provided.
The second storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information may occur in any of the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section. On the other hand, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be generated only in the determination based on the entry of the ball into the second start entry portion.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. The character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period than the low frequency switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball entry portion than the low frequency switching mode. High frequency switching mode (high frequency support mode A, B) is provided.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first type gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and the second type gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode (for example, the second normal gaming state). The third normal game state and the fourth normal game state) are provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, the first transition means (main control) for shifting to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state. In the MPU 402 of the device 162, the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state triggered by the jackpot result) and
In the type 2 gaming state transferred by the first transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the type 2 gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the first end reference number of times. (For example, 20 times), the second transition means for transitioning to the first type gaming state (from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by the time saving digestion). Function to migrate) and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, the third transition to the second type gaming state is performed without going through the special gaming state. Means (a function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger of the special deviation result) and
In the type 2 gaming state transferred by the third transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the type 2 gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the second end reference number of times. (For example, 20 times), the fourth transition means for transitioning to the first type gaming state (from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by the time saving digestion). A gaming machine characterized by having a function to transfer).

According to the feature C1, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, the game shifts to the second type gaming state through the special gaming state. The second type game state corresponds to the high frequency switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. There is a limit on the number of times in the type 2 game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the type 2 game state reaches the first end reference number, the type 1 game corresponding to the low frequency switching mode is provided. Move to the state. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Here, the special information acquired based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion is stored by the second storage means, and after the transition from the second type gaming state to the first type gaming state, those storages are stored. The game times are executed based on the special information provided. In the remaining game times related to the second starting ball entry portion, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information may be obtained. If the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the remaining game times, the special game state is promptly shifted to the second type game state without going through, and the high frequency switching mode loops. Become. With this loop, it is possible to aim for a determination result corresponding to the first determination information while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

Feature C2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit into the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and equipped with
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry / entry. A second storage means (reservation area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball portion is provided.
The second storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information may occur in any of the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section. On the other hand, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be generated only in the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. The character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support) set so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period than in the first switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) and the second starting ball entry unit are longer than the first switching mode because the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode. There is a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) that is set so that it is easy to enter the ball.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second / third normal gaming state). ) And a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state. (Function to shift from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state) in the MPU 402 of
In the second gaming state transferred by the first transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the second gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the first end reference number (for example). (20 times), a second transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (a function of shifting from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by time saving digestion). )When,
A third transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state (a third transition means). The function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by the special deviation result), and
In the third gaming state transferred by the third transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the third gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the second end reference number (for example). (20 times), a fourth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by time saving digestion). ) And a gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C2, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the process shifts to the second gaming state through the special gaming state. The second gaming state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. A limit is set for the number of times in the second game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches the first end reference number, the game shifts to the first game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. do. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Here, the special information acquired based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion is stored by the second storage means, and after the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, they are stored. The game round is executed based on the special information. In the remaining game times related to the second starting ball entry portion, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information may be obtained. When the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the remaining game times, the special game state is shifted to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through, and the high frequency switching mode loops. Will be done. With this loop, it is possible to aim for a determination result corresponding to the first determination information while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

Feature C3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit into the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and equipped with
As the starting ball entry portion, a first starting ball entry portion (first operating port 91) arranged in the first flow path (left route) in the game area and a second flow path (right route) in the game area. ) With a second starting ball entry portion (second operating port 92).
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry / entry. A second storage means (reservation area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball portion is provided.
The second storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in either the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion or the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section. The determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be generated only in the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. The character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support) set so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period than in the first switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) and the second starting ball entry unit are longer than the first switching mode because the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode. There is a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) that is set so that it is easy to enter the ball.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second / third normal gaming state). ) And a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state. (Function to shift from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state) in the MPU 402 of
In the second gaming state transferred by the first transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the second gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the first end reference number (for example). (20 times), a second transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (a function of shifting from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by time saving digestion). )When,
A third transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state (a third transition means). The function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by the special deviation result), and
In the third gaming state transferred by the third transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the third gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the second end reference number (for example). (20 times), a fourth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by time saving digestion). ) And a gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C3, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the process shifts to the second gaming state through the special gaming state. The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and by launching the game ball to the second route, the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry portion increases and the decrease of the number of balls held is suppressed. A limit is set for the number of times in the second game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches the first end reference number, the game shifts to the first game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. do. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Here, the special information acquired based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion is stored by the second storage means, and after the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, they are stored. The game round is executed based on the special information. In the remaining game times related to the second starting ball entry portion, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information may be obtained. When the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the remaining game times, the special game state is shifted to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through, and the high frequency switching mode loops. Will be done. With this loop, it is possible to aim for a determination result corresponding to the first determination information while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

Feature C4. The determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion has a configuration in which the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is more likely to be obtained than the determination result corresponding to the first determination information. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or feature C3.

As described above, when the state is changed from the second gaming state or the third gaming state to the first gaming state, the game related to the second starting ball entry portion is limited to the number of special information stored in the second storage means. Times are executed. In these game times, the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is higher than the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, and the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is not obtained. It is also possible to aim for a determination result corresponding to the first determination information while looping the high frequency switching mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game without increasing the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information.

Feature C5. If the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second determination information during the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the determination result is invalidated. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C2 to the feature C4.

According to the feature C5, if the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second / third gaming state, the determination result is invalid, while the first game from the second / third gaming state is invalidated. When the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the remaining game times related to the second start ball entry portion when the state is changed, the state is changed to the third game state with the judgment result as an opportunity. According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the loop depends on the upper limit of storage of special information related to the second starting ball entry portion. Therefore, when adjusting the advantage by increasing or decreasing the end reference number in the second / third game state, it is possible to avoid affecting the loop probability and set the end reference number freely. The degree can be suitably improved.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is configured so that "during the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is avoided in the determination by the determination means. It is also possible to say "the gaming machine according to any one of the features C2 to the feature C4".

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C2 to the feature C5, wherein the second end reference number is defined to be the same number as the first end reference number.

The configuration shown in this feature recognizes that when the second game state → the first game state → the third game state is established, the player recognizes that the game states before and after the first game state are sandwiched between them are the same. It is preferable to promote.

Feature C7. The switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is closer to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode than the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the first switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C2 to the feature C6.

The configuration shown in this feature recognizes that when the second game state → the first game state → the third game state is established, the player recognizes that the game states before and after the first game state are sandwiched between them are the same. It is preferable to promote.

The "switching mode" shown in this feature is composed of three elements: a period of maintenance in the open state, the number of times the switch is made in the open state, and an interval period between the open states. "Similar to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the above" means that there are more matching or similar elements among the three elements than in the "first switching mode".

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "feature G2 to feature G4, wherein the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is consistent with the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode. It is also possible to say "the gaming machine described in any one of the above."

Feature C8. Before the special information stored in the second storage means becomes the target of the determination, the destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the second determination information, and
In the second gaming state and the third gaming state, special information to be determined after the transition to the first gaming state with the transition from the second gaming state and the third gaming state to the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C2 to C6, which comprises a special effect executing means for executing a special effect based on a specific result by the above-mentioned specific means.

Immediately after shifting from the second gaming state or the third gaming state to the first gaming state, the remaining reserved game times related to the second starting ball entry portion are executed. Then, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in these game times, the transition from the first game state to the third game state is performed. Here, as shown in this feature, in the second / third game state, it is specified in advance whether the remaining reserved game times are the judgment results corresponding to the second judgment information, and the special result is obtained based on the result. By performing the effect, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the presence or absence of the occurrence of the loop described above.

Feature C9. When the second gaming state and the third gaming state shift to the first gaming state, the prior identification means has a configuration in which the identification is performed in the final gaming times in the second gaming state and the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature C8, which is characterized by being.

If the above specification is performed in the final game round in the second / third game state, the special effect is executed in a state where the number of special information stored in the second storage means has reached the upper limit of storage. Therefore, the function of suggesting the continuation of the loop can be suitably exhibited by the special effect.

Feature C10. The gaming machine according to feature C9, which is configured to start the special effect before being specified by the prior identification means at the final gaming round.

According to the feature C10, by starting the special effect prior to the identification by the prior identification means, the restriction on the execution period of the special effect can be relaxed, and the obsolescence of the special effect can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, each technical idea shown in the feature C4 to the feature C10 may be applied to the feature C1.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to B may be applied to the features C1 to C10.

<Characteristic D group>
The following feature D group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Feature D1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the game goes through the special game state. A third transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling) and a third transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode.
When the first transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the special effect executing means for executing the special effect suggesting the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. ,
Equipped with
The special effect executing means is configured to determine the effect mode of the special effect depending on whether or not the upper limit number of times is reached during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode of the transition destination. A gaming machine featuring.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is entered. Transition. In the second switching mode, the ball enters the second starting ball entry portion frequently, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to rescue the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, even when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the game may shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. In this case, a special effect is executed. The mode of the special effect is determined according to whether or not the ceiling is reached during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode of the transition destination. According to such a configuration, for example, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the ceiling arrival is suggested, and conversely, the second opportunity to shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is set. It is possible to make it difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the judgment result corresponds to the judgment information or the ceiling is reached, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the game goes through the special game state. A third transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling) and a third transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode.
When the first transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the special effect executing means for executing the special effect suggesting the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. Equipped with
The special effect executing means determines the effect mode of the special effect based on the end reference number of times and the remaining number of games that reach the upper limit number of times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode of the transition destination. A gaming machine characterized by being configured.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is entered. Transition. In the second switching mode, the ball enters the second starting ball entry portion frequently, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to rescue the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, even when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the game may shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. In this case, a special effect is executed. The effect mode of the special effect is determined based on the end reference number of times in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode of the transition destination and the remaining number of games to reach the ceiling. According to such a configuration, for example, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the ceiling arrival is suggested, and conversely, the second opportunity to shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is set. It is possible to make it difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the judgment result corresponds to the judgment information or the ceiling is reached, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game.

Feature D3. The special effect executing means is the first executing means.
As the special effect, a first special effect and a second special effect having different production modes are provided.
When the third transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second special effect is executed as an effect suggesting the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. With a second means of execution
The first executing means is characterized in that it has a means for executing the second special effect when the set number of ending reference times is larger than the number of remaining games that reach the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine described in D2.

According to the feature D3, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the ceiling is reached during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode which shifts with the judgment result as an opportunity, the ceiling is reached at normal times. The same special effect (second special effect) is executed as the special effect (second special effect) that is executed when the situation occurs. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ceiling look as if it were variable.

Feature D4. The first executing means is characterized in that it has a means for executing the first special effect when the set number of ending reference times is less than the number of remaining games that reach the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine described in D3.

According to the feature D4, when the set end reference number of times <the number of games to reach the ceiling, the first special effect is executed instead of the second special effect. This is preferable in order to exert the mimicry effect shown in the feature D3.

Feature D5. When the second special effect is executed by the first executing means and then the third transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second executing means is said to be the first. 2 The gaming machine according to feature D3 or feature D4, which is characterized in that it does not execute a special effect.

As shown in the feature D5, when the ceiling is reached during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second special effect is not executed and the ceiling reach is not specified, so that the mimicry shown in the feature D3 is shown. The effect can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature D6. When the upper limit number of times is reached during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the third transition means is triggered by the arrival of the end reference number of times by the second transition means. After shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the switching mode, it is configured to shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode.
A state suggesting means for suggesting a state suggesting that the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is provided.
The state suggesting means reaches the upper limit number of times during the second switching mode, and by the third transition means, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is changed from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. Any of the features D3 and D5 characterized in that the state is suggested over the three gaming states when the state is changed to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. The gaming machine described in one.

According to the feature D6, in the case of the second switching mode → the first switching mode → the second switching mode, the mimicry effect shown in the feature D3 is continued by continuing the suggestion of the second switching mode even during the first switching mode. Can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature D7. The first transition means is any number of times including a first end reference number and a second reference number of times in which the number of times is different as the end reference number when shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D2 to the feature D6, which comprises a means for setting the above.

If the first end reference number of times and the second end reference number of times are used in combination as shown in the feature D7, the pseudo-variable function of the ceiling shown in the feature D2 and the like can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature D8. The first end reference number of times is less than the upper limit number of times.
The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the second end reference number of times is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of times.

According to the feature D8, when the first end reference number of times is set, the presence or absence of reaching the ceiling in the second switching mode depends on the remaining number of times until the ceiling is reached, and when the second end reference number of times is set. Can reach the ceiling during the second switching mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress that the function is not exerted well when the ceiling is quasi-variable using the second determination information.

The technical ideas shown in the above features D3 to D8 may be applied to the feature D1.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to C may be applied to the features D1 to D8.

<Characteristic E group>
The following feature E group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features E1. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (processing for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). Function to execute) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state or a special game). Special game state transition means (special hit game state transition process and jackpot game state transition by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (special hit game state or jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state). Function to execute processing) and
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry part (variable winning device 83B) and
When the special gaming state is entered, the variable entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83B) for switching the variable entry unit into the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and equipped with
When the variable ball entry unit control means shifts to the special gaming state as a determination result (for example, a special hit result or a big hit result) that the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined information. , The variable ball entry unit is configured to switch to the acceptance state.
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry / entry. A second storage means (reservation area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball portion is provided.
The second storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The predetermined information includes first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a normal jackpot) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first information. ,
In the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion, the determination result corresponding to the second information is more likely to be obtained than the determination based on the entry into the first start entry section. Ori,
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Character 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period than the low frequency switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball entry portion than the low frequency switching mode. High frequency switching mode (high frequency support mode) is provided.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, the special game state is shifted to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. A gaming machine characterized by having a means of transition.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, the game shifts to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. .. In the high frequency switching mode, it is possible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and in the determination (lottery) based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section, not only the determination result corresponding to the first information but also the determination result. It may be a determination result corresponding to the second information which is more advantageous to the player than the first information. Therefore, the advantage in the determination is greatly increased. In other words, by reaching the ceiling, it will shift to a chance zone with a higher advantage than the previous gaming state. In this way, if the configuration is such that the player shifts to the chance zone when the ceiling is reached, the player's willingness to play can be appropriately stimulated. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotonicization of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (main control) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special hit result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state or a special game). Special game state transition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transition processing to the special hit game state and jackpot game) for shifting to a special game state (special hit game state or jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state). Function to execute the transition process to the state) and
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry part (variable winning device 83B) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83B. Function) and equipped with
As the predetermined information, first information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) and second information (random number group corresponding to the big hit result) are provided.
The control means for the variable ball entry portion is
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (special jackpot result) that corresponds to the first information and the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit is first controlled. A means for switching to the acceptance state in an embodiment and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (big hit result) and shifts to the special gaming state, or the first determination result becomes the variable input. When the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V winning area) of the ball portion, the variable entry portion is provided with a means for switching to the acceptance state in the second control mode.
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry / entry. A second storage means (reservation area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball portion is provided.
The second storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The second determination result can occur in any of the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section, while the first determination. The result is configured to occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Character 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period than the low frequency switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball entry portion than the low frequency switching mode. High frequency switching mode (high frequency support mode) is provided.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, the special game state is shifted to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. A gaming machine characterized by having a transition means (a function of shifting from a normal gaming state to a third special gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, the game shifts to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. .. In the high frequency switching mode, it is possible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and in the determination (lottery) based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section, not only the determination result corresponding to the first information but also the determination result. It can be a determination result corresponding to the second information. Therefore, the advantage in the determination (probability of winning or transition to the special gaming state) is greatly increased. In other words, by reaching the ceiling, it will shift to a chance zone with a higher advantage than the previous gaming state. In this way, if the configuration is such that the player shifts to the chance zone when the ceiling is reached, the player's willingness to play can be appropriately stimulated. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotonicization of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game.

Further, when the ball reaches the ceiling, the ball enters the second starting ball entry portion, so that not only the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed but also the probability of transition to the special gaming state is increased. In such a configuration, even if the stay period in the second switching mode is shortened, the benefit can be suitably exhibited, so that the extension of the game after reaching the ceiling can be suitably suppressed.

Feature E3. The special transition means is the first special transition means.
After shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first special transition means, the game times during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode without obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information. When the number of executions reaches the end reference number (for example, once), the second special transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 is triggered by the time saving digestion. 3 Function to shift from special game state to 4th special game state) and
With the resetting means (ceiling resetting function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for resetting the upper limit number of times when shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode by the second special transition means. The gaming machine according to the feature E2, which is characterized by having the above.

According to the feature E3, the number of games that reach the ceiling is reset when the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling ends. Such a configuration is preferable in order to realize a configuration in which the ceiling is shallow and the benefits of the ceiling are reduced, and a weak ceiling function is exhibited in a short cycle. That is, it is preferable in suppressing the monotonicization of the game.

Feature E4. An execution number counter (for example, an execution number counter) that grasps the number of times a game has been executed without producing a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information after shifting to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first special transition means. Equipped with a continuation count counter)
The second special transition means is configured to shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode when the value of the execution count counter becomes a value corresponding to the end reference number of times.
The execution number counter is updated (counted) when the game round based on the entry into the second start ball entry section is executed, while the game based on the entry into the first start entry section. The gaming machine according to feature E3, which is configured so as not to be updated (not counted) when the times are executed.

As shown in the feature E4, by setting the configuration in which the end reference number of times is updated when the ball enters the second starting ball entry portion, it is possible to prevent the benefit of reaching the ceiling from being not enjoyed well.

Feature E5. The game count M (integer), which is the upper limit, is a probability (for example, about 1/200) that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained by the determination by the determination means in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E2 to the feature E4, which is specified to be smaller than the reciprocal of).

If the upper limit number of times is specified in the embodiment shown in this feature, the effect of generating the chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing the monotonicization of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature states that "in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the probability that the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is m / N (for example, about 1 /). 200), and the number of games M (integer), which is the upper limit, is described in any one of the features E2 and E4, which is specified so that M <N / m. It is also possible to say "a game machine."

Feature E6. The number of games (integer), which is the upper limit, is the probability (for example, about 1/200) that the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E2 to the feature E4, which is defined to be equal to or less than the reciprocal of.

If the upper limit number of times is specified in the embodiment shown in this feature, the effect of generating the chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing the monotonicization of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature states that "in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the probability that the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is m / N (for example, about 1 /). 200), and the number of games M (integer), which is the upper limit, is described in any one of the features E2 and E4, which is specified so that M ≤ N / m. It is also possible to say "a game machine."

Feature E7. The sum (integer) of the upper limit of storage of special information in the second storage means and the end reference number of times is the probability (for example, 1/10) that the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E2 to the feature E6, which is defined to be equal to or less than the reciprocal of.

If the upper limit of storage and the reference number of terminations are specified in the embodiment shown in this feature, the effect of generating the chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing the monotonicization of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "the probability that the determination result corresponding to the first information in the determination by the determination means is y / X (for example, 1/10) is y / X (for example, 1/10), and the second storage means. Described in any one of the features E2 and E6, wherein the sum S (integer) of the upper limit of storage of special information and the number of termination reference times is specified so as to be S ≤ X / y. It is also possible to say "a game machine."

Feature E8. The end reference number of times is the first end reference number of times.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the second information is obtained in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode, the game shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode through the special gaming state. The first transition means (a function of shifting from the normal gaming state to the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger).
After shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first transition means, the predetermined game corresponding to the high frequency switching mode is not obtained as a determination result corresponding to the first information and the second information. When the number of times the game is executed in the state reaches the second end reference number (for example, 6 times or 100 times), the second transition means (main control) for shifting to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. The MPU 402 of the device 162 is provided with a function of shifting from the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state to the fourth special gaming state in the wake of the time saving digestion).
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E2 to the feature E7, wherein the first end reference number of times is defined to be smaller than the second end reference number of times.

As shown in feature E8, the number of end reference times set when the ceiling is reached, compared with the number of end reference times set when the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained (second end reference number). If the (first end reference number of times) is reduced, the relief function by reaching the ceiling can be suitably exerted while ensuring the superiority of the determination result (target in the game) corresponding to the second determination information.

The technical ideas shown in the above features E3 to E8 may be applied to the feature E1.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to D may be applied to the features E1 to E8.

<Characteristic F group>
The following feature F group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features F1. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (main control) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special hit result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state or a special game). Special game state transition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transition processing to the special hit game state and jackpot game) for shifting to a special game state (special hit game state or jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state). Function to execute the transition process to the state) and
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry part (variable winning device 83B) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83B. Function) and equipped with
As the predetermined information, first information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) and second information (random number group corresponding to the big hit result) are provided.
The control means for the variable ball entry portion is
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (special jackpot result) that corresponds to the first information and the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit is first controlled. A means for switching to the acceptance state in an embodiment and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (big hit result) and shifts to the special gaming state, or the first determination result becomes the variable input. When the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V winning area) of the ball portion, the variable entry portion is provided with a means for switching to the acceptance state in the second control mode.
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry / entry. A second storage means (reservation area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball portion is provided.
The second determination result can occur in any of the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section, while the first determination. The result is configured to occur only in the determination based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Character 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period than the low frequency switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball entry portion than the low frequency switching mode. High frequency switching mode (high frequency support mode) is provided.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, the game shifts to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. 1 Special transition means (a function of shifting from the normal gaming state to the third special gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached) and
After shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first special transition means, the game times during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode without obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information. When the number of executions reaches the end reference number (for example, 100 times), the second special transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 is triggered by the time saving digestion. 3 Function to shift from special game state to 4th special game state) and
Equipped with
The sum (integer) of the upper limit of storage of special information in the second storage means and the end reference number of times is the probability (for example, about 1/5) that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained in the determination by the determination means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is specified to be equal to or greater than the reciprocal of.

In the configuration shown in this feature, when the maximum number of times (ceiling) is reached without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state is reached, the high frequency switching mode is used. It shifts to the corresponding predetermined gaming state. Here, even if the high-frequency switching mode is set, the following inconveniences may occur if the probability that the determination result substantially corresponds to the predetermined information remains low. That is, the period until the player can obtain the sufficient benefit (transition to the special gaming state) expected by the player despite reaching the ceiling is extended, or the frequency is switched before the sufficient benefit is obtained. It is assumed that the mode will end (run through). This is not preferable because it causes a factor that greatly reduces the player's willingness to play. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to enter the second starting ball entry section by changing from the low frequency switching mode to the high frequency switching mode, and the determination is based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section. In (lottery), it can be not only the second determination result corresponding to the second information but also the first determination result corresponding to the first information. That is, the probability that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, that is, the probability of transition to the special gaming state, is greatly increased by reaching the ceiling. The sum (for example, 104 times) of the upper limit number of special information stored in the second storage means (for example, 4 times) and the end reference number of times (for example, 100 times) is the reciprocal of the probability that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained. Since the above settings are made, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the transition to the special gaming state is richly or substantially determined by reaching the ceiling. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

If, for example, there is a limit to the number of games that can be played in the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling, there is a strong concern about running through. In this respect, according to the above configuration, the influence of the limitation on the number of games when reaching the ceiling can be alleviated. That is, even when the high-frequency switching mode with a limited number of times is adopted by reaching the ceiling, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature F2. In the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion, the probability of the first determination result (for example, 1/5) is higher than the probability of the second determination result (for example, 1/200). The gaming machine according to the feature F1, which is characterized in that it is specified in.

According to the feature F2, when the mode is changed from the low frequency switching mode to the high frequency switching mode, the probability that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained can be greatly increased. This is preferable in order to shorten the stay period in the high-frequency switching mode and suppress the extension of the period until the above-mentioned sufficient benefit is given, in order to exert the relief function when reaching the ceiling shown in the feature F1. ..

Feature F3. An execution number counter (for example, an execution number counter) that grasps the number of times a game has been executed without producing a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information after shifting to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first special transition means. Equipped with a continuation count counter)
The second special transition means is configured to shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode when the value of the execution count counter becomes a value corresponding to the end reference number of times.
The execution number counter is updated (counted) when the game round based on the entry into the second start ball entry section is executed, while the game based on the entry into the first start entry section. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, which is configured so as not to be updated (not counted) when the times are executed.

According to the configuration shown in the feature F3, the game times related to the second start ball entry section are counted by the execution count counter, whereas the game times related to the first start ball entry section are counted by the execution count counter. Not counted. In this way, by configuring the configuration in which the presence or absence of reaching the end reference number of times is determined by the number of times the game is executed related to the second start ball entry portion, the transition to the special game state is richly or substantially determined by reaching the ceiling. It is possible to preferably realize the configuration to be used.

Features F4. The end reference number of times is the first end reference number of times (for example, 100 times).
When the second determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the second information is obtained in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode is passed through the special gaming state. The first transition means (function of shifting from the normal gaming state to the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger).
After shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first transition means, the game times during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode without obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information. When the number of executions reaches the second end reference number (for example, once or three times), the time is shortened in the second transition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. It is equipped with a function to shift from the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state to the fourth special gaming state when digested.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F3, wherein the first end reference number of times is specified to be larger than the second end reference number of times.

When the second determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode, the game shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode through the special gaming state. In the configuration shown in this feature, the number of termination reference times of the high-frequency switching mode that shifts when the ceiling is reached is larger than the number of termination criteria of the high-frequency switching mode that shifts when the second judgment result is reached. The transition to the special gaming state of the time is given preferential treatment. With such a configuration, the relief function shown in the feature F1 or the like can be suitably exerted.

Feature F5. The upper limit of the number of games M (integer) is defined to be larger than the reciprocal of the probability (for example, 1/200) of the second determination result in the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F4.

As shown in the feature F1, both the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency switching mode triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information are based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section. In the configuration in which the game times are executed, the privilege when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained during the high frequency switching mode is the same. In order to improve the satisfaction of the player, it is preferable to increase the privilege when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained, but the benefit expected when reaching the ceiling is also increased due to the influence, so that the relief by reaching the ceiling is also increased. There is concern that the functionality will be excessively powerful. In particular, as shown in feature F1, the above concern is expected to increase in a configuration in which the transition to the special gaming state is concentrated or substantially determined by reaching the ceiling. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit number of times (ceiling) is made larger than the reciprocal of the probability of reaching the second judgment result, the benefit expected from reaching the ceiling is increased, and the chance of reaching the ceiling is reduced. The above concerns can be dispelled.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is "the probability that the second determination result will be obtained in the determination by the determination means is m / N (for example, 1/200), and the number of games M (integer) which is the upper limit. ) Can be the gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F4, which is specified so that M> N / m. "

Feature F6. It is specified that the number of games M (integer), which is the upper limit, is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability (for example, 1/200) of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F4.

As shown in the feature F1, both the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency switching mode triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information are based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section. In the configuration in which the game times are executed, the privilege when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained during the high frequency switching mode is the same. In order to improve the satisfaction of the player, it is preferable to increase the privilege when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained, but the benefit expected when reaching the ceiling is also increased due to the influence, so that the relief by reaching the ceiling is also increased. There is concern that the functionality will be overly powerful. In particular, as shown in feature F1, the above concern is expected to increase in a configuration in which the transition to the special gaming state is concentrated or substantially determined by reaching the ceiling. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit number of times (ceiling) is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of reaching the second judgment result, the benefits expected from reaching the ceiling are increased, and the chances of reaching the ceiling are reduced. You can dispel concerns.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "the probability that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the determination by the determination means is m / N (for example, 1/200) is m / N (for example, 1/200), and the number of games is the upper limit. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F4, characterized in that M (integer) is defined to be M ≧ N / m. ”.

Feature F7. When the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination by the determination means in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode transitioned by the special transition means, the determination result corresponds to the first information, and the determination result is obtained under other circumstances. Described in any one of the feature F1 to the feature F6, which is configured so that the operation period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the case where the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained. Gaming machine.

As shown in the feature F7, in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode after reaching the ceiling, the operation period of the gaming rotation operation when the first determination result is obtained is shortened until the transition to the special gaming state. By shortening the required period of the above, the player can promptly enjoy the expected benefits.

Feature F8. The second storage means can store a plurality of special information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry unit.
The game rotation control means is configured to execute the game rotation operation so that the operation period of the game rotation operation becomes shorter as the number of special information stored in the second storage means increases. Ori,
As the high-frequency switching mode, the first high-frequency switching mode and the second high-frequency switching mode are longer than the first high-frequency switching mode because the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first high-frequency switching mode. A second high-frequency switching mode is provided so that the ball can be easily entered into the starting ball entry section.
When the first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, or when the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V winning area) of the variable entry portion as the first determination result. A means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first high-frequency switching mode via the special gaming state is provided.
The special transition means corresponds to the second high-frequency switching mode when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to the feature F7, which is configured to shift to the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature F8, in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second high-frequency switching mode that shifts when the ceiling is reached, the first judgment result → the first high-frequency switching mode that shifts when the predetermined area is passed or the second judgment result is triggered. The period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than the corresponding predetermined gaming state. That is, in the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling, the frequency of entering the second starting ball entry portion increases, and the number of special information stored in the second storage means increases. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress that the operation period of the game rotation operation in the game rotation after reaching the ceiling is shortened, and the period from reaching the ceiling to being able to enjoy the above-mentioned benefits is extended.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to E may be applied to the features F1 to F8.

<Characteristic G group>
The following feature G group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball entry section variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball entry section according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and problems that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features G1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A. Function) and equipped with
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry / entry. A second storage means (reservation area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball portion is provided.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information may occur in any of the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section. On the other hand, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be generated only in the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. The character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period than the low frequency switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball entry portion than the low frequency switching mode. High frequency switching mode (high frequency support mode A, B) is provided.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first type gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and the second type gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode (for example, the third normal gaming state). 4th normal game state) is provided,
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, the first transition means (main control) for shifting to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state. In the MPU 402 of the device 162, the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state triggered by the jackpot result) and
In the type 2 gaming state transferred by the first transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the type 2 gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the end reference number (for example). (10 times, 20 times), the second transition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by the time saving digestion, from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state) to shift to the first type gaming state. Function to shift to) and
With the end reference number resetting means for resetting the end reference number (for example, resetting 20 times) when the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second type gaming state. Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the end reference number of times resetting means is configured to perform the resetting without going through the special gaming state.

According to the feature G1, when the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, the game shifts to the second type gaming state through the special gaming state. The second type game state corresponds to the high frequency switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. There is a limit on the number of times in the type 2 game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the type 2 game state reaches the end reference number, the game state is changed to the type 1 game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. Transition. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Here, in the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion, the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information may be obtained. When the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second type gaming state, the end reference number of times is reset without going through the special gaming state. As a result, the type 2 gaming state (high frequency switching mode) is looped (extended). With this loop, it is possible to aim for a determination result corresponding to the first determination information while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

Feature G2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A. Function) and equipped with
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry / entry. A second storage means (reservation area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball portion is provided.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information may occur in any of the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section. On the other hand, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be generated only in the determination based on the entry of the ball into the second start entry portion.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. The character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support) set so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period than in the first switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball entry section than in the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) and the second starting ball entry unit are longer than the first switching mode because the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode. There is a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) that is set so that it is easy to enter the ball.
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a third normal gaming state). A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state. (Function to shift from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state) and the MPU 402 of
In the second gaming state transferred by the first transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the second gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the first end reference number (for example). (10 times or 20 times), the second transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by the time saving digestion). Function to migrate) and
When a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second gaming state, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state with the end of the game round that is the determination result. 3 A third transition means for transitioning to the gaming state (a function of transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for a special deviation result).
In the third gaming state transferred by the third transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the third gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the second end reference number (for example). (20 times), a fourth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by time saving digestion). ) And a gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G2, when the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the process shifts to the second gaming state through the special gaming state. The second gaming state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. A limit is set for the number of times in the second game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches the first end reference number, the game shifts to the first game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. do. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Here, in the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion, the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information may be obtained. When the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second gaming state, the process shifts to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state. The third game state corresponds to the third switching mode, and the game times related to the second start ball entry portion are executed as in the second game state, and in this state, the number of times the game times are executed is the second end criterion. It will continue until the number of times is reached. Here, when the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is made, the progress of the gaming round related to the second starting ball entry portion is continued. This makes it possible to aim for a determination result corresponding to the first determination information while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

Feature G3. The end reference number resetting means (in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for resetting the second end reference number when the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the third gaming state. Equipped with a function to reset the continuation counter)
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the end reference number of times resetting means is configured to perform the resetting without going through the special gaming state.

According to the feature G3, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the third gaming state, the second end reference number of times is reset. That is, the third game state loops. In this loop, since the loop does not go through the special gaming state, the game proceeds smoothly even if the loop is repeated.

Features G4. The game according to feature G2 or feature G3, wherein the second end reference number is defined to be the same number as the first end reference number or a larger number than the first end reference number. Machine.

According to the feature G4, when the second game state is changed to the third game state, the player is substantially damaged by the timing of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (the game times of the judgment result). Can be avoided. This is preferable in order to realize the diversification of the game by the above-mentioned loop function and to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G5. In the third gaming state, the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the determination by the determination means is higher than the probability of the determination result corresponding to the second determination information. The gaming machine according to feature G3 or feature G4, characterized in that it is specified.

According to the feature G5, the probability of the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is higher than the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information during the loop. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the above-mentioned loop function not being properly exerted due to frequent occurrence of determination results corresponding to the first determination information.

Feature G6. A fifth transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state when a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the third gaming state. (Function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 3rd normal gaming state) and the MPU 402 of
In the second gaming state transferred by the fifth transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the second gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the third end reference number (for example). (20 times), a sixth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (a function of shifting from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by time saving digestion). ) And
One of the feature G3 to the feature G5, wherein the third end reference number is defined to be the same number as the second end reference number or a larger number than the second end reference number. The gaming machine described in one.

According to the feature G6, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained during the above-mentioned loop, the end reference number (third end reference number) in the second gaming state to be transferred to the next is the second end. It becomes more than the standard number of times. With such a configuration, the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained during the loop, so that the player's advantage increases after the end of the special gaming state compared to during the loop, and the game during the loop is accented. Can be generated.

Feature G7. The switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is closer to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode than the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the first switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G2 to the feature G6.

The configuration shown in this feature is preferable in order to encourage the player to recognize that the front and rear gaming states are the same when the second gaming state is changed to the third gaming state.

The "switching mode" shown in this feature is composed of three elements: a period of maintenance in the open state, the number of times the switch is made in the open state, and an interval period between the open states. "Similar to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the above" means that there are more matching or similar elements among the three elements than in the "first switching mode".

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "feature G2 to feature G6, wherein the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode matches the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode. It is also possible to say "the gaming machine described in any one of the above."

Feature G8. As a determination mode in which the determination mode is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information are relative to each other. High probability mode is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G3 to the feature G7, wherein the determination mode in the second gaming state is the low probability mode.

According to the feature G8, it is possible to prevent the loop function from being buried because the determination result corresponding to the first determination information frequently occurs in the loop described above. As a result, it is possible to realize diversification of games while suppressing the increase in gambling.

Feature G9. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A. Function) and equipped with
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry / entry. A second storage means (reservation area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball portion is provided.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information may occur in any of the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section. On the other hand, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be generated only in the determination based on the entry of the ball into the second start entry portion.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. The character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period than the low frequency switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball entry portion than the low frequency switching mode. The high frequency switching mode (high frequency support mode A) is provided.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first type gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and the second type gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the fourth normal gaming state). And are provided,
In the type 2 gaming state, when the number of times the game is executed during the type 2 gaming state becomes the end reference number (for example, 20 times) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information. Transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (a function of transitioning from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for time saving), and
End reference number reset means for resetting the end reference number (for example, resetting 20) when the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second type gaming state. And with
The gaming machine characterized in that the end reference number of times resetting means is configured to perform the resetting without going through the special gaming state.

According to the feature G9, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second type gaming state, the end reference number of times is reset. That is, the second type game state loops. In this loop, since the loop does not go through the special gaming state, the game proceeds smoothly even if the loop is repeated. Therefore, it is possible to realize the diversification of games and contribute to the improvement of attention to games.

The technical ideas shown in the above features G3 to G8 may be applied to the features G1 and G9.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to F may be applied to the features G1 to G9.

<Characteristic H group>
The following feature H group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features H1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit into the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high frequency switching mode (high frequency support mode) set to be.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game goes through the special game state. A special transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).
It is provided with an upper limit number of times setting means for setting the upper limit number of times when the determination result is obtained corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the state shifts to the predetermined gaming state through the special gaming state.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming.
As the predetermined determination information, the first information (a random number group corresponding to the normal jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode. The second information (random number group corresponding to the probability change jackpot result) that triggers the transition is provided.
The upper limit number setting means sets the first number of times (for example, 300 times) as the upper limit number when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination means, and the determination means determines. When the determination result corresponds to the second information, the upper limit is set to be a second number (for example, 100 times) smaller than the first number. A gaming machine.

If the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the player enters the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. Transition. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, the monotonicization of the game can be suitably suppressed. Here, the upper limit of the number of times the ceiling is reached is the first number (for example, 300 times) when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained, and the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained. The second number is less than the first. Here, since the high-probability mode shifts to the special gaming state at an earlier timing than the low-probability mode, the effect of the ceiling function can be suitably exhibited by setting the upper limit number of times to be small. This can suitably contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high frequency switching mode (high frequency support mode) set to be.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game goes through the special game state. A special transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).
It is provided with an upper limit number of times setting means for setting the upper limit number of times when the determination result is obtained corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the state shifts to the predetermined gaming state through the special gaming state.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming.
As the predetermined determination information, the first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, and the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode. Second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the corresponding predetermined gaming state is provided.
The upper limit number of times setting means uses the second information in the determination by the determination means as compared with the upper limit number of times set when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination means. A gaming machine characterized in that the upper limit number of times to be set when a corresponding determination result is obtained is set to be small.

If the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the player enters the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. Transition. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, the monotonicization of the game can be suitably suppressed. Here, regarding the upper limit of the number of times the ceiling is reached, the case where the judgment result corresponds to the second information is smaller than the case where the judgment result corresponds to the first information is reduced (shortened). Is configured. Here, since the high-probability mode shifts to the special gaming state at an earlier timing than the low-probability mode, the effect of the ceiling function can be suitably exhibited by setting the upper limit number of times to be small. This can suitably contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit into the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high frequency switching mode (high frequency support mode) set to be.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game goes through the special game state. A special transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).
It is provided with an upper limit number of times setting means for setting the upper limit number of times when the determination result is obtained corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the state shifts to the predetermined gaming state through the special gaming state.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming.
As the predetermined determination information, the first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, and the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode. Second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the corresponding predetermined gaming state is provided.
The upper limit number setting means sets the first number of times (for example, 300 times) as the upper limit number when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination means, and the determination means determines. When the determination result corresponds to the second information, the upper limit is set to be a second number (for example, 100 times) smaller than the first number. A game machine.

If the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the player enters the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. Transition. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, the monotonicization of the game can be suitably suppressed. Here, regarding the upper limit of the number of times the ceiling is reached, the case where the judgment result corresponds to the second information is smaller than the case where the judgment result corresponds to the first information is reduced (shortened). Is configured. Here, since the high-probability mode shifts to the special gaming state at an earlier timing than the low-probability mode, the effect of the ceiling function can be suitably exhibited by setting the upper limit number of times to be small. This can suitably contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

Further, in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, the game progresses without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information even though the high probability mode is set. Contrary to the expectations of the player, the investment will increase significantly. This is expected to be a factor that greatly reduces the player's willingness to play. In this regard, as shown in this feature, in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, the upper limit number of times is lowered and the investment is suppressed by shifting to the high frequency switching mode at an early timing. Therefore, the effect of diversifying the game (the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game) can be suitably exhibited.

Features H4. The first number of times is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the low probability mode, and the second number of times corresponds to the predetermined determination information in the high probability mode. The gaming machine according to feature H3, which is characterized by having a reciprocal of the probability of a determination result or more.

If the relief function by reaching the ceiling shown in the feature H3 acts excessively, the technical significance (diversification of games) of providing a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode may decrease. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the upper limit number of times so as to be equal to or more than the reciprocal of the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in each game state, the diversification of the game and the above-mentioned relief function can be achieved. It can be suitably coexisted.

Feature H5. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality (for example, four) of the special information.
The game rotation control means varies depending on the operation period setting means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of setting the operation period of the game rotation operation according to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Has a function to execute the display time setting process)
The operation period setting means is configured to set the operation period so that the operation period becomes shorter as the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means increases.
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode transferred by the special transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode corresponds to the predetermined determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 400 times) is reached without becoming, a means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature H3 or feature H4, wherein the end reference number of times is specified to be larger than the second number of times.

It is preferable to have a configuration in which the operation period of the game rotation operation is shortened by increasing the number of stored special information in order to facilitate the progress of the game. However, on the premise of such a configuration, the following inconveniences may occur by applying the configuration shown in the above-mentioned feature H3 or the like. That is, when the ceiling is reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, and the game shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, the game times in the predetermined gaming state become faster. An event may occur in which the benefits are terminated before the benefits of reaching the ceiling are fully experienced. It is feared that this will be a factor that greatly reduces the player's attention to the relief function. In this regard, as shown in this feature, setting the end reference number of times to be larger than the upper limit number of times (second number of times) can contribute to solving the above concern.

Feature H6. In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, the transition is made when the first number of times is reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode. The reference number of times is set, and in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, the transition is made when the first number of times is reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode. The configuration is such that the second end reference number is set as the reference number.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H3 to the feature H5, wherein the first end reference number of times and the second end reference number of times are defined to be the same number of times.

According to the feature H6, it is preferable to set the first end reference number and the second end reference number in order to simplify the configuration related to the game. Even with such a configuration, since the probability that a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained is raised during the high probability mode, the predetermined determination information is supported while the above relief function is being exerted. The probability of becoming a judgment result increases. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the above-mentioned inconvenience that may occur in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode.

Feature H7. In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, the transition is made when the first number of times is reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode. The number of times is set, and in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, the end reference is made when the first number of times is reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode. The configuration is such that the second end reference number of times is set as the number of times.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H3 to the feature H5, wherein the second end reference number of times is specified to be smaller than the first end reference number of times.

According to the feature H7, by making the number of times of the second end reference number smaller than the number of times of the first end reference number, it is possible to suppress the relief function from becoming a factor that incites gambling.

Feature H8. As the starting ball entering portion, a first starting ball entering portion (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entering portion (which is more advantageous to the player for determination by the determination means than the first starting ball entering portion). A second operating port 92A) is provided,
The variable mechanism is in the accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry portion and in the non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H3 to the feature H7, which is characterized by having a switchable configuration.

According to the feature H8, the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section is given preferential treatment to the player in favor of the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section. When the ceiling is reached in the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, not only the investment is suppressed but also the judgment result is given preferential treatment, so that the player is doubled in the rescue function. When a fit occurs in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency switching mode, the expectation for reaching the ceiling increases. This can contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H9. In the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion, the determination result includes the determination result that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode. In the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion, the determination result includes the determination result that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H3 to the feature H8, which is characterized by the absence.

According to the feature H9, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode is performed again while the relief function is exerted by reaching the ceiling during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode. It is possible to avoid an event that the benefit of the ceiling is substantially lost (wasteful pulling) as a judgment result that triggers the transition to.

Features H10. The first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section are arranged on a predetermined flow path in the game area.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the second start entry / entry. A second storage means (reservation area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball portion is provided.
When the special information is stored in both the first storage means and the second storage means, the determination means gives priority to the special information stored in the second storage means as the target of the determination. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H3 to the feature H9, which is characterized by having a configuration.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the player reaches the ceiling in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode and shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, relief is provided. There is no need to change the launch destination of the game ball to enjoy the benefits of the function. Therefore, even if the rescue function is suddenly exerted without going through the special gaming state, it is possible to suppress the wasteful consumption of the game ball and preferably improve the satisfaction level of the rescue function. can.

Features H11. The high-frequency switching mode is the first high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode A).
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism, the second high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) is set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the low-frequency switching mode. And are provided,
As the predetermined determination information, the third information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second high frequency switching mode is provided. Ori,
In the second high-frequency switching mode, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means is higher than that in the first high-frequency switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H3 to the feature H10, which is configured as follows.

According to the feature H11, when the ceiling is reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, the game ball is more than the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second high frequency switching mode. It will shift to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode in which the decrease is suppressed and the first high frequency switching mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize the superiority when reaching the ceiling and greatly change the rhythm of the game when reaching the ceiling.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to G may be applied to the features H1 to H11.

<Characteristic I group>
The following feature group I describes: "In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player are provided. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features I1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit into the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming.
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode.
During the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state does not become a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the upper limit number (ceiling). : For example, 50 times), the special transition means (in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of shifting to a normal gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode A when reaching the ceiling).

According to the feature I1, during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the upper limit number ( When it becomes the ceiling), it shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonicization of the game while ensuring the superiority of the player in the high probability mode.

Feature I2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit into the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming.
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode.
The first criterion is that the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode through the special gaming state does not result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. Execution of the game times after the high-probability mode ends when the number of times (for example, 100 times) is reached and the high-probability mode and the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode are entered through the special game state. The second switching mode is terminated when the number of times becomes the second reference number of times (for example, 50 times) less than the first reference number of times without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. Ori,
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the third reference number (for example, 50 times) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the switching control mode is switched to the third switching. Equipped with a means to shift to the mode
The gaming machine is characterized in that the third reference number of times is defined to be equal to or more than the second reference number of times and equal to or less than the first reference number of times.

According to the feature I2, after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of times the game is executed becomes the second reference number without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. In this case, the second switching mode ends, and when the first reference number is reached, the high probability mode ends. Here, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the third reference number without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. The third reference number is equal to or greater than the second reference number and equal to or less than the first reference number, and the switching control mode is switched to the third switching mode during the high probability mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonicization of the game while ensuring the superiority of the player in the high probability mode.

Feature I3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit into the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming.
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode.
The first criterion is that the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode through the special gaming state does not result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. Execution of the game times after the high-probability mode ends when the number of times (for example, 100 times) is reached and the high-probability mode and the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode are entered through the special game state. The second switching mode is terminated when the number of times becomes the second reference number of times (for example, 50 times) less than the first reference number of times without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. Ori,
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state becomes the third reference number (for example, 50 times), which is less than the first reference number, without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. A means for shifting the switching control mode to the third switching mode is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the third reference number of times is defined to be the same number of times as the second reference number of times.

According to the feature I3, after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of times the game is executed becomes the second reference number without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. In this case, the second switching mode ends, and when the first reference number is reached, the high probability mode ends. Here, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the third reference number without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. The number of times of the third reference is the same as the number of times of the second reference, and the switching control mode is switched from the second switching mode to the third switching mode during the high probability mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonicization of the game while ensuring the superiority of the player in the high probability mode.

Feature I4. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit into the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming.
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode.
The first criterion is that the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode through the special gaming state does not result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. When the number of times (for example, 100 times) is reached, the first transition means for shifting the lottery mode to the low probability mode without going through the special gaming state, and
The first A second transition means for shifting the switching control mode to the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state when the second reference number (for example, 50 times) is less than the reference number is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature I4, after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of times the game is executed becomes the second reference number without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. In this case, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode, and when the first reference number of times is reached, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonicization of the game while ensuring the superiority of the player in the high probability mode.

Feature I5. The third switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means is higher than that in the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to the feature I4, which is characterized by being

As shown in Feature I4, in a gaming machine (so-called ST machine) of a type in which an upper limit (first reference number) is provided for the number of times a game is executed in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode, the number of times the game is executed is executed. As the number of times approaches the first reference number of times, the probability that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information will be obtained decreases, and the expectation of the player may be greatly reduced. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, the third switching mode is set when the ball reaches the ceiling, so that the frequency of entering the second starting ball entry portion becomes higher than before, and the investment is suppressed. In this way, if the switching control mode is further given preferential treatment in the latter half by using the ceiling function, it is possible to overcome the weak point of the ST machine (expectation is greatly reduced toward the end).

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launch capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a means (game ball launching mechanism 110) and a ball entering a ball entry unit (operating ports 91A, 92A and variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with (payout device 224), and special information (holding information) is acquired when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section. Special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and acquisition information storage means (main control device) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means. The reserved ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of 162) and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The determination means (a function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the determination means is performed, and the determination is made prior to the determination by the determination means or by the determination means. Based on this, the game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. The predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1 and D2) are controlled so that the game rounding operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and the judgment result by the determination means become the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, and the game turn control means said. A special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the end of the game rotation operation. The game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), the accepted state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the accepted state. A variable ball entry unit (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry unit, which can be switched to a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is difficult to enter the game ball, and a case where the game transitions to the special game state. In addition, a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (a function of executing the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry portion and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. 93A) and a variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and switching of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means. As the control mode (support mode), the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode (high) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. The frequency support mode B) and the third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode are provided. The third switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means is higher than that in the second switching mode. As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the predetermined determination information are supported. A high-probability mode in which the probability of a determination result is relatively high is provided, and as the predetermined determination information, the specificity that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the second switching mode. The number of times the game is executed after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode via the special gaming state including information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B). When the first reference number of times (for example, 100 times) is reached without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode without going through the special gaming state. The number of times the game is executed after the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode through the transition means and the special gaming state is the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. When the number of second reference times (for example, 50 times) is less than the first reference number of times, the switching control mode is shifted to the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having means. It is also possible to say.

Feature I6. The feature I4 or feature I5 is characterized in that the second transition means is configured to shift from the second switching mode to the third switching mode during the game round when the second reference number of times is reached. The described gaming machine.

According to the configuration shown in the feature I6, the game can be smoothly advanced by connecting the high support so as to be seamless.

Feature I7. The second transition means is a determination result in which the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode through the special gaming state corresponds to the predetermined determination information. When the second reference number (for example, 50 times) is reached without becoming the above, the predetermined number corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode is accompanied by the end of the game times when the second reference number is reached. The feature I4 or the feature is characterized in that the game state is shifted to the game state, and the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode at the next game round of the game round. The gaming machine described in I5.

According to the configuration shown in the feature I7, when the relief function is activated when the ceiling is reached, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode via the first switching mode. With such a configuration, the impact when the switching control mode is changed can be strengthened.

Feature I8. The second reference number is described in the feature I7, which is defined so that the second reference number is equal to or less than the first reference number and equal to or more than the difference between the first reference number and the second reference number. Gaming machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the special gaming state is achieved by shortening the staying period of the game times corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode than the staying period of the game times corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. It is possible to dramatically improve the attention level in the final stage in the advantageous state of transitioning after the end of.

Feature I9. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The game rotation control means has an operation period setting means capable of setting an operation period of the game rotation operation according to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
In the third switching mode, the average number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the gaming ball is continuously launched toward the starting ball entry portion is the average number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the second switching mode. A feature characterized in that it is configured to be larger than the average number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the game ball is continuously launched toward the starting ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of I4 to feature I5.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game progresses by shifting from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode when the ceiling is reached. It is possible to change the speed. This makes it possible to more preferably suppress the monotonicization of the game.

Feature I10. As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section and a second start ball entry section in which the determination by the determination means is more advantageous to the player than the first start ball entry section are provided.
The variable mechanism is in the accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry portion and in the non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. It has a switchable configuration and has a switchable configuration.
Both the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section are arranged in a predetermined flow path in the game area.
The gaming machine according to feature I9, wherein the determination means is configured to perform the determination in the order of entry into the first start entry section and the second start entry section.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the second start is performed by shifting from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode when the ceiling is reached. There will be more opportunities for the game rounds related to the ball entry section to be executed. As a result, the player's advantage is greatly increased by reaching the ceiling, and the degree of attention to the game after reaching the ceiling can be suitably improved.

Feature I11. The third criterion is that the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode by the second transition means does not result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. A third transition means for shifting the switching control mode to the first switching mode without going through the special gaming state when the number of times is reached is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature I4 to the feature I10, wherein the third reference number of times is defined to be larger than the first reference number of times.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, after the end of the special gaming state, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode → the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode → the low probability mode and the third. It shifts in the order of the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the switching mode → the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from rapidly decreasing when the third switching mode is set when the ceiling is reached and the mode is changed to the low probability mode.

The technical ideas shown in the above features I5 to I11 may be applied to the features I1 to I3.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to H may be applied to the features I1 to I10.

<Characteristic J group>
The following feature J group is described as "in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features J1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, the first type gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and the second type gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode (for example, the fourth normal gaming state). And are provided,
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, and the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state in the first type gaming state is described. When the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) is reached without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the first transition to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state. Means (a function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 with the special disconnection result and reaching the ceiling as a trigger).
After shifting to the second type gaming state by the first transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the second type gaming state is the end reference number of times (for example, without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information). When the number of times is 40 or 400), the second transition means for transitioning to the first type gaming state (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 is triggered by the time saving digestion from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state). Function to shift to) and
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit during the type 2 gaming state shifted by the determination result corresponding to the second determination information, the second type It is characterized by having a resetting means (a function of overwriting the value of the continuation number counter with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for resetting the number of executions of the remaining game times that reach the end reference number in the game state. A game machine.

According to the feature J1, even if the game proceeds while the transition to the special game state (judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not established, the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the end of the special game state When the upper limit of the number of games to be played later is reached (ceiling is reached), the game may shift to the second type game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. By switching to the high frequency switching mode, the frequency of entering the starting ball is increased, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the soundness of the game. However, as described above, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information and the ceiling arrival are used together as an opportunity to shift to the second type gaming state, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling reach is invalidated when the player reaches the ceiling during the second type game state, some of the benefits that the player should have originally enjoyed disappear, and the player's satisfaction level. Is a concern that will drop significantly. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the second type game state, the number of executions of the remaining game times is reset. This can dispel the above concerns and contribute to improving the satisfaction of the player.

Regarding the "resetting means" shown in this feature, the number of executions of the remaining game times set when the game shifts to the second type game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, and the second. The configuration may be such that the number of executions of the remaining game times set when the number of executions of the game times after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit during the seed game state is the same as the number of times of execution, or the second determination information. The upper limit is the number of executions of the remaining game times set when the game shifts to the second type game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the above, and the number of executions of the game times after the end of the special game state during the second type game state. The number of times may be different from the number of executions of the remaining game times set when the number of times is reached.

Feature J2. When the number of executions of the remaining game times is reset by the resetting means, the second-class gaming state is continued without going through any gaming state other than the second-class gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature J1, which is characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the feature J2, when the ceiling is reached and the number of executions of the remaining game times is reset during the second type game state, the second game state is not shifted to another game state due to the reset. The two-kind game state will be continued. This is preferable in order to suppress the disturbance of the rhythm of the game in the second type game state.

Feature J3. Regarding the number of executions of the remaining game times set by the resetting means, the number of executions of the remaining game times set when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first type game state. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, which is configured to be configured to be more than one.

According to the feature J3, it is possible to prevent the number of executions of the remaining game times from decreasing due to reaching the ceiling, and to contribute to the improvement of the player's satisfaction.

Features J4. The game rotation control means has an operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game rotation operation.
As the operation period, a first operation period (for example, 20 sec to 30 sec) and a second operation period (for example, 3 sec to 14 sec) shorter than the first operation period are provided.
The operation period setting means is one of the features J1 to the feature J3 having a configuration in which the second operation period is set as the operation period of the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached during the second type game state. The gaming machine described in.

If the second operation period is set as the operation period when the ceiling is reached during the second type game state as shown in the feature J4, it is preferable that the smoothness of the game progress is impaired by the reset function. Can be suppressed.

Feature J5. When the number of executions of the remaining game times is reset by the resetting means in the situation where the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state, the acceptance period set in association with the switching to the acceptance state is set. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to the feature J4, characterized in that the acceptance state is maintained until the lapse of time.

Feature As shown in J5, even if the variable mechanism is reset while it is in the accepted state, the smooth flow of the game is interrupted by avoiding the forced termination of the accepted state. This can be suitably suppressed.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to I may be applied to the features J1 to J5.

<Characteristic K group>
The following feature K group is described as "In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player are provided. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features K1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, the first type gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and the second type gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode (for example, the second normal gaming state). The third normal game state and the fourth normal game state) are provided.
When a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, a means (main control) for shifting to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state. The MPU 402 of the device 162 is provided with a function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by a special deviation result).
When a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second type gaming state, the determination result is invalidated.
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) for executing a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed is provided. ,
As the display effect, a first display effect and a second display effect are provided.
The display effect executing means is
When the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (normally deviated result) that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information, the means for executing the first display effect and the means.
Means for executing the second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the situation of the first type gaming state. When,
Means for executing the first display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the situation of the second type gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having and.

According to the feature K1, even if the game proceeds while the transition to the special gaming state (judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not established, the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is high. It may shift to the second type game state corresponding to the frequency switching mode. By switching to the high frequency switching mode, the frequency of entering the starting ball is increased, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the soundness of the game. However, if the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second type gaming state, the determination result becomes invalid. This is preferable in suppressing the increase in gambling, but if the player understands that the judgment result has been obtained, there is concern that the player will be given the impression that he or she has wasted luck. Will be done. This can be a factor that reduces the motivation to play. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes a judgment result (normal deviation result) that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, the first display effect is executed and the first type gaming state is executed. If the judgment result by the judgment means becomes the judgment result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second judgment information under the situation of, the second display effect is executed and it becomes the second kind game state. If the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information under the present circumstances, the first display effect is executed. With such a configuration, even when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second type gaming state, it can be made inconspicuous. This can suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience and contribute to the improvement of the player's satisfaction. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature K2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, the first type gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and the second type gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode (for example, the second normal gaming state). The third normal game state and the fourth normal game state) are provided.
When a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, a means (main control) for shifting to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state. The MPU 402 of the device 162 is provided with a function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by a special deviation result).
When a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second type gaming state, the determination result is invalidated.
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) for executing a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed is provided. ,
The display effect executing means is
A pattern display means (design display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (designs) on the display screen, and
A display control means for controlling the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of patterns on the display screen and then displaying the final stop display of the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means. (Notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410)
When the game time control means obtains a determination result corresponding to the second determination information in a situation in which the game state is either the first type game state or the second type game state. , The predetermined notification means is controlled so that the notification result corresponds to the determination result.
As a pattern combination to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, a first pattern combination (a symbol combination showing a normal deviation result) and a second pattern combination (a symbol combination showing a special deviation result) are provided.
The display control means is
When the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (normally deviated result) that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information, the means for stopping and displaying the first pattern combination and the means.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the situation of the first type gaming state, the second pattern combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the situation of the second type gaming state, the first pattern combination is performed. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for displaying a stop.

According to the feature K2, even if the game proceeds while the transition to the special gaming state (judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not established, the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is high. It may shift to the second type game state corresponding to the frequency switching mode. By switching to the high frequency switching mode, the frequency of entering the starting ball is increased, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the soundness of the game. However, if the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second type gaming state, the determination result becomes invalid. This is preferable in suppressing the increase in gambling, but if the player understands that the judgment result has been obtained, there is concern that the player will be given the impression that he or she has wasted luck. Will be done. This can be a factor that reduces the motivation to play. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result (normal deviation result) does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, the first pattern combination is stopped and displayed, and the game is in the first type gaming state. If the judgment result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained below, the second pattern combination is stopped and displayed, and the second judgment information is used in the situation where the game is in the second type gaming state. When the corresponding determination result (special deviation result) is obtained, the first pattern combination is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, even when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second type gaming state, it can be made inconspicuous. This can suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience and contribute to the improvement of the player's satisfaction. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature K3. The game rotation control means has an operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game rotation operation.
As the operation period, a first operation period (for example, 20 sec to 30 sec) and a second operation period (for example, 3 sec to 14 sec) shorter than the first operation period are provided.
The operation period setting means is
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the situation of the first type gaming state, the first operation period is defined as the operation period. And the means to set
When the determination result by the determination means does not correspond to the predetermined determination information (normally out of order result) in the situation of the second type gaming state, the second operation period is defined as the operation period. And the means to set
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the situation of the second type gaming state, the second operation period is defined as the operation period. The gaming machine according to the feature K1 or the feature K2, which comprises means for setting the above.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the first type gaming state, the operation period = the first operation period, and the second type gaming state is in progress. When a judgment result (normal deviation result) that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information is obtained, the operation period = the second operation period, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information during the second type gaming state (special deviation result). When becomes, the operation period = the second operation period. By setting the operation period in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort depending on the operation period, and to preferably exert the effects shown in the feature K1 and the like.

Features K4. The second operation period is a variable period that is variable within a predetermined range (for example, 3 sec to 14 sec).
The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
In the situation of the second type gaming state, the judgment result by the judgment means does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information (normal deviation result) or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special deviation). As a result), when the second operation period is set as the operation period, the operation period is configured to be shorter as the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is larger. The gaming machine according to the feature K3.

In the second type game state, the ball enters the starting ball entry part frequently. Therefore, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the second type gaming state, the operation period depends on the number of special information as in the case where the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information. If the configuration is shortened, the game times that are the determination results corresponding to the second determination information can be rapidly advanced without discomfort, and it is preferable that the notification result in the predetermined notification means is noticed by the player. It is possible to reduce to.

Feature K5. Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination, the destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the second determination information, and
In the first-class gaming state, a special effect executing means for executing a special effect based on a specific result by the above-mentioned specific means, and a special effect executing means.
The feature K1 to the feature K1 to be provided with a regulatory means for regulating either the identification by the prior identification means or the special effect by the special effect execution means in the case of the second type gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of K4.

By executing a special effect (notice effect, look-ahead effect) with the determination result corresponding to the second determination information as the target of identification (so-called look-ahead) by the look-ahead specifying means, the monotonicization of the game can be suitably suppressed. However, in such a configuration, when the special effect occurs during the type 2 gaming state, it not only causes the player to be confused, but also greatly reduces the reliability of the special effect. Therefore, it is preferable to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience by restricting any of the above-mentioned specific and special effects during the type 2 gaming state.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to J may be applied to the features K1 to K5.

<Characteristic L group>
The following feature L group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, "The above-mentioned type of gaming machine can improve the degree of attention to the gaming machine by promoting the diversification of the game, but the management of the gaming machine in the gaming hall becomes complicated due to this. It was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is a concern that new issues will arise."

Feature L1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be.
A first execution number storage means (a game number counter provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404) for storing the number of executions of the game times executed after the end of the special game state, and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the first reset means (regular) for resetting (clearing 0) the number of executions stored in the first execution number storage means. In the normal processing, which is the processing, the function of clearing the game count counter to 0 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
When the number of executions stored in the first execution number storage means reaches the upper limit number (ceiling: for example, 400 times), the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is performed without going through the special gaming state. (A function to shift to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling) and the first transition means to shift to.
A second execution number storage means (continuation provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404) that stores the number of executions of the game times executed in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode that has been transferred by the first transition means. Count counter) and
When the number of executions stored in the second execution number storage means becomes the end reference number (for example, 400 times) in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode that has been transferred by the first transition means. , A second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by a time saving digestion). ,
When a predetermined reset operation (ON operation of the reset switch 166) is performed when the power of the game machine is turned on, the second execution number stored in the first execution number storage means is reset (cleared to 0). Reset means (a function to clear the game count counter to 0 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 in the main process executed at startup) and
It was the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode in which the gaming state before the power was cut off was transferred by the second transition means even when the power was turned on without the predetermined reset operation. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a notification means (annular illumination unit 26 of the front door frame 14 and a notification / effect control device 140) for executing a predetermined notification (special notification) in case of a case.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the player enters the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. Transition. In the second switching mode, the ball enters the starting ball entry portion frequently, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to rescue the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode shifted by reaching the ceiling is provided with the end reference number of times, and even when the ceiling is reached, the predetermined game state is provided. There is a possibility that the predetermined gaming state may end without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information (hereinafter, also referred to as ceiling run-through). This is preferable in order to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from becoming excessive and causing excessive gambling. However, after running through the ceiling, the number of executions stored in the first execution number storage means remains unreset, and it becomes impossible to reach the ceiling again. Here, if the power of the gaming machine is turned from OFF to ON without performing a predetermined reset operation in the state after running through the ceiling, a predetermined notification is executed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the state is after running through the ceiling. It is preferable to support the grasp of the state after running through the ceiling by turning on the power in this way in order to improve the convenience of the administrator.

Feature L2. The first operating means (effect button 35) and the second operating means (reset switch 166),
A notification canceling means for canceling the predetermined notification when any of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in a situation where the predetermined notification is executed is provided.
It is configured that the number of executions stored in the first execution number storage means is reset when the second operation means is operated under the situation where the predetermined notification is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature L1.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the manager of the gaming hall can easily select the correspondence to the gaming machine in which the predetermined notification is executed according to the business form of the gaming hall and the like. That is, it is possible to select whether to cancel only the above-mentioned predetermined notification and leave it in the state of running through the ceiling, or to reset the ceiling. With such a configuration, the effect shown in the feature L1 can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the first operating means is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, and the second operating means is arranged on the back side of the gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, if the second operating means for resetting and canceling the notification is arranged on the back side of the gaming machine and the first operating means for canceling the notification is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, the convenience of the administrator can be improved. It is possible to reduce the inconvenience that the number of executions is reset by the player while trying.

Feature L4. The notification canceling means is the first notification canceling means.
The feature L2 is provided with a second notification canceling means for canceling the predetermined notification when the power is cut off and the power is turned on again under the condition that the predetermined notification is executed. Or the gaming machine according to the feature L3.

Many gaming machines are often installed in the island facilities of the gaming hall. As the number of installations increases, the number of gaming machines on which the above-mentioned predetermined notification is executed also increases. Here, as shown in this feature, if the predetermined notification is canceled by turning the power OFF → the power ON under the situation where the predetermined notification is executed, each gaming machine is individually released. It is not necessary to perform the above release operation, which can contribute to further improvement of the convenience of the administrator.

Feature L5. The notification means performs the predetermined notification by setting the light emitting display unit (annular illumination unit 26) provided on the front surface portion (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine to a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, all lighting). It is a thing
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature L1 to the feature L4, which comprises at least the regulating means for regulating the predetermined notification when the gaming time is progressing by the game time control means. ..

In order to make the predetermined notification as conspicuous as possible, it is technically significant to execute the predetermined notification on the light emitting display unit provided on the front portion of the gaming machine. However, if the predetermined notification is not canceled due to overlooking the predetermined notification or the like, the predetermined notification will be continued even during the business hours of the game hall. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, predetermined notification is restricted at least when the game round is in progress. This makes it possible to allow the use of the light emitting display unit for the purpose of producing or the like. This is preferable in order to suppress the oversight of a predetermined notification and to suppress the deterioration of the effect function due to the suppression.

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "in the notification means, the light emitting display unit (annular illumination unit 26) provided on the front surface portion (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine is set to a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, all lighting). By doing so, the predetermined notification is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature L1 to the feature L4, characterized in that the predetermined notification is canceled when the game rotation is started by the game rotation control means. It is also possible to say.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to K may be applied to the features L1 to L5.

<Characteristic M group>
The following feature M group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features M1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, the first type gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and the second type gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode (for example, the second normal gaming state). The third normal game state and the fourth normal game state) are provided.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the first type gaming state, the said Means for shifting to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. Prepare,
As the display effect, a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided.
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R probability variation jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 2R probability variation jackpot result) are provided.
The display effect executing means is
A means for executing the first display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached.
A game characterized in that it has a means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. Machine.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the second type game corresponding to the high frequency switching mode Move to the state. In the second type game state, the frequent entry into the starting ball entry section suppresses the investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to rescue the player. Here, when the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, there is a possibility that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information will be obtained in the game times when the ceiling is reached. In the configuration shown in this feature, when the above-mentioned duplication occurs, different display effects are displayed depending on whether the determination result is the determination result corresponding to the first information or the determination result corresponding to the second information. It is configured to be executed. Specifically, when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached, the first display effect clearly indicating that the upper limit number of times is reached is executed, and the first display effect is executed in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. When the determination result corresponding to the two pieces of information is obtained, the second display effect is executed without clearly indicating that the upper limit of the number of times has been reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the monotonousness of the game production and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that the description regarding the "predetermined determination information" is "as the predetermined determination information, the first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result) in which the player's advantage is relatively high, and the player's advantage. Second information with a relatively low degree (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result) is provided. "

Features M2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, the first type gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and the second type gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode (for example, the second normal gaming state) 4th normal game state) is provided,
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the first type gaming state, the said It is equipped with a means for shifting to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R probability variation jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 2R probability variation jackpot result) are provided.
When the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the means for shifting to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state and the means.
When the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the means for shifting to the first type gaming state via the special gaming state and the means.
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. Prepare,
As the display effect, a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided.
The display effect executing means is
A means for executing the first display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached.
A game characterized in that it has a means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. Machine.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the second type game corresponding to the high frequency switching mode Move to the state. In the second type game state, the frequent entry into the starting ball entry section suppresses the investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to rescue the player. Here, when the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the investment of the player is large when the ceiling is reached. For this reason, it is feared that if it is conspicuous that the benefit cannot be enjoyed even though the player has reached the ceiling, the player's willingness to play will be reduced. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the game times when the ceiling is reached (in the case of duplication), the judgment result corresponds to the first information. Different display effects are executed depending on whether the determination result is the determination result or the determination result corresponding to the second information. Specifically, when the judgment result corresponding to the first information (that is, the judgment result of switching to the high frequency switching mode after the end of the special game state) is obtained in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached, the time when the upper limit number of times is reached is clearly indicated. 1 When the display effect is executed and the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached (that is, the judgment result in which the low frequency switching mode is set after the end of the special game state), the upper limit number of times is reached. The configuration is such that a second display effect that is not specified is executed. With such a configuration, when the judgment result corresponding to the first information is set and the special game state → high frequency switching mode is set, the player is made to imagine that it is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. It is possible to make a judgment result corresponding to the second information, and when the special game state → low frequency switching mode is set, the player can imagine that the benefit is not generated in the first place by not clearly indicating the arrival at the ceiling. Can be made to. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the satisfaction level of the player and preferably realize the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Features M3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, the first type gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and the second type gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode (for example, the second normal gaming state). The third normal game state and the fourth normal game state) are provided.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the first type gaming state, the said Means for shifting to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).
When the number of times the game is executed becomes the first end reference number (for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the second type gaming state transferred by the second transition means. Is provided with a means for shifting to the first-class gaming state.
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R probability variation jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R normal jackpot result) are provided.
When the determination result corresponding to the first information and the determination result corresponding to the second information are obtained by the determination by the determination means, the means for shifting to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state is provided. ,
The type 2 gaming state that has been transferred as the determination result corresponding to the first information is continued until the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained, while the determination result corresponding to the second information is continued. When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained next, or in the second type gaming state, the number of times the game is executed corresponds to the predetermined determination information. When the number of second end reference times (for example, 40 times) is less than the first end reference number without any result, the game is shifted to the first type gaming state.
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) for executing a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed is provided. ,
As the display effect, a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided.
The display effect executing means is
A means for executing the first display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached.
A game characterized in that it has a means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. Machine.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the second type game corresponding to the high frequency switching mode Move to the state. In the second type game state, the frequent entry into the starting ball entry section suppresses the investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to rescue the player. Here, when the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the investment of the player is large when the ceiling is reached. For this reason, it is feared that if it is conspicuous that the benefit cannot be enjoyed even though the player has reached the ceiling, the player's willingness to play will be reduced. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the game times when the ceiling is reached (in the case of duplication), the judgment result corresponds to the first information. Different display effects are executed depending on whether the determination result is the determination result or the determination result corresponding to the second information. Specifically, when the judgment result corresponding to the first information (that is, the judgment result of the high frequency switching mode of long continuation after the end of the special game state) is obtained in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached, the upper limit number of times is reached. When the first display effect to be specified is executed and the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the game times when the maximum number of times is reached (that is, the judgment result in which the short continuation high frequency switching mode is set after the end of the special game state). Is configured to execute a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit has been reached. With such a configuration, when the judgment result corresponding to the first information is set and the special game state → long continuation high frequency switching mode is set, the player feels as if it is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. In the case of a special game state → high frequency switching mode of short continuation as a judgment result corresponding to the second information, the benefit is not generated in the first place by not clearly indicating the arrival at the ceiling. You can make the player imagine it. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the satisfaction level of the player and preferably realize the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that, in the present feature, "the second type gaming state that has been transferred as the determination result corresponding to the first information is continued until the next determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained, while the second information". When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained next, or in the second type gaming state, the number of times the game is executed is the predetermined number of times. When the number of second end reference times (for example, 40 times) is smaller than the first end reference number without producing a judgment result corresponding to the determination information, the game is shifted to the first type gaming state. " The description "The first end without the number of times the game being executed in the second type gaming state that has become the determination result corresponding to the first information becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information". When the second end reference number (for example, 9999 times) is larger than the reference number, the game shifts to the first type gaming state, while the second type shifts as a determination result corresponding to the second information. In the game state, the third end reference number (for example, 40 times) is larger than the first end reference number without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information being obtained in the second type game state. ), It is possible to change to the above-mentioned type 1 gaming state.

Features M4. In the first display effect, the display effect executing means executes an effect indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached, and then executes an effect indicating that a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information has been obtained. On the other hand, in the second display effect, the effect of clearly indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached is not executed, and the effect of clearly indicating that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M1 to the feature M3, which is configured to be executed.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the first display effect executed when the judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained, the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is made after it is clearly indicated that the ceiling has been reached. It is clearly stated that it has become. With such a configuration, it is clearly stated that the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information → a special game state is obtained, so that it is as if two benefits are given while suppressing the discomfort of the production. I can show you.

Feature M5. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or a variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As a switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry portion. And, since the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode, the second is set so that the ball can be easily entered into the starting ball entry portion as compared with the first switching mode. Since the switching mode (high frequency support mode B) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than in the first switching mode, it is easier to enter the starting ball than in the first switching mode. There is a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set to be.
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 6R probability variation jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a 2R probability variation jackpot result) are provided.
When the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the first transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode via the special gaming state and
When the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the second transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode via the special gaming state and
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game goes through the special game state. A third transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling) and a third transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode.
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. Prepare,
As the display effect, a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided.
The display effect executing means is
A means for executing the first display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached.
A game characterized in that it has a means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. Machine.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the player enters the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode. Transition. In this predetermined game state, the ball enters the starting ball entry portion frequently, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to rescue the player. Here, when the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the investment of the player is large when the ceiling is reached. For this reason, it is feared that if it is conspicuous that the benefit cannot be enjoyed even though the player has reached the ceiling, the player's willingness to play will be reduced. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the game times when the ceiling is reached (in the case of duplication), the judgment result corresponds to the first information. Different display effects are executed depending on whether the determination result is the determination result or the determination result corresponding to the second information. Specifically, when the determination result corresponding to the first information (that is, the determination result of the second switching mode after the end of the special gaming state) is obtained in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached, the upper limit number of times is clearly indicated. 1 When the display effect is executed and the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached (that is, the judgment result in which the first switching mode is set after the end of the special game state), the upper limit number of times is reached. The configuration is such that a second display effect that is not specified is executed. With such a configuration, if the judgment result corresponding to the first information is set to the special gaming state → high frequency switching mode (second switching mode), it is as if it is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. It is possible to make the player imagine it as such, and when the judgment result corresponding to the second information is set to the special game state → low frequency switching mode (first switching mode), the ceiling arrival is not specified. It is possible to make the player imagine that the benefits are not occurring in the first place. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the satisfaction level of the player and preferably realize the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

The technical idea shown in the above features M1 to M4 may be applied to the feature M5.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to L may be applied to the features M1 to M3.

<Characteristic N group>
The following feature N group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Feature N1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. Prepare,
The display effect executing means is
A pattern display means (design display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (designs) on the display screen, and
A display control means for controlling the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of patterns on the display screen and then displaying the final stop display of the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means. (Notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410)
The display control means is
A special stop display means for stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second determination information as a combination of symbols corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained. (Function to execute processing for temporary stop by MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) and
The special variable display means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 performs a process for revariable display) in which the predetermined pattern combination stopped and displayed by the special stop display means is variably displayed again before the final stop display is reached. Has a function to execute)
A plurality of reference times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) are provided as the end reference times, and the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is provided. When shifting to, the end reference number setting means (a function of executing the continuation count counter setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that sets any one of the plurality of reference times as the end reference number of the present time, and
Correlation information notification means (remaining number counter displayed on the number display unit 88C and notification / effect control device) for notifying the player of the correlation information (number of times) correlated with the end reference number set by the end reference number setting means. With 140)
The correlation information notification means is an information updating means (notification / effect control) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the fact that the predetermined pattern combination is displayed at a predetermined position through variable display by the special variable display means. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the device 140).

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. In particular, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, any one of the plurality of reference times is set as the end reference number of times, and further diversification of the game is realized. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information is stopped and displayed to correspond to the second determination information. It is clearly shown to the player that the judgment result has been obtained. After that, the configuration is such that the variable display is performed again before the final stop display is reached, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with the variable display. The player can grasp that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained based on the fact that the predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed), and after that, the pattern combination is placed in the predetermined position. By updating the correlation information each time it reaches, it is possible to estimate or grasp the number of times of the end reference this time. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game when shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode triggered by the determination result corresponding to the second determination information.

Feature N2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. Prepare,
The display effect executing means is
A symbol display means (symbol display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows (left symbol row, middle symbol row, right symbol row) on the display screen.
Display control that controls the display of the symbol display means by variably displaying the plurality of symbol sequences on the display screen and then displaying the final stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means. It has means (notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410).
The display control means is
A special stop display means for stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second determination information as a combination of symbols corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained. (Function to execute processing for temporary stop by MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) and
The special lap display means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 executes a process for re-variation display) that laps and displays the predetermined pattern combination stopped and displayed by the special stop display means before the final stop display is reached. Function) and has
A plurality of reference times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) are provided as the end reference times, and the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is provided. When shifting to, the end reference number setting means (a function of executing the continuation count counter setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that sets any one of the plurality of reference times as the end reference number of the present time, and
Correlation information notification means (remaining number counter displayed on the number display unit 88C and notification / effect control device) for notifying the player of the correlation information (number of times) correlated with the end reference number set by the end reference number setting means. With 140)
The correlation information notifying means is an information updating means for updating the correlation information being notified based on the movement of the predetermined pattern combination when the special orbital display means is performing the orbital display of the predetermined pattern combination. A gaming machine characterized by having (a function of executing a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140).

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. In particular, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, any one of the plurality of reference times is set as the end reference number of times, and further diversification of the game is realized. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information is stopped and displayed to correspond to the second determination information. It is clearly shown to the player that the judgment result has been obtained. After that, the predetermined pattern combination is lap-displayed before the final stop display is reached, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with the lap display. The player can grasp that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained based on the fact that the predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed), and then the correlation information is updated. By doing so, it is possible to estimate or grasp the number of termination criteria this time. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game when shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode triggered by the determination result corresponding to the second determination information.

Feature N3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. Prepare,
The display effect executing means is
A symbol display means (symbol display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows (left symbol row, middle symbol row, right symbol row) on the display screen.
Display control that controls the display of the symbol display means by variably displaying the plurality of symbol sequences on the display screen and then displaying the final stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means. It has means (notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410).
The display control means is
A special stop display means for stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second determination information as a combination of symbols corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained. (Function to execute processing for temporary stop by MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) and
The special lap display means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 executes a process for re-variation display) that laps and displays the predetermined pattern combination stopped and displayed by the special stop display means before the final stop display is reached. Function) and has
A plurality of reference times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) are provided as the end reference times, and the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is provided. When shifting to, the end reference number setting means (a function of executing the continuation count counter setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that sets any one of the plurality of reference times as the end reference number of the present time, and
Correlation information notification means (remaining number counter displayed on the number display unit 88C and notification / effect control device) for notifying the player of the correlation information (number of times) correlated with the end reference number set by the end reference number setting means. With 140)
The correlation information notification means counts up with the information updating means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the rotation of the predetermined pattern combination by the special rotation display means. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing processing).

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. In particular, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, any one of the plurality of reference times is set as the end reference number of times, and further diversification of the game is realized. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information is stopped and displayed to correspond to the second determination information. It is clearly shown to the player that the judgment result has been obtained. After that, the predetermined pattern combination is lap-displayed before the final stop display is reached, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with the lap display. The player can grasp that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained based on the fact that the predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed), and then the predetermined pattern combination is lapped. By updating the correlation information according to the above, it is possible to estimate or grasp the number of times of the end reference this time. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game when shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode triggered by the determination result corresponding to the second determination information.

Feature N4. The gaming machine according to feature N2 or feature N3, wherein the special orbital display means is configured to perform the orbital display so that the predetermined combination of patterns is maintained.

In the configuration where the correlation information is updated by displaying the predetermined pattern combination in a lap as shown in the feature N2 etc., the lap is successful because the predetermined pattern combination is broken in the process of the lap. It gives the impression that the correlation information is not updated, that is, there is a concern that the degree of attention to the production will decrease at an early stage. Therefore, if the orbital display is performed so that a predetermined combination of patterns is maintained as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. It should be noted that such a configuration is also preferable in order to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the fact that the predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed is itself a mistake.

Feature N5. The gaming machine according to feature N2 or feature N3, wherein the special orbital display means is configured to perform the orbital display by synchronizing the plurality of picture rows.

In the configuration where the correlation information is updated by displaying the predetermined pattern combination in a lap as shown in the feature N2 etc., the lap is successful because the predetermined pattern combination is broken in the process of the lap. It gives the impression that the correlation information is not updated, that is, there is a concern that the degree of attention to the production will decrease at an early stage. Therefore, if the circuit display is performed by synchronizing each pattern sequence as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. It should be noted that such a configuration is also preferable in order to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the fact that the predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed is itself a mistake.

Feature N6. The game according to feature N4 or feature N5, wherein the other pattern combinations displayed in the special lap display are configured so as not to include the pattern combination corresponding to the first determination information. Machine.

According to the feature N6, it is possible to suppress unnecessary fanning as if the result is promoted to the result corresponding to the first determination information, and it is possible to suitably avoid the misidentification of the player. This is preferable in order to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the update of the correlation information linked to the special lap display.

Feature N7. The correlation information notification means is configured to display the remaining number of times that the end reference number of times is reached as the correlation information.
The game according to any one of the features N2 to N6, wherein the information updating means is configured to add and display the remaining number of times as the updating each time the predetermined pattern combination is lapped. Machine.

As shown in the feature N7, if the remaining number of times is additionally displayed each time the predetermined pattern combination laps, the player expects that the lap motion continues as long as possible, and the second switching is performed by the effect. It is possible to preferably suppress the impression that the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the mode is unnecessarily delayed.

Feature N8. The display control means has a lap count setting means for setting the lap count by the special lap display means.
The feature N2 to the feature N7 is characterized in that the lap count setting means is configured to set the lap count so that the number of laps increases as the set end reference count increases. The gaming machine described in one.

According to the configuration shown in the feature N8, the player expects the lap motion to continue for as long as possible, and it seems that the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is unnecessarily delayed by the effect. It is possible to suitably suppress the impression.

Feature N9. A plurality of effective lines are provided on the display screen of the pattern display means.
The special stop display means is configured to set any one of the plurality of effective lines as a stop line for stopping and displaying the predetermined pattern combination.
The characteristic N2 to the feature is that the correlation information notification means is configured to update the correlation information when the predetermined pattern combination reaches the stop line by the orbital display by the special orbital display means. The gaming machine according to any one of N8.

As shown in this feature, if the stop line in which the predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed) and the stop line that triggers the update of the correlation information are aligned, the game is caused by the diversification of the production. It is possible to prevent people from being confused. This is preferable in order to preferably exert the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention.

Feature N10. The special stop display means is characterized in that the stop line is set so that at least one effective line is secured on the front side of the stop line in the circumferential direction of the pattern. The described gaming machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to end the lap display when a predetermined pattern combination reaches another effective line before the effective line (stop line) that triggers the update of the correlation information. This is preferable in order to realize diversification of production.

Feature N11. The correlation information notification means keeps the correlation information hidden when the predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed by the special stop display means, and reaches the stop line after the predetermined pattern combination is variably displayed. The gaming machine according to feature N9 or feature N10, which is configured to start displaying the correlation information when the correlation information is displayed.

As shown in this feature, when the predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed), the correlation information is left hidden, and when the predetermined pattern combination reaches the stop line after the variable display. If the configuration is such that the display of the correlation information is started, it is possible to circulate the predetermined pattern combination at least once. This is preferable in order to widen the range of the set end reference number of times and to suppress the flow of lap display → correlation information update caused by it from becoming obsolete.

Feature N12. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode B) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. Prepare,
The display effect executing means is
A pattern display means (design display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (designs) on the display screen, and
A display control means for controlling the display of the pattern display means by variably displaying the plurality of patterns on the display screen and then displaying the final stop display of the pattern combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means. (Notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410)
The display control means is
A special stop display means for stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second determination information as a combination of symbols corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained. (Function to execute processing for temporary stop by MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) and
The special variable display means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 performs a process for revariable display) in which the predetermined pattern combination stopped and displayed by the special stop display means is variably displayed again before the final stop display is reached. Has a function to execute)
A plurality of reference times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) are provided as the end reference times, and the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is provided. When shifting to, the end reference number setting means (a function of executing the continuation count counter setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that sets any one of the plurality of reference times as the end reference number of the present time, and
Correlation information notification means (remaining number counter displayed on the number display unit 88C and notification / effect control device) for notifying the player of the correlation information (number of times) correlated with the end reference number set by the end reference number setting means. With 140)
The correlation information notification means is an information updating means (notification / effect control) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the fact that the predetermined pattern combination is displayed at a predetermined position through variable display by the special variable display means. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the device 140).

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. In particular, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, any one of the plurality of reference times is set as the end reference number of times, and further diversification of the game is realized. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information is stopped and displayed to correspond to the second determination information. It is clearly shown to the player that the judgment result has been obtained. After that, the configuration is such that the variable display is performed again before the final stop display is reached, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with the variable display. The player can grasp that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained based on the fact that the predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed), and after that, the pattern combination is placed in the predetermined position. By updating the correlation information each time it reaches, it is possible to estimate or grasp the number of times of the end reference this time. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game when shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode triggered by the determination result corresponding to the second determination information.

Feature N13. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode B) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. Prepare,
The display control means is
A special stop display means for stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second determination information as a combination of symbols corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained. (Function to execute processing for temporary stop by MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) and
The special lap display means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 executes a process for re-variation display) that laps and displays the predetermined pattern combination stopped and displayed by the special stop display means before the final stop display is reached. Function) and has
A plurality of reference times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) are provided as the end reference times, and the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is provided. When shifting to, the end reference number setting means (a function of executing the continuation count counter setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that sets any one of the plurality of reference times as the end reference number of the present time, and
Correlation information notification means (remaining number counter displayed on the number display unit 88C and notification / effect control device) for notifying the player of the correlation information (number of times) correlated with the end reference number set by the end reference number setting means. With 140)
The correlation information notifying means is an information updating means for updating the correlation information being notified based on the movement of the predetermined pattern combination when the special orbital display means is performing the orbital display of the predetermined pattern combination. A gaming machine characterized by having (a function of executing a count-up process in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140).

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. In particular, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, any one of the plurality of reference times is set as the end reference number of times, and further diversification of the game is realized. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information is stopped and displayed to correspond to the second determination information. It is clearly shown to the player that the judgment result has been obtained. After that, the predetermined pattern combination is lap-displayed before the final stop display is reached, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with the lap display. The player can grasp that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained based on the fact that the predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed), and then the correlation information is updated. By doing so, it is possible to estimate or grasp the number of termination criteria this time. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game when shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode triggered by the determination result corresponding to the second determination information.

Feature N14. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode B) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. Prepare,
The display control means is
A special stop display means for stopping and displaying a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the second determination information as a combination of symbols corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained. (Function to execute processing for temporary stop by MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) and
The special lap display means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 executes a process for re-variation display) that laps and displays the predetermined pattern combination stopped and displayed by the special stop display means before the final stop display is reached. Function) and has
A plurality of reference times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) are provided as the end reference times, and the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is provided. When shifting to, the end reference number setting means (a function of executing the continuation count counter setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that sets any one of the plurality of reference times as the end reference number of the present time, and
Correlation information notification means (remaining number counter displayed on the number display unit 88C and notification / effect control device) for notifying the player of the correlation information (number of times) correlated with the end reference number set by the end reference number setting means. With 140)
The correlation information notification means counts up with an information updating means (MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140) that updates the correlation information being notified based on the rotation of the predetermined pattern combination by the special rotation display means. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing processing).

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. In particular, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, any one of the plurality of reference times is set as the end reference number of times, and further diversification of the game is realized. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second determination information is stopped and displayed to correspond to the second determination information. It is clearly shown to the player that the judgment result has been obtained. After that, the predetermined pattern combination is lap-displayed before the final stop display is reached, and the correlation information is updated in conjunction with the lap display. The player can grasp that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained based on the fact that the predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed), and then the predetermined pattern combination is lapped. By updating the correlation information according to the above, it is possible to estimate or grasp the number of times of the end reference this time. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game when shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode triggered by the determination result corresponding to the second determination information.

The technical ideas shown in the above features N2 to N11 may be applied to the features N1, the features N12 to the features N14.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to M may be applied to the features N1 to N14.

<Characteristic O group>
The following feature O group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features O1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) set to be.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
First destination specifying means (main control device) for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the first determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination. Function to execute the process for confirming the jackpot with MPU 402 of 162) and
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first special effect executing means (symbol display device 95A) that executes the first special effect (big hit notice effect) based on the specific result by the first destination specifying means. , A function to execute processing for jackpot advance notice effect in the notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410),
A second destination specifying means (main control device) for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination. (Function to execute the process for confirming the special deviation with the MPU 402 of 162) and
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the second special effect executing means (special effect device 500D,) that executes the second special effect (special disengagement notice effect) based on the specific result by the second destination specifying means. It is equipped with 500E, 500F, a function to execute processing for special off-preliminary effect by the notification / effect control device 140).
The first special effect is an effect executed at least in a game time prior to the game time related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect.
The second special effect is an effect executed at least in a game time prior to the game time related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect.
When one of the first special effect and the second special effect is executed, the regulatory means (notification / effect control device 140) for restricting the execution of the other of the first special effect and the second special effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the MPU 442 is equipped with a function of managing a production regulation flag, etc.).

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the determination result corresponds to the first determination information is specified before the start of the corresponding game round (hereinafter referred to as "first identification"), and the subsequent identification result. The first special effect is executed based on the above, and whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is specified before the corresponding game round is started (hereinafter referred to as "first specification"). , The second special effect is executed based on the specific result. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game from the game times before the corresponding game times. However, the fact that two types of special effects having different premised results are executed in parallel can be a factor that confuses the player. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game by the special production. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that when one special effect is executed, the other special effect is not executed, the above-mentioned concern can be suitably dispelled. This is preferable for coexistence of the above-mentioned two kinds of special effects.

The "regulatory means" shown in this feature has a function to avoid duplication between the first special effect and the second special effect, and the other special effect is newly started during one special effect. It includes a configuration for restricting the performance, and a configuration for forcibly ending (cancelling) one special effect when the other special effect is started during one special effect.

Feature O2. The regulating means regulates the first special effect and the second special effect so that the other is not started, triggered by the special information that triggered the start of either the first special effect or the second special effect. The gaming machine according to feature O1, which is characterized in that it is configured to be used.

If the first special effect and the second special effect are executed triggered by the special information of 1, one special effect will deny the other special effect. It is feared that this will be a factor that confuses the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if it is avoided that both the first special effect and the second special effect are executed with the special information of 1 as a trigger, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "the regulatory means provides special information that triggered the start of either the first special effect or the second special effect, and other special information that follows the special information. It is also possible to use the gaming machine according to feature O1, which is characterized in that the other of the first special effect and the second special effect is restricted from being started as an opportunity. "

Feature O3. The restricting means starts the regulation when either the first special effect or the second special effect is executed by the first special effect executing means or the second special effect executing means, and the regulation means one of them. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or feature O2, which is configured to terminate the regulation when the special production of the above is completed.

As shown in this feature, it is preferable to have a configuration in which when one special effect is executed, the other special effect is regulated in order to relax the restrictions on the effect mode of the special effect. That is, not only in the case where the special effect is started immediately after the execution condition is satisfied, but also in the case where the start is intentionally delayed even when the execution condition of the special effect is internally satisfied. In addition, the two types of special effects can be suitably coexisted, and the restrictions on the production mode of the special effects can be suitably relaxed.

Feature O4. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) set to be.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
First destination specifying means (main control device) for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the first determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination. Function to execute the process for confirming the jackpot with MPU 402 of 162) and
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first special effect executing means (design display device 95A, notification) that executes the first special effect (big hit notice effect) based on the specific result by the first destination specifying means. (Function to execute the processing of the jackpot notice effect by the effect control device 140 and the display control device 410) and
A second destination specifying means (main control device) for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination. (Function to execute processing for confirmation of special deviation on MPU 402 of 162) and
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the second special effect executing means (special effect device 500D,) that executes the second special effect (special disengagement notice effect) based on the specific result by the second destination specifying means. It is equipped with 500E, 500F, a function to execute processing for special off-preliminary effect by the notification / effect control device 140).
The first special effect is an effect executed at least in a game time prior to the game time related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect.
The second special effect is an effect executed at least in a game time prior to the game time related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect.
When the second special effect is executed by the second special effect executing means, the regulating means (notification / effect control device 140) for restricting the execution of the first special effect by the first special effect executing means (notification / effect control device 140). A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with (a function of executing the management of the production regulation flag, etc.) in the MPU 442 of the above.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the determination result corresponds to the first determination information is specified before the start of the corresponding game round (hereinafter referred to as "first identification"), and the subsequent identification result. The first special effect is executed based on the above, and whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is specified before the corresponding game round is started (hereinafter referred to as "first specification"). , The second special effect is executed based on the specific result. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game from the game times before the corresponding game times. However, in the configuration in which the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is used as an opportunity to shift to the special gaming state, the player who expects the transition to the special gaming state pays attention to the first special effect. If the first special effect is started while the second special effect is being executed, it is highly likely that the player's attention will shift from the second special effect to the first special effect. It is feared that this will hinder the successful exertion of the effect of increasing the attention to the game by the second special production. In this respect, as shown in this feature, when the second special effect is executed by the second special effect executing means, the configuration is such that the first special effect is not executed by the first special effect executing means. If so, the above concerns can be suitably dispelled. This is preferable for coexistence of the above-mentioned two kinds of special effects.

The "regulatory means" shown in this feature has a function to avoid duplication between the first special effect and the second special effect, and regulates the start of the first special effect. The configuration includes a configuration for forcibly terminating (cancelling) the first special effect being executed.

Feature O5. The regulatory means is configured to regulate so that the first special effect is not started by the special information that triggered the start of the second special effect and other special information that follows the special information. The gaming machine according to the feature O4.

If the first special effect and the second special effect are executed triggered by the special information of 1, one special effect will deny the other special effect. It is feared that this will be a factor that confuses the player. In particular, in a configuration in which the first special effect has higher expectations than the second special effect, the execution of the second special effect may act to lower the reliability (expectation) of the first special effect. This can be a factor that greatly reduces the degree of attention to the first special effect. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the configuration is such that the first special effect is not started with the special information that triggered the start of the second special effect and other special information that follows the special information. For example, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. For example, even if new special information is acquired until the end of the second special effect, it may be regulated so that the first special effect triggered by the special information is not executed.

Feature O6. The regulating means is configured to start the regulation when the second special effect is executed by the second special effect executing means, and to end the regulation when the second special effect is completed. The gaming machine according to feature O4 or feature O5.

As shown in this feature, it is preferable that the first special effect is regulated when the second special effect is executed in order to relax the restrictions on the effect mode of the second special effect. That is, not only in the case where the second special effect is started immediately after the execution condition is satisfied, but also in the case where the start is intentionally delayed in the situation where the execution condition of the second special effect is internally satisfied. Even so, the competition between the first special effect and the second special effect can be suitably suppressed, and the restrictions relating to the effect mode of the second special effect can be suitably relaxed.

Feature O7. If the second special effect is executed by the second special effect executing means while the first special effect is being executed by the first special effect executing means, the first special effect is canceled. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature O1 to the feature O6, which is provided with a stopping means for causing the pachinko machine to be stopped.

If the configuration is such that the execution condition of the second special effect can be satisfied during the execution of the first special effect, the opportunity to execute the second special effect can be suitably secured. Then, if the execution condition of the second special effect is satisfied during the execution of the first special effect, the player can be attracted to the second special effect by canceling the first special effect.

Feature O8. When the second special effect is started by the second special effect executing means in a situation where the first special effect is executed by the first special effect executing means, the stopping means is said to be the first. 2. The gaming machine according to feature O7, which is configured to stop the first special effect after the start of the special effect.

When the first special effect is canceled as shown in the feature O7, the cancellation behavior itself can be made a part of the effect by stopping the first special effect after the start of the second special effect, and the game can be started. It is possible to realize a practically preferable configuration in order to improve the degree of attention of.

Feature O9. When the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the first determination information corresponds to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature O1 to the feature O8, which is configured to be more advantageous to the player when the determination result is obtained.

As shown in the feature O9, if the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is configured to increase the advantage when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the player corresponds to the second determination information. It is expected that the determination result will be the determination result corresponding to the determination result → the first determination information, and the degree of attention to the second special effect can be suitably improved.

Especially in combination with the feature O7 or the feature O8, when the second special effect is started during the first special effect, the first special effect is canceled. That is, the expectation that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information will be obtained by canceling the first special effect is increased, and the effect of the cancellation of the first special effect can be more preferably exhibited. ..

Feature O10. The first special effect start timing at which the first special effect is started by the first special effect executing means in the game times, and the second special effect is started by the second special effect executing means at the game times. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature O1 to the feature O9, which is characterized in that the timing of starting the second special effect is different.

In the configuration in which the special effect is started before the corresponding game times as shown in the feature O1 and the like, it is expected that the expectation of the player increases at the start of the special effect. Therefore, when the first special effect and the second special effect are used together, it is preferable that the start (beginning) of each special effect is overlooked if the timing at which the special effect is started is different in the game times. Can be suppressed.

Feature O11. The game according to feature O10, wherein either one of the first special effect start timing and the second special effect start timing is the timing of the first half of the game round, and the other is the timing of the latter half of the game round. Machine.

As shown in Feature O10, in order to make the start timing of the first special effect different from the start timing of the second special effect, one is divided into the first half of the game round and the other is the second half of the game round. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game throughout the game.

Feature O12. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode B) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
First destination specifying means (main control device) for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the first determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination. Function to execute the process for confirming the jackpot with MPU 402 of 162) and
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first special effect executing means (symbol display device 95A) that executes the first special effect (big hit notice effect) based on the specific result by the first destination specifying means. , A function to execute processing for jackpot advance notice effect in the notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410),
A second destination specifying means (main control device) for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination. (Function to execute the process for confirming the special deviation with the MPU 402 of 162) and
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the second special effect executing means (special effect device 500D,) that executes the second special effect (special disengagement notice effect) based on the specific result by the second destination specifying means. It is equipped with 500E, 500F, a function to execute processing for special off-preliminary effect by the notification / effect control device 140).
The first special effect is an effect executed at least in a game time prior to the game time related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect.
The second special effect is an effect executed at least in a game time prior to the game time related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect.
When one of the first special effect and the second special effect is executed, the regulatory means (notification / effect control device 140) for restricting the execution of the other of the first special effect and the second special effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the MPU 442 is equipped with a function of managing a production regulation flag, etc.).

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the determination result corresponds to the first determination information is specified before the start of the corresponding game round (hereinafter referred to as "first identification"), and the subsequent identification result. The first special effect is executed based on the above, and whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is specified before the corresponding game round is started (hereinafter referred to as "first specification"). , The second special effect is executed based on the specific result. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game from the game times before the corresponding game times. However, the fact that two types of special effects having different premised results are executed in parallel can be a factor that confuses the player. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game by the special production. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that when one special effect is executed, the other special effect is not executed, the above-mentioned concern can be suitably dispelled. This is preferable for coexistence of the above-mentioned two kinds of special effects.

Feature O13. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode B) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
First destination specifying means (main control device) for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the first determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination. Function to execute the process for confirming the jackpot with MPU 402 of 162) and
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first special effect executing means (design display device 95A, notification) that executes the first special effect (big hit notice effect) based on the specific result by the first destination specifying means. (Function to execute the process for jackpot advance notice effect by the effect control device 140 and the display control device 410) and
A second destination specifying means (main control device) for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination. (Function to execute the process for confirming the special deviation with the MPU 402 of 162) and
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the second special effect executing means (special effect device 500D,) that executes the second special effect (special disengagement notice effect) based on the specific result by the second destination specifying means. It is equipped with 500E, 500F, a function to execute processing for special off-preliminary effect by the notification / effect control device 140).
The first special effect is an effect executed at least in a game time prior to the game time related to the special information that triggered the execution of the first special effect.
The second special effect is an effect executed at least in a game time prior to the game time related to the special information that triggered the execution of the second special effect.
When the second special effect is executed by the second special effect executing means, the regulating means (notification / effect control device 140) for restricting the execution of the first special effect by the first special effect executing means (notification / effect control device 140). A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with (a function of executing the management of the production regulation flag, etc.) in the MPU 442 of the above.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, whether or not the determination result corresponds to the first determination information is specified before the start of the corresponding game round (hereinafter referred to as "first identification"), and the subsequent identification result. The first special effect is executed based on the above, and whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is specified before the corresponding game round is started (hereinafter referred to as "first specification"). , The second special effect is executed based on the specific result. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game from the game times before the corresponding game times. However, in the configuration in which the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is used as an opportunity to shift to the special gaming state, the player who expects the transition to the special gaming state pays attention to the first special effect. If the first special effect is started while the second special effect is being executed, it is highly likely that the player's attention will shift from the second special effect to the first special effect. It is feared that this will hinder the successful exertion of the effect of increasing the attention to the game by the second special production. In this respect, as shown in this feature, when the second special effect is executed by the second special effect executing means, the configuration is such that the first special effect is not executed by the first special effect executing means. If so, the above concerns can be suitably dispelled. This is preferable for coexistence of the above-mentioned two kinds of special effects.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features O2 to O3 and features O5 to O11 may be applied to the features O12 to O13.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to N may be applied to the features O1 to O13.

<Characteristic P group>
The following feature P group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball entry section variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball entry section according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and problems that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features P1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) set to be.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
Display effect executing means (variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, and display control) that execute a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. It is equipped with a function for executing display control processing of the symbol display device 95 in the device 410).
The display effect executing means controls the display of a symbol display unit (variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols (designs) and the symbol display unit (notification / effect control device 140). And a function to execute a process for displaying a symbol on the display control device 410), and when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the variable display is performed. After that, the pattern combination corresponding to the judgment result is stopped and displayed.
A special display unit (special effect devices 500D, 500F) provided separately from the pattern display unit, and
It is suggested or clearly shown that the result of the determination by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second determination information in the special display unit when the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is set. It is characterized by being equipped with a special control means (a function of executing a process for a special disengagement notice effect in the notification / effect control device 140) for controlling the display of the special display unit so as to execute a special effect. A game machine.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is used because the game immediately shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round. Switching to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to the case where it becomes. This is expected to cause confusion for players and cause wasteful investment. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the pattern combination indicating that fact is stopped and displayed on the pattern display unit. , It is suggested or clearly indicated by a special effect in the special display unit provided separately from the pattern display unit that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress confusing and equivalence with the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences.

Feature P2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) set to be.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
Display effect executing means (variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, and display control) that execute a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. It is equipped with a function for executing display control processing of the symbol display device 95 in the device 410).
The display effect executing means controls the display of a symbol display unit (variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols (designs) and the symbol display unit (notification / effect control device 140). And a function to execute a process for displaying a symbol on the display control device 410), and when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the variable display is performed. After that, the pattern combination corresponding to the judgment result is stopped and displayed.
Prior identification means (main control) for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the determination means. The function to execute the processing for confirming the special deviation in the MPU 402 of the device 162) and
A special display unit (special effect devices 500D, 500F) provided separately from the pattern display unit, and
When the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is set, the special effect (special disengagement notice effect) is executed on the special display unit based on the specific result by the prior identification means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a special control means for controlling the display of a display unit (a function of executing a process for a special off-notice effect by the notification / effect control device 140).

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is used because the game immediately shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round. Switching to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to the case where it becomes. This is expected to cause confusion for players and cause wasteful investment. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the pattern combination indicating that fact is stopped and displayed on the pattern display unit. The determination result corresponding to the second determination information is suggested by the special effect in the special display unit provided separately from the pattern display unit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress confusing and equivalence with the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences.

In this feature, in particular, whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is specified in advance by the first-specific means (hereinafter referred to as "first-specific"), and the result is specified in advance. Since the special effect is executed accordingly, the player can predict in advance that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information may be obtained. With such a configuration, the sudden feeling described above can be reduced, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be further suppressed.

Feature P3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) set to be.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
Display effect executing means (variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, and display control) that execute a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. It is equipped with a function for executing display control processing of the symbol display device 95 in the device 410).
The display effect executing means controls the display of a symbol display unit (variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols (designs) and the symbol display unit (notification / effect control device 140). And a function to execute a process for displaying a symbol on the display control device 410), and when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the variable display is performed. After that, the pattern combination corresponding to the judgment result is stopped and displayed.
Prior identification means (main control) for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the determination means. The function to execute the processing for confirming the special deviation in the MPU 402 of the device 162) and
A special display unit (special effect devices 500D, 500F) provided separately from the pattern display unit, and
In the case of the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, at least based on the specific result before the game round related to the special information targeted by the specific target is started. A special control means (notification / effect control device 140) for performing display control of the special display unit by executing a special effect (special disengagement notice effect) on the special display unit is executed. A gaming machine characterized by having a function).

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is used because the game immediately shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round. Switching to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to the case where it becomes. This is expected to cause confusion for players and cause wasteful investment. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the pattern combination indicating that fact is stopped and displayed on the pattern display unit. The determination result corresponding to the second determination information is suggested by the special effect in the special display unit provided separately from the pattern display unit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress confusing and equivalence with the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences.

In this feature, in particular, whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is specified in advance by the first-specific means (hereinafter referred to as "first-specific"), and the result is specified in advance. A special production is performed accordingly. Since this special effect is executed at least in the game times before the game times related to the special information to be specified in advance, the player may have a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. Can be predicted in advance. With such a configuration, the sudden feeling described above can be reduced, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be further suppressed.

Features P4. One of the feature P1 to the feature P3, wherein the special control means has a means for starting the special effect in a situation where the pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the pattern display unit. The gaming machine described in one.

In the configuration in which the determination result is notified by the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, the attention to the game may be rapidly reduced by notifying that the player has not won. Therefore, if the special effect is started under such a situation, the rapid decrease in the degree of attention described above can be suitably suppressed by the special effect.

Further, in the configuration in which the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is notified by the pattern display unit, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the pattern display unit. Therefore, if the special effect is started during the stop display period in which the need to pay attention to the pattern display unit is reduced, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being overlooked.

Feature P5. When the execution condition of the special effect is satisfied during the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit, the special control means waits for the stop display of the pattern in the variable display to start the special effect. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature P1 to the feature P3, which is characterized by having.

In the configuration in which the determination result is notified by the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, the attention to the game may be rapidly reduced by notifying that the player has not won. Therefore, if the special effect is started under such a situation, the rapid decrease in the degree of attention described above can be suitably suppressed by the special effect.

Further, in the configuration in which the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is notified by the pattern display unit, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the pattern display unit. Therefore, if the execution condition of the special effect is satisfied during the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit, the special effect can be started by waiting for the stop display of the pattern in the variable display. Can be suppressed from being overlooked.

Feature P6. The special display unit is characterized in that the distance from the starting ball entry unit to the special display unit is smaller than the distance from the starting ball entry unit to the pattern display unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features P5.

The player may pay attention to the starting ball entry section for the configuration in which special information is acquired based on the entry into the starting ball entry section. Therefore, by arranging the special display unit closer to the starting ball entry unit as compared with the pattern display unit, it is possible to suitably reduce the chance that the special effect is overlooked.

Feature P7. The special display unit is characterized in that it is arranged behind a portion closer to the starting ball entry portion in the flow path (left route) in which the game ball flows down toward the starting ball entry portion in the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature P1 to the feature P6.

Regarding the configuration in which special information is acquired based on the entry into the starting ball entry section, the player can pay attention to the movement of the game ball toward the starting ball entry section and the starting ball entry section. Therefore, by arranging the special display unit behind the portion closer to the starting ball entry section in the flow path (left route) in which the game ball flows toward the starting ball entry section, it is preferable to have an opportunity to overlook the special effect. Can be reduced to.

Features P8. The special display unit has a first display unit (preliminary decoration units 511D, 511F) suggesting that a determination result corresponding to the second determination information may be obtained, and a determination corresponding to the second determination information. It has a second display unit (decorative unit for notification 512D, 512F) that clearly indicates the result.
When the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information, the special control means receives the determination result corresponding to the second determination information on the first display unit as the special effect. After executing the first display (notice display) suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming the second display unit, the second display (result display) clearly indicates that the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information. When the determination result by the determination means is not the determination result corresponding to the second information, the first display is executed by the first display unit as the special effect. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature P1 to the feature P7, characterized in that the second display unit does not execute the second display.

If the configuration is such that the possibility of the determination result is suggested by the first display unit before the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is clearly indicated by the second display unit, the second display The chance that the second display in the section is overlooked can be suitably reduced.

Features P9. The special display unit is characterized in that the distance from the first display unit to the starting ball entry unit is smaller than the distance from the second display unit to the starting ball entry unit. Feature The gaming machine described in P8.

In a gaming machine of a type in which a game progresses based on the entry of a ball into the starting ball entry section, the player's attention tends to be directed to the starting ball entry section. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the first display unit of the first display unit and the second display unit is closer to the start ball entry unit (starting ball entry unit provided with the determination result corresponding to the second determination information). By forming the special display portion in this way, the overlook suppression effect shown in the feature P8 can be more preferably exhibited.

Features P10. As the display mode of the first display unit, a plurality of display modes having different expectations for the determination result corresponding to the second determination information are provided.
The special control means has a means for switching the display mode of the first display unit in a situation where the pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the pattern display unit, or the feature P8 or the feature P9. The gaming machine described in.

When the pattern is variably displayed on the pattern display unit, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the pattern display unit. Therefore, if the display mode of the first display unit is switched in a situation where the pattern combination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the switching of the display mode from being overlooked.

In addition, there is a possibility that the attention to the game may be momentarily reduced due to the stop display of the pattern combination, but as shown in this feature, the first display is performed under the situation where the pattern combination is stopped and displayed. If the display mode of the unit is switched, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "as a display mode of the special display unit in the special effect, a plurality of display modes having different expectations for a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information are provided, and the special display mode is provided. The control means is any one of the feature P1 to the feature P7, wherein the display mode of the special display unit can be switched in a situation where the pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the pattern display unit. It is also possible to say "the gaming machine described in one."

Features P11. An upper limit (for example, four) is set for the number of special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage means.
The pattern display unit is provided with a storage number display unit (holding display area of the symbol display device 95A) for displaying the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The special display unit is characterized in that the distance from the first display unit to the storage number display unit is smaller than the distance from the second display unit to the storage number display unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature P8 to the feature P10.

Acquired based on the entry into the starting ball entry → In a gaming machine of the type that has an upper limit on the number of special information to be stored, the launch operation is temporarily refrained from unnecessary entry. Adjustments such as may be made. The player who makes such an adjustment pays attention to the movement of the game ball in and around the starting ball entry portion, and pays attention to the display of the storage number display portion. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the special display section is formed so that the first display section of the first display section and the second display section is closer to the storage number display section, so that the overlooked section shown in the feature P8 or the like is overlooked. The inhibitory effect can be more preferably exerted.

Features P12. In the first gaming state, when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the second switching mode is supported. It has a means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state, and has
The special control means is characterized in that it has means for executing the special effect at least in the game times before the game times in which the upper limit number of times is reached when the upper limit number of times is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of the features P11.

As shown in the feature P12, if the configuration shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode when the upper limit is reached, excessive investment can be suppressed and the soundness of the gaming can be enhanced. Even in such a case, by configuring the above-mentioned special effect to be executed from the previous game round, it is promoted to recognize that the special effect generation = the possibility of shifting to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. Above, the frequency of occurrence of special effects (success patterns) can be suitably improved.

Feature P13. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode B) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
Display effect executing means (variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, and display control) that execute a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. It is equipped with a function for executing display control processing of the symbol display device 95 in the device 410).
The display effect executing means controls the display of a symbol display unit (variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols (designs) and the symbol display unit (notification / effect control device 140). And a function to execute a process for displaying a symbol on the display control device 410), and when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the variable display is performed. After that, the pattern combination corresponding to the judgment result is stopped and displayed.
A special display unit (special effect devices 500D, 500F) provided separately from the pattern display unit, and
It is suggested or clearly shown that the result of the determination by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second determination information in the special display unit when the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is set. It is characterized by being equipped with a special control means (a function of executing a process for a special disengagement notice effect in the notification / effect control device 140) for controlling the display of the special display unit so as to execute a special effect. A game machine.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is used because the game immediately shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round. Switching to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to the case where it becomes. This is expected to cause confusion for players and cause wasteful investment. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the pattern combination indicating that fact is stopped and displayed on the pattern display unit. , It is suggested or clearly indicated by a special effect in the special display unit provided separately from the pattern display unit that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress confusing and equivalence with the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences.

Features P14. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode B) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the three switching modes (the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the special disconnection result).
Determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode transferred by the first transition means. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
Display effect executing means (variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, and display control) that execute a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. It is equipped with a function for executing display control processing of the symbol display device 95 in the device 410).
The display effect executing means controls the display of a symbol display unit (variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols (designs) and the symbol display unit (notification / effect control device 140). And a function to execute a process for displaying a symbol on the display control device 410), and when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the variable display is performed. After that, the pattern combination corresponding to the judgment result is stopped and displayed.
Prior identification means (main control) for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the determination means. The function to execute the processing for confirming the special deviation in the MPU 402 of the device 162) and
A special display unit (special effect devices 500D, 500F) provided separately from the pattern display unit, and
When the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is set, the special effect (special disengagement notice effect) is executed on the special display unit based on the specific result by the prior identification means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a special control means for controlling the display of a display unit (a function of executing a process for a special off-notice effect by the notification / effect control device 140).

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is used because the game immediately shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round. Switching to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to the case where it becomes. This is expected to cause confusion for players and cause wasteful investment. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the pattern combination indicating that fact is stopped and displayed on the pattern display unit. The determination result corresponding to the second determination information is suggested by the special effect in the special display unit provided separately from the pattern display unit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress confusing and equivalence with the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences.

In this feature, in particular, whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is specified in advance by the first-specific means (hereinafter referred to as "first-specific"), and the result is specified in advance. Since the special effect is executed accordingly, the player can predict in advance that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information may be obtained. With such a configuration, the sudden feeling described above can be reduced, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be further suppressed.

Feature P15. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (actuating openings 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode B) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
When the result of the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first is performed without going through the special gaming state. A first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the three switching modes (a function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for a special deviation result).
Determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode transferred by the first transition means. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. In MPU402, the function to shift from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion) and
Display effect executing means (variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, and display control) that execute a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. It is equipped with a function for executing display control processing of the symbol display device 95 in the device 410).
The display effect executing means controls the display of a symbol display unit (variable display area ME of the symbol display device 95) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols (designs) and the symbol display unit (notification / effect control device 140). And a function to execute a process for displaying a symbol on the display control device 410), and when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the variable display is performed. After that, the pattern combination corresponding to the judgment result is stopped and displayed.
Prior identification means (main control) for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the second determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to determination by the determination means. The function to execute the processing for confirming the special deviation in the MPU 402 of the device 162) and
A special display unit (special effect devices 500D, 500F) provided separately from the pattern display unit, and
In the case of the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, at least based on the specific result before the game round related to the special information targeted by the specific target is started. A special control means (notification / effect control device 140) for performing display control of the special display unit by executing a special effect (special disengagement notice effect) on the special display unit is executed. A gaming machine characterized by having a function).

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is used because the game immediately shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode after the end of the game round. Switching to the switching control mode tends to be abrupt compared to the case where it becomes. This is expected to cause confusion for players and cause wasteful investment. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, the pattern combination indicating that fact is stopped and displayed on the pattern display unit. The determination result corresponding to the second determination information is suggested by the special effect in the special display unit provided separately from the pattern display unit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress confusing and equivalence with the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences.

In this feature, in particular, whether or not the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is specified in advance by the first-specific means (hereinafter referred to as "first-specific"), and the result is specified in advance. A special production is performed accordingly. Since this special effect is executed at least in the game times before the game times related to the special information to be specified in advance, the player may have a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. Can be predicted in advance. With such a configuration, the sudden feeling described above can be reduced, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be further suppressed.

The technical ideas shown in the above features P4 to P12 may be applied to the features P13 to P15.

Further, each technical idea shown in the above-mentioned feature A group to feature O group may be applied to the feature P1 to the feature P15.

<Characteristic Q group>
The following feature Q group is described as "In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player are provided. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features Q1. It has a light emitting unit (light emitting unit 630E, 630F) provided with a light emitting body (light emitting body 641E, 641F) and a decorative cover (front cover 670E, 670F) covering the light emitting unit, and light from the light emitting unit can be emitted. A gaming machine provided with a light emitting effect device (special effect device 500E, 500F) configured to be emitted to the front of the game machine through a light transmitting portion (opposing portion 671E, 671F) of the decorative cover.
The first position where the light from the light emitting body is applied to the light diffusing region (light diffusing part 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in the light transmitting portion, and the light from the light emitting body are the light transmitting. The light emitter is displaced within a predetermined operating range including the second position irradiated to the non-light diffusing region (non-light diffusing portion 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F). The gaming machine is provided with a driving means (driving mechanisms 690E, 690F and a notification / effect control device 140) for driving the light emitting unit.

According to the configuration shown in the feature Q1, the first position where the light diffusing region of the decorative cover is irradiated with the light and the second position where the light is irradiated to the non-light diffusing region of the decorative cover by driving the light emitting unit. The illuminant will be displaced within a predetermined operating range including. The appearance (light emitting mode) of the light emitting effect device can be significantly changed depending on whether the light from the light emitting unit (light emitting body) is irradiated to the non-light diffusion region or the light diffusion region. This makes it possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the light emission effect using the light emission effect device. When performing such a light emitting effect, it is assumed that the change in the position of the decoration itself is a factor that deteriorates the appearance of the light emitting effect device and reduces the impact of the light emitting effect. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by moving the light emitting unit among the decorative cover and the light emitting unit.

Features Q2. It has a light emitting unit (light emitting unit 630E, 630F) and a decorative cover (front cover 670E, 670F) that covers the light emitting unit, and light from the light emitting unit is a light transmitting portion (opposing portion 671E, 671F) of the decorative cover. ), Which is equipped with a light emitting effect device (special effect device 500E, 500F) configured to be emitted in front of the game machine.
A drive means (drive mechanism 690E and notification / effect control device 140) for rotating the light emitting unit in a predetermined direction is provided.
When the light emitting unit is rotated in the predetermined direction, the light emitting bodies (light emitting bodies 641E, 641F) provided in the light emitting unit have a light diffusion region (light diffusion unit 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F) in the light transmission unit. , 722F, 732F) and the non-light diffusion region (non-light diffusion portion 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F) in the light transmission portion is irradiated with light. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to pass through a predetermined path (trajectories PLa to PLf) including a second position.

According to the configuration shown in the feature Q2, the first position where the light diffusing region of the decorative cover is irradiated with the light and the second position where the light is irradiated to the non-light diffusing region of the decorative cover by rotating the light emitting unit. The illuminant is displaced so as to pass through a predetermined path including and. The appearance (light emitting mode) of the light emitting effect device can be significantly changed depending on whether the light from the light emitting unit (light emitting body) is irradiated to the non-light diffusion region or the light diffusion region. This makes it possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the light emission effect using the light emission effect device. When performing such a light emitting effect, it is assumed that the change in the position of the decoration itself is a factor that deteriorates the appearance of the light emitting effect device and reduces the impact of the light emitting effect. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by rotating the light emitting unit among the decorative cover and the light emitting unit. In addition, by making the light emitting unit a rotary type, the light emitting mode can be continuously and repeatedly changed, so that the execution period of the light emitting effect can be secured to some extent and the sustainability of the attention-improving effect can be suitably enhanced. preferable.

Features Q3. The gaming machine according to feature Q2, wherein the driving means is configured to rotate the light emitting unit while the light emitting body is maintained in a lit state.

As shown in this feature, if the light emitting unit is rotated while the light emitting body is maintained in the lit state, the light emitting part (position) can be seamlessly changed in addition to the change in the light emitting pattern. And the effect shown in feature Q2 can be further enhanced.

Features Q4. The gaming machine according to feature Q2 or feature Q3, wherein the light diffusion region is an uneven decoration provided on the decorative cover.

By forming the light diffusing region by the uneven decoration as shown in this feature, it is possible to suitably suppress that the presence of the light diffusing region is a factor that deteriorates the appearance of the decorative cover.

Features Q5. A plurality of the light diffusion regions are provided so as to be arranged differently in the predetermined direction.
The light emitting body irradiates light from the first position of irradiating one of the plurality of light diffusing regions with light as the light emitting unit rotates to the other light diffusing region. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature Q2 to the feature Q4, which is configured to be displaced to the first position via the second position.

According to the feature Q5, when the light diffusion region is displaced from one light diffusion region to another light diffusion region, the configuration is such that the light emission pattern is changed by passing through the second position corresponding to the non-light diffusion region. Can be strengthened.

Features Q6. The light emitting pattern when the light diffusion region is irradiated with light is linear, and the light emission pattern when the non-light diffusion region is irradiated with light is configured to be dotted. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature Q2 to the feature Q5.

As shown in this feature, if the light emitting pattern is changed in a dot shape / a linear shape, the appearance can be greatly changed.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is configured so that "the light emitting pattern when the light diffusing region is irradiated with light and the light emitting pattern when the light non-diffusing region is irradiated with light are different. It is also possible to say "the gaming machine according to any one of the feature Q2 to the feature Q5".

Features Q7. Having a plurality of the above-mentioned illuminants,
The light emitting unit is configured such that when any one of the plurality of light emitting bodies is located at the second position, any of the other light emitting bodies is located at the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature Q2 to the feature Q6.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to simultaneously display a light emitting pattern with light diffusion and a light emitting pattern without light diffusion. This is advantageous in improving the appearance of the light emitting effect and preferably exerting the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention.

Features Q8. The light transmitting portion has a planar shape that intersects the rotation center axis of the light emitting unit.
The surface portion of the light transmitting portion facing the light emitting unit side is planar, and the surface portion of the light transmitting portion facing opposite to the light emitting unit side is formed with an uneven decoration. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature Q2 to the feature Q7.

As shown in the feature Q8, if the front side of the light transmitting portion is formed with irregularities having the functions of light diffusion and decoration and the back side is flat, there is an operating gap between the light emitting unit and the decorative cover. Can be reduced and reduced to promote the thinning of the light emitting effect device.

Features Q9. It has a light emitting unit (light emitting unit 630E, 630F) and a decorative cover (front cover 670E, 670F) that covers the light emitting unit, and light from the light emitting unit is a light transmitting portion (opposing portion 671E, 671F) of the decorative cover. ), Which is equipped with a light emitting effect device (special effect device 500E, 500F) configured to be emitted in front of the game machine.
One of the light emitting unit and the decorative cover is a movable body that can rotate around an axis (center axis CL1) extending in the parallel direction of the light emitting unit and the decorative cover.
A drive means (drive mechanism 690E and notification / effect control device 140) for rotating the movable body around the axis is provided.
By rotating the movable body around the axis, the light from the light emitting body is irradiated to the light diffusion region (light diffusion portion 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) in the light transmission portion. The first state and the second state in which the light from the light emitting body is applied to the non-light diffusion region (non-light diffusion portion 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F) in the light transmission portion. A game machine characterized by being configured to be.

According to the configuration shown in the feature Q9, the relationship between the light emitting unit and the decorative cover as the movable body rotates is the relationship in which the light diffusing region is irradiated with light and the relationship in which the non-light diffusing region is irradiated with light. Changes to. Since the appearance (light emitting mode) of the light emitting effect device changes greatly depending on whether the light from the light emitting unit (light emitting body) is irradiated to the non-light diffusion area or the light diffusion area, the light emission effect device It is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the light emission effect using the above. In addition, by making the movable body rotatable, the light emitting mode can be continuously and repeatedly changed, so that the execution period of the light emitting effect can be secured to some extent and the sustainability of the attention-improving effect can be suitably enhanced. preferable.

Features Q10. The gaming machine according to feature Q9, wherein the driving means is configured to rotate the movable body in a situation where the light emitting body is maintained in a lit state.

According to the feature Q10, if the light emitting unit is rotated under the condition that the light emitting body is maintained in the lit state, the light emitting part (position) can be seamlessly changed in addition to the change of the light emitting pattern. It is possible to further enhance the effect shown in feature Q2.

The technical ideas shown in the above features Q3 to Q8 may be applied to the features Q1 and Q9 to Q10.

Further, each technical idea shown in the above-mentioned feature A group to feature P group may be applied to feature Q1 to feature Q10.

<Characteristic R group>
The following feature R group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Feature R1. A light emitting unit (light emitting unit 630E, 630F) provided with a light emitting body (light emitting body 641E, 641F) and a cover (front cover 670E, 670F) for covering the light emitting unit are provided, and light from the light emitting unit is the cover. It is a gaming machine equipped with a light emitting effect device (special production device 500E, 500F) configured to be emitted in front of the gaming machine through.
One of the light emitting unit and the cover is a movable body that operates while maintaining the distance relationship between the light emitting unit and the cover.
A drive means (drive mechanism 690E and notification / effect control device 140) for operating the movable body is provided.
In the cover, a plurality of linear light diffusing portions (for example, annular convex portions 713E, 723E, 733E, 713F, 723F, 733F) extend with respect to a predetermined axis extending in a parallel direction between the light emitting unit and the cover. A light diffusion region (light diffusion unit 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) arranged so as to be arranged in the radial direction is provided.
The light emitting unit is configured such that the optical axis of the light emitting body faces the parallel direction.
The driving means is such that the distance from the predetermined axis to the optical axis of the light emitting body changes while maintaining the overlap between the optical axis of the light emitting body and the light diffusion region in the parallel arrangement direction. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to drive the movable body.

According to the configuration shown in the feature R1, the light radiated to the light diffusion region is diffused in the arrangement direction (direction intersecting the predetermined axis) of the linear light diffusion portions. As a result, the light emitting pattern becomes a band shape (linear shape) extending in the direction intersecting the predetermined axis. This band-shaped light emitting pattern is displaced by the movement of the movable body, and the displacement of the band-shaped light emitting pattern can enhance the visual impact of the light emitting effect. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

Feature R2. A light emitting unit (light emitting unit 630E, 630F) provided with a light emitting body (light emitting body 641E, 641F) and a cover (front cover 670E, 670F) for covering the light emitting unit are provided, and light from the light emitting unit is the cover. It is a gaming machine equipped with a light emitting effect device (special production device 500E, 500F) configured to be emitted in front of the gaming machine through.
The light emitting unit is provided with a driving means (driving mechanism 690E and notification / effect control device 140) for operating the light emitting unit while maintaining a distance relationship with the cover.
A plurality of linear light diffusing portions (for example, annular convex portions) are arranged on the cover so as to be arranged in a radial direction with respect to a predetermined axis extending in a parallel direction between the light emitting unit and the cover. A light diffusion region (light diffusion unit 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F) is provided.
The light emitting unit is configured such that the optical axis of the light emitting body faces the parallel direction.
The driving means is such that the distance from the predetermined axis to the optical axis of the light emitting body changes while maintaining the overlap between the optical axis of the light emitting body and the light diffusion region in the parallel arrangement direction. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to drive the light emitting unit.

According to the configuration shown in the feature R2, the light radiated to the light diffusion region is diffused in the arrangement direction (direction intersecting the predetermined axis) of the linear light diffusion portions. As a result, the light emitting pattern becomes a band shape (linear shape) extending in the direction intersecting the predetermined axis. This band-shaped light emitting pattern is displaced by the movement of the movable body, and the displacement of the band-shaped light emitting pattern can enhance the visual impact of the light emitting effect. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

Feature R3. When the light emitting unit is driven by the driving means, the optical axis of the light emitting body is displaced so as to straddle the plurality of light diffusing portions as the light emitting unit operates. The gaming machine according to the feature R2.

As shown in this feature, if the optical axis is displaced so as to straddle a plurality of light diffusing portions, the light diffusing portion intersecting the optical axis causes a change in the light diffusing mode (light emission pattern). be able to. It is preferable to diversify the light emitting pattern in this way in order to suppress the monotonousness of the light emitting effect.

Feature R4. The gaming machine according to feature R2 or feature R3, wherein the light diffusing portion is an uneven decoration formed on the cover.

According to the feature R4, in a configuration in which the uneven decoration also functions as a light diffusing portion, it is assumed that the visual impact is reduced by the operation of the cover. In this respect, in combination with the feature R2, since the light emitting unit located behind the cover is operated instead of the cover, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be avoided.

Feature R5. The light emitting unit is rotatable and can be rotated.
One of the features R2 to R4, wherein the rotation center axis (center axis CL1) of the light emitting unit is separated from the predetermined axis and parallel to the predetermined axis. The gaming machine described in.

If the light emitting unit is a rotary type, the light emitting mode can be continuously and repeatedly changed. This is preferable in order to secure the execution period of the light emission effect to some extent and to suitably enhance the sustainability of the attention-improving effect. In particular, as shown in this feature, if the rotation center axis of the light emitting unit is configured to be separated from a predetermined axis and parallel to the predetermined axis, the light emitting pattern changes with rotation. Preferred above.

For example, the light diffusing portion may have an arc shape, and the radius of the path (orbital PLa to PLf) through which the light emitting body passes as the light emitting unit rotates may be different from the radius of the light diffusing portion.

Feature R6. The gaming machine according to any one of features R2 to R5, wherein the light diffusing portion has a ridge or a groove shape.

As shown in this feature, if the light diffusing portion has a ridge or a groove shape, a configuration that diffuses light in the arrangement direction of the light diffusing portion can be suitably realized by a three-dimensional decoration.

Feature R7. The gaming machine according to feature R6, wherein the light diffusing portion is formed so that the side surfaces (side surfaces 718E) of the light diffusing portion are all inclined surfaces inclined with respect to the predetermined axis. ..

If the side surface of the light diffusing portion is inclined with respect to a predetermined axis as shown in this feature, a part of the light from the light emitting body can be reflected and guided to another light diffusing portion. This is preferable in order to lengthen the total length when the light emitting pattern is strip-shaped and to emphasize the difference in appearance (dot-shaped / strip-shaped).

Feature R8. A flat surface portion is formed between the light diffusing portions.
The gaming machine according to feature R7, wherein the rotation trajectory through which the light emitting body passes and the plane portion are formed so as to overlap each other when viewed in the direction of the rotation center axis.

According to the configuration shown in the feature R8, the shape (for example, the total length) of the light emitting pattern is changed depending on whether the light from the light emitting body is irradiated to the inclined surface or the light from the light emitting body is irradiated to the flat surface portion. be able to. That is, the shape of the light emitting pattern changes as the position of the light emitting pattern changes. Such a configuration is preferable in order to suppress the monotonicization of the light emission effect.

Feature R9. The light diffusing part includes a first light diffusing part, a second light diffusing part, and a third light diffusing part.
The width of the flat surface portion formed between the first light diffusing portion and the second light diffusing portion, and the flat surface portion formed between the second light diffusing portion and the third light diffusing portion. The gaming machine according to feature R8, which is characterized in that the width is different from that of the gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, if the width (length in the arrangement direction) of each plane portion is different, the shape of the light emitting pattern (for example, the total length) is more preferably changed according to the light irradiation target. be able to.

Feature R10. The light emitting unit is rotatable and can be rotated.
The rotation center axis (center axis CL1) of the light emitting unit is separated from the predetermined axis and parallel to the predetermined axis.
As the light emitting body, the first light emitting body and the second light emitting body having a distance from the rotation center axis are different from those of the first light emitting body.
With the rotation of the light emitting unit, the length of the portion overlapping the light diffusion region when viewed in the parallel direction in the orbit (for example, the orbit PLe) through which the first light emitting body passes with the rotation of the light emitting unit. The features R2 to R9 are characterized in that the length of the portion overlapping the light diffusion region is different when viewed in the parallel direction in the orbit (for example, the orbit PLg) through which the second light emitter passes. The gaming machine described in any one of.

If the light emitting unit is a rotary type, the light emitting mode can be continuously and repeatedly changed. This is preferable in order to secure the execution period of the light emission effect to some extent and to suitably enhance the sustainability of the attention-improving effect. In particular, as shown in this feature, if the rotation center axis of the light emitting unit is configured to be separated from a predetermined axis and parallel to the predetermined axis, the light emitting pattern changes with rotation. Preferred above.

In addition, the length of the portion that overlaps the light diffusion region when viewed in the parallel direction in the orbit through which the first light emitting body passes with the rotation of the light emitting unit, and the second light emitting body passes with the rotation of the light emitting unit. If the length of the portion overlapping the light diffusion region is different from the length of the portion overlapping the light diffusion region when viewed in the parallel direction, the rotation range (angle) in which the light emission pattern is displayed in one light diffusion region is different. Can be suitably realized. In a configuration in which the decoration of the cover functions as a light diffusing portion, restrictions on the shape and size of the light diffusing portion may become stronger in order to exert the function as a decoration. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a plurality of light emitters can pass behind one light diffusion region and the rotation range is different, the appearance of the light emission effect can be improved. The caused inconvenience can be suitably eliminated.

For example, the light diffusing portion may have an arc shape, and the radius of the orbit (orbital PLa to PLf) through which the light emitting body passes as the light emitting unit rotates may be different from the radius of the light diffusing portion. It is also possible to set the "orbit" shown in this feature as a "predetermined path".

The technical ideas shown in the above features R3 to R10 may be applied to the feature R1.

Further, each technical idea shown in the above-mentioned feature A group to feature Q group may be applied to the feature R1 to the feature R10.

<Characteristic S group>
The following feature S group is described as "in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features S1. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit into the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) set to be.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. A special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, and
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination, the destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and
The pre-identifying means determines whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means under the situation where the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode occurs. A transition determination means for determining before the game times when the upper limit is reached based on the specific result of
When it is determined by the transition determination means that the special transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second switching mode is performed before the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the corresponding predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature S1, if the game progresses while the transition to the special game state (judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information) is not established, the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state is the upper limit. By reaching (reaching the ceiling), the game shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the starting ball entry section is frequently in the receiving state, so that the frequency of ball entry into the starting ball entry section increases, and further investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the soundness of the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, in particular, whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs is reached by the upper limit number of times based on the specific result by the prior specific means. It is determined before the game times, and if it is determined that the transition occurs, a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the game times when the maximum number of times is reached. To. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessively high tension immediately before the ceiling and give a sense of security to the player who expects to reach the ceiling. This is preferable in order to improve the satisfaction of the player and further improve the degree of attention to the game.

In this feature, "a destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the determination". "," Whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means under the situation where the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is obtained. "Transition determination means that determines before the game times that reach the upper limit number of times based on a specific result by the prior identification means", "The predetermined game corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means by the transition determination means" When it is determined that the transition to the state occurs, the "special effect executing means for executing the special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode" is referred to as "the said one corresponding to the first switching mode". Whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs under the situation where the predetermined gaming state is reached is prior to the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. "Transition determination means for determination", "When it is determined by the transition determination means that the special transition means causes the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the predetermined determination corresponding to the second switching mode". It may be "a special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating the transition to the gaming state".

Further, "when it is determined by the transition determination means that the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, the first game is performed before the upper limit is reached. 2 The description of "special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the switching mode" is described as "before the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached based on the determination result by the transition determination means". It may be used as a "special effect execution means" for executing a special effect. Incidentally, "when it is determined by the transition determination means that the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, the first game is performed before the upper limit is reached. The description of "a special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes" is described as "the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means by the transition determination means". It is also possible to use the special effect executing means for executing the special effect indicating the arrival of the upper limit number of times before the game number of times the upper limit number is reached when it is determined that the transition to the upper limit number is reached.

Feature S2. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit into the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and equipped with
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion, and the second acquisition information storage means. A second storage means (holding area Rb for the second operating port) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion is provided.
The determination by the determination means based on the special information stored in the first storage means is more advantageous to the player than the determination by the determination means based on the special information stored in the second storage means. Is configured to
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. The character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) set to be.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. A special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, and
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination, the destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and
The pre-identifying means determines whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means under the situation where the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode occurs. A transition determination means for determining before the game times when the upper limit is reached based on the specific result of
When it is determined by the transition determination means that the special transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second switching mode is performed before the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the corresponding predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature S2, if the game progresses while the transition to the special game state (judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information) is not established, the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state is the upper limit. By reaching (reaching the ceiling), the game shifts to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the second starting ball entry section frequently enters the receiving state, so that the frequency of entering the second starting ball entry section increases, and further investment is suppressed. It will be. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the soundness of the game.

Here, the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section is given preferential treatment to the player in favor of the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section. That is, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is strengthened by shifting to the second switching mode and entering the ball into the second starting ball entry section → determining. In such a configuration, the benefit cannot be enjoyed because the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained just before reaching the ceiling. Therefore, it is assumed that the player who expects to reach the ceiling plays the game with the expectation that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information will not be obtained at least just before reaching the ceiling. In the configuration shown in this feature, in particular, whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs from the game times in which the upper limit is reached based on the specific result by the prior specific means. Is determined before, and if it is determined that the transition occurs, a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the gaming times when the maximum number of times is reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessively high tension in front of the ceiling and give a sense of security to the player who expects to reach the ceiling. This is preferable in order to improve the satisfaction of the player and further improve the degree of attention to the game.

In this feature, "a destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the determination". "," Whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means under the situation where the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is obtained. "Transition determination means that determines before the game times that reach the upper limit number of times based on a specific result by the prior identification means", "The predetermined game corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means by the transition determination means" When it is determined that the transition to the state occurs, the "special effect executing means for executing the special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode" is referred to as "the said one corresponding to the first switching mode". Whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs under the situation where the predetermined gaming state is reached is prior to the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. "Transition determination means for determination", "When it is determined by the transition determination means that the special transition means causes the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the predetermined determination corresponding to the second switching mode". It may be "a special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating the transition to the gaming state".

Further, "when it is determined by the transition determination means that the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, the first game is performed before the upper limit is reached. 2 The description of "special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the switching mode" is described as "before the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached based on the determination result by the transition determination means". It may be used as a "special effect execution means" for executing a special effect. Incidentally, "when it is determined by the transition determination means that the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, the first game is performed before the upper limit is reached. The description of "a special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes" is described as "the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means by the transition determination means". It is also possible to use the special effect executing means for executing the special effect indicating the arrival of the upper limit number of times before the game number of times the upper limit number is reached when it is determined that the transition to the upper limit number is reached.

Feature S3. The transition determination means is the special transition means when it is specified by the prior identification means that none of the game times executed until the upper limit is reached results in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. It is determined that the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode will occur, and any of the gaming times executed until the upper limit number of times is reached will be the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. The feature S2 is characterized in that, when it is specified by the prior identification means, it is determined that the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means does not occur. The gaming machine described in.

As shown in the feature S3, when it is specified in advance that the game times executed until the upper limit is reached will result in a judgment result that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, the state transition by the special transition means occurs. Then, if it is determined in advance that any of the game times executed until the upper limit is reached will result in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the state transition by the special transition means does not occur. With the configuration for determination, the technical idea shown in the feature S2 can be suitably embodied.

Features S4. The transition determination means determines whether or not the number of stored special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the number of executions of the remaining game times when the upper limit is reached. It has a storage number determination means, and is configured to determine whether or not migration by the special transition means occurs when the storage number determination means determines that the storage number has reached the corresponding number. The gaming machine according to the feature S2 or the feature S3.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the transfer by the special transfer means occurs when the number of stored special information reaches the number corresponding to the remaining number of executions when the maximum number of times is reached, the special effect is produced. It is possible to suppress the increase in control load due to the implementation of. For example, the control load can be suitably reduced as compared with a configuration in which it is determined whether or not migration occurs by the special migration means each time special information is added.

Feature S5. The feature S4 is characterized in that the stored number determining means is configured to determine whether or not the stored number has reached the corresponding number when the special information is acquired by the special information acquiring means. The gaming machine described in.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the transition by the special transition means occurs when the special information is added, the special effect can be started promptly.

Feature S6. As the predetermined determination information, the first determination information (the jackpot result A which is the jackpot result corresponding to the low probability mode) and the second determination information (the jackpot result B which is the jackpot result corresponding to the high probability mode) are provided.
The determination result corresponding to the second determination information is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the determination result corresponding to the first determination information.
In the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is more likely to be obtained than the determination based on the entry into the first start entry section. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature S2 to the feature S5, which is characterized by the above.

As shown in this feature, the judgment based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section is given preferential treatment to the player's advantage over the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section. In the gaming machine, by shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the benefit when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained becomes large. In such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of an event in which the benefits of reaching the ceiling cannot be substantially enjoyed by configuring the configuration to notify the player at an early stage that the arrival at the ceiling has been confirmed by a special effect. .. Specifically, in the game times (game times after reaching the ceiling) related to the special information acquired by continuing the launch of the game ball toward the first starting ball entry part even after the arrival at the ceiling is confirmed. Although the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information can be obtained, the occurrence of such an inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature S7. The special effect is characterized in that it is started in a game number executed before the game number in which the upper limit number of times is reached, and is continued until at least the game number in which the upper limit number of times is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature S2 to the feature S6.

In a configuration in which a judgment based on entry into the second starting ball entry section with a variable mechanism is given preferential treatment over a determination based on entry into the first starting ball entry section, the upper limit is reached in advance (ceiling arrival). ) Is confirmed, but it cannot be denied that the game ball may be launched to cause further entry into the first starting entry section. When special information is acquired by such a ball entry, an event may occur in which the benefit of reaching the ceiling cannot be substantially enjoyed. It is feared that this will be a factor that greatly reduces the player's willingness to play. Therefore, if the special effect is continued until at least the game times when the special effect reaches the ceiling, the special effect is overlooked and the above-mentioned inconvenience is suitably suppressed. can.

Features S8. In the special effect executing means, any of the gaming times executed until the upper limit number of times is reached in the case where the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means is performed. Features S2 to S7 are characterized in that the special effect is executed when the reach display, which is one of the game turn effects executed in parallel with the game turn operation, is not supported. The gaming machine described in any one of.

In the configuration that suggests that the reach display results in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, it becomes obvious that the reach display is a so-called ghost effect by starting the special effect, and the reach attention is paid to the game. There is concern that the effect of improving the degree will not be exhibited well. This is expected to be a factor that reduces the reliability of the reach display. Therefore, in this feature, if the reach display is executed by the time the ceiling is reached under the condition that the upper limit of the number of times has been reached (the ceiling has been reached), the special effect is refrained from. As a result, the special effect function and the reach display function can be suitably coexisted.

Features S9. As a mode of reach display, which is one of the game rotation effects executed in parallel with the game rotation operation, a first reach display mode and a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information rather than the first reach display mode. There is a second reach display mode with low expectations.
In the case where the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means, any one of the gaming times executed until the upper limit number of times is reached is the second reach display mode. The game according to any one of the features S2 to S7, which comprises means for changing the reach display mode to the first reach display mode when the reach display is supported. Machine.

In the configuration that suggests that the reach display results in a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the player's anxiety is caused by the reach display being executed in the second reach display mode with high expectation during the special effect. It is feared that it will be uselessly fueled. This can be a factor that reduces the satisfaction of the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the upper limit of the number of times reached (reaching the ceiling) is confirmed and the special effect is executed, the degree of expectation is relatively high for the mode of reach display executed during the special effect. By changing from the second reach display mode to the first display mode in which the degree of expectation is relatively low, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Features S10. A suggestion effect suggesting that the relevant special information becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information before being the target of the determination by the determination means is executed based on the advance identification result by the advance identification means. Equipped with suggestion production execution means,
After the special effect is started by the special effect executing means, it is regulated so that the suggestion effect is not executed by the suggestion effect executing means until at least the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached are completed. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature S2 to the feature S9.

In a configuration that suggests that the suggestion effect results in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, there is a concern that the player may be confused by the overlap of the suggestion effect and the special effect. This is not preferable because it can be harmful due to the diversification of production. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the above-mentioned concern can be suitably resolved by configuring the configuration so that the suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of the special effect.

Features S11. A suggestion effect suggesting that the relevant special information becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information before being the target of the determination by the determination means is executed based on the advance identification result by the advance identification means. Equipped with suggestion production execution means,
The special effect executing means can execute the special effect during the execution of the suggestion effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features S2 to S10, characterized in that the special effect is started before the suggestion effect ends, and the means for stopping the suggestion effect is provided. ..

As shown in this feature, it is possible to suitably secure an opportunity to execute the special effect by configuring the configuration so that the special effect can be executed even during the suggestion effect. As shown in this feature, if the suggestion effect is stopped when the special effect is started, the player gives the impression that the special effect cancels the suggestion effect (the impression that the superiority is guaranteed). It is possible to suitably improve the satisfaction of the player.

Features S12. The gaming machine according to feature S11, wherein the stop timing of the suggestion effect by the stop means is configured to be a predetermined timing after the start of the special effect.

By shifting the stop timing of the suggestion effect to be later than the start timing of the special effect as shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the overlooking of the behavior of the stop of the suggestion effect, and the effect shown in the feature S11 is preferably obtained. It will be possible to exert it.

Feature S13. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit into the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode B) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. A special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, and
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination, the destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and
The pre-identifying means determines whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means under the situation where the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode occurs. A transition determination means for determining before the game times when the upper limit is reached based on the specific result of
When it is determined by the transition determination means that the special transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second switching mode is performed before the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the corresponding predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature S13, if the game progresses while the transition to the special game state (determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information) is not established, the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state is the upper limit. By reaching (reaching the ceiling), the game shifts to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the starting ball entry section is frequently in the receiving state, so that the frequency of ball entry into the starting ball entry section increases, and further investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the soundness of the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, in particular, whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs is reached by the upper limit number of times based on the specific result by the prior specific means. It is determined before the game times, and if it is determined that the transition occurs, a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the game times when the maximum number of times is reached. To. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessively high tension immediately before the ceiling and give a sense of security to the player who expects to reach the ceiling. This is preferable in order to improve the satisfaction of the player and further improve the degree of attention to the game.

In this feature, "a destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the determination". "," Whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means under the situation where the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is obtained. "Transition determination means that determines before the game times that reach the upper limit number of times based on a specific result by the prior identification means", "The predetermined game corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means by the transition determination means" When it is determined that the transition to the state occurs, the "special effect executing means for executing the special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode" is referred to as "the said one corresponding to the first switching mode". Whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs under the situation where the predetermined gaming state is reached is prior to the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. "Transition determination means for determination", "When it is determined by the transition determination means that the special transition means causes the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the predetermined determination corresponding to the second switching mode". It may be "a special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating the transition to the gaming state".

Features S14. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91A, 92A or variable winning device 83B) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating openings 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function to execute the game state transition process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the state shifts to the special gaming state, the control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A. Function) and equipped with
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired based on the entry into the first starting ball entry portion, and the second acquisition information storage means. A second storage means (holding area Rb for the second operating port) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion is provided.
The determination by the determination means based on the special information stored in the first storage means is more advantageous to the player than the determination by the determination means based on the special information stored in the second storage means. Is configured to
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. The character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode B) is provided, and
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. A special transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, and
Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination, the destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and
The pre-identifying means determines whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means under the situation where the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode occurs. A transition determination means for determining before the game times when the upper limit is reached based on the specific result of
When it is determined by the transition determination means that the special transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second switching mode is performed before the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the corresponding predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature S14, when the game progresses while the transition to the special game state (determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information) is not established, the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state is the upper limit. By reaching (reaching the ceiling), the game shifts to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. In the second switching mode, the variable mechanism attached to the second starting ball entry section frequently enters the receiving state, so that the frequency of entering the second starting ball entry section increases, and further investment is suppressed. It will be. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the soundness of the game.

Here, the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section is given preferential treatment to the player in favor of the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section. That is, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is strengthened by shifting to the second switching mode and entering the ball into the second starting ball entry section → determining. In such a configuration, the benefit cannot be enjoyed because the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained just before reaching the ceiling. Therefore, it is assumed that the player who expects to reach the ceiling plays the game with the expectation that the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information will not be obtained at least just before reaching the ceiling. In the configuration shown in this feature, in particular, whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs from the game times in which the upper limit is reached based on the specific result by the prior specific means. Is determined before, and if it is determined that the transition occurs, a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is executed before the gaming times when the maximum number of times is reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessively high tension in front of the ceiling and give a sense of security to the player who expects to reach the ceiling. This is preferable in order to improve the satisfaction of the player and further improve the degree of attention to the game.

In this feature, "a destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the predetermined determination information before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the determination". "," Whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode occurs by the special transition means under the situation where the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is obtained. "Transition determination means that determines before the game times that reach the upper limit number of times based on a specific result by the prior identification means", "The predetermined game corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means by the transition determination means" When it is determined that the transition to the state occurs, the "special effect executing means for executing the special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode" is referred to as "the said one corresponding to the first switching mode". Whether or not the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs under the situation where the predetermined gaming state is reached is prior to the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. "Transition determination means for determination", "When it is determined by the transition determination means that the special transition means causes the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the predetermined determination corresponding to the second switching mode". It may be "a special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating the transition to the gaming state".

Further, "when it is determined by the transition determination means that the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, the first game is performed before the upper limit is reached. 2 The description of "special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the switching mode" is described as "before the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached based on the determination result by the transition determination means". It may be used as a "special effect execution means" for executing a special effect. Incidentally, "when it is determined by the transition determination means that the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means occurs, the first game is performed before the upper limit is reached. The description of "a special effect executing means for executing a special effect indicating a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes" is described as "the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode by the special transition means by the transition determination means". It is also possible to use the special effect executing means for executing the special effect indicating the arrival of the upper limit number of times before the game number of times the upper limit number is reached when it is determined that the transition to the upper limit number is reached.

The technical ideas shown in the above features S3 to S12 may be applied to the features S1 and S13 to S14.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to R may be applied to the features S1 to S14.

<Characteristic T group>
The following feature T group is "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features T1. A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
The variable mechanism has a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of the game ball into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the flow path. It has a movable piece (movable pieces 901G to 901I) that can be displaced to a position) and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position. This is configured to be in the accepted state, and the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position to be in the non-accepted state.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when a predetermined support lottery is won.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
In the variable mechanism, a predetermined passage through which the game ball flowing in from the inlet portion (for example, inflow port 921G) of the variable mechanism passes is formed by the movable piece.
The predetermined passage functions as a guide passage for guiding the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the starting ball entry portion when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, while the variable mechanism is used. Functions as a return passage for returning a game ball located in the predetermined passage to the game area without guiding the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the start entry portion.
When the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state in a situation where the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the variable mechanism control means uses an inlet portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner. The variable mechanism is controlled so that the passed game ball is returned to the game area through the predetermined passage, while the variable mechanism is used in a situation where the switching control mode is the third switching mode. In the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined mode is guided to the starting ball entry portion through the predetermined passage. A game machine.

As shown in this feature, if the first switching mode, the second switching mode, and the third switching mode are used in combination, it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the monotonicization of the game. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode, the support lottery in the second switching mode is won. While the probability is higher than that in the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode is the same as that in the first switching mode. That is, in the case of the first switching mode → the third switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In such a configuration, it is annoying to the player that the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a mode in which the ball is virtually impossible to enter (a mode in which the receiving period is extremely short, which will be described later). It is feared that it will be easy to give an impression such as, and it will hinder the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is set to the accepting state in the situation where the third switching mode is set, the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined mode is predetermined. When the variable mechanism is controlled so as to be guided to the starting ball entry portion through the passage of the above, and the variable mechanism is put into the receiving state in the situation where the first switching mode is set, the entrance of the variable mechanism is performed in a predetermined manner. The variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the portion is returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. That is, even in the first switching mode, by securing a certain period (acceptance period) for maintaining the acceptance state and allowing the inflow of the game ball into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the impression of the player. Then, excessive entry into the starting entry section due to an increase in the number of inflows and an increase in the number of inflows to the variable mechanism impair the opportunity to enter other entry sections such as the variable entry section. Can be suitably suppressed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

Feature T2. A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
The variable mechanism has a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of the game ball into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the flow path. It has a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced to a position) and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position. The movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position to be in the non-accepted state.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when a predetermined support lottery is won.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
In the variable mechanism, a predetermined passage through which the game ball flowing in from the inlet portion (for example, inflow port 921G) of the variable mechanism passes is formed by the movable piece.
The predetermined passage functions as a guide passage for guiding the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the starting ball entry portion when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, while the variable mechanism is used. Functions as a return passage for returning a game ball located in the predetermined passage to the game area without guiding the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the start entry portion.
When the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state in a situation where the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the variable mechanism control means uses an inlet portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner. The variable mechanism is controlled so that the passed game ball is returned to the game area through the predetermined passage, while the variable mechanism is used in a situation where the switching control mode is the third switching mode. In the receiving state, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined mode is guided to the starting ball entry portion through the predetermined passage. A game machine.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that in the first switching mode, the second switching mode via the special gaming state While the winning probability of the support lottery in is higher than that of the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode without the special gaming state is the same as that of the first switching mode. .. That is, when the first switching mode → the third switching mode is changed without going through the special gaming state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In such a configuration, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased in order to strengthen the support function in the third switching mode, the support lottery is won even in the first switching mode in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state for a short period of time. There will be more opportunities to do so and more opportunities for the variable mechanism to be accepted. In such a configuration, it is annoying to the player that the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a mode in which the ball is virtually impossible to enter (a mode in which the receiving period is extremely short, which will be described later). It is feared that it will be easy to give an impression such as, and it will hinder the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is set to the accepting state in the situation where the third switching mode is set, the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined mode is predetermined. When the variable mechanism is controlled so as to be guided to the starting ball entry portion through the passage of the above, and the variable mechanism is put into the receiving state in the situation where the first switching mode is set, the entrance of the variable mechanism is performed in a predetermined manner. The variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the portion is returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. That is, even in the first switching mode, by securing a certain period (acceptance period) for maintaining the acceptance state and allowing the inflow of the game ball into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the impression of the player. Then, excessive entry into the starting entry section due to an increase in the number of inflows and an increase in the number of inflows to the variable mechanism impair the opportunity to enter other entry sections such as the variable entry section. Can be suitably suppressed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

It is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Feature T3. The variable mechanism has an urging means (spring member) that urges the movable piece to the second position side, and a drive signal is output from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit so that the movable piece By displacing from the second position to the first position against the urging force of the urging means, the receiving state is reached, and the output of the drive signal from the variable mechanism control means to the driving unit is stopped. The movable piece is configured to be in the non-accepting state by being displaced from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means.
The control means for the variable mechanism is
When the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state in the situation where the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined mode is the predetermined. The output period for outputting the drive signal to the drive unit is set so that the drive signal is returned to the game area through the passage.
When the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state in a situation where the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined mode is the predetermined. The gaming machine according to the feature T1 or the feature T2, wherein the output period of the drive signal to the drive section is set so as to be guided to the start ball entry section through the passage.

The movable piece shown in this feature is maintained in the first position during the output of the drive signal, and is displaced to the second position by the urging force of the urging means when the output of the drive signal is stopped. When the variable mechanism is set to the accepting state in the first switching mode, the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined mode is returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. When the output period of the drive signal is set and the variable mechanism is set to the accepting state in the situation where the third switching mode is set, the game ball passing through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined mode passes through a predetermined passage. By setting the output period of the drive signal so as to be guided to the starting ball entry portion through the ball, the effect shown in the feature T1 or the like can be suitably exhibited.

Feature T4. The variable mechanism is used when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and the game ball is located at a specific portion (for example, second surface portions 904G to 904I) of the movable piece. The direction in which the movable piece is displaced when the movable piece is pushed by the game ball is configured to be the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the urging force of the urging means.
When the game ball is located in a non-specific portion of the movable piece (a portion on the flat surface portion 905G to 905I on the upstream side of the virtual line FL2), the movable piece is caused by the urging means by the game ball. It is configured to be pushed in the direction opposite to the direction of urging,
In the specific portion and the non-specific portion, the non-specific portion is located on the entrance portion side and the specific portion is located on the starting ball entry portion side.
The output period of the drive signal to the drive unit when the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state under the situation where the switching control mode is the first switching mode is the variable mechanism according to the predetermined embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature T3, wherein the gaming ball that has passed through the entrance portion is specified to be longer than the required period until it passes through the non-specific portion.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the first switching mode, the output of the drive signal is stopped after the game ball has passed through the non-specific portion. As a result, it is possible to suppress the action of the weight of the game ball so as to prevent the movable piece from being displaced to the second position, and to suitably improve the return responsiveness of the movable piece to the second position.

Feature T5. The variable mechanism is used when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and the game ball is located at a specific portion (for example, second surface portions 904G to 904I) of the movable piece. The direction in which the movable piece is displaced when the movable piece is pushed by the game ball is configured to be the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the urging force of the urging means.
The output period of the drive signal to the drive unit when the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state under the situation where the switching control mode is the first switching mode is the variable mechanism according to the predetermined embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature T3 or feature T4, wherein the gaming ball that has passed through the entrance portion is specified to be longer than the required period until it reaches the specific portion.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the output of the drive signal is stopped when the game ball reaches a specific portion. As a result, the movable piece is displaced to the second position by both the weight of the game ball and the urging force of the urging means, and the displacement speed of the movable piece can be suitably increased. This is preferable in order to improve the return responsiveness of the movable piece to the second position.

Feature T6. In any of the first switching mode, the second switching mode, and the third switching mode, the period from when the output of the drive signal is stopped to when the output of the drive signal is started next is the predetermined period. T3 to be characterized in that the gaming ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism is configured to be longer than the required period until it is discharged to the gaming area through the predetermined passage. The gaming machine according to any one of T5.

Features As shown in T1 and the like, in a configuration in which a predetermined flow path formed by a movable piece of a variable mechanism functions as a guide passage and a discharge passage, the game ball being discharged prevents switching to the receiving state. That is a disadvantage for the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the period from the stop of the output of the drive signal to the start of the output of the drive signal is until the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined mode is discharged to the game area through a predetermined passage. By specifying the period to be longer than the required period of the above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience and to prevent the reliability of the gaming machine from being lowered in order to exert the effect shown in the feature T1 and the like.

Feature T7. The required period until the gaming ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined embodiment is discharged to the gaming area through the predetermined passage is the game that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of the features T1 to T6, characterized in that the ball is configured to be shorter than the required time for the ball to enter the starting ball entry portion through the predetermined passage. ..

Even though the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism cannot enter the starting ball entry portion, staying in the predetermined passage for a long time may cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, it is possible to configure the time required for the ball to be discharged to the game area through the predetermined passage to be shorter than the time required for the ball to enter the starting ball entry portion through the predetermined passage. preferable.

Feature T8. When the predetermined passage functions as the discharge passage, the predetermined passage is configured to have a larger inclination of the bottom surface of the passage than when the predetermined passage functions as the guide passage. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature T1 to the feature T7.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball located in the predetermined passage is promptly discharged from the predetermined passage by switching to the non-accepting state. This is advantageous in avoiding the game ball from hindering the switching of the next acceptance state of the variable mechanism and shortening the interval when the open state is repeated.

Feature T9. A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
The variable mechanism has a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of the game ball into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the flow path. It has a movable piece (movable pieces 901G to 901I) that can be displaced to a position) and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position. This is configured to be in the accepted state, and the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position to be in the non-accepted state.
In the variable mechanism, a predetermined passage through which the game ball flowing in from the entrance portion of the variable mechanism passes is formed by the movable piece.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when a predetermined support lottery is won.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first mode (low frequency support mode) and the first mode. There is a second mode (high frequency support mode) set to
The predetermined passage functions as a guide passage for guiding the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the starting ball entry portion when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, while the variable mechanism is used. Functions as a return passage for returning a game ball located in the predetermined passage to the game area without guiding the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the start entry portion.
The control means for the variable mechanism is
When the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state in the situation where the switching control mode is the first mode, the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined mode is the predetermined passage. The output period for outputting the drive signal to the drive unit is set so that the drive signal is returned to the game area through.
When the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state in the situation where the switching control mode is the second mode, the gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined embodiment is the predetermined. A gaming machine characterized in that an output period of a drive signal to the drive unit is set so as to be guided to the start ball entry unit through a passage.

In the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the accepting state under the condition of the second mode, the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined mode is started through a predetermined passage. When the variable mechanism is controlled so as to be guided to the ball entry portion and the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state in the situation where the first mode is set, the game passing through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined mode. The variable mechanism is controlled so that the ball is returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. That is, even in the first mode, by securing a certain period (acceptance period) for maintaining the acceptance state and allowing the inflow of the game ball into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the impression of the player. Then, excessive entry into the starting entry section due to an increase in the number of inflows and an increase in the number of inflows to the variable mechanism impair the opportunity to enter other entry sections such as the variable entry section. Can be suitably suppressed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

Feature T10. A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
The variable mechanism has a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of the game ball into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the flow path. It has a movable piece (movable piece 901G to 901J) that can be displaced to a position) and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position. This is configured to be in the accepted state, and the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position to be in the non-accepted state.
In the variable mechanism, a predetermined passage through which the game ball flowing in from the entrance portion of the variable mechanism passes is formed by the movable piece.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when a predetermined support lottery is won.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first mode (low frequency support mode) and the first mode. There is a second mode (high frequency support mode) set to
The predetermined passage functions as a guide passage for guiding the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the starting ball entry portion when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state, while the variable mechanism is used. Functions as a return passage for returning a game ball located in the predetermined passage to the game area without guiding the game ball located in the predetermined passage to the start entry portion.
The variable mechanism control means passes through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner when the variable mechanism is set to the receiving state in a situation where the switching control mode is the first mode. While controlling the variable mechanism so that the game ball is returned to the game area through the predetermined passage, the variable mechanism is in the receiving state under the condition that the switching control mode is the second mode. In this case, the variable mechanism is controlled so that the gaming ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in the predetermined embodiment is guided to the starting ball entry portion through the predetermined passage. Gaming machine.

In the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the accepting state under the condition of the second mode, the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined mode is started through a predetermined passage. When the variable mechanism is controlled so as to be guided to the ball entry portion and the variable mechanism is put into the receiving state in the situation where the first switching mode is set, the variable mechanism has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner. The variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball is returned to the game area through a predetermined passage. That is, even in the first mode, by securing a certain period (acceptance period) for maintaining the acceptance state and allowing the inflow of the game ball into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the impression of the player. Then, excessive entry into the starting entry section due to an increase in the number of inflows and an increase in the number of inflows to the variable mechanism impair the opportunity to enter other entry sections such as the variable entry section. Can be suitably suppressed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

The technical ideas shown in the above features T3 to T8 may be applied to the features T9 to T10.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to S may be applied to the features T1 to T10.

<Characteristic U group>
The following features U group is described as "In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player are provided. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features U1 (main). A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
The variable mechanism has a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of the game ball into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the flow path. It has a movable piece (movable pieces 901G to 901I) that can be displaced to a position) and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position. This is configured to be in the accepted state, and the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position to be in the non-accepted state.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when a predetermined support lottery is won.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
The movable piece is distributed to a first flow path (winning route) that guides the game ball to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide the game ball to the starting ball entry section (second). The movable piece has a two-sided portion 904G to 904I) and a guide portion (first surface portion 903G to 903I) that guides a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion (inflow port 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution portion. Is arranged at the first position, the distribution portion is located at the first flow path forming position forming the first flow path, and the movable piece is arranged at the second position. The distribution section is located at the position where the second flow path is formed.
When the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the variable mechanism control means is driven more than the required period until the gaming ball passing through the inlet portion reaches the distribution portion. The drive unit is driven and controlled so that the output period of the drive signal to the unit is longer, and when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the gaming ball that has passed through the entrance portion. The game is characterized in that the drive unit is driven and controlled so that the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the required period until the vehicle reaches the distribution unit. Machine.

As shown in this feature, if the first switching mode, the second switching mode, and the third switching mode are used in combination, it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the monotonicization of the game. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode, the support lottery in the second switching mode is won. While the probability is higher than that in the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode is the same as that in the first switching mode. That is, in the case of the first switching mode → the third switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In such a configuration, it is annoying to the player that the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a mode in which the ball is virtually impossible to enter (a mode in which the receiving period is extremely short, which will be described later). It is feared that it will be easy to give an impression such as, and it will hinder the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the accepting state under the condition of the third switching mode, the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is the first. When the variable mechanism is controlled so as to be guided to the starting ball entry portion through one flow path and the variable mechanism is put into the receiving state in the situation where the first switching mode is set, the variable mechanism is provided in a predetermined manner. The variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion does not enter the starting ball entry portion. That is, even in the first switching mode, by securing a certain period (acceptance period) for maintaining the acceptance state and allowing the inflow of the game ball into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the impression of the player. Then, excessive entry into the starting ball entry portion due to an increase in the number of inflows can be suitably suppressed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

Since the movable piece (distribution unit) starts to be displaced toward the second position before the game ball reaches the distribution unit, the distribution unit is moved from the first flow path formation position to the second flow path formation position. You can earn a period to displace to. This is preferable in suppressing excessive entry into the starting ball entry portion and ensuring the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode.

Features U2. A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
The variable mechanism has a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of the game ball into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the flow path. It has a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced to a position) and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position. The movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position to be in the non-accepted state.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when a predetermined support lottery is won.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
The movable piece is distributed to a first flow path (winning route) that guides the game ball to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide the game ball to the starting ball entry section (second). The movable piece has a two-sided portion 904G to 904I) and a guide portion (first surface portion 903G to 903I) that guides a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion (inflow port 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution portion. Is arranged at the first position, the distribution portion is located at the first flow path forming position forming the first flow path, and the movable piece is arranged at the second position. The distribution section is located at the position where the second flow path is formed.
When the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the variable mechanism control means is driven more than the required period until the gaming ball passing through the inlet portion reaches the distribution portion. The drive unit is driven and controlled so that the output period of the drive signal to the unit is longer, and when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the gaming ball that has passed through the entrance portion. The game is characterized in that the drive unit is driven and controlled so that the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the required period until the vehicle reaches the distribution unit. Machine.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that in the first switching mode, the second switching mode via the special gaming state While the winning probability of the support lottery in is higher than that of the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode without the special gaming state is the same as that of the first switching mode. .. That is, when the first switching mode → the third switching mode is changed without going through the special gaming state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In such a configuration, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased in order to strengthen the support function in the third switching mode, the support lottery is won even in the first switching mode in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state for a short period of time. There will be more opportunities to do so and more opportunities for the variable mechanism to be accepted. In such a configuration, it is annoying to the player that the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a mode in which the ball is virtually impossible to enter (a mode in which the receiving period is extremely short, which will be described later). It is feared that it will be easy to give an impression such as, and it will hinder the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the accepting state under the condition of the third switching mode, the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is the first. When the variable mechanism is controlled so as to be guided to the starting ball entry portion through one flow path and the variable mechanism is put into the receiving state in the situation where the first switching mode is set, the variable mechanism is provided in a predetermined manner. The variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion does not enter the starting ball entry portion. That is, even in the first switching mode, by securing a certain period (acceptance period) for maintaining the acceptance state and allowing the inflow of the game ball into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the impression of the player. Then, excessive entry into the starting ball entry portion due to an increase in the number of inflows can be suitably suppressed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

Since the movable piece (distribution unit) starts to be displaced toward the second position before the game ball reaches the distribution unit, the distribution unit is moved from the first flow path formation position to the second flow path formation position. You can earn a period to displace to. This is preferable in suppressing excessive entry into the starting ball entry portion and ensuring the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode.

Incidentally, it is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Features U3. A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
The variable mechanism has a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of the game ball into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the flow path. It has a movable piece (movable pieces 901G to 901I) that can be displaced to a position) and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position. This is configured to be in the accepted state, and the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position to be in the non-accepted state.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when a predetermined support lottery is won.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
The movable piece is distributed to a first flow path (winning route) that guides the game ball to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide the game ball to the starting ball entry section (second). The movable piece has a two-sided portion 904G to 904I) and a guide portion (first surface portion 903G to 903I) that guides a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion (inflow port 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution portion. Is arranged at the first position, the distribution portion is located at the first flow path forming position forming the first flow path, and the movable piece is arranged at the second position. The distribution section is located at the position where the second flow path is formed.
In the game area, a first inflow path (first route R1) and a second inflow path (second route R2) are formed as inflow paths for flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism.
The moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the first inflow path is slower than the moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the second inflow path. It is structured so that
In the variable mechanism control means, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path is distributed. The drive unit is driven and controlled so that the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the required period until the unit is reached, and the switching control mode is the first switching mode. In this case, the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the required period until the gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path reaches the distribution unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the drive unit is driven and controlled so as to be shortened.

As shown in this feature, if the first switching mode, the second switching mode, and the third switching mode are used in combination, it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the monotonicization of the game. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode, the support lottery in the second switching mode is won. While the probability is higher than that in the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode is the same as that in the first switching mode. That is, in the case of the first switching mode → the third switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In such a configuration, it is annoying to the player that the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a mode in which the ball is virtually impossible to enter (a mode in which the receiving period is extremely short, which will be described later). It is feared that it will be easy to give an impression such as, and it will hinder the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the accepting state under the condition of the third switching mode, the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism via the first inflow path The variable mechanism is controlled so as to be guided to the starting ball entry portion through the first flow path, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the situation where the first switching mode is set, the variable mechanism is passed through the first inflow path. The variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism is prevented from entering the starting ball entry portion. That is, even in the first switching mode, by securing a certain period (acceptance period) for maintaining the acceptance state and allowing the inflow of the game ball into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the impression of the player. Then, excessive entry into the starting ball entry portion due to an increase in the number of inflows can be suitably suppressed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

Since the movable piece (distribution unit) starts to be displaced toward the second position before the game ball reaches the distribution unit, the distribution unit is moved from the first flow path formation position to the second flow path formation position. You can earn a period to displace to. This is preferable in suppressing excessive entry into the starting ball entry portion and ensuring the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode.

Features U4. A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
The variable mechanism has a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of the game ball into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the flow path. It has a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced to a position) and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position. The movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position to be in the non-accepted state.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when a predetermined support lottery is won.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
The movable piece is distributed to a first flow path (winning route) that guides the game ball to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide the game ball to the starting ball entry section (second). The movable piece has a two-sided portion 904G to 904I) and a guide portion (first surface portion 903G to 903I) that guides a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion (inflow port 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution portion. Is arranged at the first position, the distribution portion is located at the first flow path forming position forming the first flow path, and the movable piece is arranged at the second position. The distribution section is located at the position where the second flow path is formed.
In the game area, a first inflow path (first route R1) and a second inflow path (second route R2) are formed as inflow paths for flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism.
The moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the first inflow path is slower than the moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the second inflow path. It is structured so that
In the variable mechanism control means, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path is distributed. The drive unit is driven and controlled so that the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the required period until the unit is reached, and the switching control mode is the first switching mode. In this case, the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the required period until the gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path reaches the distribution unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the drive unit is driven and controlled so as to be shortened.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that in the first switching mode, the second switching mode via the special gaming state While the winning probability of the support lottery in is higher than that of the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode without the special gaming state is the same as that of the first switching mode. .. That is, when the first switching mode → the third switching mode is changed without going through the special gaming state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In such a configuration, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased in order to strengthen the support function in the third switching mode, the support lottery is won even in the first switching mode in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state for a short period of time. There will be more opportunities to do so and more opportunities for the variable mechanism to be accepted. In such a configuration, it is annoying to the player that the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a mode in which the ball is virtually impossible to enter (a mode in which the receiving period is extremely short, which will be described later). It is feared that it will be easy to give an impression such as, and it will hinder the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the accepting state under the condition of the third switching mode, the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism via the first inflow path The variable mechanism is controlled so as to be guided to the starting ball entry portion through the first flow path, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the situation where the first switching mode is set, the variable mechanism is passed through the first inflow path. The variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism is prevented from entering the starting ball entry portion. That is, even in the first switching mode, by securing a certain period (acceptance period) for maintaining the acceptance state and allowing the inflow of the game ball into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the impression of the player. Then, excessive entry into the starting ball entry portion due to an increase in the number of inflows can be suitably suppressed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

Since the movable piece (distribution unit) starts to be displaced toward the second position before the game ball reaches the distribution unit, the distribution unit is moved from the first flow path formation position to the second flow path formation position. You can earn a period to displace to. This is preferable in suppressing excessive entry into the starting ball entry portion and ensuring the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode.

Incidentally, it is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Features U5. When the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the output period of the drive signal by the variable mechanism control means is a gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the second inflow path. The gaming machine according to feature U3 or feature U4, wherein is specified to be longer than the required period until reaching the distribution unit.

In the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism via the second inflow path may enter the starting ball entry section. In this way, it is preferable to have a configuration in which there is room for entering the starting ball even during the first switching mode in order to attract attention to the movement of the movable piece even in the first switching mode.

Features U6. The number of game balls flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path is larger than the number of game balls flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the second inflow path. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature U3 to the feature U5, which is configured as follows.

If it is difficult for the first flow path, which is the main inflow path to the variable mechanism, to enter the starting ball entry portion, the effect shown in the feature U3 or the like can be suitably exhibited.

Features U7. The variable mechanism has an urging means (spring member) that urges the movable piece to the second position side, and a drive signal is output from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit so that the movable piece By displacing from the second position to the first position against the urging force of the urging means, the receiving state is reached, and the output of the drive signal from the variable mechanism control means to the driving unit is stopped. The movable piece is configured to be in the non-accepting state by being displaced from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means.
In the variable mechanism, when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped and the game ball is located at the distribution unit of the movable piece, the movable piece is moved by the game ball. Any of the features U3 and U6 characterized in that the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by being pushed is the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the urging force of the urging means. The gaming machine described in one.

As shown in this feature, when the game ball is located in the distribution section under the condition that the output of the drive vibration is stopped, the displacement of the movable piece to the second position is boosted by the game ball. In the situation where the first switching mode is set, the first ball is suppressed from entering the starting ball entry portion of the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism via the first inflow path. The output period of the drive signal in the switching mode can be made as long as possible.

Features U8. The variable mechanism causes the game ball to push the movable piece to the first position when the game ball is located at a predetermined portion (a portion upstream of the virtual line FL2) in the guide portion. It is configured to work,
When the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the output period of the drive signal by the variable mechanism control means is a gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path. 2. Game machine.

The output period of the drive signal in the first switching mode is described. It is shorter than the required period until the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first inflow path reaches the distribution portion, and the game ball. By prescribing that is longer than the required period until passing through the predetermined portion, it is possible to prevent the weight of the game ball located on the movable piece from acting so as to prevent the movable piece from being displaced to the second position. However, it is possible to improve the responsiveness when switching to the non-accepting state.

Features U9. The variable mechanism has an urging means (spring member) that urges the movable piece to the second position side, and a drive signal is output from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit so that the movable piece By displacing from the second position to the first position against the urging force of the urging means, the receiving state is reached, and the output of the drive signal from the variable mechanism control means to the driving unit is stopped. The movable piece is configured to be in the non-accepting state by being displaced from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means.
The variable mechanism is located in a specific portion (a portion downstream of the virtual line FL2) including the distribution portion in the movable piece when the drive signal output to the drive portion is stopped. In this case, the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by pushing the movable piece by the game ball is configured to be the same as the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the urging force of the urging means. Displacement,
When the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the output period of the drive signal by the variable mechanism control means is a gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion of the variable mechanism via the first flow path. Is specified to be shorter than the required time to reach the distribution portion and longer than the required time for the gaming ball to reach the specific portion in the specific portion. The gaming machine according to any one of U3 to feature U6.

As shown in this feature, in the configuration in which the displacement of the movable piece to the second position is boosted by the own weight of the game ball, the position is moved to the second position by the own weight and the urging force of the game ball prior to reaching the distribution portion. By initiating the displacement, the responsiveness when switching to the non-accepting state can be suitably improved.

Features U10 (zero). A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
The variable mechanism has a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of the game ball into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the flow path. It has a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced to a position) and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position. The movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position to be in the non-accepted state.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when a predetermined support lottery is won.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
The movable piece is distributed to a first flow path (winning route) that guides the game ball to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide the game ball to the starting ball entry section (second). The movable piece has a two-sided portion 904G to 904I) and a guide portion (first surface portion 903G to 903I) that guides a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion (inflow port 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution portion. Is arranged at the first position, the distribution portion is located at the first flow path forming position forming the first flow path, and the movable piece is arranged at the second position. The distribution section is located at the position where the second flow path is formed.
When the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the variable mechanism control means has a longer time than the required period until the gaming ball passing through the inlet portion reaches the starting ball entry portion. The drive unit is driven and controlled so that the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer, and when the switching control mode is the first switching mode, the game has passed through the inlet portion. The output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the required period until the ball reaches the distribution unit, and the drive period is longer than the required period until the game ball reaches the start entry unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the drive unit is driven and controlled so that the output period of the drive signal to the unit is shorter.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that in the first switching mode, the second switching mode via the special gaming state While the winning probability of the support lottery in is higher than that of the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode without the special gaming state is the same as that of the first switching mode. .. That is, when the first switching mode → the third switching mode is changed without going through the special gaming state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In such a configuration, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased in order to strengthen the support function in the third switching mode, the support lottery is won even in the first switching mode in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state for a short period of time. There will be more opportunities to do so and more opportunities for the variable mechanism to be accepted. In such a configuration, it is annoying to the player that the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a mode in which the ball is virtually impossible to enter (a mode in which the receiving period is extremely short, which will be described later). It is feared that it will be easy to give an impression such as, and it will hinder the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the accepting state under the condition of the third switching mode, the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the variable mechanism in a predetermined manner is the first. When the variable mechanism is controlled so as to be guided to the starting ball entry portion through one flow path and the variable mechanism is put into the receiving state in the situation where the first switching mode is set, the variable mechanism is provided in a predetermined manner. The variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion does not enter the starting ball entry portion. That is, even in the first switching mode, by securing a certain period (acceptance period) for maintaining the acceptance state and allowing the inflow of the game ball into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the impression of the player. Then, excessive entry into the starting ball entry portion due to an increase in the number of inflows can be suitably suppressed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

Since the movable piece (distribution part) starts to be displaced toward the second position when the game ball is located on the distribution part, the behavior of the movable piece changes due to the speed change in the displacement process. Disturbance can be suppressed. This is preferable in order to improve the operational stability of the movable piece.

Incidentally, it is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Features U11. A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
The variable mechanism has a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of the game ball into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the flow path. It has a movable piece (movable piece 901G) that can be displaced to a position) and a drive unit (drive unit 911G) that drives the movable piece, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position. The movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position to be in the non-accepted state.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when a predetermined support lottery is won.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
The movable piece is distributed to a first flow path (winning route) that guides the game ball to the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (return route) that does not guide the game ball to the starting ball entry section (second). The movable piece has a two-sided portion 904G to 904I) and a guide portion (first surface portion 903G to 903I) that guides a game ball that has passed through the inlet portion (inflow port 921G) of the variable mechanism to the distribution portion. Is arranged at the first position, the distribution portion is located at the first flow path forming position forming the first flow path, and the movable piece is arranged at the second position. The distribution section is located at the position where the second flow path is formed.
In the game area, a first inflow path (first route R1) and a second inflow path (second route R2) are formed as inflow paths for flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism.
The moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the first inflow path is slower than the moving speed of the game ball when flowing into the inlet portion of the variable mechanism through the second inflow path. It is structured so that
In the variable mechanism control means, when the switching control mode is the third switching mode, the gaming ball that has passed through the inlet portion via the first inflow path is sent to the starting ball entry portion. When the drive unit is driven and controlled so that the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the required period until the drive unit is reached, and the switching control mode is the first switching mode. Is that the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is longer than the required period until the game ball that has passed through the inlet portion via the first inflow path reaches the distribution unit, and the game The feature is that the drive unit is driven and controlled so that the output period of the drive signal to the drive unit is shorter than the required period until the ball reaches the start-in ball portion. Pachinko machine.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that in the first switching mode, the second switching mode via the special gaming state While the winning probability of the support lottery in is higher than that of the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode without the special gaming state is the same as that of the first switching mode. .. That is, when the first switching mode → the third switching mode is changed without going through the special gaming state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. In such a configuration, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased in order to strengthen the support function in the third switching mode, the support lottery is won even in the first switching mode in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state for a short period of time. There will be more opportunities to do so and more opportunities for the variable mechanism to be accepted. In such a configuration, it is annoying to the player that the variable mechanism (movable piece) is frequently switched to the receiving state in a mode in which the ball is virtually impossible to enter (a mode in which the receiving period is extremely short, which will be described later). It is feared that it will be easy to give an impression such as, and it will hinder the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the variable mechanism is in the accepting state under the condition of the third switching mode, the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism via the first inflow path The variable mechanism is controlled so as to be guided to the starting ball entry portion through the first flow path, and when the variable mechanism is in the receiving state in the situation where the first switching mode is set, the variable mechanism is passed through the first inflow path. The variable mechanism is controlled so that the game ball that has flowed into the variable mechanism is prevented from entering the starting ball entry portion. That is, even in the first switching mode, by securing a certain period (acceptance period) for maintaining the acceptance state and allowing the inflow of the game ball into the variable mechanism, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the impression of the player. Then, excessive entry into the starting ball entry portion due to an increase in the number of inflows can be suitably suppressed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

Since the movable piece (distribution part) starts to be displaced toward the second position when the game ball is located on the distribution part, the behavior of the movable piece changes due to the speed change in the displacement process. Disturbance can be suppressed. This is preferable in order to improve the operational stability of the movable piece.

Incidentally, it is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

In addition, each technical idea shown in the above-mentioned features U5 to U9 may be applied to the features U10 to U11.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to T may be applied to the features U1 to U11.

<Characteristic V group>
The following feature V group is described as "in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features V1. A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (for example, the operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
The variable mechanism makes it more difficult for the game ball to flow into the flow path than the first position (open position) that allows the inflow of the game ball into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and the first position. A movable piece (movable piece 901G to 901J) that can be displaced to the second position (closed position), an urging means (spring member) that urges the movable piece to the second position side, and the movable piece are driven. It has a driving unit (driving unit 911G), and a driving signal is output from the variable mechanism control means to the driving unit, and the movable piece resists the urging force of the urging means from the second position. By being displaced to the first position, the receiving state is reached, the output of the drive signal from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit is stopped, and the movable piece is moved from the first position by the urging force of the urging means. It is configured to be in the non-accepting state by being displaced to the second position.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when a predetermined support lottery is won.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the predetermined support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the predetermined support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated to be
The movable piece forms a rolling surface of the game ball in the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion when the movable piece is arranged at the first position.
The variable mechanism is a specific portion of the movable piece (a portion downstream of the virtual line FL2 in the movable pieces 901G to 901J, for example, a second portion) when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped. When the game ball is located on the face portions 904G to 904I), the movable piece is displaced by the urging force of the urging means in the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the movable piece being pushed by the game ball. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be in the same direction as the direction.

As shown in this feature, if the first switching mode, the second switching mode, and the third switching mode are used in combination, it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the monotonicization of the game. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode, the support lottery in the second switching mode is won. While the probability is higher than that in the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode is the same as that in the first switching mode. That is, in the case of the first switching mode → the third switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. Therefore, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased in order to strengthen the support function in the third switching mode, the chances of winning the support lottery will increase even in the first switching mode in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state for a short period of time. As a result, the chances of entering the starting ball entry section will increase. This is assumed to be an obstacle in enhancing the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit is stopped and the state is switched to the non-acceptance state, the game ball already moving in the flow path toward the start entry unit is also used. It is possible to suppress the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section. Specifically, when the game ball is located on a specific portion of the rolling surface formed by the movable piece, the game ball boosts the displacement (return) of the movable piece to the second position. That is, when the movable piece returns to the second position, the movable piece is quickly moved to the second position by using the urging force of the urging means and the own weight of the game ball located on the rolling surface (specific portion). Can be restored to. As a result, even if the chances of winning in the support lottery increase in the first switching mode in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state for a short period of time, it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of balls entering the starting ball entry portion, and the above concerns are preferable. Can be wiped off. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In addition, in the first switching mode, it is possible to take measures such as making the period (acceptance period) in which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state extremely short (for example, 0.01 sec, etc.) so that the ball cannot be substantially entered. However, it is feared that the frequent occurrence of such behavior of the variable mechanism (movable piece) tends to give the player an impression that it is bothersome, and hinders the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to reduce the chance of entering the starting ball while avoiding the acceptance period during the first switching mode from becoming excessively short. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

Feature V2. A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (for example, the operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
The variable mechanism prevents the inflow of the game ball into the flow path from the first position (open position) that allows the inflow of the game ball into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and the first position. A movable piece (movable piece 901G to 901J) that can be displaced to the second position (closed position), an urging means (spring member) that urges the movable piece to the second position side, and the movable piece are driven. It has a driving unit (driving unit 911G), and a driving signal is output from the variable mechanism control means to the driving unit, and the movable piece resists the urging force of the urging means from the second position. By being displaced to the first position, the receiving state is reached, the output of the drive signal from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit is stopped, and the movable piece is moved from the first position by the urging force of the urging means. It is configured to be in the non-accepting state by being displaced to the second position.
The variable mechanism control means is configured to output a drive signal to the drive unit to switch the variable mechanism to the acceptance state when a predetermined support lottery is won.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the predetermined support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the predetermined support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated to be
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
When the movable piece is arranged at the first position, the movable piece forms a rolling surface of the game ball in the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion.
The variable mechanism is a specific portion on the rolling surface (a portion downstream of the virtual line FL2 in the movable pieces 901G to 901J, for example, the first) when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped. When the game ball is located on the two-sided portion 904G to 904I), the movable piece is displaced by the urging force of the urging means in the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by pushing the movable piece. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be in the same direction as the one in which it is used.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, although the second switching mode and the third switching mode are both configured so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that in the first switching mode, the second switching mode via the special gaming state While the winning probability of the support lottery in is higher than that of the first switching mode, the winning probability of the support lottery in the third switching mode without the special gaming state is the same as that of the first switching mode. .. That is, when the first switching mode → the third switching mode is changed without going through the special gaming state, the winning probability of the support lottery is maintained without being changed. Therefore, if the probability of winning the support lottery is increased in order to strengthen the support function in the third switching mode, the chances of winning the support lottery will increase even in the first switching mode in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state for a short period of time. As a result, the chances of entering the starting ball entry section will increase. This is assumed to be an obstacle in enhancing the superiority of the third switching mode over the first switching mode. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit is stopped and the state is switched to the non-acceptance state, the game ball already moving in the flow path toward the start entry unit is also used. It is possible to suppress the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section. Specifically, when the game ball is located on a specific portion of the rolling surface formed by the movable piece, the game ball boosts the displacement (return) of the movable piece to the second position. That is, when the movable piece returns to the second position, the movable piece is quickly moved to the second position by using the urging force of the urging means and the own weight of the game ball located on the rolling surface (specific portion). Can be restored to. As a result, even if the chances of winning in the support lottery increase in the first switching mode in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state for a short period of time, it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of balls entering the starting ball entry portion, and the above concerns are preferable. Can be wiped off. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In addition, in the first switching mode, it is possible to take measures such as making the period (acceptance period) in which the variable mechanism is in the acceptance state extremely short (for example, 0.01 sec, etc.) to make it virtually impossible to enter the ball. However, it is feared that the frequent occurrence of such behavior of the variable mechanism (movable piece) tends to give the player an impression that it is bothersome, and hinders the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to reduce the chance of entering the starting ball while avoiding the acceptance period during the first switching mode from becoming excessively short. As a result, the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention can be more preferably exerted.

It is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Feature V3. The gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2, wherein the variable mechanism has a deceleration means (second end portion 909G to 909J) for decelerating a gaming ball that has reached the specific portion.

Features As shown in V1 etc., in the configuration that uses the weight of the game ball located in the specific part to support the return of the movable piece to the second position, the game ball that has reached the specific part is decelerated. , The return assist function can be exerted stably. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive entry of the ball into the starting ball entry portion.

Features V4. The movable piece is rotatably supported around a central axis (central axis CL10) extending in the thickness direction of the game board, and rotates in a first direction (first predetermined direction) about the central axis. As a result, the position is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the first position is rotated around the central axis in the second direction (second predetermined direction) opposite to the first direction. It is configured to be displaced from the position to the second position.
The rolling surface is configured to be inclined downward toward the starting ball entry portion when the movable piece is arranged at the first position.
The specific portion is a range between the central axis and the end portion on the starting ball entry portion side on the rolling surface, and is on the rolling surface on the starting ball entry portion side on the rolling surface. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature V1 to the feature V3, which is formed in a specific range including an end portion.

When the movable piece is a rotary type, the above-mentioned specific portion includes the end portion on the rolling surface on the starting ball portion side between the central axis and the end portion on the starting ball entering portion side on the rolling surface. By forming the movable piece in such a manner, the function of boosting the return of the movable piece to the second position by the weight of the game ball (return assist function) can be suitably exerted.

Feature V5. The starting ball entry portion is open in front of the gaming machine.
The movable piece is located on the front side of the starting ball entry portion and is arranged on the left and right sides of the starting ball entry portion.
The variable mechanism is configured such that when the movable pieces are arranged at the first position, a gap smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball is formed between the specific portions of the movable pieces.
The gaming machine according to feature V4, wherein the specific portion is inclined rearward so that a gaming ball fitted in the gap can be guided toward the opening.

According to the configuration shown in the feature V5, the game ball that has reached the specific portion is supported at a position straddling the movable pieces, and is guided to the starting ball entry portion via the specific portion. If the game ball is configured to fit in such a gap, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the behavior of the game ball in a specific portion and preferably exert the above-mentioned return assist function. Further, by gaining a distance from the center of rotation to the contact point with the game ball on the rolling surface, the weight of the game ball can be suitably used.

Feature V6. The gap is expanded by the movable piece arranged at the first position rotating in the second direction, and the specific portion is expanded before the gap is expanded so as to be larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball. The gaming machine according to feature V5, wherein the ball cannot enter the starting ball entry portion through the ball.

The gap is expanded by pushing the movable piece by the game ball fitted in the gap. At this time, the height position of the game ball supported by the movable piece also changes (descends). When this gap becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball loses its support and falls from the gap. In such a configuration, it is impossible to enter the starting ball through a specific portion before the gap becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball, so that the responsiveness when the ball cannot be entered is improved. It can be suitably improved.

Feature V7. When the game ball reaches the specific portion, the movable piece is restricted from returning to the non-specific portion (for example, the first surface portion 903I) which is a portion other than the specific portion on the rolling surface. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature V1 to the feature V6, characterized in that a regulation portion (for example, a step portion 906I) is formed.

Features As shown in V1 etc., in the configuration that uses the weight of the game ball to support the return of the movable piece to the second position, the behavior of the game ball on the movable piece (rolling surface) is disturbed to assist the return. It is assumed that the function will not be exhibited well. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the reversion of the game ball that has reached a specific portion is regulated, it is possible to prevent the return assist function from being poorly exerted.

Feature V8. The gaming machine according to feature V7, wherein the restricting portion is a step formed at a boundary portion between the specific portion and the non-specific portion.

As shown in this feature, if the boundary portion between the specific portion and the non-specific portion has a stepped shape, the reversion of the game ball that has reached the specific portion to the non-specific portion side can be regulated by a simple configuration.

Feature V9. The specific portion is formed so that when the movable piece is arranged at the first position, the component facing upward is larger than that of the non-specific portion which is a portion other than the specific portion on the rolling surface. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature V1 to the feature V8.

As shown in this feature, when the movable piece is arranged in the first position, the component facing upward is larger in the specific portion than in the non-specific portion on the rolling surface. The weight of the game ball can be efficiently changed to the force for rotating the movable piece.

Feature V10 (zero). A game board (game board 80aG) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 93G) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
The variable mechanism has a first position (open position) that allows the inflow of the game ball into the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion and a second position (closed position) that prevents the inflow of the game ball into the flow path. Movable pieces (movable pieces 901G to 901J) that can be displaced to the position), urging means (spring member) that urges the movable piece to the second position side, and a drive unit (drive unit) that drives the movable piece. 911G), and a drive signal is output from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit, and the movable piece is displaced from the second position to the first position against the urging force of the urging means. By doing so, the receiving state is set, the output of the drive signal from the variable mechanism control means to the drive unit is stopped, and the movable piece is displaced from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means. It is configured to be in the non-accepted state by doing so.
When the movable piece is arranged at the first position, the movable piece forms a rolling surface of the game ball in the flow path toward the starting ball entry portion.
The variable mechanism is a specific portion of the movable piece (a portion downstream of the virtual line FL2 in the movable pieces 901G to 901J, for example, a second portion) when the drive signal output to the drive unit is stopped. When the game ball is located on the face portions 904G to 904I), the movable piece is displaced by the urging force of the urging means in the direction in which the movable piece is displaced by the movable piece being pushed by the game ball. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be in the same direction as the direction.

In the configuration shown in this feature, when the output of the drive signal to the drive unit is stopped and the state is switched to the non-acceptance state, the game ball already moving in the flow path toward the start entry unit is also started. It is possible to suppress the entry of the ball into the club. Specifically, when the game ball is located on a specific portion of the rolling surface formed by the movable piece, the game ball boosts the displacement (return) of the movable piece to the second position. That is, when the movable piece returns to the second position, the movable piece is quickly moved to the second position by using the urging force of the urging means and the own weight of the game ball located on the rolling surface (specific portion). Can be restored to. In addition, depending on the game situation, it is possible to take measures such as making the period during which the variable mechanism is accepted (acceptance period) extremely short (for example, 0.01 sec, etc.) to make it virtually impossible to enter the ball. However, it is feared that the frequent occurrence of such behavior of the variable mechanism (movable piece) tends to give the player an impression that it is bothersome, and hinders the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to reduce the chance of entering the starting ball while ensuring a certain acceptance period.

The technical ideas shown in the above features V3 to V9 may be applied to the feature V10.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to U may be applied to the features V1 to V10.

<Characteristic W group>
The following feature W group is described as "in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to facilitate the progress of the gaming."

Features W1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means for executing a support lottery based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area (a function of executing a support lottery with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that the display unit is confirmed and displayed.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first mode (low frequency support mode) and the first mode. A second mode (high frequency support mode A) set to is provided.
The second mode is defined so that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first mode.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state corresponding to the first mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and
A second gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the second mode is provided.
A special transition means for shifting to the second gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a special condition (special disengagement result, reaching the ceiling) is satisfied in the first gaming state is provided.
The support game has a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part executed after the end of the main part and the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-accepted state. And then
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the pattern are restricted.
The execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is variable when the variable display of the pattern is started on the pattern display unit during the first game state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to have a period having the same length as the sum of the display period and the final display period, or a period shorter than the sum.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified, and the game is monotonous. It can contribute to the suppression of conversion. When the special condition is satisfied and the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is established, the benefits can be enjoyed even though the transition to the second gaming state is internally performed. By extending the period (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Further, in order to secure the superiority of the second gaming state over the first gaming state, it is not preferable that the variable mechanism is frequently in the accepting state in the first gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of acceptance, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, but such measures will lengthen the variable display period of the pattern. It is expected that the maximum value of the delay period will also increase.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first gaming state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and an ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, the period until the benefits of the second gaming state can be enjoyed while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the second gaming state. Can be suppressed from being delayed (it can contribute to smoothing the progress of the game). Further, in this feature, in particular, the variable display period when the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is the variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is started during the first game state, and The period is the same as the sum of the fixed display periods or shorter than the sum. With such a configuration, the above effect can be suitably exhibited.

Features W2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means for executing a support lottery based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area (a function of executing a support lottery with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that the display unit is confirmed and displayed.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
It is provided with a second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a special condition (special deviation result, reaching the ceiling) is satisfied in the first gaming state.
The support game has a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part executed after the end of the main part and the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-accepted state. And then
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the pattern are restricted.
The execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is a variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is started on the pattern display unit during the first game state. And a gaming machine characterized by being configured to have a period having the same length as the sum of the fixed display periods or a period shorter than the sum.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and when the special condition is satisfied, the special game is played. If the switching control mode is changed without going through the state, the flow of the game when the switching control mode is changed to a higher one can be diversified, and it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the monotonicization of the game. Here, when shifting from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the special gaming state, it is possible to acquire a set of gaming balls in the special gaming state. That is, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special gaming state, from the transition to the third switching mode to the time when another benefit can be enjoyed. Even if the period is extended to some extent, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information results in the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the determination results are internally made to the third gaming state. By extending the period until the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Further, in order to secure the superiority of the third gaming state over the first gaming state, it is not preferable that the variable mechanism is frequently in the accepting state in the first gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of acceptance, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, but such measures will lengthen the variable display period of the pattern. It is expected that the maximum value of the delay period will also increase.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first gaming state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and an ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the third gaming state, the period until the benefits of the third gaming state can be enjoyed is extended. This can be suppressed (it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game). In this feature, in particular, the variable display period and the definite display when the variable display of the pattern is started during the first game state are the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state. The period is the same as the sum of the periods or shorter than the sum. With such a configuration, the above effect can be suitably exhibited.

Features W3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means for executing a support lottery based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area (a function of executing a support lottery with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that the display unit is confirmed and displayed.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
The support game has a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part executed after the end of the main part and the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-accepted state. And then
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the pattern are restricted.
The execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is a variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is started on the pattern display unit during the first game state. And a gaming machine characterized by being configured to have a period having the same length as the sum of the fixed display periods or a period shorter than the sum.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, when shifting from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the special gaming state, it is possible to acquire a set of gaming balls in the special gaming state. That is, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special gaming state, from the transition to the third switching mode to the time when another benefit can be enjoyed. Even if the period is extended to some extent, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information results in the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the determination results are internally made to the third gaming state. By extending the period until the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Further, in order to secure the superiority of the third gaming state over the first gaming state, it is not preferable that the variable mechanism is frequently in the accepting state in the first gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of acceptance, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, but such measures will lengthen the variable display period of the pattern. It is expected that the maximum value of the delay period will also increase.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first gaming state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and an ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the third gaming state, the period until the benefits of the third gaming state can be enjoyed is extended. This can be suppressed (it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game). In this feature, in particular, the variable display period and the definite display when the variable display of the pattern is started during the first game state are the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state. The period is the same as the sum of the periods or shorter than the sum. With such a configuration, the above effect can be suitably exhibited.

It is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Features W4. The execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is a variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is started on the pattern display unit during the first game state. The gaming machine according to the feature W2 or the feature W3, which is configured to have a shorter period than that of the feature W2.

During the ending part, it is more likely that the player will be given the impression that the timing at which the support game is stopped and the benefits can be enjoyed is unnecessarily delayed. On the other hand, it is difficult to give such an impression while the variable display of the pattern is being executed. Therefore, if the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state does not exceed the variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is started during the first game state, the first The chance that the transition to the third gaming state by the transition means occurs during the ending part is less than the chance that occurs during the variable display of the pattern. This can alleviate the above concerns.

Features W5. The execution period of the support game when the support game is started during the first game state is a variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is started on the pattern display unit during the first game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature W2 to the feature W4, which is configured to have a period having the same length as the sum of the confirmed display periods or a period shorter than the sum.

As shown in this feature, if the execution period of the support game does not exceed the sum of the variable display period and the definite display period, the effect shown in the feature W2 or the like can be suitably exhibited.

Features W6. The sum of the execution period of the ending part and the execution period of the main part when the support game is started during the first game state is a variable display of the pattern on the pattern display unit during the first game state. 1 of the feature W2 to the feature W5, which is configured to have the same length as the sum of the variable display period and the final display period when The gaming machine described in one.

As shown in the configuration shown in this feature, by determining the execution period of the main part and the ending part according to the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period, the effect of smoothing shown in the feature W2 or the like is more preferably exhibited. Can be made to.

Feature W7. The execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the third game state is shorter than the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the third game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature W2 to the feature W6, which is configured as follows.

When the ending part is provided, it is assumed that the existence of the ending part hinders the smooth progress of the game in the third game state. Therefore, as shown in this feature, such a concern can be dispelled by setting the execution period of the ending part to be shortened in the third gaming state.

Features W8. The support game is provided with an opening part that is executed before the main part and that the variable mechanism is maintained in a non-accepting state.
The sum of the execution period of the opening part, the execution period of the main part, and the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is the pattern during the first game state. The feature is that the period is the same as the sum of the variable display period and the final display period when the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit, or the period is shorter than the sum. The gaming machine according to any one of W2 and W7.

When the delay shown in the feature W2 occurs, there is a concern that the stress of the player will increase if the period is partially grouped. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the above concerns can be alleviated by arranging an opening part and an ending part before and after the main part, and dividing the delay period into each of these parts.

Features W9. The execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is a variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is started on the pattern display unit during the first game state. And is configured to be shorter than the sum of the confirmed display periods.
In the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit is configured to be shorter than that in the first gaming state.
When the second transition means shifts to the third gaming state while the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the support lottery being the winning result is being executed in the symbol display unit, the said. The support game corresponds to the third game state,
When the support game corresponding to the first game state is transferred to the third game state by the second transition means while the support game is being executed, the support game corresponds to the first game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features W2 and W8, characterized in that the next support game is configured to correspond to the third gaming state.

When the pattern shifts to the third game state during the variable display of the pattern in the first game state (corresponding to the winning result), the support game corresponds to the third game state. By configuring the configuration so that the switching to the acceptance state corresponding to the third game state is not carried over from the next support lottery to the winning result, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the player's satisfaction. On the other hand, if the game shifts to the third game state when the support game has already started (during the support game), it is necessary to win the subsequent support lottery and execute the support game. .. Since the support game is executed after at least one support lottery and variable display of the pattern in this way, the delay period can be longer than in the case of shifting to the third game state during the variable display. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is determined as the variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is started during the first game state. By configuring the period to be shorter than the sum of the display periods, even if the transition to the third game state during the support game occurs and the support lottery is won and the support game is executed thereafter. It is possible to prevent the variable mechanism from becoming extremely long until it becomes a receiving state.

Features W10. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means for executing a support lottery based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area (a function of executing a support lottery with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
The support game has a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part executed after the end of the main part and the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-accepted state. And then
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the pattern are restricted.
The sum of the execution period of the ending part and the execution period of the main part when the support game is started during the first game state is a variable display of the pattern on the pattern display unit during the first game state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to have a period having the same length as the sum of the variable display period and the final display period when is started, or a period shorter than the sum.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, when shifting from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the special gaming state, it is possible to acquire a set of gaming balls in the special gaming state. That is, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special gaming state, from the transition to the third switching mode to the time when another benefit can be enjoyed. Even if the period is extended to some extent, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information results in the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the determination results are internally made to the third gaming state. By extending the period until the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Further, in order to secure the superiority of the third gaming state over the first gaming state, it is not preferable that the variable mechanism is frequently in the accepting state in the first gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of acceptance, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, but such measures will lengthen the variable display period of the pattern. It is expected that the maximum value of the delay period will also increase.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first gaming state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display period and an ending period (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the third gaming state, the period until the benefits of the third gaming state can be enjoyed is extended. This can be suppressed (it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game). In this feature, in particular, the sum of the execution period of the ending part and the execution period of the main part when the support game is started during the first game state is such that the variable display of the pattern is started during the first game state. In this case, the period is the same as the sum of the variable display period and the final display period, or a period shorter than the sum. With such a configuration, the above effect can be suitably exhibited.

It is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

The technical ideas shown in the above features W4 to W9 may be applied to the features W1 and W10.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to V may be applied to the features W1 to W10.

<Characteristic X group>
The following feature X group is described as "in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to facilitate the progress of the gaming."

Features X1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means for executing a support lottery based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area (a function of executing a support lottery with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that the display unit is confirmed and displayed.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first mode (low frequency support mode) and the first mode. A second mode (high frequency support mode A) set to is provided.
The second mode is defined so that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first mode.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state corresponding to the first mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and
A second gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the second mode is provided.
A special transition means for shifting to the second gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a special condition (special disengagement result, reaching the ceiling) is satisfied in the first gaming state is provided.
When the player shifts to the third gaming state by the second transition means during the support game, the required period until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state according to the timing of the transition is On the other hand, if the second transition means shifts to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern, the player can enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state according to the timing of the transition. The required period is different,
The longest required period of the required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the support game and the longest required period of the required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to have the same or substantially the same required period.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified, and the game is monotonous. It can contribute to the suppression of conversion. When the special condition is satisfied and the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is established, the benefits can be enjoyed even though the transition to the second gaming state is internally performed. By extending the period (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Here, as shown in this feature, when the player shifts to the second gaming state during the support game, until the player can enjoy the benefits of the second gaming state according to the timing of the transition. If the required period of the game is different and the player shifts to the second gaming state during the variable display of the pattern, the player can enjoy the benefits of the second gaming state according to the timing of the transition. For configurations with different required periods, the delay period is greatly affected by the length of the support game execution period and the length of the variable display period. That is, the longer the remaining period at the transition timing, the larger the delay period, and the shorter the remaining period, the shorter the delay period. Therefore, it is the longest of the required period when shifting to the second gaming state during the support game and the longest required period when shifting to the second gaming state during the variable display of the pattern. If the required period is configured to be the same or substantially the same, the delay period will be extremely long between the case where the transition occurs during the support game and the case where the transition occurs during the variable display ( It is possible to suppress (the above maximum value becomes extremely large) and contribute to the smooth progress of the game. This is preferable in order to preferably exert an increase in the degree of attention to the game due to the diversification of the game.

Incidentally, "the longest required period in the case of shifting to the third gaming state during the support game, and the required period in the case of shifting to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern". The term "substantially the same" as "the longest required period" indicates a period in which the player recognizes that the longest required period is the same, and includes, for example, a period in which the difference is suppressed to about 10%. ..

Feature X2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means for executing a support lottery based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area (a function of executing a support lottery with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
It is provided with a second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a special condition (special deviation result, reaching the ceiling) is satisfied in the first gaming state.
When the player shifts to the third gaming state by the second transition means during the support game, the required period until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state according to the timing of the transition is On the other hand, if the second transition means shifts to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern, the player can enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state according to the timing of the transition. The required period is different,
The longest required period of the required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the support game and the longest required period of the required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to have the same or substantially the same required period.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and when the special condition is satisfied, the special game is played. If the switching control mode is changed without going through the state, the flow of the game when the switching control mode is changed to a higher one can be diversified, and it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the monotonicization of the game. Here, when shifting from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the special gaming state, it is possible to acquire a set of gaming balls in the special gaming state. That is, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special gaming state, from the transition to the third switching mode to the time when another benefit can be enjoyed. Even if the period is extended to some extent, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information results in the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the determination results are internally made to the third gaming state. By extending the period until the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Here, as shown in this feature, when the player shifts to the third gaming state during the support game, it is necessary for the player to enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state according to the timing of the transition. If the period is different and the player shifts to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern, the required time until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state differs depending on the timing of the transition. The delay period is greatly affected by the length of the support game execution period and the length of the variable display period. That is, the longer the remaining period at the transition timing, the larger the delay period, and the shorter the remaining period, the shorter the delay period. Therefore, the longest required period of the transition to the third gaming state during the support game and the longest required period of the transition to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern. If the above is configured to be the same or substantially the same, the delay period will be extremely long between the case where the transition occurs during the support game and the case where the transition occurs during the variable display (the above maximum). It is possible to suppress (the value becomes extremely large) and contribute to the smooth progress of the game. This is preferable in order to preferably exert an increase in the degree of attention to the game due to the diversification of the game.

In addition, "the longest required period in the case of shifting to the third gaming state during the support game, and the required period in the case of shifting to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern". The term "substantially the same" as "the longest required period" indicates a period in which the player recognizes that the longest required period is the same, and includes, for example, a period in which the difference is suppressed to about 10%. ..

Feature X3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means for executing a support lottery based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area (a function of executing a support lottery with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that the display unit is confirmed and displayed.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
When the player shifts to the third gaming state by the second transition means during the support game, the required period until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state according to the timing of the transition is On the other hand, if the second transition means shifts to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern, the player can enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state according to the timing of the transition. The required period is different,
The longest required period of the required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the support game and the longest required period of the required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to have the same or substantially the same required period.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, when shifting from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the special gaming state, it is possible to acquire a set of gaming balls in the special gaming state. That is, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special gaming state, from the transition to the third switching mode to the time when another benefit can be enjoyed. Even if the period is extended to some extent, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information results in the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the determination results are internally made to the third gaming state. By extending the period until the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Here, as shown in this feature, when the player shifts to the third gaming state during the support game, it is necessary for the player to enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state according to the timing of the transition. If the period is different and the player shifts to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern, the required time until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state differs depending on the timing of the transition. The delay period is greatly affected by the length of the support game execution period and the length of the variable display period. That is, the longer the remaining period at the transition timing, the larger the delay period, and the shorter the remaining period, the shorter the delay period. Therefore, the longest required period of the transition to the third gaming state during the support game and the longest required period of the transition to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern. If the above is configured to be the same or substantially the same, the delay period will be extremely long between the case where the transition occurs during the support game and the case where the transition occurs during the variable display (the above maximum). It is possible to suppress (the value becomes extremely large) and contribute to the smooth progress of the game. This is preferable in order to preferably exert an increase in the degree of attention to the game due to the diversification of the game.

It is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Incidentally, "the longest required period in the case of shifting to the third gaming state during the support game, and the required period in the case of shifting to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern". The term "substantially the same" as "the longest required period" indicates a period in which the player recognizes that the longest required period is the same, and includes, for example, a period in which the difference is suppressed to about 10%. ..

Feature X4. When the second transition means shifts to the third gaming state while the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the support lottery being the winning result is being executed in the symbol display unit, the said. The support game corresponds to the third game state,
When the support game corresponding to the first game state is transferred to the third game state by the second transition means while the support game is being executed, the support game corresponds to the first game state. On the other hand, the next support game is configured to correspond to the third game state.
The longest required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the support game is the longest required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern. The gaming machine according to feature X2 or feature X3, which is characterized in that it is shorter than the required period.

When the pattern shifts to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern in the first normal gaming state (corresponding to the winning result), the support game corresponds to the third gaming state. By configuring the configuration so that the switching to the acceptance state corresponding to the third game state is not carried over from the next support lottery to the winning result, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the player's satisfaction. On the other hand, if the game shifts to the third game state when the support game has already started (during the support game), it is necessary to win the subsequent support lottery and execute the support game. .. In this way, since the support game is executed after at least one support lottery and variable display of the pattern, the period until the variable mechanism becomes the accepted state as compared with the case of shifting to the third game state during the variable display. Can be long. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the longest required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the support game is the required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern. By keeping it shorter than the longest required period, the above concerns can be alleviated.

Feature X5. The support game is executed at least one of a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism and at least one before and after the execution of the main part, and the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-accepted state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature X2 to the feature X4, which comprises a standby part to be performed.

In the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the standby part to be executed at least one of before and after the execution of the main part of the support game. Specifically, by providing the standby part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first gaming state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and a standby part side (for example, smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the third gaming state, the period until the benefits of the third gaming state can be enjoyed is extended. This can be suppressed (it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game).

Feature X6. During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the pattern are restricted.
The sum of the execution period of the main part and the execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the first game state is a variable display of the pattern on the pattern display unit during the first game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature X2 to the feature X5, which is configured to be the same as or substantially the same as the sum of the variable display period and the definite display period when the above is started.

In the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the standby part to be executed at least one of before and after the execution of the main part of the support game. Specifically, by providing the standby part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first gaming state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and a standby part side (for example, smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the third gaming state, the period until the benefits of the third gaming state can be enjoyed is extended. This can be suppressed (it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game). In this feature, in particular, the sum of the execution period of the main part and the execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the first game state is started to be variablely displayed in the pattern during the first game state. It is the same as or substantially the same as the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period in the case of. With such a configuration, the above effect can be suitably exhibited.

Feature X7. The description in feature X6, wherein the execution period of the waiting part when the support game is started during the first game state is configured to be longer than the execution period of the main part. Gaming machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the effect shown in feature X6 can be suitably exerted.

The technical ideas shown in the above features X4 to X7 may be applied to the feature X1.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to W may be applied to the features X1 to X7.

<Characteristic Y group>
The following feature Y group is described as "In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player are provided. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to facilitate the progress of the gaming."

Features Y1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means for executing a support lottery based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area (a function of executing a support lottery with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that the display unit is confirmed and displayed.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first mode (low frequency support mode) and the first mode. A second mode (high frequency support mode A) set to is provided.
The second mode is defined so that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first mode.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state corresponding to the first mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and
A second gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the second mode is provided.
A special transition means for shifting to the second gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a special condition (special disengagement result, reaching the ceiling) is satisfied in the first gaming state is provided.
The support game has a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part executed after the end of the main part to maintain the variable mechanism in the non-accepted state. And
As the execution period of the ending part, a first period and a second period shorter than the first period are provided.
In the support game execution means, the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is set as the first period, and the support game is started during the second game state. A gaming machine characterized in that it has means for setting the execution period of the ending part to the second period.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified, and the game is monotonous. It can contribute to the suppression of conversion. When the special condition is satisfied and the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is established, the benefits can be enjoyed even though the transition to the second gaming state is internally performed. By extending the period (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Further, in order to secure the superiority of the second gaming state over the first gaming state, it is not preferable that the variable mechanism is frequently in the accepting state in the first gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of acceptance, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, but such measures will lengthen the variable display period of the pattern. It is expected that the maximum value of the delay period will also increase.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first gaming state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and an ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, the period until the benefits of the second gaming state can be enjoyed while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the second gaming state. Can be suppressed from being delayed (it can contribute to smoothing the progress of the game). However, when the ending part is provided, it is assumed that the existence of the ending part hinders the smooth progress of the game in the second gaming state. Therefore, as shown in this feature, such a concern can be dispelled by the configuration in which the execution period of the ending part is shortened in the second gaming state.

Feature Y2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means for executing a support lottery based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area (a function of executing a support lottery with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that the display unit is confirmed and displayed.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
It is provided with a second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a special condition (special deviation result, reaching the ceiling) is satisfied in the first gaming state.
The support game has a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part executed after the end of the main part to maintain the variable mechanism in the non-accepted state. And
As the execution period of the ending part, a first period and a second period shorter than the first period are provided.
In the support game execution means, the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is set as the first period, and the support game is started during the third game state. A gaming machine comprising means for setting the execution period of the ending part of the case to the second period.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and when the special condition is satisfied, the special game is played. If the switching control mode is changed without going through the state, the flow of the game when the switching control mode is changed to a higher one can be diversified, and it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the monotonicization of the game. Here, when shifting from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the special gaming state, it is possible to acquire a set of gaming balls in the special gaming state. That is, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special gaming state, from the transition to the third switching mode to the time when another benefit can be enjoyed. Even if the period is extended to some extent, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information results in the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the determination results are internally made to the third gaming state. By extending the period until the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Further, in order to secure the superiority of the third gaming state over the first gaming state, it is not preferable that the variable mechanism is frequently in the accepting state in the first gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of acceptance, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, but such measures will lengthen the variable display period of the pattern. It is expected that the maximum value of the delay period will also increase.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first gaming state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and an ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the third gaming state, the period until the benefits of the third gaming state can be enjoyed is extended. This can be suppressed (it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game). However, when the ending part is provided, it is assumed that the existence of the ending part hinders the smooth progress of the game in the third gaming state. Therefore, as shown in this feature, such a concern can be dispelled by setting the execution period of the ending part to be shortened in the third gaming state.

Feature Y3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area. ,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that the display unit is confirmed and displayed.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
The support game has a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part executed after the end of the main part to maintain the variable mechanism in the non-accepted state. And
As the execution period of the ending part, a first period and a second period shorter than the first period are provided.
In the support game execution means, the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is set as the first period, and the support game is started during the third game state. A gaming machine comprising means for setting the execution period of the ending part of the case to the second period.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, when shifting from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the special gaming state, it is possible to acquire a set of gaming balls in the special gaming state. That is, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special gaming state, from the transition to the third switching mode to the time when another benefit can be enjoyed. Even if the period is extended to some extent, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information results in the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the determination results are internally made to the third gaming state. By extending the period until the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Further, in order to secure the superiority of the third gaming state over the first gaming state, it is not preferable that the variable mechanism is frequently in the accepting state in the first gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of acceptance, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, but such measures will lengthen the variable display period of the pattern. It is expected that the maximum value of the delay period will also increase.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first gaming state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and an ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the third gaming state, the period until the benefits of the third gaming state can be enjoyed is extended. This can be suppressed (it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game). However, when the ending part is provided, it is assumed that the existence of the ending part hinders the smooth progress of the game in the third gaming state. Therefore, as shown in this feature, such a concern can be dispelled by setting the execution period of the ending part to be shortened in the third gaming state.

It is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Features Y4. When the support game is started during the first game state, the execution period of the ending part constituting the support game is longer than the execution period of the main part constituting the support game, and the third game state. When the support game is started during the period, the execution period of the ending part constituting the support game is shorter than the execution period of the main part constituting the support game. Feature The gaming machine described in Y3.

As shown in this feature, when the support game is started during the third game state, the main part becomes dominant, and when the support game is started during the first game state, the ending part becomes dominant. By configuring it so as to be, the effect shown in the feature Y2 or the like can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature Y5. During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the pattern are restricted.
When the support game is started during the first gaming state, even if the support game is shifted to the third gaming state by the second transition means by the second transition means during the support game, the support game is described. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature Y2 to the feature Y4, wherein the support game is continued from the start of the ending part to the elapse of the first period.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the variation in the delay period while suppressing the frequency of winning the support lottery and the variable mechanism becoming the accepting state in the first gaming state.

Feature Y6. The second period is shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the definite display period when the variable display of the pattern of the pattern display unit is executed under the situation of the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature Y2 to the feature Y5, which is characterized by being defined.

As shown in this feature, by making the second period set during the third game state shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the definite display period of the pattern, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of the ending part. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the impression that the presence of the ending part is troublesome.

Feature Y7. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area. ,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that the display unit is confirmed and displayed.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
The support game is executed either before or after the execution of the main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-accepted state. Have a waiting part
As the execution period of the waiting part, a first period and a second period shorter than the first period are provided.
In the support game execution means, the execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the first game state is set as the first period, and the support game is started during the third game state. A gaming machine comprising means for setting the execution period of the standby part in the case to the second period.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, when shifting from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the special gaming state, it is possible to acquire a set of gaming balls in the special gaming state. That is, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special gaming state, from the transition to the third switching mode to the time when another benefit can be enjoyed. Even if the period is extended to some extent, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information results in the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the determination results are internally made to the third gaming state. By extending the period until the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Further, in order to secure the superiority of the third gaming state over the first gaming state, it is not preferable that the variable mechanism is frequently in the accepting state in the first gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of acceptance, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, but such measures will lengthen the variable display period of the pattern. It is expected that the maximum value of the delay period will also increase.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the standby part to be executed either before or after the execution of the main part of the support game. Specifically, by providing the standby part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first gaming state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and a standby part side (for example, smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the third gaming state, the period until the benefits of the third gaming state can be enjoyed is extended. This can be suppressed (it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game). However, when the waiting part is provided, it is assumed that the existence of the waiting part hinders the smooth progress of the game in the third gaming state. Therefore, as shown in this feature, such a concern can be dispelled by setting the execution period of the waiting part to be shortened in the third gaming state.

It is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Feature Y8. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area. ,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
The support game has a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part executed after the end of the main part to maintain the variable mechanism in the non-accepted state. And
The execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the first game state is different from the execution period of the ending part when the support game is started during the third game state. A gaming machine characterized by being configured in such a manner.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, when shifting from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the special gaming state, it is possible to acquire a set of gaming balls in the special gaming state. That is, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special gaming state, from the transition to the third switching mode to the time when another benefit can be enjoyed. Even if the period is extended to some extent, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information results in the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the determination results are internally made to the third gaming state. By extending the period until the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Further, in order to secure the superiority of the third gaming state over the first gaming state, it is not preferable that the variable mechanism is frequently in the accepting state in the first gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of acceptance, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, but such measures will lengthen the variable display period of the pattern. It is expected that the maximum value of the delay period will also increase.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences can be suppressed by configuring the ending part to be executed after the main part of the support game is executed. Specifically, by providing the ending part, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first gaming state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and an ending side (for example, by smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the third gaming state, the period until the benefits of the third gaming state can be enjoyed is extended. This can be suppressed (it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game). If the execution time of the ending part is different between the case where the support game is started during the first game state and the case where the support game is started during the third game state, the above-mentioned game progress is further enhanced. Can contribute to facilitation.

It is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above features Y4 to Y6 may be applied to the features Y1 and Y7 to Y8.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to X may be applied to the features Y1 to Y8.

<Characteristic Z group>
The following feature Z group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball entry section variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball entry section according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to facilitate the progress of the gaming."

Feature Z1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means for executing a support lottery based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area (a function of executing a support lottery with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that the display unit is confirmed and displayed.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first mode (low frequency support mode) and the first mode. A second mode (high frequency support mode A) set to is provided.
The second mode is defined so that the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first mode.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state corresponding to the first mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) and
A second gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the second mode is provided.
A special transition means for shifting to the second gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a special condition (special disengagement result, reaching the ceiling) is satisfied in the first gaming state is provided.
The support game is executed at least one of a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism and at least one before and after the execution of the main part, and the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-accepted state. Have a waiting part and be
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the pattern are restricted.
In the second gaming state, the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit is configured to be shorter than in the first gaming state.
When the special transition means shifts to the second gaming state while the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the support lottery being the winning result is being executed in the symbol display unit, the said The support game corresponds to the second game state,
If the special transition means shifts to the second gaming state while the support game corresponding to the first gaming state is being executed, the support game corresponds to the first gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the next support game is configured to correspond to the second gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state, the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified, and the game is monotonous. It can contribute to the suppression of conversion. When the special condition is satisfied and the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is established, the benefits can be enjoyed even though the transition to the second gaming state is internally performed. By extending the period (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Further, in order to secure the superiority of the second gaming state over the first gaming state, it is not preferable that the variable mechanism is frequently in the accepting state in the first gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of acceptance, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, but such measures will lengthen the variable display period of the pattern. It is expected that the maximum value of the delay period will also increase.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, by providing a standby part in the support game, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and a standby part side (for example, smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, there is a period until the benefits of the second gaming state can be enjoyed while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the second gaming state. It is possible to suppress the delay (it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game). In this feature, in particular, when the game shifts to the second game state during the variable display of the pattern, the benefit can be enjoyed from the support game this time. On the other hand, when the game shifts to the third game state during the support game, the variable display period of the pattern is shortened from the next time, although it is delayed by the waiting part. That is, the delay due to the standby part and the delay due to the long-term variable display do not occur at the same time, and the excessive delay is suppressed, so that the demerit due to the provision of the standby part can be suppressed.

Feature Z2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry unit (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means for executing a support lottery based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area (a function of executing a support lottery with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that the display unit is confirmed and displayed.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
It is provided with a second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a special condition (special deviation result, reaching the ceiling) is satisfied in the first gaming state.
The support game is executed at least one of a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism and at least one before and after the execution of the main part, and the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-accepted state. Have a waiting part and be
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the pattern are restricted.
In the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit is configured to be shorter than that in the first gaming state.
When the second transition means shifts to the third gaming state while the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the support lottery being the winning result is being executed in the symbol display unit, the said. The support game corresponds to the third game state,
When the support game corresponding to the first game state is transferred to the third game state by the second transition means while the support game is being executed, the support game corresponds to the first game state. On the other hand, the next support game is characterized in that it is configured to correspond to the third game state.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and when the special condition is satisfied, the special game is played. If the switching control mode is changed without going through the state, the flow of the game when the switching control mode is changed to a higher one can be diversified, and it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the monotonicization of the game. Here, when shifting from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the special gaming state, it is possible to acquire a set of gaming balls in the special gaming state. That is, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special gaming state, from the transition to the third switching mode to the time when another benefit can be enjoyed. Even if the period is extended to some extent, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information results in the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the determination results are internally made to the third gaming state. By extending the period until the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Further, in order to secure the superiority of the third gaming state over the first gaming state, it is not preferable that the variable mechanism is frequently in the accepting state in the first gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of acceptance, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, but such measures will lengthen the variable display period of the pattern. It is expected that the maximum value of the delay period will also increase.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, by providing a standby part in the support game, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and a standby part side (for example, smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the third gaming state, the period until the benefits of the third gaming state can be enjoyed is extended. This can be suppressed (it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game). In this feature, in particular, when the game shifts to the third game state during the variable display of the pattern, the benefit can be enjoyed from the support game this time. On the other hand, when the game shifts to the third game state during the support game, the variable display period of the pattern is shortened from the next time, although it is delayed by the waiting part. That is, the delay due to the standby part and the delay due to the long-term variable display do not occur at the same time, and the excessive delay is suppressed, so that the demerit due to the provision of the standby part can be suppressed.

Feature Z3. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area. ,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that the display unit is confirmed and displayed.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
The support game is executed at least one of a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism and at least one before and after the execution of the main part, and the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-accepted state. Have a waiting part and be
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the pattern are restricted.
In the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit is configured to be shorter than that in the first gaming state.
When the second transition means shifts to the third gaming state while the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the support lottery being the winning result is being executed in the symbol display unit, the said. The support game corresponds to the third game state,
When the support game corresponding to the first game state is transferred to the third game state by the second transition means while the support game is being executed, the support game corresponds to the first game state. On the other hand, the next support game is characterized in that it is configured to correspond to the third game state.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special gaming state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher level is diversified. It can contribute to the suppression of monotonicization of games. Here, when shifting from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the special gaming state, it is possible to acquire a set of gaming balls in the special gaming state. That is, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special gaming state, from the transition to the third switching mode to the time when another benefit can be enjoyed. Even if the period is extended to some extent, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information results in the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the determination results are internally made to the third gaming state. By extending the period until the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Further, in order to secure the superiority of the third gaming state over the first gaming state, it is not preferable that the variable mechanism is frequently in the accepting state in the first gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of acceptance, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, but such measures will lengthen the variable display period of the pattern. It is expected that the maximum value of the delay period will also increase.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, by providing a standby part in the support game, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and a standby part side (for example, smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the third gaming state, the period until the benefits of the third gaming state can be enjoyed is extended. This can be suppressed (it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game). In this feature, in particular, when the game shifts to the third game state during the variable display of the pattern, the benefit can be enjoyed from the support game this time. On the other hand, when the game shifts to the third game state during the support game, the variable display period of the pattern is shortened from the next time, although it is delayed by the waiting part. That is, the delay due to the standby part and the delay due to the long-term variable display do not occur at the same time, and the excessive delay is suppressed, so that the demerit due to the provision of the standby part can be suppressed.

It is also possible to refer to the "first determination information" shown in this feature as "winning information" and the "second determination information" as "special non-winning information".

Feature Z4. As the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, a first display period and a second display period shorter than the first display period are provided.
The display control means sets the first display period as the variable display period of the pattern in the first game state, and sets the second display period as the variable display period of the pattern in the third game state. Have the means to
The feature that the execution period of the support game started in the first game state is configured to be a period not exceeding the sum of the first display period and the definite display period of the pattern. The gaming machine according to Z2 or feature Z3.

After it becomes possible to enjoy the benefits of the transition to the third gaming state, the benefits can be experienced by actually entering the variable mechanism in the accepting state. However, as described above, if the support game corresponding to the first game state is being executed and the game shifts to the third game state, the support game remains corresponding to the first game state and the next time. In the configuration in which the support game of No. 3 corresponds to the third game state, in order to experience the above-mentioned benefits, it is necessary to win the support lottery again and go through the variable display and the definite display of the pattern. For this reason, it tends to take a long time to experience the benefits. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the execution period of the support game started in the first game state is defined as a period not exceeding the sum of the first display period and the definite display period, as described above. Even in the case, it is possible to suppress the delay in the period until the benefits can be experienced.

Feature Z5. The display control means is in the middle of executing variable display of a pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery being a non-winning result by the pattern display unit under the situation of the first gaming state. In the case of shifting to the third gaming state by the second transition means, the final display is executed based on the elapse of the first display period after the variable display is started, and the third game is played. It has a means for setting the second display period as the variable display period of the pattern after shifting to the state.
The execution period of the support game started in the first game state is a period not exceeding the sum of the first display period and the definite display period of the pattern, and the difference from the sum is the second display. The gaming machine according to feature Z4, which is defined to be smaller than the sum of the period and the finalized display period.

If the game shifts to the third game state while the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the non-winning result is being executed in the first game state, the variable display is continued as it is, and the variable display period is the second from the next time. It will be shortened to the display period. In this case, in order to experience the above benefits, it is necessary to win the support lottery again and go through the variable display and the definite display of the pattern. As shown in the feature Z4, the above-mentioned case is defined by defining that the execution period of the support game started in the first game state does not exceed the sum of the first display period and the definite display period. However, although it is possible to prevent the period until the benefits can be experienced, it becomes difficult to effectively exert the above-mentioned various effects because the difference becomes excessively large. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the above difference is specified to be smaller than the sum of the second display period and the definite display period, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature Z6. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature Z2 to the feature Z5, wherein the standby part is an ending part executed after the main part.

If the support game is started during the first game state, there is a possibility that the variable mechanism shifts to the third game state after the start of the support game and before the variable mechanism becomes the accept state. Even in such a case, there is a concern that the satisfaction level of the player will decrease if the acceptance state is executed in a mode corresponding to the first gaming state. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the waiting part is composed of the ending part executed after the main part, the chance of the above event occurring is reduced, and the existence of the waiting part becomes a factor that lowers the player's motivation to play. Can be suppressed.

Feature Z7. The gaming machine according to feature Z6, wherein in the support game, the start timing of the support game is configured to be the start timing of the main part.

If the player shifts to the third game state during the support game, the benefit of the third game state can be experienced by winning the support lottery again and generating the support game after the end of the support game. In such a configuration, by setting the waiting part as the ending part, if the support lottery is re-winned and the support game is generated, the variable mechanism will be promptly switched to the accepted state, and the period until the benefit can be experienced. It is possible to suppress the extension.

Feature Z8. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a ball entering a ball entry portion (actuating openings 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (holding information acquired by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry portion (operating port 92) as the ball entry portion. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). (Function to execute the process for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is The end of the game round operation as the corresponding notification result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Is equipped with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (display unit D2 for the operating port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A support lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a passing portion (through gate 84) provided in the game area. ,
A pattern display unit (display unit DS for through gate) that can display a variable pattern, and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means (a function of controlling the display of the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display unit so that the display unit is confirmed and displayed.
A variable mechanism (for example, an electric motor) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Thing 93G) and
It has a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing an electric function opening / closing process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism, the result of the support lottery is a winning result, and the pattern by the display control means. Is provided with a support game execution means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for executing a support game for switching the variable mechanism to the acceptance state based on the completion of the confirmation display of. ,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set so as to be, and the third switching mode (high frequency) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. Support mode A) is provided, and
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, the second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. Prepare,
The support game is composed of a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism, and an ending part executed after the execution of the main part and the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-accepted state. Has been
During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the pattern are restricted.
In the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit is configured to be shorter than that in the first gaming state.
When the second transition means shifts to the third gaming state while the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the support lottery being the winning result is being executed in the symbol display unit, the said. The support game corresponds to the third game state,
When the support game corresponding to the first game state is transferred to the third game state by the second transition means while the support game is being executed, the support game corresponds to the first game state. On the other hand, the next support game is characterized in that it is configured to correspond to the third game state.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and when the special condition is satisfied, the special game is played. If the switching control mode is changed without going through the state, the flow of the game when the switching control mode is changed to a higher one can be diversified, and it is possible to contribute to the suppression of the monotonicization of the game. Here, when shifting from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the special gaming state, it is possible to acquire a set of gaming balls in the special gaming state. That is, since the player can enjoy the benefit of the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information in the special gaming state, from the transition to the third switching mode to the time when another benefit can be enjoyed. Even if the period is extended to some extent, it is unlikely to be a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information results in the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, the determination results are internally made to the third gaming state. By extending the period until the benefits can be enjoyed (hereinafter, also referred to as the delay period), the smoothness of the game progress is reduced. If such a delay becomes remarkable, it is feared that it will hinder the improvement of the player's motivation to play.

Further, in order to secure the superiority of the third gaming state over the first gaming state, it is not preferable that the variable mechanism is frequently in the accepting state in the first gaming state. In order to simply reduce the frequency of acceptance, it is possible to take measures such as lengthening the variable display period of the pattern in the pattern display unit, but such measures will lengthen the variable display period of the pattern. It is expected that the maximum value of the delay period will also increase.

Therefore, in the configuration shown in this feature, by providing an ending part in the support game, it is possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of switching to the acceptance state during the first game state. That is, even if the maximum value of the variable display period of the pattern is reduced, the increase in frequency can be suppressed. Then, by dividing the delay period into a variable display side and an ending part side (for example, smoothing), the maximum value of the delay period can be reduced. Therefore, while suppressing the frequent switching to the accepting state during the first gaming state and ensuring the superiority of the third gaming state, the period until the benefits of the third gaming state can be enjoyed is extended. This can be suppressed (it can contribute to the smooth progress of the game). In this feature, in particular, when the game shifts to the third game state during the variable display of the pattern, the benefit can be enjoyed from the support game this time. On the other hand, when the game shifts to the third game state during the support game, the variable display period of the pattern is shortened from the next time, although it is delayed by the ending part. That is, the delay due to the ending part and the delay due to the long-term variable display do not occur at the same time, and the excessive delay is suppressed, so that the demerit due to the provision of the ending part can be suppressed.

The technical ideas shown in the above features Z4 to Z6 may be applied to the features Z1 and Z8.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to Y may be applied to the features Z1 to Z8.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 41), a gaming ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 110), and the firing thereof. A ball passage (guidance rail 100) that guides a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and each game part (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area are provided, and a predetermined passage among the game parts is provided. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a section (general winning opening 81, etc.).

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc., and is provided with a throwing device that takes in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device that pays out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 41 ... Game ball launch handle, 80 ... Game board unit, 80a ... Game board, 82 ... Actuating port unit, 83 ... Variable winning device, 84 ... Through gate, 86 ... Out port, 91 ... 1st actuating port, 92 ... 2nd actuating port, 93 ... electric accessory, 95 ... symbol display device, 95a ... display screen, 99 ... main display unit, 110 ... game ball launch mechanism, 140 ... notification / effect control device , 162 ... main control device, 224 ... payout device, 242 ... payout control device, 402 ... MPU, 403 ... ROM, 404 ... RAM, 410 ... display control device, 421 ... pass / fail table storage area, 422 ... distribution table storage area 423 ... Fluctuation display time table storage area, 431 ... Lottery counter buffer, 432 ... Hold ball storage area, 433 ... Electric service hold area, 442 ... MPU, 500D, 500E, 500F ... Special production device, 511D, 511F ... Notice Unit, 512D, 512F ... Notification unit, 630E, 630F ... Light emitting unit, 641E, 641F ... Light emitter, 670E, 670F ... Front cover, 671E, 671F ... Opposing part, 690E, 690F ... Drive mechanism, 701E, 715E, 725E, 735E, 701F, 715F, 725F, 735F ... Non-light diffusing part, 712E, 722E, 732E, 712F, 722F, 732F ... Light diffusing part, 713E, 723E, 733E, 713F, 723F, 733F ... Circular convex part, 801G ... Recovery Passage, 802G ... Detection sensor, 851G ... Base part, 861G ... First bulging part, 871G ... Second bulging part, 872G ... Opposing part, 874G ... Lower open part, 901G, 901H, 901I, 901J ... Movable body , 902G ... Shaft, 903G, 903H, 903I ... First surface, 904G, 904H, 904I ... Second surface, 905G, 905H, 905I, 905J ... Flat surface, 906I ... Step, 908G, 908H, 908I, 908J ... 1st end, 909G, 909J, 909I, 909J ... 2nd end, 911G ... Drive, 921G, 921J ... Inlet, CL1 ... Central axis, CL5-CL7 ... Central axis, CL10 ... Central axis, FB ... Virtual Surface, FE ... specific area, FL2 ... virtual line, ME ... variable display area, NE ... hold number display area, PLa to PLf ... orbit, PE ... game area.

Claims (5)

The game board where the game area is formed and
A game ball launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player,
A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a game ball based on a ball entering a ball entry portion provided in the game area.
A special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the starting ball entry section as the entry section, and a special information acquisition means.
An acquisition information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and an acquisition information storage means.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and a determination means.
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. As one of the game times, the game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Equipped with
As the predetermined determination information, the first determination information and the second determination information are provided.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. Special game state transition means to shift to a special game state,
A variable ball entry section as the entry section, which can be switched between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state.
A control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the state shifts to the special gaming state, and
A support lottery means for executing a support lottery based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion provided in the game area, and a support lottery means.
A picture display unit that can display a variable picture and
The variable display of the pattern in the pattern display unit is started prior to the support lottery by the support lottery means or based on the support lottery performed by the support lottery means, and the pattern corresponding to the result of the support lottery is started. A display control means for controlling the pattern display unit so that
A variable mechanism that can switch between an accepted state in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state.
It has a control means for a variable mechanism that controls the variable mechanism, and the variable mechanism is put into an accepting state based on the fact that the result of the support lottery is the winning result and the definite display of the pattern by the display control means is completed. It is equipped with a support game execution means for executing a support game to be switched.
As the switching control mode of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a first switching mode and a second switching mode set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode. And a third switching mode set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode is provided.
In the second switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is higher than that of the first switching mode, and in the third switching mode, the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as that of the first switching mode. It is stipulated and
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and
A third gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state, and
A second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state is provided.
When the player shifts to the third gaming state by the second transition means during the support game, the required period until the player can enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state according to the timing of the transition is On the other hand, if the second transition means shifts to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern, the player can enjoy the benefits of the third gaming state according to the timing of the transition. The required period is different,
The longest required period of the required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the support game and the longest required period of the required period when shifting to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to have the same or substantially the same required period. When the second transition means shifts to the third gaming state while the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the support lottery being the winning result is being executed in the symbol display unit, the said. The support game corresponds to the third game state,
When the support game corresponding to the first game state is transferred to the third game state by the second transition means while the support game is being executed, the support game corresponds to the first game state. On the other hand, the next support game is configured to correspond to the third game state.
The longest required period in the case of transitioning to the third gaming state during the support game is the longest required period in the transition to the third gaming state during the variable display of the pattern. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is shorter than the required period. The support game is executed at least one of a main part in which the variable mechanism is switched to the accepted state by the control means for the variable mechanism and at least one before and after the execution of the main part, and the variable mechanism is maintained in the non-accepted state. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that it has a standby part to be performed. During the execution of the support game, the support lottery and the variable display of the pattern are restricted.
The sum of the execution period of the main part and the execution period of the standby part when the support game is started during the first game state is a variable display of the pattern on the pattern display unit during the first game state. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be the same as or substantially the same as the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the above is started. The fourth aspect of claim 4 is characterized in that the execution period of the waiting part when the support game is started during the first game state is configured to be longer than the execution period of the main part. Gaming machine.

Images